The Organic Law of 19 June, of Qualifications and Vocational Training, aims at the organisation of an integral system of vocational training, qualifications and accreditation, which will respond effectively and transparency of social and economic demands through the various forms of training. To this end, it creates the National System of Qualifications and Vocational Training, defining it in Article 2.1 as the set of instruments and actions necessary to promote and develop the integration of vocational training offerings, through the National Catalogue of Professional Qualifications, as well as the evaluation and accreditation of the corresponding professional skills, in order to promote the professional and social development of the people and cover the needs of the production system.

The National Catalogue of Professional Qualifications, as set out in Article 7.1, is designed to facilitate the integrated nature and adequacy of vocational training and the labour market, as well as training throughout life, the mobility of workers and the unity of the labour market. This catalogue consists of the qualifications identified in the production system and the training associated with them, which is organised in training modules.

Article 5.3 of the Organic Law of 19 June, gives the National Qualifications Institute the responsibility to define, develop and maintain the National Catalogue of Professional Qualifications, in its quality of technical organ of support to the General Council of Vocational Training, whose regulatory development is set out in Article 9.2 of Royal Decree 1128/2003 of 5 September, which regulates the National Catalogue of Qualifications Professionals, in accordance with Article 9.4, the obligation to maintain permanently updated by its periodic review which, in any case, shall be carried out within a period of not more than five years from the date of inclusion of the qualification in the catalogue.

Therefore, this order is issued in application of Royal Decree 817/2014 of 26 September 2014 laying down specific aspects of professional qualifications for the purposes of which it is amended, Article 7.3 of the Organic Law of 19 June 2002 on qualifications and vocational training, which was obtained by the Council of State of the Council of State 618/2014 of 23 July 2014, is applicable to the approval and effects of the legislation.

Thus, in the present order, twelve professional qualifications of the professional family Gráficas, which have an age in the National Catalogue of Qualifications, are updated, as a complete replacement of their annexes. Professionals in excess of five years, to which the Royal Decree 817/2014 applies, of September 26. In addition, certain professional qualifications are partially modified by the replacement of the transversal competence units and the associated training modules, which are included in the updated professional qualifications collected in the attachments of this order.

In the process of drafting this order, the Autonomous Communities have been consulted and the General Council of Vocational Training and the State School Council have issued a report.

Under the joint proposal of the Minister for Education, Culture and Sport and the Minister for Employment and Social Security, I have:

Article 1. Object and scope of application.

purpose of this ministerial order is to update 12 professional qualifications for the professional family arts, by replacing the corresponding annexes, and to partially amend certain professional qualifications through the replacement of certain competing units and training modules, in application of Royal Decree 817/2014 of 26 September, laying down the specific aspects of the professional qualifications for whose modification, procedure of Article 7.3 of the Organic Law of 19 June, on qualifications and vocational training, is applicable to the adoption and effects of the legislation.

Updated and partially modified professional qualifications are valid and are applicable throughout the national territory, and do not constitute a regulation of professional practice.

Article 2: Updating of certain professional qualifications of the professional family Gráficas, established by Royal Decree 295/2004 of 20 February establishing certain qualifications (i) vocational training courses, which are included in the national catalogue of professional qualifications, as well as their corresponding training modules which are incorporated into the modular vocational training catalogue.

As set out in the single additional provision of Royal Decree 295/2004 of 20 February 2004, the updating of professional qualifications, the specifications of which are contained in Annexes LXXII and LXXIII of the aforementioned royal decree:

One. A new wording is given to Annex LXXII, Professional Qualification "Printing in offset". Level 2. ARG072_2, which is listed as Annex I to this order.

Two. A new wording is given to Annex LXXIII, Professional Qualification "Editorial Production". Level 3. ARG073_3, which is listed as Annex II to this order.

Article 3. Updating of a professional qualification of the professional family Gráficas Gráficas, established by Royal Decree 1087/2005 of 16 September, establishing new professional qualifications, which are included in the national catalogue of professional qualifications, as well as their corresponding training modules, which are incorporated into the modular catalogue of vocational training, and certain professional qualifications are updated as set out by the Royal Decree 295/2004, dated February 20.

As set out in Royal Decree 1087/2005's unique additional provision of 16 September 2005, the updating of the professional qualification whose specifications are contained in the Annex CLI of the Quoted royal decree:

A new wording is given to the Annex CLI, Professional Qualification "Digital Printing". Level 2. ARG151_2, which is listed as Annex III to this order.

Article 4. Updating of certain professional qualifications of the professional family Gráficas, established by Royal Decree 1228/2006 of 27 October, supplementing the national catalogue of professional qualifications, by means of the establishment of certain professional qualifications, as well as their corresponding training modules which are incorporated into the modular vocational training catalogue.

As set out in the unique additional provision of Royal Decree 1228/2006 of 27 October, the updating of professional qualifications, the specifications of which are set out in Annexes CCXVI, is appropriate. CCVIXVII, CCXVIII and CCIXth of the aforementioned royal decree:

One. A new wording is given to Annex CCXVI, Professional Qualification "Calcographic and Xyographic Recording". Level 2. ARG216_2, which is listed as Annex IV to this order.

Two. A new wording is given to Annex CCXVII, Professional Qualification "Guilty and folding". Level 2. ARG217_2, which is listed as Annex V to this order.

Three. A new wording is given to Annex CCXVIII, Professional Qualification "Troquelado". Level 2. ARG218_2, which is listed as Annex VI to this order.

Four. A new wording is given to Annex CCXIX, Professional Qualification "Design of graphic products". Level 3. ARG219_3, which is listed as Annex VII to this order.

Article 5. Updating of certain professional qualifications established by Royal Decree 1135/2007 of 31 August 2007 supplementing the National Catalogue of Professional Qualifications by establishing six qualifications Professional Family Arts professionals.

As set out in the unique additional provision of Royal Decree 1135/2007 of 31 August 2007, the professional qualifications whose specifications are contained in the Annexes are updated. CCLXXXXVIII, CCLXXXIX, CCXC, CCXCI and CCXCIII of the aforementioned royal decree:

One. A new wording is given to Annex CCLXXXXVIII, Professional Qualification "Imposition and obtaining of the printer form". Level 2. ARG288_2, which is listed as Annex VIII to this order.

Two. A new wording is given to Annex CCLXXXIX, Professional Qualification "Litography". Level 2. ARG289_2, which is listed as Annex IX to this order.

Three. A new wording is given to Annex CCXC, Professional Qualification "Operations in Cosework Trains". Level 2. ARG290_2, which is listed as Annex X to this order.

Four. A new wording is given to Annex CCXCI, Professional Qualification "Treatment and layout of graphic elements in preprint". Level 2. ARG291_2, which is listed as Annex XI to this order.

Five. A new wording is given to Annex CCXCIII, Professional Qualification "Development of multimedia publishing products". Level 3. ARG293_3, which is listed as Annex XII to this order.

Article 6. Partial modification of certain professional qualifications established by Royal Decree 1955/2009 of 18 December 2009 supplementing the National Catalogue of Professional Qualifications through the establishment of seven professional qualifications of the Professional Family Arts.

As set out in the unique additional provision of Royal Decree 1955/2009 of 18 December 2009, the updating of professional qualifications, the specifications of which are contained in the Annexes CDXVI, is appropriate. CDXVII, CDXVIII, CDXIX and CDXX of the aforementioned royal decree:

One. The professional qualification established as " Annex CDXVI: Manufacture of complexes, packaging, packaging and other articles of paper and cardboard is amended. Level2. ARG416_2 "replacing, respectively, the competition unit" UC0200_2: Operate in the graphical process under conditions of safety, quality and productivity "and the associated training module" MF0200_2: Processes in graphic arts ", by the unit of "UC0200_2: Operate in the graphical process under conditions of safety, quality and productivity" and the associated training module "MF0200_2: Processes in graphic arts", corresponding to Annex I " Printing in offset. Level 2. ARG072_2 " of this order.

Two. The professional qualification established as "Annex CDXVII: Printing in flexography" is modified, replacing the units of competence "UC0200_2: Operate in the graphical process under conditions of safety, quality and productivity" "UC0201_2: Preparing raw materials and intermediate products for printing", and associated training modules "MF0200_2: Processes in graphic arts" and "MF0201_2: Materials and products in print" by the competition units " UC0200_2: Operate in the graphical process under conditions of safety, quality and productivity " and "UC0201_2: Preparing raw materials and intermediate products for printing", and the associated training modules "MF0200_2: Processes in graphic arts" and "MF0201_2: Materials and products in print", corresponding to the Anexi " Printing in offset. Level 2. ARG072_2 " of this order.

Three. The professional qualification established as "Annex CDXVIII: Impression in Huecograving" is modified, replacing the units of competence "UC0200_2: Operate in the graphical process under conditions of safety, quality and productivity" "UC0201_2: Preparing raw materials and intermediate products for printing", and associated training modules "MF0200_2: Processes in graphic arts" and "MF0201_2: Materials and products in print" by the competition units " UC0200_2: Operate in the graphical process under conditions of safety, quality and productivity " and "UC0201_2: Preparing raw materials and intermediate products for printing", and associated training modules "MF0200_2: Processes in graphic arts" and "MF0201_2: Materials and products in print", corresponding to Annex I " Printing in offset. Level 2. ARG072_2 " of this order.

Four. The professional qualification established as "Annex CDXIX: printing in screen printing and size", respectively, replacing the units of competence " UC0200_2: Operate in the graphical process under conditions of safety, quality and productivity "and" UC0201_2: Preparing raw materials and intermediate products for printing ", and associated training modules" MF0200_2: Processes in graphic arts "and" MF0201_2: Materials and products in print " by the competition units " UC0200_2: Operate in the graphical process under security, quality and productivity "and" UC0201_2: Preparing raw materials and intermediate products for printing ", and associated training modules" MF0200_2: Processes in graphic arts "and" MF0201_2: Materials and products in print ", corresponding to Annex I " Impression en offset. Level 2. ARG072_2 " of this order.

Five. The professional qualification established as "Annex CDXX: Industrial binding operations in paperback and hardcover" is modified, replacing the unit of competence " UC0200_2: Operate in the graphical process under conditions of security, quality and productivity "and the associated training module" MF0200_2: Processes in graphic arts "" for the competition unit "UC0200_2: Operate in the graphical process under conditions of safety, quality and productivity" and the associated training module "MF0200_2: Processes in graphic arts", corresponding to Annex LXXII "Impression in offset" of the present order. In addition, replacing the competition unit "UC0691_2: Preparing raw materials and auxiliary products for binding" and the associated training module "MF0691_2: Materials and binding products" by the "UC0691_2: Prepare the raw materials and auxiliary products for binding", and the associated training module "MF0691_2: Materials and binding products", corresponding to Annex X " Operations on sewn trains. Level 2. ARG290_2 " of this order.

Article 7. Partial modification of certain professional qualifications established by Royal Decree 1957/2009 of 18 December, supplementing the National Catalogue of Professional Qualifications, by establishing nine professional qualifications of the Image and Sound Professional Family.

As set out in the single additional provision of the 1957/2009 of 18 December, the updating of professional qualifications, the specifications of which are contained in Annexes CDXXXV and CDXLI to the Quoted royal decree:

One. The professional qualification established as "Annex CDXXXV: Image laboratory production operations", respectively, replacing the unit of competence " UC0928_2: Digitalize and perform the processing of images by means of computer applications "and the associated training module" MF0928_2: Treatment of digital images "by the competition unit" UC0928_2: Digitalize and perform image processing using computer applications "and the associated training module" MF0928_2: Processing of digital images ", corresponding to Annex XI" Processing and layout of graphic elements in preprint. Level 2. ARG291_2 " of this order.

Two. The professional qualification established as "Annex CDXLI: photographic production" is amended, replacing the competition unit "UC0928_2: Digitalize and perform image processing using computer applications" and the associated training module ' MF0928_2: Treatment of digital images "by the competition unit" UC0928_2: Digitalize and perform image processing using computer applications "and the associated training module" MF0928_2: Processing of digital images ", corresponding to Annex XI" Processing and layout of graphic elements in preprint. Level 2. ARG291_2 " of this order.

Article 8. Partial modification of a professional qualification of the professional family Gráficas Gráficas, established by Royal Decree 889/2011 of 24 June, supplementing the National Catalogue of Professional Qualifications, by means of the the establishment of certain professional qualifications for the Professional Arts and Commerce and Marketing and Marketing Families.

As set out in the single additional provision of Royal Decree 889/2011 of 24 June 2011, it is appropriate to update the professional qualification whose specifications are contained in Annex DCXXX to that Regulation. royal decree:

The professional qualification established as "Annex DCXXX: Artistic Serigraphy" is modified, replacing the "UC0687_2: Elaborate and interpret sketches for graphic work" and the training module associated "MF0687_2: Expression techniques for graphic work" by the competition unit "UC0687_2: Develop and interpret sketches for graphic work" and the associated training module "MF0687_2: Expression techniques for graphic work", corresponding to the Annex IV " Calcographic and xylographic recording. Level 2. ARG216_2 " of this order.

Final disposition first. Competence title.

This order is dictated by the powers conferred on the State by Article 149.1.1. and the 30th of the Constitution, on the regulation of the basic conditions that guarantee the equality of all Spaniards in the exercise of rights and in the fulfilment of constitutional duties, and for the regulation of the conditions for obtaining, issuing and approval of academic and professional qualifications.

Final disposition second. Entry into force.

This ministerial order shall enter into force on the day following that of its publication in the "Official State Gazette".

Madrid, July 23, 2015. -Government Vice President and Minister of the Presidency Soraya Saenz de Santamaria Anton.

ANNEX I

Professional Qualification: Printing on Offset

Professional Family: Graphic Arts

Level: 2

Code: ARG072_2

General Competition

Make the impression by the offset procedure, preparing and adjusting the elements of the printing process and the necessary raw materials, according to the productivity and quality established and intervening in the graphical process, complying with the applicable labour and environmental risk prevention rules.

Competition Units

UC0200_2: Operate in the graphical process under security, quality, and productivity

UC0201_2: Preparing raw materials and intermediate products for printing

UC0202_2: Determine and adjust offset printing process elements

UC0203_2: Perform offset printing

Professional Environment

Professional Scope

Develops its professional activity in the area of offset printing in graphic companies dedicated to both the printing in specifications and the printing in coil on all types of supports, in entities of public or private nature, small, medium and large size and regardless of its legal form, generally works as an employed person and depending, where appropriate, functional and/or hierarchically of a superior. He may occasionally have people in his position and/or be team boss. The principles of universal accessibility are applied in the development of professional activity in accordance with the applicable regulations.

Productive Sectors

It is located in the productive sector of graphic industries: graphic arts, manipulated and transformed national or international that print out the offset system editorial products, advertising, labels, publications periodicals, packaging and packaging, and in any other sector that has any of these activities.

Relevant occupations and jobs

The terms of the following relationship of occupations and jobs are used with a generic and omnicomprensivo character of women and men.

Offset machine operators, in general: sheet offset machine and coil offset machine

Small-format offset machine operators

Offset printer machine operators

Offset machines to two or more colors

Offset machines to a single color

Machine machines for printing forms on continuous paper

Associated Training (540 hours)

Training Modules

MF0200_2: Processes in Graphic Arts (120 hours)

MF0201_2: Materies and products in print (120 hours)

MF0202_2: Preparing offset printing (90 hours)

MF0203_2: Offset printing (210 hours)

COMPETITION UNIT 1: OPERATING IN THE GRAPHICAL PROCESS UNDER SECURITY, QUALITY, AND PRODUCTIVITY

Level: 2

Code: UC0200_2

Professional Realizations and Realization Criteria:

RP 1: Determine the characteristics of the graphical products to establish the appropriate manufacturing process, taking into account the available elements and applicable regulations.

CR 1.1 Graphic products are identified from the data provided by the originals, sketches and models, in response to the established technical specifications.

CR 1.2 The specifications on the graphic product to be performed are valued by identifying their typology and functional and communicative characteristics-product use, applicable regulations and others.

CR 1.3 The functional and technological relationships of the graphic product to be made are established according to its components: stationery, stuchaery, publishing, advertising, and others.

CR 1.4 The phases required for the reproduction of the graphic product: preprint, binding printing and finishes, are set from their specifications, introducing the data into the workflow.

RP 2: Perform the standardization of the production parameters in the workflows for each phase of the graphical product, according to the specifications set.

CR 2.1 The production phases in the graphical process are determined by specifying each of the elements involved in the process: technical parameters, product typology, and others.

CR 2.2 Production parameters are standardized in the workflow according to the typology of the graphic product: packaging, editorial product, billboard and others, following established procedures.

CR 2.3 The parameters and manufacturing elements of the graphic product at different stages of the process: preprint, printing, binding and transformed, are checked according to the technical specifications.

CR 2.4 The productive environment in each of the phases of the graphical process is determined from the established technical specifications.

CR 2.5 Graphic process tracking is done through workflows by facilitating planning, automation, procedures, and other factors that affect the production environment.

CR 2.6 The incidents that arise in the process are recorded in the workflow following established procedures to take the necessary corrective and preventive measures.

RP 3: Verify quality parameters in the process using specific equipment to obtain the product with the established standards.

CR 3.1 The most significant quality features in each of the phases of the process are identified according to established variables and attributes.

CR 3.2 The graphical product in process is checked, verifying that it complies with the fundamental concepts of quality in the different phases of its manufacturing according to the established standards and standards.

CR 3.3 Quality procedures at each stage of the manufacturing process of the graphic product are applied methodically according to the technical specifications of the product, using the specific measurement equipment.

CR 3.4 Control frequencies are applied according to the type of characteristics to be controlled and the number of product units to be obtained, following established procedures.

CR 3.5 The results and incidences of the quality control of the graphical product are recorded using the corresponding control sheets by entering them into the workflow.

CR 3.6 Quality verification in the graphical process is carried out in compliance with applicable labour and environmental risk prevention regulations.

Professional Context:

Production media:

Specific computers and software. Digital printer. Standards of communication. Workflows. Normalized light pupitre. Measurement and control tools and tools: densitometer, tipometer, odometer, colorimeter and spectrophotometer.

Products and results:

Production parameters entered into the workflow. Recorded quality control incidents. Completed control sheets. Failures or defects in the registered processes. Quality parameters identified throughout the graphical process.

Information used or generated:

Production order. Technical documentation of preprint, printing and post-pressure equipment and machines. Applicable rules for the prevention of occupational and environmental risks. Quality standards and standards to be applied in the graphical process. Technical equipment sheets. Maintenance manuals. Company quality control plans.

COMPETITION UNIT 2: PREPARE RAW MATERIALS AND INTERMEDIATE PRODUCTS FOR PRINTING

Level: 2

Code: UC0201_2

Professional Realizations and Realization Criteria:

RP 1: Get the technical data on the printing raw materials from the production orders to start the process according to the technical and quality requirements.

CR 1.1 Production orders are reviewed by checking that they contain the necessary technical information regarding the quality and productivity of the raw materials to be used in the printing process.

CR 1.2 Data about media, inks, printer shape, additives, and others are identified in the production order, checking that they are compatible and that they meet production needs.

CR 1.3 The raw material technical information is in contrast to the quality specifications defined for the printing process by checking their compatibility.

CR 1.4 The consistency of the raw materials established in the production order is checked against the elements of the process: machine, materials, and methods.

RP 2: Review the printer form to ensure its quality in the transfer, according to the quality criteria set.

CR 2.1 The offset, hollow, screen printing, flexography, or other printer form is checked by ensuring that it corresponds to the specifications of the corresponding production order.

CR 2.2 The elements of the printer form are reviewed by ensuring the adequacy of their surface in terms of the specified positioning, tracing, and measurement.

CR 2.3 The elements of the printer-friendly form, such as marginal and other marks, are removed by applying specific correctors, preventing their passage to support.

CR 2.4 Possible defects in the printer shape that can alter the surface transfer are inspected and corrected according to established work processes.

RP 3: Prepare and control the media to be printed to power the printing machine in a way that ensures the continuity of the print run.

CR 3.1 The quantity and quality of the print media are verified based on their compliance with the production order.

CR 3.2 The print media is transported from the warehouse to the machine in accordance with the established security rules.

CR 3.3 Print support is manipulated and conditioned by applying the established working methods to ensure proper input and passage through the machine.

CR 3.4 The relative humidity and the temperature of the support to be printed are checked by using hygrometers and thermometers by taking into account the established working methods to ensure their input and passage through the machine.

RP 4: Prepare inks and additives in standard tones and special colors to get the tonality according to the specifications, samples, and media to be printed.

CR 4.1 The ink is chosen taking into account the printing process, the machine, the type of support and the finish.

CR 4.2 The physico-chemical properties of printing inks (viscosity, draught, rigidity) are adapted to the production needs, by means of appropriate operations (smoothie, addition of reducers, varnishes or oils).

CR 4.3 Required tones are obtained by mixing the different inks manually (spatula) or mechanical (blender) according to the color specifications requested in the production order.

CR 4.4 The tones of the obtained inks are checked visually or by means of control devices, comparing them with the 'pantone' guide, established colour tables and approved colour samples.

Professional Context:

Production media:

Computer equipment, sheet reader, normalized light pupitre, densitometer, colorimeter, storyteller.

Products and results:

Ready print media. Forms of offset, hollow, screen printing, flexography or other revised forms. Selected and prepared inks and additives.

Information used or generated:

Work Order. Technical documentation of printing equipment and machines. Letters of color. Authorized color samples. 'pantone' guide. Applicable rules for the prevention of occupational and environmental risks. Quality standards for the process.

COMPETITION UNIT 3: DETERMINE AND ADJUST OFFSET PRINTING PROCESS ELEMENTS

Level: 2

Code: UC0202_2

Professional Realizations and Realization Criteria:

RP 1: Regulating the starting mechanisms on the offset printing machine, complying with the technical production instructions.

CR 1.1 Power system elements and mechanisms are checked to ensure that they correspond to the support for printing, according to the technical needs and the user manual.

CR 1.2 The correct operation of the machine is checked by checking its elements and starting up, correcting the anomalies by means of established processes.

CR 1.3 The elements and mechanisms of the output system are verified to ensure that they correspond to the print media and the print to be obtained according to the technical specifications and the user manual.

CR 1.4 The drying and wetting elements, in the coil printing systems, are adjusted according to the needs of the process and the supports.

CR 1.5 Adjustment operations are performed in compliance with applicable labour and environmental risk prevention rules.

RP 2: Adjust the pressures of the offset printing machine's printer assembly according to the technical specifications.

CR 2.1 The correct transmission of the offset printing machine pressures is controlled by adjusting the diameter of the cylinders, according to the technical specifications and the user manual.

CR 2.2 Cylinder separation is verified by taking into account the thickness of the support to be printed, depending on the technical specifications set out in the process.

CR 2.3 The diameter of the iron-rubber-printer cylinders is checked using the specific measuring instruments: micrometer, durometer, gauge, gage, and measurement rules of the cylinder-guide-guide or other.

CR 2.4 The increases are selected according to the thickness thereof, obtaining optimum diameter and pressure, by means of cylinder measurement rules.

CR 2.5 Pressure adjustment checking is performed in compliance with applicable labor and environmental risk prevention standards.

RP 3: Make the fixed and tensioned of the iron on the offset printing machine by following the established working methods.

CR 3.1 The die-cut and bending of the iron is effected by adjusting it at the die-cutting table for subsequent housing on the machine's pins.

CR 3.2 The printer shape is fixed and adapted to the plate-holder by making the tensioning, according to the established working methods.

CR 3.3 The printer shape is fixed on the jaws while respecting the margins on the media to be printed, according to the technical specifications.

CR 3.4 The printer shape is tense according to the technical specifications until you get the record of the different colors.

CR 3.5 Fixed and tensioned operations of the printer form are performed in compliance with applicable labour and environmental risk prevention rules.

RP 4: Prepare the inking and wetter group by regulating it according to the technical and quality specifications.

CR 4.1 The tinteros level by adapting the ink to the printer zones, using the mechanical or electronic devices of the machine keeping the ink flow controlled, according to the technical specifications.

CR 4.2 The tinteros are regulated until you get the ink flow to respond to the established transfer conditions.

CR 4.3 The physico-chemical characteristics of the ink are checked in relation to the needs of the spin by viscosimeter or others.

CR 4.4 The wetting elements are calibrated, adjusting the temperature and correct dosage of the wet solution according to the technical specifications.

CR 4.5 The wet solution: pH, conductivity, surface tension and temperature is controlled according to the needs of the support to be printed and its physical characteristics, by means of the different devices drivers.

CR 4.6 The wet flow is controlled, checking the water contribution according to the specific needs of the work to be performed and the technical specifications established in the process.

CR 4.7 Preparation activities are developed in compliance with applicable labour and environmental risk prevention standards.

RP 5: Adjust the finishing devices based on the printing requirements to achieve a final impression in accordance with the established technical specifications.

CR 5.1 Finishing devices are selected according to the process set out in the production instructions to achieve the specified treatments: varnish, plasticised, lacquered and others.

CR 5.2 The mechanisms of the finishing devices are arranged, placing them in line with the printing bodies to achieve the treatments specified according to the user manual.

CR 5.3 The finishing devices are regulated by adjusting them to a uniform application of the product: varnish, lacquer and others on the supports to be treated.

CR 5.4 Adjustment operations are developed in compliance with applicable labour and environmental risk prevention rules.

RP 6: Perform user-level maintenance operations on the offset machine, applying the company's security and maintenance plan.

CR 6.1 The machine's security devices are reviewed by checking their proper operation by following the established procedures.

CR 6.2 The periodic greasing of the disposed oiling points is performed using the specific media and materials, according to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

CR 6.3 The operation of air and water circuits and filters is verified by following established procedures.

CR 6.4 Maintenance operations are performed by applying applicable labour and environmental risk prevention rules.

Professional Context:

Production media:

Offset printing machines in flat or coil, normalized light pupitre, densitometer, colorimeter, storyteller. Measuring instruments: micrometer, durometer, gauge, gages, and rules for measuring the guide-rods of the cylinders or others. Offset plates. Plate die-cutting table. Finishing product application teams on the media.

Products and results:

Set-in mechanisms of the regulated offset machine. Groups of inking and prepared majado. Fitted and prepared finishing devices. Preventive maintenance of the print machine performed.

Information used or generated:

Work Order. Technical documentation of printing equipment and machines. User's manual. Applicable rules for the prevention of occupational and environmental risks. Quality standards for the process.

COMPETITION UNIT 4: PERFORM OFFSET PRINTING

Level: 2

Code: UC0203_2

Professional Realizations and Realization Criteria:

RP 1: Get the first printed samples, performing offset printing groups to check for the characteristics specified in the work order.

CR 1.1 The attachments are recorded at the input of the printer body by coordinating it in two directions (heels and squads) and synchronizing the marker with the side guide and with the paint introduction tweezers.

CR 1.2 The amount of water-ink for the correct inking of the printer form is balanced against the printed support, by means of specific measuring equipment.

CR 1.3 The printing machine is launched by adjusting each of the bodies with the optimum production speed and the required parameters for the process and the current graphic product.

CR 1.4 The first printed sheets are controlled in sufficient quantity by checking the adjustment of the record, tones and presence of defects by specific measuring equipment.

CR 1.5 Control is performed by monitoring the media-specifications, coil-based on samples, patterns, normalized tables, authorized samples, established color profiles, and specifications.

CR 1.6 The sequentially obtained prints are checked, contrasting the samples obtained with the contract tests, according to the technical specifications.

CR 1.7 The first printed and recorded sheets are folded, if any, by the folding lines, checking the consistency with the layout and quality of the resulting ring.

RP 2: Adjust the process variables by modifying the characteristics based on the results of the first printed sheets to achieve the set results.

CR 2.1 The deviations of the print in the transverse and circumferential record are corrected by acting in the heels and overtaking or delaying the plate.

CR 2.2 The pressure between the rubber cylinder and the printer is corrected according to the thickness of the support.

CR 2.3 The ink flow is adjusted by regulating it by means of the tintering dosimers, thereby making consumption the required one.

CR 2.4 The tonal correction is performed by modifying the physico-chemical characteristics of the ink and/or tonal.

CR 2.5 Variable adjustment activities are performed in compliance with applicable labor and environmental risk prevention standards.

RP 3: Get the printed graphic product by monitoring the printing process by self-control to ensure the productivity and quality of the work order.

CR 3.1. Data for self-control are identified in the production instructions and in the work method established by the company, determining both the characteristics to be controlled and the way it is performed. periodicity.

CR 3.2 Self-control is performed throughout the run by taking samples according to the frequency set, confirming the print results that are being obtained and ensuring the continuity of the print run.

CR 3.3 The printing and intonation (water-ink balance) record are maintained, controlling the tolerance margins in the set parameters.

CR 3.4 The supply of the materials is controlled by ensuring the continuity of the run, obtaining the quantity and quality established.

CR 3.5 The established printing parameters are controlled by measuring the control ranges using the specific optical measuring instruments (densitometer, spectrophotometer, colorimeter).

RP 4: Fulfill production parts for work confirmation done with incident, quality, and productivity data.

CR 4.1 The results of self-control are available in the sheets for analysis according to established standards.

CR 4.2 The possible incidents of self-control are available in the sheets for analysis according to the established rules.

CR 4.3 Production parts are completed by checking that the specified productivity matches the one obtained, recording the incidents in their case.

CR 4.4 Print process data that are of interest to successive post-print processes are recorded in the production parts indicating their characteristics such as input, side heel, number of copies and others.

RP 5: Perform the cleaning of the machine according to technical specifications in compliance with applicable standards for the prevention of occupational and environmental risks.

CR 5.1 The elements of the machines are cleaned, ensuring the levels of cleanliness laid down in the maintenance regulations.

CR 5.2 Tinteros and inking batteries are cleaned by removing the ink debris from printing by applying the established procedures.

CR 5.3 The printer shape is removed from the machine, proceeding to the cleaning of the carrier-plate cylinder, applying the established procedures.

CR 5.4 The printer cylinder is cleaned by removing the debris from the image, applying the established procedure.

CR 5.5 The ink left over from the tinteros is stored in accordance with applicable waste disposal regulations.

CR 5.6 The waste produced in the job during the run is removed by applying the established procedures.

Professional Context:

Production media:

Offset or Coil Offset Printing Machines. Normalized light pupitre, densitometer, colorimeter, dropper.

Products and results:

Print and/or finish support. Start of the offset machine. Offset printing machine clean and ready for the next printing. Quality control performed in process. Cleaning the machine done.

Information used or generated:

Work Order. Part of the job. Technical documentation of offset printing equipment and printing machines in the product or in the coil. Applicable rules for the prevention of occupational and environmental risks. Quality standards for the process. Possible recorded production incidents.

FORMATIVE MODULE 1: PROCESSES IN GRAPHIC ARTS

Level: 2

Code: MF0200_2

Associated with UC: Operate in the graphical process under security, quality, and productivity

Duration: 120 hours

Assessment capabilities and criteria:

C1: Analyze the entire graphical process and its different phases: preprint, binding and transformed printing, considering the communication between them using standardization models.

CE1.1 Explain the characteristics and type configuration of graphic arts companies according to the production phase: preprint, print, binding, transformed.

CE1.2 In a defined production environment, describe through workflows the sequence of tasks or operations for obtaining the product.

CE1.3 Analyze, from the design point of view, the characteristics of a given graphical product:

-Formats and measures.

-Typology.

-Colors.

-Media.

-Encuadernation and finish.

CE1.4 In a practical scenario of producing a given graphic product, relate and sequence the different preprint phases that have been involved in its elaboration:

-Text: body, family, style, paragraph, interline.

-Trams: line, point shape, and angulation.

-Color separation.

-Plot and paging systems used.

CE1.5 In a practical scenario of crafting a given graphical product, describe and recognize the characteristics of the printing system used according to:

-Type of media used.

-Tintas: classes and layers.

-Tramado.

-Profile of the characters.

-Footprint or relief on the media.

-Effects on printing.

-Number of passes on machines.

CE1.6 Analyze the different preprint, printing and binding and finishing systems, describing and relating their main phases to the machines, equipment, raw materials and products used.

CE1.7 Describe the most significant print electronic systems.

CE1.8 Describe and recognize the characteristics of the post-pressure process for the elaboration of a type graphic product according to the defined process and the materials used.

C2: Classify graphic products according to their composition and functional characteristics: stationery, carpeting, stanchery, editing and advertising.

CE2.1 Explain the functional characteristics of the different graphic products: Stationery, Carpet, Stucery, Editing and Advertising.

CE2.2 Identify the structural characteristics of the different graphic products: Stationery, Carpet, Stucery, Editing and Advertising.

CE2.3 From graphic product samples:

-Recognize its physicochemical composition and identify its functional capacity.

-Rate the communicative and functional capacity of the different graphic products.

-Classify the samples of proposed graphic products according to their nature and functionality: stationery, carpeting, stanchery, editing and advertising.

C3: Recognize and analyze color metrics and metrics used in graphic arts.

CE3.1 Identify chromatic spaces: RGB, CMYK, HSB, CIE Lab, used in graphic arts.

CE3.2 Describe the measurement equipment used in the color measurement: colorimeter, glitter, spectrophotometer, identifying the application of each of them.

CE3.3 Describe the various lighting sources, color temperature, and observation conditions to reproduce color under standardized conditions.

CE3.4 In a practical scenario of color measurement and from different samples of color originals:

-Identify color parameters: brightness, saturation, tone, and metamery index.

-Represent colorimetric values in chromatic spaces.

-Evaluate color differences and their ability to play in the graphical system.

-Make measurements of color variables with the colorimeter and the electrometer over different color samples indicating the readings in a template.

C4: Relating applicable labour and environmental risk prevention rules in the graphical process with the operations that are developed in each of its phases.

CE4.1 Recognize applicable labor and environmental risk prevention regulations in the graphical process.

CE4.2 Identify the security elements to be installed in the different places and risk teams in the graphical industries.

CE4.3 Using practical examples, identify the security labels that appear on the machines and products used in the graphical process.

CE4.4 Describe and relate the rules applicable to the prevention of occupational and environmental risks, with the different phases of the graphical process.

CE4.5 Recognize the environmental documents and procedures applied in the graphical process.

C5: Analyze the quality control process in a graphical arts 'process'.

CE5.1 Identify the fundamental phases and concepts of quality control in manufacturing in the graphic arts industries.

CE5.2 Describe a raw material receipt control process succinctly.

CE5.3 Describe the instruments used in quality control: densitometres, colorimeters, control strips and production line control devices, identifying their application in the different phases of the graphical process.

CE5.4 Perform densitometric and colorimetric measurements from a preprint test, and from certain print standards, by assessing that the color range reproduction is consistent with the set standards.

CE5.5 In a scenario of quality control in print processing, from a printed product, and established standards:

-Select the required measurement instrument.

-Perform metering instrument calibration.

-Perform densitometric, colorimetric, 'trapping', sliding, and gray balance measurements.

-Set the chromatic space.

-Perform different measures on the control strip.

-Check the setting with the set standards.

CE5.6 In a practical scenario of quality control in the process of transformed, from a graphical product to be bound and/or manipulate, identify and evaluate the defects detected in:

-Format and margins.

-Cutting marks.

-Log tokens.

-Signatures.

-Fibre sense.

-Repainted.

-Troquels.

CE5.7 Describe the most significant quality features of the products:

-Encuaderation and manipulated: subjective assessment, cut marks, tracks, log signals, collared.

-Resistance to folding.

-Resistance to rub.

-Printing: density, 'trapping', stamping gain, color balance, pasting, sliding, logging.

-Preprint: tests, standards.

Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real workbench:

C1 with respect to CE1.3, CE1.4 and CE1.5; C3 with respect to CE3.4; C5 with respect to CE5.4, CE5.5 and CE5.6.

Other capabilities:

Take responsibility for the work you are developing.

Demonstrate some autonomy in solving small contingencies related to their activity.

Respect internal company procedures and rules.

Maintain an assertive, empathetic and conciliatory attitude to others by demonstrating cordiality and kindness in dealing.

Recognize the organization's productive process.

Participate and actively collaborate on the work team.

Contents:

1. Graphical process

Types of graphic products.

Company types: organization and structure.

Standardization and communication models. Workflows.

Preprint systems. Classes of originals. Latent image, revealed process. Matching the digital workflow environment.

Input peripherals, output peripherals, specific software and hardware, processing and test systems.

Plotting and mounting. Elements of the assembly. Specific software.

Print systems. Equipment, capabilities, comparison of different systems.

Types of inks and media for each print system.

Encuaderation and transformed. Classes. Benefits. Teams. Features.

Paper and paperboard manipulated. Manipulated from other materials.

2. Color and its measurement

Nature of light.

Electromagnetic spectrum.

Philosophy of vision.

Chromatic Space.

Factors that affect color perception.

Color Theory. Additive and subtractive synthesis of color.

Color rendering systems: MUNSELL, RGB, HSL, HSV, PANTONE, CIE, CIE-Lab, GAFT.

Color measurement instruments: densitometres, colorimeters, glinometers, and spectrophotometers. Color assessment.

3. Standards for the prevention of labour and environmental risks applicable to graphic arts processes

Safety plans and rules.

Rules in force.

Signals and alarms.

Environmental regulations.

4. Quality in graphic arts processes

More characteristic tests, instruments and measurements.

Preprint quality: point gain, gray balance, and density.

Print variables (print density, contrast, penetration, fixed, stamping gain, color and gray balance).

Control areas in print. Measurement.

Quality in post-pressure.

Visual control of binding and manipulated.

Checking for bound and manipulated defects.

Standardization of quality.

5. Quality control in graphic arts

Quality in manufacturing.

Quality control. Concepts involved.

Control elements.

Control Phases: receipt of materials, processes, and products.

Rules and standards for the graphical process.

Training context parameters:

Spaces and installations:

The spaces and facilities will provide a response, in the form of a classroom, a workshop, a workshop of practices, a laboratory or a singular space, to the training needs, according to the Professional Context established in the Unit Partner competence, taking into account the applicable regulations of the production sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.

Professional or former trainer profile:

1. Domain of knowledge and techniques related to production operations in the graphical process under conditions of safety, quality and productivity, which will be accredited by one of the following two forms:

-Level 2 academic training (Spanish Framework of Qualifications for Higher Education), Technical Engineering, Technical Architecture, Diplomacy or other higher level of professional field.

-Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.

2. Accredited pedagogical competence in accordance with what is established by the competent administrations.

TRAINING MODULE 2: MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS IN PRINT

Level: 2

Code: MF0201_2

Associated with UC: Preparing raw materials and intermediate products for printing

Duration: 120 hours

Assessment capabilities and criteria:

C1: Recognize and analyze the main properties and characteristics of the raw materials used in printing processes.

Ce1.1 Recognize and describe the type and structure of papers, cartons, plastics, metals, and other media for printing.

CE1.2 Recognize and describe the main characteristics and physical-chemical properties of the media, expressing them in their corresponding units.

CE1.3 Recognize and describe the main characteristics and physico-chemical properties of inks, pigments, dyes, resins, oils, varnishes and solvents, expressing them in their corresponding units.

CE1.4 Recognize and describe the main physical-chemical characteristics of the printing forms: forms of offset, forms of hologravure, forms of flexography and others.

CE1.5 Characterize the main defects and alterations of the various media used for printing.

CE1.6 From different media samples, inks and printer shapes, identify by your trade name the main materials used for printing.

C2: Value the behavior of the main materials (products, inks, varnishes, plates and supports) used in the different printing systems, relating to their application.

CE2.1 Describe the main pigments, resins, oils, varnishes and solvents most used in the preparation of inks.

CE2.2 Describe the main materials and chemicals used in the preparation of the printing forms.

CE2.3 From different printing materials, establish the relationship with the printing, binding, or manipulated system used in the graphical processes indicating the incidence of the number of copies of the print run.

CE2.4 Relating the properties of materials with the requirements of behavior in printing.

C3: Determine the characteristics of the quality variables of the raw materials, using appropriate instruments.

CE3.1 Relate the durability and behavior of the different supports used in printing with the alterations that these suffer because of: humidity and temperature, the storage, the direction of the fiber and the composition of the paste.

CE3.2 Relate the durability and behavior of the inks and chemicals used in printing with the alterations that these suffer, due to temperature, humidity, oxidation, exposure to light and their composition.

CE3.3 To differentiate the characteristics and operation of the measuring instruments used for the quality control of raw materials.

CE3.4 In a practical test case of materials characterized by different print media, perform measurements to obtain the values of:

-Moisture, pressure, density, dimension variations of media, materials, and raw materials.

-Use the tools and measuring instruments (hygrometer, thermometer, precision scales, viscosimeter, microscope, IGT) required in each case.

-Exposition the results of the measurements in their corresponding units.

CE3.5 Determine the appropriate materials for the production of printed products in relation to standard quality standards.

C4: Analyze the storage process of the materials used in the printing processes.

CE4.1 Explain the characteristic storage systems of printing companies: Offset, engraving, flexography, screen printing and others.

CE4.2 Explain the characteristics of equipment and means of loading, transport and unloading of materials used, related to their applications.

CE4.3 Relate the materials used in the printing process with the procedures and conditions that your storage requires.

C5: Prepare raw materials for printing, according to process needs, applying applicable labor and environmental risk prevention regulations.

CE5.1 From a worksheet and given raw materials: paper, ink, varnishes and others, check that the raw materials to be treated match those indicated in the specifications of the work order.

CE5.2 Describe the components and dilutions to be used in preparing chemical products for printing.

CE5.3 In a scenario of preparing raw materials for printing, from different inks and supports:

-Perform media conditioning, depending on the parameters set.

-Make the ink mixes by adjusting the color, density, viscosity, and other to the production needs raised, meeting the required labor and environmental risk prevention standards.

-Check that the preparation of the materials is in line with the expected results.

CE5.4 Relating materials used in printing processes, with environmental regulations, considering substitutes for traditionally used products.

CE5.5 Identify the risks and level of danger posed by the manipulation of different materials and products used in printing processes.

C6: Analyzing occupational and environmental risk prevention plans and relevant regulations to correctly use media and safety equipment in the transport and handling of raw materials for the printing.

CE6.1 Relate and describe the rules on symbology and physical situation of signals and alarms, fire equipment, transport safety and handling of raw materials.

CE6.2 Describe the properties and uses of clothing and personal protective equipment plus employees in printing companies for the transportation and handling of raw materials.

CE6.3 In a practical assessment of safety in the transport and handling of raw materials, on the basis of a number of plans for the prevention of occupational and environmental risks of companies in the sector printing:

-Identify and describe the most relevant aspects of each plan, collected in the documentation that contains it.

-Identify and describe risk factors and situations for health and safety in plans related to that activity.

-Relate and describe the appropriate preventive measures and prevention methods established to prevent accidents.

Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real workbench:

C3 with respect to CE3.4; C5 with respect to CE5.3; C6 with respect to CE6.3.

Other capabilities:

Take responsibility for the work you are developing.

Demonstrate some autonomy in solving small contingencies related to their activity.

Respect internal company procedures and rules.

Interpret and execute work instructions.

Act quickly in problematic situations and not just wait.

Contents:

1. Print media

Physical-chemical structure of the composition of papers, cartons, cardboard. Vegetable materials, plastics, metals.

Classification, identification, and trade names, formats, and applications.

More important properties of print media as raw material.

Measurement of grammar, roughness, relative humidity, dimensional stability, hardness, and flexibility.

Pasta classes for the stucate of the paper holders: paper, cardboard, cardboard.

Identification of defects in media.

Printability of the various media.

Conditioning.

Preparing and applications.

Applicable labour and environmental risk prevention regulations.

2. Inks, varnishes and lacquers

Physical-chemical composition of inks.

Types of inks. Properties.

Colorimetric measurement, viscosity, density, rigidity, transparency, tolerance between inks and emulsification capacity with water.

Classification by print mode.

Mixture of inks (pantone). Preparation and applications.

Types of varnishes. Classification.

Types of lacquers. Classification.

Identification, applications, and trade names.

Identification of defects. Mechanical resistors and different agents (light, water, fats, acids, alkalis and soaps).

Applicable labour and environmental risk prevention regulations.

3. Printer form

Microscopic structure. Classes of emulsions.

Chemicals.

Classification, identification, applications, formats, and trade names.

Processed sensitive materials.

More important properties of forms used in printing: resistance to spin, surface tension.

Different printer shapes according to print mode.

Preparing and mixing products for processing.

Applicable labour and environmental risk prevention regulations.

4. Transport, packaging, storage

Transport of the factory materials to the printer.

Transport and packaging problems for media.

Storage conditions. Temperature, humidity.

Influence of storage in the print run.

Applicable labour and environmental risk prevention regulations.

5. Quality control of raw materials

Control process: on the materials (supports and inks), viscosity control, drying times, resistance to the rub and scratches of varnishes and lacquers.

Quality regulations. Commercial qualities.

Teams and instruments.

Inspection and receipt procedures.

Training context parameters:

Spaces and installations:

The spaces and facilities will provide a response, in the form of a classroom, a workshop, a workshop of practices, a laboratory or a singular space, to the training needs, according to the Professional Context established in the Unit Partner competence, taking into account the applicable regulations of the production sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.

Professional or former trainer profile:

1.-Domain of knowledge and techniques related to the preparation of raw materials and intermediate products for printing, which will be accredited by one of the following two forms:

-Level 2 academic training (Spanish Framework of Qualifications for Higher Education), Technical Engineering, Technical Architecture, Diplomacy or other higher level of professional field.

-Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.

2.-Accredited pedagogical competence according to what the competent administrations establish.

TRAINING MODULE 3: PREPARING OFFSET PRINTING

Level: 2

Code: MF0202_2

Associated with UC: Determine and adjust offset printing process elements

Duration: 90 hours

Assessment capabilities and criteria:

C1: Identify and regulate maneuvering and service mechanisms on offset machines to make printing under quality, productivity and safety conditions.

CE1.1 Identify the handlers that allow you to calibrate the items that make up the equipment (transmission, pressure) on offset printing machines.

CE1.2 Recognize the maneuvering mechanisms in offset printing machines by assessing the adjustments required to adjust the machine to the printing conditions.

CE1.3 In a practical scenario of preparing the maneuvering mechanisms, characterized by a type printing machine and a given working instructions:

-Perform functional maneuvers in correspondence to the type and format of the print media by correcting possible defects.

-Adjust the power and marker system elements and mechanisms based on the size and type of support.

-Adapt the function mode of elements and mechanisms of the output and receive system to the media and features of the print run.

CE1.4 Perform all operations in compliance with applicable labor and environmental risk prevention regulations.

C2: Determine the pressures between the iron-rubber-printer cylinders according to process needs.

CE2.1 Identify offset machine elements that act on the rubber-iron pressure.

CE2.2 Determine the relationship between the media used in printing: paper, cardboard, plastic, metal, and others with the pressure on the rubber-printer cylinders.

CE2.3 In a scenario of preparing cylinders and starting with a given support:

-Check the diameter of the iron-rubber-printer cylinders using the specific measuring instruments: micrometer, durometer, gauge, gages, and measurement rules of the cylinder-guide or other.

-Adapt the necessary increases to adjust the optimum diameter and pressure between cylinders.

-Adjust pressure and light between cylinders, rubber, and printer in relation to the type of media to be printed.

-Perform all operations in compliance with applicable labor and environmental risk prevention rules.

C3: Perform the necessary operations for fixing the printer form on offset printing machines.

CE3.1 Describe the job streams that characterize the mounting and fixing operations of the printer form on offset printing machines.

CE3.2 Identify the plates corresponding to each color in four-color print jobs.

CE3.3 In a scenario of printing characterized by different irons to be mounted on an offset machine, from a template:

-Make the necessary adjustments for the die-cut and bending of the iron for your enclosure in the pins according to the template.

-Position the iron in the cylinder by making fixed and tensioned with pre-registration settings.

-Perform all operations in compliance with applicable labor and environmental risk prevention rules.

C4: Regular water-ink balance with control of wet and inking equipment according to the needs of the run.

CE4.1 Recognize the wet and inking elements in offset printing machines.

CE4.2 Identify the water-ink regulation elements in the wet and inking equipment of the offset machines.

CE4.3 Determine the parameters for the control of the wet solution: pH, conductivity, surface tension and temperature, assessing its impact on the water-ink balance regulation.

CE4.4 In a scenario of regulating wet and inking equipment for a type job:

-Nivate the tinteros by adapting them to the needs of the image zone.

-Regular ink flow in balance with consumption and chromatic need.

-Control the wet solution: pH, conductivity, surface tension and temperature.

-Regular flow of wet according to technical needs.

C5: Determine surface finishes on the media using the specific equipment in offset printing equipment according to technical requirements.

CE5.1 Describe the most common finishes applied to printed media in the graphic industry: varnished, lacquered and others.

CE5.2 Prepare and position devices and finishing mechanisms in offset printing equipment from defined technical specifications.

CE5.3 In a practical scenario of applying finishes on different print media and starting with instructions given:

-Regular the end application devices by adjusting them to the needs of the original.

-Select the finishing equipment according to the requirements: varnished, lacquered or other.

-Regular the mechanisms of the finishing devices for the specified treatments.

-Perform all operations in compliance with applicable labor and environmental risk prevention rules.

C6: Analyze occupational and environmental risk prevention plans for applicable regulations to properly use media and safety equipment in the preparation and adjustment of the elements of the process printing.

CE6.1 Relate and describe the rules regarding the preparation and adjustment operations of the elements involved in printing.

CE6.2 Describe the properties and uses of the most employed personal protective clothing and equipment in the graphic industry for the preparation of the printing process.

CE6.3 In a practical assessment of security in the preparation of printing equipment, based on a number of occupational and environmental risk prevention plans for companies in the sector:

-Identify and describe the most relevant aspects of each plan, collected in the documentation that contains it.

-Identify and describe risk factors and situations for health and safety in plans related to that activity.

-Relate and describe the appropriate preventive measures and prevention methods established to prevent accidents.

Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real workbench:

C1 with respect to CE1.3; C2 with respect to CE2.3; C3 with respect to CE3.3; C4 with respect to CE4.4; C5 for CE5.3; C6 for CE6.3.

Other capabilities:

Take responsibility for the work you are developing.

Demonstrate some autonomy in solving small contingencies related to their activity.

Respect internal company procedures and rules.

Participate and actively collaborate on the work team.

Transfer information clearly, in an orderly, structured, clear and precise manner respecting the channels established in the organization.

Habit to the organization's work rate.

Contents:

1. Print procedures

Print process. Technological principles.

Operations. Control parameters.

Printing machines. Types.

Sheet machines. Features.

Coil machines. Features.

Other machines.

Main parts. Features. Structures. Types.

Security teams.

Organization and schedule of tasks.

Applicable labour and environmental risk prevention regulations.

2. Preparing equipment for printing

Feeder apparatus.

Placeholder, transport, and output of pliegos or coil.

Parts. Mechanisms. Regulation.

Measuring Devices.

Machine regulation problems. Solutions.

Control Pupitre. Parts. Regulation.

Applicable labour and environmental risk prevention regulations.

3. Adjusting the inking and wetting bodies

Printer body. Cylinders. Coatings. Developments. Pressures. Record correction.

Inter Group. Classes of tinteros. Roller battery. Regulation. Control of the inking. Pressures. Cleaning.

Wetter group. Wet solution. Wet systems. Roller battery. Control. Regulation. Water/ink balance. Cleaning.

Printer Form. Preparation. Fixing. Regulation. Treatment and conservation.

Rubber Mantilla. Manufacture. Assembly. Treatment and conservation.

Applicable labour and environmental risk prevention regulations.

Training context parameters:

Spaces and installations:

The spaces and facilities will provide a response, in the form of a classroom, a workshop, a workshop of practices, a laboratory or a singular space, to the training needs, according to the Professional Context established in the Unit Partner competence, taking into account the applicable regulations of the production sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.

Professional or former trainer profile:

1.-Domain of knowledge and techniques related to the determination and adjustment of offset printing process elements, which will be credited by one of the following two ways:

-Level 1 academic training (Spanish Framework of Qualifications for Higher Education) or other higher level education related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.

2.-Accredited pedagogical competence according to what the competent administrations establish.

TRAINING MODULE 4: OFFSET PRINTING

Level: 2

Code: MF0203_2

Associated with UC: Perform offset printing

Duration: 210 hours

Assessment capabilities and criteria:

C1: Perform operations for the start up of the main offset printing machines and machines.

CE1.1 Describe the recording mechanisms of the specification in the input of the printer body on offset printing machines.

CE1.2 Describe and relate the power, support, transport, and output mechanisms on an offset printing machine in the specification.

CE1.3 Analyze the required throttling operations for offset in offset:

-Pressions between cylinders.

-Pressure of the inking rollers/wetters.

-Entinters/mojors ' roller-ism.

-Correct/wet load depending on the type of paper, the machines used and the work to be printed.

CE1.4 Identify the main methods of checking the regulations of:

-Centralized the printer form.

-Circumferential/Axial Record.

-Marking of the media (sheet).

-Intented, wet batteries, pressure mechanisms and cylinder lining according to manufacturer's specifications.

CE1.5 In a scenario of starting printing and starting from a work order conveniently characterized by checking the mechanisms of:

-Troquing, folding, placing, recording, and printing the printer form.

-Marker device (power head, mark-table elements, height and side heels).

-Transport and output system (tweezers and squats).

-Conventional and automatic inking battery, mechanical tintero, remote control tintero, conventional wet system, and water-alcohol.

-Cylinder pressure (iron, rubber, printer) and its coatings.

C2: Operate with the main offset printing machines, to perform the run and achieve the required quality.

CE2.1 Identify the correct placement of materials in offset printing machines, in order to obtain optimal results and times.

CE2.2 Describe the printing system's own defects and those relating to registration, color, and intonation.

CE2.3 In a practical scenario characterized by an offset printing process type and from an established color profile and an original for printing:

-Relate the causes and effects of the readjustment of the parameters of the printed form, acting (manually or by means of computerized equipment) on the mechanical elements of the register, the ink, the water, the pressures and regulations on the marked device.

-Relate the print order of the appropriate colors according to the job type.

-Compare a printed sample to the original and pre-print (digital, chemical) tests, readjusting the printing parameters (pressure, intonation, registration) to bring the results closer to the tests.

-Get the definitive form with the required quality.

CE2.4 In a scenario of printing a graphical product, from different raw materials:

-Determine the correspondence between print teams and proposed raw materials.

-Set the optimal print speed for the print run, based on the printed parameters (ink density, printing contrast, stamping gain).

-Identify the possible characteristic defects that are affected by the transport of the printed (repainted, the resistance to the rub and the scratch, and the water).

C3: Relate the measurement of process quality variables and print products, using the appropriate instruments.

CE3.1 Describe the method and frequency of obtaining printed samples during a specified print run.

CE3.2 Differentiate and describe the characteristics and operation of the measuring instruments used for quality control.

CE3.3 In a practical scenario of quality control of the print and from different samples, perform the measurement of various parameters:

-Density, stamping gain, print contrast, trapping, tone error, gray content, rub resistance, light resistance, support printability, image offset.

-Wet additive, temperature and percentage of alcohol, conductivity and pH.

-Use the appropriate instruments in the measurement and express the result of the measurement in the units and appropriate form.

CE3.4 Describe the influence of the lighting conditions (color temperature, illumination angle) of the colors of the adjacent surfaces, of the characteristics of the surface of the support (opacity, brightness, degree of The lilness, tension and porosity) of penetration and drying for the measurement of colour.

CE3.5 In a practical scenario of a printing control process, from specific equipment:

-Relate the different elements involved in a control strip with the deviation of the required quality parameters.

-Identify and describe and, where appropriate, represent defects that need to be controlled during the run.

-Use the required equipment according to the parameters to be controlled by the measurements.

-Relate graphs resulting from measurements (density, stamping gain, print contrast, trapping, tone error, gray content, image displacements, sliding degree, resistance to the rub, light resistance, support printability, pH, conductivity) with the parameters set to the assumption.

C4: Perform maintenance operations on offset machines by following established procedures.

CE4.1 Identify the elements of the offset machine to be maintained.

CE4.2 Differentiate and relate the cleaning products and methods of the residual ink after each phase of the print run, wet battery, inking battery, printer cylinder, and rubber mantilla.

CE4.3 In a scenario of maintaining offset printing machines and starting from the given job tab:

-methodically perform first-level maintenance operations (greasing, dry-fat cleaning, cleaning of paper dust debris, antimaculant powder, cleaning of the water reservoir), following instructions from the manufacturer and observing safety standards.

-methodically perform machine cleaning, observing environmental protection and risk prevention standards.

-Relate the cleaning products of the machine with the corresponding environmental regulations, considering the substitutes for the products traditionally used to adapt to such regulations.

C5: Analyze occupational and environmental risk prevention plans for applicable regulations to correctly use media and safety equipment in performing offset printing.

CE5.1 Relate and describe the rules regarding the cleaning and order of the workbench.

CE5.2 Describe the properties and uses of the most employed personal protective clothing and equipment in the printing industry for printing.

CE5.3 Identify and describe rules for stopping and handling offset printing systems and machines.

CE5.4 In a practical scenario of security assessment in offset printing, based on a number of security, protection and environmental plans of companies in the sector:

-Identify and describe the most relevant aspects of each plan, collected in the documentation that contains it.

-Identify and describe risk factors and situations for health and safety in plans related to that activity.

-Relate and describe the appropriate preventive measures and prevention methods established to prevent accidents.

-Identify and describe the most relevant aspects of each plan, collected in the documentation that contains it.

Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real workbench:

C1 with respect to CE1.5; C2 with respect to CE2.3 and CE2.4; C3 with respect to CE3.3 and CE3.5; C4 with respect to CE4.3; C5 with respect to CE5.4.

Other capabilities:

Take responsibility for the work you are developing.

Demonstrate some autonomy in solving small contingencies related to their activity.

Respect internal company procedures and rules.

Participate and actively collaborate on the work team.

Transfer information clearly, in an orderly, structured, clear and precise manner respecting the channels established in the organization.

Habit to the organization's work rate.

Contents:

1. Start-up operations of offset machines

On-going power, record of the media, transport, and output.

Tuning in to the startup.

Regulatory operations. Pressure between cylinders.

Roller/Roller Roller Pressure.

Parallelism of the inking/wetter rollers.

Placement of the printer form. Perforations. Adjustment mechanisms.

2. Print run on offset

Manual or electronic readjustment of the mechanical elements of dosing (inking, wet, ink transfer, image recording on the support).

Review of the form. Readjusting the parameters of the form.

The speed of the machine. Raw materials and speed ratio.

Defects in offset printing. Cause /correction.

3. The color in offset printing

Printing and color of the print.

Print sequence.

Color mixing.

Checking the color in print in relation to preprint tests.

Color measurement equipment.

Color profiles.

4. Quality control during the run

Software and computer equipment for monitoring the quality of the print. Applications.

Equipment for the control of the print. Structure. Features. Measurements.

Elements for control (control strips, side witness, patches).

Criteria for quality control of offset printed.

Measurement conditions in the control process: Color temperature. Lighting. Angle of observation.

Print control process: Record, mass density, tonal value, stamping gain, print contrast, trapping, tone error, gray content.

Control of the finished form: Ink behavior on the media. Printable conditions of the media.

Guidelines for the inspection of the form. Sampling. Reliability. Measurement.

Quality rules for offset printed.

5. Maintenance and cleaning of the offset machine

Top-level maintenance operations.

Cleaning sequence.

Maintenance Tabs.

Lubricants (oils, fats).

Solvents (organic and inorganic).

6. Prevention of occupational and environmental risks in offset printing

Factors and situations of risk.

Protective measures.

Safety standards for machines, installations, and materials.

Environmental prevention and protection systems.

Job and environmental risk prevention plans in offset printing companies.

Emergency systems. Personal protective equipment and means.

Training context parameters:

Spaces and installations:

The spaces and facilities will provide a response, in the form of a classroom, a workshop, a workshop of practices, a laboratory or a singular space, to the training needs, according to the Professional Context established in the Unit Partner competence, taking into account the applicable regulations of the production sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.

Professional or former trainer profile:

1.-Domain of knowledge and techniques related to performing offset printing, which will be credited by one of the following two ways:

-Level 1 academic training (Spanish Framework of Qualifications for Higher Education) or other higher level education related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.

2.-Accredited pedagogical competence according to what the competent administrations establish.

ANNEX II

Professional qualification: Editorial production

Professional Family: Graphic Arts

Level: 3

Code: ARG073_3

General Competition

Perform the planning and monitoring of editorial production, managing and controlling the manufacturing and quality of the product, taking into account the cost and time factors from the editorial specifications set.

Competition Units

UC0204_3: Schedule production from the original specifications analysis

UC0205_3: Control the quality of the product, from the editorial specifications

UC0206_3: Manage Graphic Product Manufacturing

Professional Environment

Professional Scope

Develops its professional activity in the publishing area of editorial products: books, magazines and fasciculties and others, in printed or digital support in publishing companies and graphics of public or private size large, medium or small, both self-employed or self-employed, regardless of their legal form. You may have staff in your position at times, for seasons or in a stable way. The principles of universal accessibility are applied in the development of professional activity in accordance with the applicable regulations.

Productive Sectors

It is located in the publishing sector, graphic industries, and advertising that develop and edit graphic and editorial products on paper and/or digital support: books, advertising, magazines, school materials and other another sector that has any of these activities.

Relevant occupations and jobs

The terms of the following relationship of occupations and jobs are used with a generic and omnicomprensivo character of women and men.

Technical in editorial production

Quality control technicians

Responsible for the publications area

Responsible for sourcing and hiring graphic services

Associated Training (540 hours)

Training Modules

MF0204_3: Editorial production planning (210 hours)

MF0205_3: Quality management and control (180 hours)

MF0206_3: Graphic product manufacturing management (150 hours)

COMPETITION UNIT 1: PLAN PRODUCTION FROM THE ORIGINAL SPECIFICATIONS ANALYSIS

Level: 3

Code: UC0204_3

Professional Realizations and Realization Criteria:

RP 1: To intervene in the definition of the products to be made, taking into account the editorial plans, the parts of the book and/or editorial product, determining the technical, aesthetic and legal characteristics, and proposing improvements to facilitate production.

CR 1.1 The technical proposals for the manufacturing of the editorial product: printing systems, number of colors, document type, number of pages and others, are carried out in search of the balance between quality and costs.

CR 1.2 The formats of the works are proposed according to the criteria of the collections and/or criteria established by the client, taking into account the standardized measures, according to the applicable quality regulations of the paper and printing machines.

CR 1.3 The different parts of the book or editorial product are established according to the aesthetic criteria most appropriate to the character of the work: typographies, images, boxes and others.

CR 1.4 The legal aspects of the edition: Legal deposit, ISBN, Copyright, credits and others are recorded in the corresponding pages according to the rules of the publisher.

CR 1.5 The technical characteristics of the product are concretized by looking for the maximum use of the raw materials, describing them precisely in terms of measures, gramage, finishes and resistances.

CR 1.6 The characteristics of the texts of the editorial work: styles, families and others, are proposed according to the established design and the content of the publication.

CR 1.7 The characteristics of the images in the editorial work: correct techniques, definition, resolution, file format, measures and availability are proposed, adjusting to the needs of the reproduction.

CR 1.8 Phases and post-pressure operations: Pellings, manipulated and bookbinding of books or journals are established in accordance with product requirements and editorial needs.

RP 2: Request offers of materials and services related to the manufacturing of the editorial product according to the necessary technical specifications, achieving the best quality/price ratio.

CR 2.1 Market prospecting is carried out taking into account the evolution, certification and compliance of the necessary technical specifications for the performance by the suppliers of products and services preprint, print, and post-pressure.

CR 2.2 The offers received for the purchase of materials or services are in accordance with the requested technical characteristics and the required delivery times.

CR 2.3 The technical information received is collected with the one offered by the manufacturers of machinery and products, technical journals and trade fairs.

CR 2.4 Suppliers are selected on the basis of quality and economic criteria.

RP 3: Develop the editorial product budget, marking the various stages of production to control costs, using IT applications.

CR 3.1 The production phases and variables involved in the budget are recorded by facilitating the monitoring and control of data.

CR 3.2 The technical information of the materials and the production phases is identified by considering the technical characteristics of the product and the required delivery times.

CR 3.3 Preprint costs are valued based on delivery times, size, number of images and color, type of test, and delivery formats.

CR 3.4 Print costs are valued on the basis of delivery times, print size, number of copies, number of inks, plate changes (or other printer form) and quantity of resmas.

CR 3.5 Post-pressure costs are valued on the basis of delivery times, number of sheets, type of binding, manipulated, pelted and packaged.

CR 3.6 The cost of the raw materials is determined by calculating the paper used, the mermas or the storage, among others, and from consultations or using rates agreed with suppliers.

CR 3.7 The fixed and variable costs of the different production processes are determined by valuing the different items that make up the production process.

CR 3.8 The calculations and budget presentation are performed using the specific software.

RP 4: Schedule and plan the procurement of the editorial product, in accordance with the requirements established to meet delivery times and using computer applications.

CR 4.1 The presentation of the schedule of the jobs is done using the most appropriate diagrams.

CR 4.2 The incidents that may occur in the production process are considered in the programming, considering its impact on the development of the edition.

CR 4.3 The programming and planning of the reproduction of the editorial product is carried out according to the characteristics and nature of the editorial product.

CR 4.4 The production stages of preprint, printing and post-pressure are determined with a precise time calculation for their performance with the expected costs.

CR 4.5 Programming control is performed by obtaining intermediate tests between the phases.

CR 4.6 The critical points of the editorial product reproduction process are determined, valuing the margins of material reception, delivery times, process complexity, and others.

CR 4.7 The number of units to be reedited and reprinted is evaluated from the management and tracking of the product stored in stock.

Professional Context:

Production media:

Measurement teams: tell them, densitometer. Computer equipment. Software: treatment of texts, images and layout. Specific programming software. Budget software. Specific software for the evaluation of specimens and intelligent replacement of stock. Digital testing. Samples of the raw materials.

Products and results:

Programming and planning of the editorial product made. Incidents and estimated quality data. Features of editorial products such as books, newspapers, magazines, brochures, displays, deployables, envelopes, inserts, flyers and others, established. Multimedia devices. Offers of materials and services requested and valued. Budget made.

Information used or generated:

Information provided by the customer and by the suppliers. Applicable rules of quality. Technical sheets. Certification of suppliers. Editorial plans. Study of offers. Regulations on copyright, legal deposit and others. Tariffs. Manufacturing orders. Production sheets. Specifications for quality control. Preprint tests. Samples of the printed product. Models. Sketch of the work to be played. Style book. Corporate identity manual. Catalogue of types. Applicable rules for the prevention of occupational and environmental risks.

COMPETITION UNIT 2: CONTROL PRODUCT QUALITY, FROM EDITORIAL SPECIFICATIONS

Level: 3

Code: UC0205_3

Professional Realizations and Realization Criteria:

RP 1: Mark the criteria for typographies to be used in the composition of the texts in order to achieve the required quality.

CR 1.1 The text styles of the editorial work are specified in order to be consistent with the work according to the criteria of the editorial style book.

CR 1.2 Paragraphs, interlining, partitions, streets, widowed or orphan lines are controlled, applying the editorial style book and harmonizing the composition.

CR 1.3 The macro-typographical and micro-typographical elements of the edition are defined by valuing that they maintain harmony in the composition with respect to each of the elements that make up the editorial product.

CR 1.4 The editorial data on the format of the work, texts, images and other established parameters are recorded according to the guidelines of the company's quality manual.

RP 2: Set the required parameters for file creation, color testing, and image features, according to the print system to use.

CR 2.1 The product quality parameters are established based on the characteristics of the printing system used in the reproduction.

CR 2.2 The resolution, size, and format of the images are reviewed by checking that they are appropriate for the edit system to be used.

CR 2.3 The selection of the image capture and capture system (cameras, scanners, and image banks) is performed according to the quality of the work to be edited.

CR 2.4 The retouching of the images is indicated by indicating whether it is photomontage, removing objects, color adjustments and other treatments, verifying that they save aesthetic harmony with the original and respecting their authorship.

CR 2.5 The linearature and angle parameters of the images are checked by observing them on the web in all colors, in order to avoid defects in printing.

CR 2.6 Color tests are controlled by checking with equipment and materials to ensure their consistency and reliability that are made from the delivered files.

CR 2.7 The formats of the delivered files are checked by the value of the requested files, are compatible and are recorded on the specified computer media.

RP 3: Control the parameters of the compaging, valuing the technical and aesthetic aspects for the adaptation to the work and its subsequent use.

CR 3.1 The pages of the work are verified by valuing that they are balanced in the aesthetic and style aspects and that they follow the line indicated in the book of style checking that they maintain a correct harmony of the elements that configure them.

CR 3.2 The architecture of the page (boxes, blanks) is checked by checking that it maintains the same style as the other elements that make up the work.

CR 3.3 The colors defined in the work are checked by valuing that they are consistent for all linked elements and files.

CR 3.4 Compaging is evaluated by checking for plotter, diazo, or other tests.

RP 4: Establish and check the characteristics of the paper or other raw materials, seeking their suitability with the editorial product to be performed.

CR 4.1 The characteristics of the raw materials are established according to the technical specifications of the editorial product and the evolution and certification of the suppliers.

CR 4.2 The weight, size, surface, bleaching and wettability of the paper are checked using the specific equipment and following established quality control protocols.

CR 4.3 The surface finish (matt, shiny, smoothed, embossed) of the paper is checked against the proposed samples for editing.

CR 4.4 Quality control of inks and solvents is carried out by applying the physico-chemical test tests laid down in the quality standards and complying with the applicable rules for the prevention of occupational risks and environmental.

CR 4.5 The raw materials of the various devices and supports are verified by verifying that they respond to the pre-established characteristics, complying with the applicable regulations on the prevention of occupational and environmental risks.

RP 5: Mark and control the key points of printing, by evaluating tests for defect detection and ensuring quality in reproduction.

CR 5.1 The monitoring of the run is carried out by verifying the adequacy of the inks and support used in accordance with the procedures laid down in the applicable quality regulations.

CR 5.2 The systematic sampling of samples is done by visually appreciating certain printing errors such as repainting, point gain or registration errors and others.

CR 5.3 Print errors (repainted, point gain or registration errors, and others) are checked visually, with spectrophotometer or with storytellers according to the company's quality control system.

CR 5.4 The taking of printed samples is performed in the form and frequency required by the established quality procedure.

CR 5.5 The density of the control strips is accurately checked using specific measuring equipment: densitometres, spectrophotometers, odometers and others.

RP 6: Mark and control the key points of post-pressure operations, by evaluating tests for defect detection and ensuring quality in finishes.

CR 6.1 Monitoring of binding processes is carried out by checking on samples agreed with the company that the operations of guillotinate, folding, lump-sum, drawing, stapling, stitching or milling are carried out according to the instructions made and the quality manual set.

CR 6.2 The embossing, peeling and other finishes of the editorial product are checked considering the characteristics of gloss or mate, lisura or embossing of the editorial product and the absence of deforming stresses, wrinkles or bags of air or any other imperfection.

CR 6.3 The operations of cleft, die-cut and brooding performed in the editorial product are proven to be sharp and precise and to meet the requirements.

CR 6.4 The manipulated, complex, corrugated cardboard, extruded or any other treatment that requires the work are reviewed from the check of the correct compliance with the technical characteristics preset.

CR 6.5 The systematic sampling of samples is performed in the form and frequency established in the applicable quality procedure to observe the quality parameters of the finished product.

Professional Context:

Production media:

Measurement equipment: hygrometer, pH-meter, scale, and others. Viewers. Light tables. Plotter. Quality control programmes. Computer equipment. Software: treatment of texts, images and layout, image banks. Photosensitive paper. Printer shapes: plates, cylinders, screens and clichés. Inks and solvents. Print media: paper and non-paper. Cardboard, glues, varnish, solvent.

Products and results:

Criteria for marked fonts. Parameters for the creation of files, color tests and characteristics of the established images. Controlled compaging parameters. Characteristics of the controlled raw materials. Applicable quality regulations.

Information used or generated:

Customer-contributed information. Applicable quality standards. Technical sheets. Specifications for quality control. Samples of the printed product. Style book. Quality testing. Specifications of the printing system. Catalogue of types. Technical documentation. "Pantone" and letters of color for quadricromia. Company quality manual or procedure manual. Vendor standards. Applicable rules for the prevention of occupational and environmental risks.

COMPETITION UNIT 3: MANAGE THE MANUFACTURING OF THE GRAPHICAL PRODUCT

Level: 3

Code: UC0206_3

Professional Realizations and Realization Criteria:

RP 1: Contry and monitor preprint processes, in accordance with editorial plans, in order to achieve established production and quality levels.

CR 1.1 The hiring of preprint companies is performed in accordance with the criteria of quality, cost, and schedule compliance planned in the planning.

CR 1.2 The images, the texts to be reproduced and the compaging of the work are established with the preprint company establishing the quality, costs and calendars of completion, agreeing the type of control tests intermediate.

CR 1.3 Offset irons, or other printer forms are reviewed in the company verifying that they conform to the quality, costs and calendars established, checking their quality as compared to the tests performed from the Digital files delivered.

CR 1.4 The incidents produced, if any, during the preprint process are corrected and are recorded enabling the proper compliance of the predicted parameters in the planning.

RP 2: Contry and monitor print processes to achieve established production and quality levels.

CR 2.1 The hiring of printing companies is done on the basis of the quality, cost and schedule compliance criteria foreseen in the planning.

CR 2.2 The incidents produced, if any, during the printing process are corrected and recorded enabling the appropriate quality, time and cost compliance with the planning.

CR 2.3 The compliance of the specifications by the selected companies is checked, monitoring the signed printing tests.

CR 2.4 The schedules planned by the company are proven to be true in compliance with the recommended times for the drying of inks and varnishes.

RP 3: Contry and monitor post-pressure processes, as required by the editorial product, in order to achieve established production and quality levels.

CR 3.1 The hiring of companies or equipment for the production of post-pressure is done by selecting those that meet the required requirements to ensure the quality levels, costs and timetables foreseen in the planning.

CR 3.2 The stowage, classification, and transport processes of the bound and/or manipulated work are reviewed by checking that they are performed according to the requirements of receipt of materials established in the contract.

CR 3.3 The incidences produced, if any, during the post-pressure process, are corrected and recorded enabling the appropriate performance of the parameters foreseen in the planning.

CR 3.4 Material collection is monitored by checking that it is done in accordance with established needs and calendars, to optimize its use.

RP 4: Contry and monitor raw materials, as required by the editorial product in order to achieve established production and quality levels.

CR 4.1 The procurement of raw material supply companies is carried out by selecting those that meet the required requirements to ensure the quality, cost and time-to-schedule levels. planning.

CR 4.2 The processes of stowage, classification and transport of raw materials are reviewed by checking that they are carried out according to the requirements for the reception of materials established in the contract.

CR 4.3 The characteristics of the paper in the aspects of gramage, caliber, wettability and superficiality or others are reviewed by checking that they are in line with those foreseen for the product in the supply contract.

CR 4.4 Material collection is monitored by checking that it is performed according to established needs and calendars, to optimize its use and to be accompanied by established quality specifications.

Professional Context:

Production media:

Measurement equipment: calibers, hygrometer, pH-meter, scale, and others. Viewers. Light tables. Computer equipment. Software for the treatment of texts, images or layout. Specific software for the evaluation of specimens and intelligent replacement of stock. Print media: paper, cardboard, cardboard and plastic. Samples for approval of the first printed sheet and control during the run.

Products and results:

Hiring of preprint, printing, and post-pressure companies. Monitoring of the process of elaboration of the editorial product in all processes. Procurement of suppliers of raw materials and supervision of the quality of raw materials. Fact sheets and quality data. Monitoring intermediate print tests.

Information used or generated:

Customer-contributed information. Editorial plans. Study of offers. Manufacturing orders. Specifications for quality control. Samples of the printed product. Catalogue of types. Technical documentation. 'Pantone' and color cards for quadricromia. Production software. Quality standards. Applicable rules for the prevention of occupational and environmental risks.

TRAINING MODULE 1: PLANNING EDITORIAL PRODUCTION

Level: 3

Code: MF0204_3

Associated with UC: Schedule Production from Analysis of Original Specifications

Duration: 210 hours

Assessment capabilities and criteria:

C1: Analyze the processes and methods used in sourcing and purchasing raw materials.

CE1.1 Determine the most common sourcing and purchasing processes for raw materials in editorial and graphic processes.

CE1.2 Analyze a purchase contract for raw materials with respect to the content and form.

CE1.3 In a practical material supply scenario, from raw material sourcing data:

-Determine and graphically represent the minimum, maximum, and optimal stocks.

-Identify the sources of information available for the market search of suppliers, products, or raw materials that the company needs.

-Perform a report on the method used for the request and evaluation of the offers.

C2: Analyze and specify the needs of a graphical product in terms of materials, texts, images, printing processes, finishes and binding.

CE2.1 Analyze the design of books, press, brochures, packaging and indicate the characteristics that determine their functional, communication and commercial values.

CE2.2 Relate the different types of graphic products with the materials and processes to be used in their manufacture, especially in terms of value for money.

CE2.3 Point out in different types of graphic products the factors that are critical in the definition of each one.

CE2.4 Identify the type of standard or standard of national or international quality to refer to when specifying materials, processes, formats, or tests.

CE2.5 Verify and/or modify the technical characteristics of a graphic product to allow maximum use of raw materials.

CE2.6 Verify the integrity of the originals received from the client or sent to the supplier and that the technical characteristics of texts, images, materials, printing method and finishes are correct.

CE2.7 In a practical scenario of estimating needs for the production of a graphic product, based on specifications and samples given:

-Determine the appropriate paper type based on value for money.

-Inspect the sample to determine the type of paper.

-Determine the appropriate printing system based on support, manufacturing volume, quality, and price.

-Determine the required manufacturing operations.

-Detect critical points in the manufacturing process that typically cause problems.

-Identify the most common fonts and determine the required character files by evaluating the associated problems.

-Determine the best quality and format of the images.

-Evaluate the possibility of changes to the product specification that can improve value for money.

C3: Value graphic service offerings by referring to national or international standards in graphic arts and taking into account the legal and technical limitations of processes and companies.

CE3.1 Select suppliers for request for offers based on information from manufacturers, machinery, and products known by specialized publications.

CE3.2 Use the appropriate lexicon to describe in writing the characteristics and formal elements of the graphic products.

CE3.3 Describe rules, procedures and documentation regarding intellectual property and editing:

-Copyright.

-Translations.

-Legal deposit and ISBN.

-Coedit.

CE3.4 Identify the most relevant quality standards or standards of graphic arts applicable to service contracts.

CE3.5 In a practical scenario in which an editorial intends to elaborate a complex book, based on established parameters:

-Indicate the originals to be delivered.

-Determine how your treatment should be marked.

-Present the memory for your order.

-Indicate how the working relationships with the different external providers would be established and formalized throughout the process, from conception to sale.

C4: Develop the budget for a graphical product from service offerings or with your own database or calculation prices.

CE4.1 Identify the concepts that need to be taken into account to draw up an estimate budget and select and apply the appropriate rates and prices.

CE4.2 Consult appropriate catalogs and databases to obtain material and service prices.

CE4.3 Uncompose in units of work the manufacture of a graphic product for measurement and measurement.

CE4.4 Develop material and other graphic services requests.

CE4.5 Rate printing costs according to delivery times, print size, number of inks, plate changes, or other printer shape and quantity of resmas.

CE4.6 In a scenario of estimating the costs of a graphical product, based on the technical characteristics of the product:

-Request all data and prices that are required.

-Indicate all originals to be delivered.

-Set the most appropriate print system to the product type.

-Develop a detailed budget.

-Determine the critical points in the editing process that can affect the cost.

C5: Develop programming for the execution of editorial projects, considering the planning of the edition.

CE5.1 Identify the most common diagrams used in programming type publishing projects.

CE5.2 In a practical planning scenario for an editorial project, from an estimated date:

-Determine critical activities to complete the project by the expected date, requesting for it, if necessary, intermediate tests.

-Assign resources and costs to the activities to plan the disbursements.

-Generate documentation for tracking deadlines, costs, and quality.

CE5.3 In a practical development scenario of a graphic product required for a particular event where the content and characteristics of the product and resources of all types are fixed for processing and manufacturing:

-Perform a bar chart, scheduling all required jobs.

-Point out critical points in the process for programming purposes.

-Indicate activities that can be abbreviated, using alternative resources, or increasing the settings.

-Indicate the most common contingencies that can be presented and point out the actions to be remedied.

Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real workbench:

C1 with respect to CE1.3; C2 with respect to CE2.7; C3 with respect to CE3.5; C4 with respect to CE4.6; C5 with respect to CE5.2 and CE5.3.

Other capabilities:

Take Responsibility for the work that you develop and achieve your goals.

Prove a good professional.

Finish the job based on criteria of suitability, speed, economy and effectiveness.

Demonstrate a degree of autonomy in the resolution of contingencies related to your activity.

Propose alternatives with the aim of improving results.

Treat the customer with courtesy, respect and discretion.

Adapt to organization, organizational and technological changes as well as new situations or contexts.

Contents:

1. The publishing industry in the next environment

Characterization of the business sector and structure.

Structure and organizational shapes by size.

Macroeconomic indicators.

Offering products and services in the next environment.

Quality and cost criteria for business selection.

Applicable labour and environmental risk prevention regulations.

2. Editorial products

Printed and digital books.

Web Publications.

Magazines and newspapers: weekly, monthly and others.

Style Books.

Legal aspects of the edition: legal deposit, ISBN and others.

3. Graphical processes

Basic transfer systems.

Continuous and hatched images.

Frames, lineatures, resolution, and gray levels.

Analog and digital technologies.

Phases of the process: design, preprint, print, post-pressure.

Machinery: typologies, formats, capabilities, prices, and other specifications.

Technical-economic benchmarking.

Characterization of systems by the printed image.

Applicable labour and environmental risk prevention regulations.

Factors to consider in the composition of texts.

Major problems related to the layout and selection of types. The architecture of the page.

4. Raw materials and graphic services

Paper and other media.

Formats.

Inks: types, features.

Application Fields.

Usage specifications.

Applicable quality standards.

Applicable labour and environmental risk prevention regulations.

5. Budgeting

Introduction to the cost study.

Costs according to their nature.

Cost of materials.

Process cost: preprint, print, and post-pressure.

Fixed costs and variable costs.

Specific equipment and software.

Measurement of materials and estimation of times.

Ways to budget.

Application to different processes.

Order of magnitude and index numbers.

6. Request and selection of offerings

International and national standards for products, processes and qualities in graphic arts.

Specifying materials, colors, finishes, tests, models, and other processes.

The "prefligt" original check.

Contract tests. Application standards and criteria.

Legal aspects of hiring. Contract types and award modes.

Intellectual property: text and image rights.

7. Planning and tracking editorial projects

Introduction to project planning and management tools.

Activity planning.

Resource planning.

Cost planning.

Plan for quality and risk.

Identification of hotspots.

Communication and tracking tools.

Project plan optimization for goal fulfillment.

Training context parameters:

Spaces and installations:

The spaces and facilities will provide a response, in the form of a classroom, a workshop, a workshop of practices, a laboratory or a singular space, to the training needs, according to the Professional Context established in the Unit Partner competence, taking into account the applicable regulations of the production sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.

Professional or former trainer profile:

1. Domain of knowledge and techniques related to the planning of production from the analysis of the specifications of the originals, which will be accredited by one of the following two forms:

-Level 2 academic training (Spanish Framework of Qualifications for Higher Education), Technical Engineering, Technical Architecture, Diplomacy or other higher level of professional field.

-Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.

2. Accredited pedagogical competence in accordance with what is established by the competent administrations.

TRAINING MODULE 2: QUALITY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL

Level: 3

Code: MF0205_3

Associated with UC: Control product quality, from the editorial specifications

Duration: 180 hours

Assessment capabilities and criteria:

C1: Define criteria for text composition and compaging of publishing an editorial product.

CE1.1 Identify quality parameters in the preparation of texts such as interlining, family, body, and others.

CE1.2 Analyze the correct application of the fonts in a type of print, taking into account the editorial product and the company style manuals.

CE1.3 In a practical assessment of the composition of the texts in an editorial product, based on a given test:

-Evaluate correct text compaging

-Analyze paragraphs or interlines.

-Correct widows, orphans, and others.

-Verify that the compaging conforms to the product characteristics, formats, and subsequent utilization.

C2: Analyze parameters relating to the creation and transfer of images during the capture, editing, film filming, irons, or test generation phases.

CE2.1 Determine if the capture device settings are correct based on the characteristics of the original and the target system.

CE2.2 Check that test kits have been correctly calibrated and characterized, with corresponding color profiles, according to the manufacturer's recommendations or some national or international standard.

CE2.3 In a scenario of analyzing graphical elements, from an editing project and given tests:

-Control or define the correct resolution of images based on the playback system.

-Verify the contrast in lights, shadows, and midtones, gray balance, and color balance.

-Verify the correct reproduction of four-color colors, flat colors, memory, or any other referenced in the sample.

-Verify the absence of defects due to image retouching.

-Check the minimum and mass density on film and the correct generation of the point with transmission densitometer.

-Verify lineatures and plot angles for each of the separations.

-Verify the control of microlines. Verify the geometry, edges, and tuning of the point.

-Check the compatibility of formats in digital files.

C3: Analyze the characteristics of the raw materials used to obtain the editorial products, using the required equipment.

CE3.1 Value the quality of raw materials through the data recorded in different quality contracts with supply companies.

CE3.2 Identify and assess the applicable regulations for the prevention of occupational and environmental risks related to raw materials and waste in the processes of reproduction of editorial products.

CE3.3 In a practical case of valuation of raw materials and from different media and measuring equipment:

-Recognize and characterize the structure of papers, cartons, cartons, cardboard, and other print media.

-Successfully handle the tools or measuring instruments: precision scales, microscope, gyrometer, and others.

-Verify the main characteristics and physical and chemical properties of the supports: hardness, roughness, gramage, humidity, whiteness, chromatic components and others, using the most appropriate measuring equipment in each case.

CE3.4 In a practical test case of materials from different supports, inks, pigments and others:

-Prepare and manipulate the test equipment, instruments and tools with skill and skill.

-Analyze the main characteristics and physicochemical properties of inks, varnishes, pigments, dyes, oils, solvents (shooting, viscosity, pH, transparency, drying, clarity, brightness, color, and others).

-Perform physico-chemical testing tests in compliance with applicable labor and environmental risk prevention regulations.

C4: Analyze the characteristics of the printing processes by performing measurements on standard tests.

CE4.1 Check or specify control elements to ensure product quality.

CE4.2 Determine the control elements that must be tested to facilitate control measurements.

CE4.3 On a printed test, measure or check according to the printing standards:

-Print contraste visually and with densitometer, colorimeter, or spectrophotometer.

-Balance of gray visually or quantitatively.

-Color balance visually or quantitatively.

-Colorimetric values in masses of primary, secondary and reference with spectrophotometer.

-Point gain with densitometer or spectrophotometer.

-Tonal reproduction limits visually or with densitometer.

-Absence of repainted, ripped, spots, white dots, or black dots with dropper.

-Record with storytellers.

C5: Analyze the quality parameters in the post-pressure process: binding, peeled, manipulated, and others, by evaluating tests.

CE5.1 Identify the parameters that define quality in binding processes: guillotined, folding, lump-sum, and others.

CE5.2 Recognize key control points in handling operations such as waffling, cleft, and others.

CE5.3 In a practical scenario of assessing quality in a post-pressure process, from a given product:

-Identify the product binding operations.

-Identify the transformed operations that you have traversed in your production.

-Check the quality at each of the phases.

C6: Rate the application of a quality system to the manufacturing of the editorial product, in relation to the applicable standards.

CE6.1 Interpret a manual of quality and manual of procedure (inspection and testing) of a type company.

CE6.2 Use the different methods, equipment, and instruments required for manual or automatic sampling in the production process.

CE6.3 Analyze the statistical control charts used to determine the quality capacity of the process, interpreting the trends and stability of the process.

CE6.4 Recognize the procedures for assessing the quality of supplies for the acceptance of the batch material, relative to the agreed quality level.

CE6.5 Recognize the main standards or standards for quality control of materials and processes.

CE6.6 Determine or verify the degree of adjustment to European, national or international standards of materials, processes and type procedures.

Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real workbench:

C1 with respect to CE1.3; C2 with respect to CE2.3; C3 with respect to CE3.3 and CE3.4; C4 with respect to CE4.3; C5 with respect to CE5.3.

Other capabilities

Propose alternatives with the aim of improving results.

Learn new concepts or procedures and effectively leverage training using acquired knowledge.

Use time and effort to extend knowledge and supplemental information for use in your work.

Sharing information with the work team.

Adapt to organization, organizational and technological changes as well as new situations or contexts.

Contents:

1. Colorimetry

Nature of light.

Color spaces.

Color Coordinates.

Standard Observer.

Uniform color models.

Factors that affect color perception.

Color measurement. Colorimeter densitometres, spectrophotometers.

Color perception models.

Color difference measurement models.

2. Quality control

Control of raw materials. Films, plates, ink, supports.

Control images.

Densitometry, colorimetry, and spectrophotometry.

Quality of the image in the film. Standards and observations. Point gain, tuning and contrast.

Ink behavior. Transfer. Monochromatic deviation. Tone error. Grisura. Additionality.

3. Proof of Imposition

Test and print control. Print contrast. Tonal reproduction limits. Balance of grays. Color balance. Point gain. Print contrast. Defects: record, started, repainted, spots, points, or marks.

Applicable quality rules.

Quality of finishes, manipulated and binding.

Estimating the cost of quality.

Applicable labour and environmental risk prevention regulations.

4. Quality Management

Quality and productivity. Regulations.

Elements of quality assurance systems.

The functions and processes.

The factors that affect quality. Diagrams cause effect.

Relationship with quality control.

Company Quality Manual.

Statistics and charts.

5. Color management

The problem of color reproduction.

Management systems components: profiles and color administration module (cmm).

Commercial management systems.

The problem of adjustments and workflows.

Phases of the implementation of a color management system: calibration, characterization, profiling, utilization and verification.

Criteria for evaluating the operation of a color management system.

Rules on recommendations for using profiles on color management systems.

6. Digital originals

Recommendations for the original creator.

Recommendations for image capture and treatment.

Recommendations for file delivery, transmission, and verification.

Pre-flight file verification software .

Recommendations for preprint.

Quality regulations applicable.

Training context parameters:

Spaces and installations:

The spaces and facilities will provide a response, in the form of a classroom, a workshop, a workshop of practices, a laboratory or a singular space, to the training needs, according to the Professional Context established in the Unit Partner competence, taking into account the applicable regulations of the production sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.

Professional or former trainer profile:

1. Domain of knowledge and techniques related to the quality control of the product, based on the editorial specifications, which will be accredited by one of the following two forms:

-Level 2 academic training (Spanish Framework of Qualifications for Higher Education), Technical Engineering, Technical Architecture, Diplomacy or other higher level of professional field.

-Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.

2. Accredited pedagogical competence in accordance with what is established by the competent administrations.

TRAINING MODULE 3: MANAGING THE MANUFACTURING OF THE GRAPHICAL PRODUCT

Level: 3

Code: MF0206_3

Associated with UC: Manage Graphic Product Manufacturing

Duration: 150 hours

Assessment capabilities and criteria:

C1: Identify the graphical process followed for the manufacture of an editorial product, as a whole and its different phases: preprint, print and post-pressure.

CE1.1 To differentiate the different graphic industries according to the type of process, product and magnitude, relating them to the economic, productivity and competitiveness factors taking into account their technological evolution.

CE1.2 Explain the main features of preprint, print and post-pressure processes and systems, relating phases and operations to the type of machines, input/output products, and materials.

CE1.3 Verify from the design point of view, the characteristics of an editorial product type:

-Formats and measures.

-Tipographies.

-Colors.

-Media.

-Encuadernation and finish.

CE1.4 Indicate the originals to be delivered, for the manufacture of a type-illustrated book, how your treatment should be marked and the specifications for ordering the work.

C2: Analyze the organizational, functional and productive structure of the graphic industries.

CE2.1 Relating and sequencing the various preprint, printing, and post-pressure phases that have been involved in the manufacture of a type graphic product and the functions related to the processing processes.

CE2.2 From the technical documentation collected from visits to companies, trade fairs, catalogues or technical journals, prepare a report where the most relevant technical and organizational aspects are production.

CE2.3 In a scenario of developing different graphical products, from the specifications of the given products:

-Identify the most appropriate type of business for your playback.

-Describe the fundamental phases of a material purchase process.

-Apply purchasing techniques.

-Verify the documentation associated with the orders.

C3: Determine the technical documentation required for the launch and follow-up of an editorial product.

CE3.1 Verify charts and diagrams used in the study of methods, planning, and programming (moves, tasks, and times).

CE3.2 In a graphical production scenario based on instructions given to determine:

-The production job stream.

-The required materials and the intermediate products used.

-Computers, machines, and software.

-Human resources.

-Partial and total production times.

CE3.3 In a preprint scenario from the editorial product to play, verify:

-Preprint system to be used.

-Type of photosensitive material.

-Page dimensions, margins, columns, typographical features.

-Modifications in the image.

-Filming and quality parameters.

-Test system.

-Run times.

CE3.4 In a scenario of printing from the editorial product to be reproduced verify:

-Print system to be used.

-Machine format.

-Formas printers.

-Class (type, interior or cover, format, gramage) and amount of support to print (number of copies).

-Number of pages.

-Class and quantity of inks.

-Print Sequence.

-The quality parameters.

-Density of the mass.

-Print Contrast.

-Trapping.

-Stamp gain.

-Run times.

CE3.5 In a practical post-pressure scenario, complete a work order with the signs, abbreviations, and codes used in post-pressure, setting:

-Binding or manipulated system.

-Method of sharpening.

-No. of copies.

-Materials to be used (cardboard, cardboard, polyethylene, among others).

-Run times.

C4: Perform budgetary control and calculation of deviations in manufacturing processes for editorial products.

CE4.1 Identify the most common causes that may result in the diversion of budgeted calculations in the reproduction of editorial products, due to materials, processes, or others.

CE4.2 From an entirely finished editorial product (magazine, books, brochures, labels, packaging) calculate the quantities of the materials that have been used in the production, taking into account:

-Amount of paper based on the number of copies.

-Number of different inks and quantity of the same.

-Type of bound and manipulated.

-Type of treatment of the images.

-Type of tests performed.

CE4.3 In a practical scenario of adjusting a budget for an editorial work, based on an estimated budget and simulated data:

-Calculate deviations.

-Analyze the causes of their occurrence and the effects they produce.

-Propose alternative solutions.

Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real workbench:

C1 with respect to CE1.3; C2 with respect to CE2.3; C3 with respect to CE3.2, CE3.3, CE3.4 and CE3.5; C4 with respect to CE4.2 and CE4.3.

Other capabilities:

Demonstrate a degree of autonomy in the resolution of contingencies related to your activity.

Propose initiatives to improve results.

Communicate effectively with the right people at every moment, respecting the channels established in the organization.

Learn new concepts or procedures and effectively leverage training using acquired knowledge.

Use time and effort to extend knowledge and supplemental information for use in your work.

Sharing information with the work team.

Contents:

1. Management and management of the graphic industry

The company, models of companies. Historical developments. Problem control programs.

The tax and labor system.

Organization.

Developments in the graphical sector.

Offering and Demand.

Outsourcing services.

Cost accounting and budget control.

Classification of products in the graphical industry.

2. Basic phases in the graphical process

Process information: Preprint, print, and post-pressure.

Machines and production facilities: benefits, yields, typical provisions.

Flow of materials and products.

Evaluation of the times.

Maintenance: plans, organization, economic aspects.

Human resources.

3. Production control and monitoring

Planning and tracking tools.

Production control charts.

Optimization techniques.

Control computing tools.

4. Technical documentation generated in manufacturing

Charts and diagrams for scheduling and scheduling.

Sequences of work.

Total and partial production times.

Record job parameters.

Record quality parameters.

Phases. Tasks. Sequences.

5. Procurement techniques and management

Purchasing techniques. Types. Features.

Market prospecting.

Contracts with suppliers in accordance with applicable quality regulations.

Documentation associated with purchasing management.

Training context parameters:

Spaces and installations:

The spaces and facilities will provide a response, in the form of a classroom, a workshop, a workshop of practices, a laboratory or a singular space, to the training needs, according to the Professional Context established in the Unit Partner competence, taking into account the applicable regulations of the production sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.

Professional or former trainer profile:

1. Domain of knowledge and techniques related to the management of the manufacturing of the graphic product, which will be accredited by one of the following two forms:

-Level 2 academic training (Spanish Framework of Qualifications for Higher Education), Technical Engineering, Technical Architecture, Diplomacy or other higher level of professional field.

-Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.

2. Accredited pedagogical competence in accordance with what is established by the competent administrations.

ANNEX III

Professional qualification: digital pressure

Professional Family: Graphic Arts

Level: 2

Code: ARG151_2

General Competition

Interpret and manage digital information for your graphical process and make the impression through digital technologies by preparing and adjusting the elements of the process and the necessary raw materials intervening in the a graphical process under the established security, quality and productivity conditions.

Competition Units

UC0200_2: Operate in the graphical process under security, quality, and productivity

UC0482_2: Interpret and manage digital information needed for digital product printing

UC0483_2: Prepare teams, adjust parameters, and perform digital printing

Professional Environment

Professional Scope

Develops its professional activity in the area of digital printing on all types of media in graphic, communication and design companies, in entities of public or private nature, small, medium and large and with independence from its legal form, generally works as an employed person and depending, where appropriate, functional and/or hierarchically of a superior. You may have staff in your position at times, for seasons or in a stable way. The principles of universal accessibility are applied in the development of professional activity in accordance with the applicable regulations.

Productive Sectors

It is located in the productive sector of graphic, manipulated and transformed industries of national or international level that print by the digital system publishing products, advertising, packaging and packaging and others, and in any another sector that has any of these activities.

Relevant occupations and jobs

The terms of the following relationship of occupations and jobs are used with a generic and omnicomprensivo character of women and men.

Pre-media preps

Digital Printers

Digital system operators

Digital print technicians

Associated Training (510 hours)

Training Modules

MF0200_2: Processes in Graphic Arts (120 hours)

MF0482_2: Preparing files for digital printing (120 hours)

MF0483_2: Printing with digital devices (270 hours)

COMPETITION UNIT 1: OPERATING IN THE GRAPHICAL PROCESS UNDER SECURITY, QUALITY, AND PRODUCTIVITY

Level: 2

Code: UC0200_2

Professional Realizations and Realization Criteria:

RP 1: Determine the characteristics of the graphical products to establish the appropriate manufacturing process, taking into account the available elements and applicable regulations.

CR 1.1 Graphic products are identified from the data provided by the originals, sketches and models, in response to the established technical specifications.

CR 1.2 The specifications on the graphic product to be performed are valued by identifying their typology and functional and communicative characteristics-product use, applicable regulations and others.

CR 1.3 The functional and technological relationships of the graphic product to be made are established according to its components: stationery, stuchaery, publishing, advertising, and others.

CR 1.4 The phases required for the reproduction of the graphic product: preprint, binding printing and finishes, are set from their specifications, introducing the data into the workflow.

RP 2: Perform the standardization of the production parameters in the workflows for each phase of the graphical product, according to the specifications set.

CR 2.1 The production phases in the graphical process are determined by specifying each of the elements involved in the process: technical parameters, product typology, and others.

CR 2.2 Production parameters are standardized in the workflow according to the typology of the graphic product: packaging, editorial product, billboard and others, following established procedures.

CR 2.3 The parameters and manufacturing elements of the graphic product at different stages of the process: preprint, printing, binding and transformed, are checked according to the technical specifications.

CR 2.4 The productive environment in each of the phases of the graphical process is determined from the established technical specifications.

CR 2.5 Graphic process tracking is done through workflows by facilitating planning, automation, procedures, and other factors that affect the production environment.

CR 2.6 The incidents that arise in the process are recorded in the workflow following established procedures to take the necessary corrective and preventive measures.

RP 3: Verify quality parameters in the process using specific equipment to obtain the product with the established standards.

CR 3.1 The most significant quality features in each of the phases of the process are identified according to established variables and attributes.

CR 3.2 The graphical product in process is checked, verifying that it complies with the fundamental concepts of quality in the different phases of its manufacturing according to the established standards and standards.

CR 3.3 Quality procedures at each stage of the manufacturing process of the graphic product are applied methodically according to the technical specifications of the product, using the specific measurement equipment.

CR 3.4 Control frequencies are applied according to the type of characteristics to be controlled and the number of product units to be obtained, following established procedures.

CR 3.5 The results and incidences of the quality control of the graphical product are recorded using the corresponding control sheets by entering them into the workflow.

CR 3.6 Quality verification in the graphical process is carried out in compliance with applicable labour and environmental risk prevention regulations.

Professional Context:

Production media:

Specific computers and software. Digital printer. Standards of communication. Workflows. Normalized light pupitre. Measurement and control tools and tools: densitometer, tipometer, odometer, colorimeter and spectrophotometer.

Products and results:

Production parameters entered into the workflow. Recorded quality control incidents. Completed control sheets. Failures or defects in the registered processes. Quality parameters identified throughout the graphical process.

Information used or generated:

Production order. Technical documentation of preprint, printing and post-pressure equipment and machines. Applicable rules for the prevention of occupational and environmental risks. Quality standards and standards to be applied in the graphical process. Technical equipment sheets. Maintenance manuals. Company quality control plans.

COMPETITION UNIT 2: INTERPRET AND MANAGE DIGITAL INFORMATION NEEDED FOR DIGITAL PRODUCT PRINTING

Level: 2

Code: UC0482_2

Professional Realizations and Realization Criteria:

RP 1: Receiving and checking the digital information and technical specifications of the graphical product for further processing, using the appropriate IT applications.

CR 1.1 Digital files that contain the information to be printed are received, applying the rules set for the process.

CR 1.2 Digital files that contain the information to be printed are protected by backing up the file according to the established procedures.

CR 1.3 The content of the digital information and the technical specifications received: posters, brochures, stanchery, and others are checked by checking that they correspond to the work to be done.

CR 1.4 Digital files are treated, avoiding to casually alter their content.

CR 1.5 Digital information: fonts images and others, are collated by checking that it corresponds to the technical specifications of the work order.

CR 1.6 Data relating to dimensional specifications, tonal changes and output characteristics of the image-resolution, plot, linearature and others-suitable formats-TIFF, EPS, PDF and others-are obtained from the order of production by setting the parameters in relation to the characteristics of the process.

RP 2: Perform the treatment and correction of digital information for validation, using the appropriate IT applications.

CR 2.1 Digital files are opened using specific computer applications.

CR 2.2 The computer format and image color model are selected based on the treatment program to be used and the technical specifications.

CR 2.3 The fonts and their activation are valued, checking them by visual observation on the screen.

CR 2.4 The location and characteristics of digital images: resolutions, color modes and file format, are verified by visual observation methods or by contrast with printed test, correcting them if applicable according to the technical specifications established.

CR 2.5 The database is nested in the document to be printed using the appropriate software based on the variable data printing specified by the client.

CR 2.6 The imposition of the required works is carried out with the specific digital documents assuring the married of the document when printing face and back 'duplex' and the application of all the specifications as to trepids, cut lines, and others.

CR 2.7 The corrected digital files are saved using the specific computer applications.

RP 3: Adjust all the elements involved in the process using specific computer programs to maintain the job parameters within the established quality plans.

CR 3.1 The parameters of the collection and scanning equipment are introduced, adjusted and regulated by specific software.

CR 3.2 The compatibility between software is checked by a pre-check, verifying that the validated digital files are compatible with the control and management software of the printing device.

CR 3.3 The image collection and scanning system is calibrated according to established patterns and patterns.

CR 3.4 The operational status of equipment, tools, instruments, and materials is maintained through the plan of the set.

CR 3.5 Employee process, control, and maintenance documents are formalized according to the proper use of specific terminology and lexical.

RP 4: Send digital information to print devices to start printing, using the appropriate computer applications.

CR 4.1 The final digital information is checked, opening the validated digital files, sending them to the digital file queues to be printed, taking into account the machine control and management software.

CR 4.2 The parameters and technical characteristics of the form are introduced into the system, taking into account the type of printing technology available.

CR 4.3 Digital files are sent to the Rip of the printing device according to the requirements of the graphic product, using the specific computer applications.

CR 4.4 Digital file queues to be printed are controlled by the output device management and control software by securing a required workflow.

RP 5: Control the digital system for optimal use, according to established processes.

CR 5.1 The work activities on the printing team are organized with efficiency criteria from the production order.

CR 5.2 Data for the calibration of the digital system are introduced using the required software.

CR 5.3 Digital system correction parameters are performed on specific programs.

CR 5.4 The status and quality of operation of the digital system is checked by test, according to the company's maintenance plan.

Professional Context:

Production media:

Computer equipment, collection and scanning equipment. Text processing software. Image processing software. Layout software. Printers and test systems. Control strips. Plotter. Drives. Print servers.

Products and results:

Files received, optimized for processing or playback in digital printing. Digital information treated. Control and maintenance documentation.

Information used or generated:

Technical equipment documentation, file management manuals, color management, client style book. User manuals. Work order. Applicable rules for the prevention of occupational and environmental risks.

COMPETITION UNIT 3: PREPARE TEAMS, ADJUST PARAMETERS, AND PERFORM DIGITAL PRINTING

Level: 2

Code: UC0483_2

Professional Realizations and Realization Criteria:

RP 1: Prepare the media to be printed to power the digital printing machine so that continuity in the print run is guaranteed.

CR 1.1 The cellulosic and non-cellulosic supports to be used in digital printing are checked by verifying their physicochemical structure and their characteristics in relation to the production order.

CR 1.2 The surface finish (mate, brightness, offset, and others) and the color of the print support is checked, valuing that they correspond to the job specifications.

CR 1.3 The quantity and quality of the print media is verified by checking that it corresponds to the production order.

CR 1.4 The print media is transported from the warehouse to the machine, following the company's protocols and established security rules.

CR 1.5 Print support is manipulated and treated according to established working methods, which ensure your input and pass through the machine.

CR 1.6 The stack and the stored support conditions are controlled periodically by applying the established control plan and checking their good status according to the company's quality plans.

CR 1.7 Print support is identified using appropriate signage, maintaining their traceability through the process.

RP 2: Prepare the visualizing elements: inks, toners and additives, to obtain the tones and other physico-chemical characteristics according to the specifications, samples and supports to be printed.

CR 2.1 The visualizing elements-inks, toners, and others-are chosen according to the needs of the work, taking into account the compatibility with the available technology, the machine, the type of support and the finish.

CR 2.2 The physico-chemical properties of the visualizing elements: density, conductivity and temperature and others, are adapted to the production needs, using the established methods and the appropriate operations.

CR 2.3 The required colors are obtained by controlling the densitometric and colorimetric responses in the control images and strips, according to the established standards.

CR 2.4 Visualizing and additive elements are stored in dry place and with controlled humidity, complying with applicable regulations on the prevention of occupational and environmental risks.

RP 3: Preparing equipment and regulating the start-up mechanisms for digital printing, according to the technical orders, the work to be done and the materials to be used.

CR 3.1 The device power system: squads, rear stop, and transport elements are prepared by manually adjusting them to the format of the media to be printed.

CR 3.2 The elements of the manual recording of the device are prepared according to the needs of the material used.

CR 3.3 Paper power, output, and pressure elements are regulated by specific handlers by adjusting them according to the job's characteristics.

CR 3.4 The cutting mechanisms of the material blades and pressure are adjusted, adapting them to the needs of the support to be used.

CR 3.5 Deposits with displayable elements and additives are controlled, by checking their level of visual or through print management software, according to the established control plan.

CR 3.6 The anomalies that arise during the start of the printing device: movements in the media, mismatches in the amount of tint/toner, and others, are corrected until the printing parameters are reached required.

CR 3.7 Adjustments are made in compliance with applicable labour and environmental risk prevention standards.

RP 4: Get the printed product by making digital printing according to the specifications set.

CR 4.1 The first printed sheets are checked by checking: type of media, size, colors, and others, depending on the characteristics specified in the production order.

CR 4.2 The tonalities of the first printed sheets are controlled, checking the tones and the absence of defects.

CR 4.3 Process control is performed by looking at possible printing defects based on samples, patterns, normalized tables, and technical specifications.

CR 4.4 Process variables are modified, based on the assessment and results of the first printed sheets.

CR 4.5 Correction and adjustment are performed on the elements and mechanisms of power, image formation and chromatic correction of the machine.

CR 4.6 The correction and adjustment of the materials is performed by modifying the physicochemical characteristics of the display elements and manipulations of the support.

CR 4.7 The modification of the chromatic values is done by choosing preset parameters in the machine software or by acting on the color management system.

CR 4.8 The loss of intensity of the determining elements of the imaging of the images are controlled, making their change as appropriate.

RP 5: Control quality in the digital printing process by taking printed samples, applying the established methods.

CR 5.1 The sampling of the printed graphic product is carried out on a regular basis using the company's quality procedures.

CR 5.2 The quality control of the process is performed according to the established working method, both in terms of the characteristics to be controlled and the way it is performed and its periodicity.

CR 5.3 Display of samples is performed under standard lighting conditions.

CR 5.4 The control of the quality parameters of the form: intonation, adjustment, and others, is carried out by visual observation in the standardized light pupil and/or with specific equipment under standard lighting conditions.

CR 5.5 The supply of the materials is controlled according to the established procedure by ensuring a sufficient quantity, to avoid unwanted mixtures and to achieve a uniform quality during the run.

CR 5.6 Print parameters such as: tonality, image adjustment, and others remain constant according to the specifications established using the normalized light pupitre, the spectrophotometer and the tell them.

RP 6: Make, where appropriate, the simple online manipulated in compact digital printing equipment to obtain the graphic product, according to the established specifications.

CR 6.1 Production data relating to the online manipulated in the compact digital printing machine: folding, stapling and other, are introduced into the control panels by adjusting the parameters according to the instructions of the job.

CR 6.2 The online processing of printed pages is checked by checking that it conforms to the characteristics specified in the production order.

CR 6.3 The online folding process for printed pages is checked by checking that it conforms to features specified in the production order.

CR 6.4 The standard form of the printed document on digital printing compacts is checked, checking the correct order of the pages, in relation to the foliation of the original and/or model.

CR 6.5 Graphic document binding is performed according to job specifications.

CR 6.6 The variables of the online manipulated process are modified according to the assessment and results of the first printed copy to meet the specifications.

RP 7: Fulfill production parts for work confirmation done with incident, quality, and productivity data.

CR 7.1 The results of the self-control are available in the control sheets, indicating the incidents for analysis.

CR 7.2 The production parts are completed to check the concordance between the specified and the obtained productivity.

CR 7.3 The data in the production parts is recorded informally, according to the subsequent analyses to be performed.

RP 8: Perform first-level cleaning and maintenance jobs by checking the security systems to keep the digital printing machine to a point according to established procedures.

CR 8.1 The security devices of the digital printing machine are reviewed by checking their correct operation, following the established procedures.

CR 8.2 The periodic greasing of the grease points on the machine is done by following the machine manufacturer's instructions and the established procedures.

CR 8.3 The operation of the circuits and filters is verified by performing specific checks, according to the established maintenance rules.

CR 8.4 The items on the machines must have the cleaning levels set in the maintenance regulations.

CR 8.5 The housing of the contents of the visualizing elements-inks, toners, and others-are cleaned according to the established procedures.

CR 8.6 Leftover inks and toners are stored following applicable waste disposal regulations.

Professional Context:

Production media:

Digital printing machine, normalized light pupitre. Densitometer, colorimeter, pHmeter, spectrophotometer, conductmeter, specification readers.

Products and results:

Printed media: stationery, cartelery, stanchery, advertising, ornamentation, books and publishing in general. First level maintenance.

Information used or generated:

Production order, authorized samples, technical documentation of digital printing equipment and machines, applicable regulations for the prevention of occupational and environmental risks. Quality standards and standards. Preventive maintenance plan. Control plan. Letters of color.

FORMATIVE MODULE 1: PROCESSES IN GRAPHIC ARTS

Level: 2

Code: MF0200_2

Associated with UC: Operate in the graphical process under security, quality, and productivity

Duration: 120 hours

Assessment capabilities and criteria:

C1: Analyze the entire graphical process and its different phases: preprint, binding and transformed printing, considering the communication between them using standardization models.

CE1.1 Explain the characteristics and type configuration of graphic arts companies according to the production phase: preprint, print, binding, transformed.

CE1.2 In a defined production environment, describe through workflows the sequence of tasks or operations for obtaining the product.

CE1.3 Analyze, from the design point of view, the characteristics of a given graphical product:

-Formats and measures.

-Typology.

-Colors.

-Media.

-Encuadernation and finish.

CE1.4 In a practical scenario of producing a given graphic product, relate and sequence the different preprint phases that have been involved in its elaboration:

-Text: body, family, style, paragraph, interline.

-Trams: line, point shape, and angulation.

-Color separation.

-Plot and paging systems used.

CE1.5 In a practical scenario of crafting a given graphical product, describe and recognize the characteristics of the printing system used according to:

-Type of media used.

-Tintas: classes and layers.

-Tramado.

-Profile of the characters.

-Footprint or relief on the media.

-Effects on printing.

-Number of passes on machines.

CE1.6 Analyze the different preprint, printing and binding and finishing systems, describing and relating their main phases to the machines, equipment, raw materials and products used.

CE1.7 Describe the most significant print electronic systems.

CE1.8 Describe and recognize the characteristics of the post-pressure process for the elaboration of a type graphic product according to the defined process and the materials used.

C2: Classify graphic products according to their composition and functional characteristics: stationery, carpeting, stanchery, editing and advertising.

CE2.1 Explain the functional characteristics of the different graphic products: Stationery, Carpet, Stucery, Editing and Advertising.

CE2.2 Identify the structural characteristics of the different graphic products: Stationery, Carpet, Stucery, Editing and Advertising.

CE2.3 From graphic product samples:

-Recognize its physicochemical composition and identify its functional capacity.

-Rate the communicative and functional capacity of the different graphic products.

-Classify the samples of proposed graphic products according to their nature and functionality: stationery, carpeting, stanchery, editing and advertising.

C3: Recognize and analyze color metrics and metrics used in graphic arts.

CE3.1 Identify chromatic spaces: RGB, CMYK, HSB, CIE Lab, used in graphic arts.

CE3.2 Describe the measurement equipment used in the color measurement: colorimeter, glitter, spectrophotometer, identifying the application of each of them.

CE3.3 Describe the various lighting sources, color temperature, and observation conditions to reproduce color under standardized conditions.

CE3.4 In a practical scenario of color measurement and from different samples of color originals:

-Identify color parameters: brightness, saturation, tone, and metamery index.

-Represent colorimetric values in chromatic spaces.

-Evaluate color differences and their ability to play in the graphical system.

-Make measurements of color variables with the colorimeter and the electrometer over different color samples indicating the readings in a template.

C4: Relating applicable labour and environmental risk prevention rules in the graphical process with the operations that are developed in each of its phases.

CE4.1 Recognize applicable labor and environmental risk prevention regulations in the graphical process.

CE4.2 Identify the security elements to be installed in the different places and risk teams in the graphical industries.

CE4.3 Using practical examples, identify the security labels that appear on the machines and products used in the graphical process.

CE4.4 Describe and relate the rules applicable to the prevention of occupational and environmental risks, with the different phases of the graphical process.

CE4.5 Recognize the environmental documents and procedures applied in the graphical process.

C5: Analyze the quality control process in a graphical arts 'process'.

CE5.1 Identify the fundamental phases and concepts of quality control in manufacturing in the graphic arts industries.

CE5.2 Describe a raw material receipt control process succinctly.

CE5.3 Describe the instruments used in quality control: densitometres, colorimeters, control strips and production line control devices, identifying their application in the different phases of the graphical process.

CE5.4 Perform densitometric and colorimetric measurements from a preprint test, and from certain print standards, by assessing that the color range reproduction is consistent with the set standards.

CE5.5 In a scenario of quality control in print processing, from a printed product, and established standards:

-Select the required measurement instrument.

-Perform metering instrument calibration.

-Perform densitometric, colorimetric, 'trapping', sliding, and gray balance measurements.

-Set the chromatic space.

-Perform different measures on the control strip.

-Check the setting with the set standards.

CE5.6 In a practical scenario of quality control in the process of transformed, from a graphical product to be bound and/or manipulate, identify and evaluate the defects detected in:

-Format and margins.

-Cutting marks.

-Log tokens.

-Signatures.

-Fibre sense.

-Repainted.

-Troquels.

CE5.7 Describe the most significant quality features of the products:

-Encuaderation and manipulated: subjective assessment, cut marks, tracks, log signals, collared.

-Resistance to folding.

-Resistance to rub.

-Printing: density, 'trapping', stamping gain, color balance, pasting, sliding, logging.

-Preprint: tests, standards.

Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real workbench:

C1 with respect to CE1.3, CE1.4 and CE1.5; C3 with respect to CE3.4; C5 with respect to CE5.4, CE5.5 and CE5.6.

Other capabilities:

Take responsibility for the work you are developing.

Demonstrate some autonomy in solving small contingencies related to their activity.

Respect internal company procedures and rules.

Maintain an assertive, empathetic and conciliatory attitude to others by demonstrating cordiality and kindness in dealing.

Recognize the organization's productive process.

Participate and actively collaborate on the work team.

Contents:

1. Graphical process

Types of graphic products.

Company types: organization and structure.

Standardization and communication models. Workflows.

Preprint systems. Classes of originals. Latent image, revealed process. Matching the digital workflow environment.

Input peripherals, output peripherals, specific software and hardware, processing and test systems.

Plotting and mounting. Elements of the assembly. Specific software.

Print systems. Equipment, capabilities, comparison of different systems.

Types of inks and media for each print system.

Encuaderation and transformed. Classes. Benefits. Teams. Features.

Paper and paperboard manipulated. Manipulated from other materials.

2. Color and its measurement

Nature of light.

Electromagnetic spectrum.

Philosophy of vision.

Chromatic Space.

Factors that affect color perception.

Color Theory. Additive and subtractive synthesis of color.

Color rendering systems: MUNSELL, RGB, HSL, HSV, PANTONE, CIE, CIE-Lab, GAFT.

Color measurement instruments: densitometres, colorimeters, glinometers, and spectrophotometers. Color assessment.

3. Standards for the prevention of labour and environmental risks applicable to graphic arts processes

Safety plans and rules.

Rules in force.

Signals and alarms.

Environmental regulations.

4. Quality in graphic arts processes

More characteristic tests, instruments and measurements.

Preprint quality: point gain, gray balance, and density.

Print variables (print density, contrast, penetration, fixed, stamping gain, color and gray balance).

Control areas in print. Measurement.

Quality in post-pressure.

Visual control of binding and manipulated.

Checking for bound and manipulated defects.

Standardization of quality.

5. Quality control in graphic arts

Quality in manufacturing.

Quality control. Concepts involved.

Control elements.

Control Phases: receipt of materials, processes, and products.

Rules and standards for the graphical process.

Training context parameters:

Spaces and installations:

The spaces and facilities will provide a response, in the form of a classroom, a workshop, a workshop of practices, a laboratory or a singular space, to the training needs, according to the Professional Context established in the Unit Partner competence, taking into account the applicable regulations of the production sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.

Professional or former trainer profile:

1. Domain of knowledge and techniques related to production operations in the graphical process under conditions of safety, quality and productivity, which will be accredited by one of the following two forms:

-Level 2 academic training (Spanish Framework of Qualifications for Higher Education), Technical Engineering, Technical Architecture, Diplomacy or other higher level of professional field.

-Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.

2. Accredited pedagogical competence in accordance with what is established by the competent administrations.

TRAINING MODULE 2: PREPARING FILES FOR DIGITAL PRINTING

Level: 2

Code: MF0482_2

Associated with UC: Interpreting and managing digital information needed for digital product printing

Duration: 120 hours

Assessment capabilities and criteria:

C1: Apply the required methods of receiving digital information, determining the appropriate software for checking the content and technical specifications.

CE1.1 Interpret the established methods and rules for receiving the most used originals in digital printing.

CE1.2 Interpret established methods and standards for the protection of digital information.

CE1.3 In a practical scenario of receiving files for printing and from different fonts and images control:

-Type fonts, checking that they are all and that there is no repeat.

-Image files: same file names, avoid duplicate files, file formats appropriate: TIFF, EPS, PDF and others, resolution, plot, linearature, mode and color profiles, non-alpha channels, grayscale, line, bittones.

-Information storage media: CDs, DVDs, Zip drive, magneto-optical disks, floppy disks, external hard drives, among others.

CE1.4 Verify that the contents of digital files correspond to the technical specifications of the graphic product:

-fonts and text fonts.

-Image files: appropriate file formats: TIFF, EPS, PDF and others, resolution, plot, linearature, mode and color profiles, in grayscale, line, bittones.

CE1.5 In a scenario of testing digital originals, based on a given technical specification:

-Treat digital files by using methods that do not affect their content.

-visually contrast the contents of digital files with technical specifications.

-Attach the different characteristics of the images to the interpretation of the order of manufacture (appropriate file formats: TIFF, EPS, PDF and others, resolution, plot, linearature, mode and color profiles, in grayscale, line, bittones).

C2: Determine the methods of processing digital information, using the software appropriate to the needs of the process.

CE2.1 Identify the specific computer programs and programs required to address graphic digital information.

CE2.2 Interpret the operation and characteristics of computer equipment and software from the interpretation of technical documentation and user manuals.

CE2.3 In a practical scenario of evaluating software for the display of digital graphics, from given technical specifications, choose the appropriate software that allows us to value, in contrast to the technical specifications, typographical sources, correct location of the images and their digital characteristics, for the treatment and choice of corrective measures, if applicable:

-Software for text display.

-Software for viewing images.

-Software for the display of model pages.

-Software for the management of workflows: pre-checkup, RIPs, digital tests.

CE2.4 Determine the causes that motivate deviations from the characteristics of digital images, in relation to the process followed, to take timely corrective measures that allow us to obtain the quality specified in a given work order.

CE2.5 In a practical scenario of image processing for your adjustment to the digital process, from different files:

-Identify the computer format and color characteristics of the images to suit the technical specifications, using the appropriate software.

-Set the appropriate file formats: TIFF, EPS, PDF, and others.

-Optimize image parameters in relation to the needs of digital printing: resolution, frame, linearature, mode and color profiles, in grayscale, line.

-Store optimized digital files, using the appropriate software available to ensure the unalterability of content.

C3: Rate the computer applications associated with the different digital printing systems to send the digital files to print, according to process requirements.

CE3.1 Recognize the most appropriate software to the content of the digital file for submission to the digital printing machine.

CE3.2 In a practical simulation of file preparation to send to print on digital machine, from text and image files:

-Select appropriate software to allow the opening of validated digital files for the introduction of parameters and technical features in the digital printing system: text processing software, software for image processing, software for layout, software to determine print parameters.

CE3.3 In a practical case of managing print queues, from a graphical product to obtain:

-Rate the conditions of the graphic product to be obtained and the appropriate workflow according to the job to be performed.

-Perform control of workflow management: PDF files, color management using ICC profiles, prior review, normalization, RIPs, digital tests, digital printing output.

-Use the required software in each case.

C4: Rate the different direct and indirect digital printing systems to optimize their use, in relation to the type of support to be printed and the graphic product to be achieved, according to technical specifications.

CE4.1 Acknowledge and the operation of digital printing systems according to image transfer mode:

-Direct.

-Indirect.

-With impact.

-No impact.

CE4.2 Relating the current digital print systems with different media to print, and the type graphics products.

CE4.3 In a scenario of evaluating different digital printing systems, from a given media:

-Set digital system calibration for media

-Relating the print quality of support to different digital print systems.

-Contrast the relationship between the display elements/support type and determine the most appropriate.

Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real workbench:

C1 with respect to CE1.3 and CE1.5; C2 with respect to CE2.3 and CE2.5; C3 with respect to CE3.3; C4 with respect to CE4.3.

Other capabilities:

Take responsibility for the work you are developing.

Habit to the business pace of the business.

Respect internal company procedures and rules.

Adapt to organization, organizational and technological changes as well as new situations or contexts.

Communicate effectively with the right people at every moment, respecting the channels established in the organization.

Interpret and execute work instructions.

Contents:

1. Receiving files

Methods. Standards. Protection.

Image files: graphic formats in computer support, graphic compression, resolution, frames, linearature, and color profiles.

Graphical Tools.

Text files: fonts, text formats. Tools.

Media for information.

2. Treatment of information

Teams: classes, types, features, and operation.

Viewing files.

Software for image processing.

Software for word processing.

Imposing software for display of the layout.

Color management software.

Software for managing workflows.

Pre-Check, RIPs and Digital Tests. Types.

Print queues.

3. Digital printing processes

Classification. Operation.

Transfer of the image.

Display items: inks, toners.

Media: classes, nature, and behavior.

Types of graphic products.

Training context parameters:

Spaces and installations:

The spaces and facilities will provide a response, in the form of a classroom, a workshop, a workshop of practices, a laboratory or a singular space, to the training needs, according to the Professional Context established in the Unit Partner competence, taking into account the applicable regulations of the production sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.

Professional or former trainer profile:

1. Domain of knowledge and techniques related to the interpretation and management of digital information required for the printing of the digital product, which will be accredited by one of the following two forms:

-Level 1 academic training (Spanish Framework of Qualifications for Higher Education) or other higher level education related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.

2. Accredited pedagogical competence in accordance with what is established by the competent administrations.

TRAINING MODULE 3: PRINTING WITH DIGITAL DEVICES

Level: 2

Code: MF0483_2

Associated with UC: Prepare teams, adjust parameters, and perform digital printing

Duration: 270 hours

Assessment capabilities and criteria:

C1: Recognize and analyze the main properties and characteristics of raw materials and ancillary products in different laboratory practices, using the appropriate instruments.

CE1.1 Recognize and describe the characteristics of the structure of paper and non-paper media: paper, cardboard, cardboard, textile, metal, wood, glass, synthetic, acrylic, vinyl and other supports.

CE1.2 Recognize and describe the main characteristics and physical and chemical properties of the media, expressing it in their corresponding units.

CE1.3 Characterize the main defects and alterations of the various media used in digital printing.

CE1.4 Describe the main pigments, oils, solvents, and varnishes related to inks and toners.

CE1.5 Relating the various display elements in relation to support, digital printing systems, and post-pressure processes.

CE1.6 Relating the properties of materials with the requirements of behaviors in different processes.

CE1.7 Test in the laboratory of mixtures and conditioning of the raw materials, according to the parameters established with respect to the current regulations of safety and environment, verifying that the result is previewed using the appropriate instruments.

CE1.8 Identify the risks and level of danger posed by the manipulation of the various materials and products used in digital printing.

C2: To value, through the appropriate measuring instruments, the quality variables of the raw materials-supports and visualizing elements-used in the digital printing.

CE2.1 Identify the physicochemical properties of the different visualizing elements used in digital printing.

CE2.2 Relating the durability and behavior of the various digital printing products-supports and visualizing elements-with the alterations they suffer, due to: humidity, temperature, composition, oxidation, exposure to light and mechanical stress.

CE2.3 In a practical assessment of the quality of raw materials, from different measuring equipment:

-Perform support measurements with the appropriate instruments (hygrometer, precision scales, densitometer, colorimeter, spectrophotometer, and others).

-Check the characteristics of the display elements by using viscosimeter, densitometer, thermometers, and others.

-Rate the quality of raw materials and correctly express the results of the measures.

-Determine optimal storage conditions for raw materials.

C3: Perform operations for the tuning of major digital printing machines and machines.

CE3.1 Describe the different direct and indirect digital printing systems that are currently used.

CE3.2 Describe the different mechanisms for imaging according to the type of digital printing machine.

CE3.3 Describe and relate power mechanisms, support recording, transport and output on different digital printing machines.

CE3.4 Analyze the regulatory operations required for printing digital printing, depending on the type of machine: electrostatic charge, light sources, temperature, conductivity, and others.

CE3.5 Recognize and define the structure and composition of the image drum and the different injection heads in the different digital printing machines.

CE3.6 Explain the different methods of checking and regulating on digital printing machines, from:

-Light sources.

-Conductivity.

-Eninking systems.

-Pressure atmospheres.

-Clear drive.

-Cleaning unit.

-Temperature and pressure of the fixing systems.

CE3.7 In a practical scenario of adjusting a digital machine, from a work order conveniently characterized, regulate the mechanisms of:

-Marker device (power head, mark-table elements, height and side heels).

-Repower, transport, and receive system.

-Eninking capacity.

-Pressure of the cylinders and temperature for the set.

CE3.8 In a scenario of maintaining digital machines, from the machine's maintenance tab:

-Identify the items to be maintained.

-Define the appropriate first-level maintenance plan for the digital print machine.

-methodically perform maintenance operations: greasing, dry grease cleaning, cleaning of paper dust debris, toners powder, ink and oil deposit cleaning, following instructions from the manufacturer.

-methodically perform the cleaning of the machine in compliance with applicable labor and environmental risk prevention regulations.

-Relate the cleaning products of the machine with the corresponding environmental regulations, considering the substitutes for the products traditionally used to adapt to such regulations.

C4: Operate with the main digital printing machines to perform the print run and achieve the required quality.

CE4.1 Identify the appropriate way to dispose of materials on machines, in order to obtain optimal results and times.

CE4.2 Describe the printing system's own defects and those relating to registration, color, and intonation.

CE4.3 Relate the characteristic defects that are affected by the transport of the printed form during a digital printing process: repainted, the resistance to the rub and the scratch.

CE4.4 In a scenario of setting up digital printing machine elements, from a type job to print:

-Relate the causes and effects of the readjustment of the printed parameters.

-Actioning manually or using computerized equipment, on the mechanical elements of the recording, inking, pressure and regulation of the feeding apparatus, adjusting them to the needs.

-Identify the print order of the appropriate colors based on the job type.

CE4.5 In a scenario of digital printing, from an original and preprint tests:

-Get the print with the required quality in relation to the original.

-Compare the print with preprint, digital or chemical tests, readjusting the printing parameters: pressure, intonation, registration, to bring the results closer to the tests.

-Relate the machines and raw materials used with the print speed of the print run, according to the printed parameters: ink density, print contrast, trapping, stamping gain.

C5: Relate the measurement of process quality variables and digital print products using the appropriate instruments.

CE5.1 Describe the method and frequency of obtaining printed samples during a digital print run.

CE5.2 Differentiate and describe the characteristics and functioning of the measuring instruments used for quality control in digital printing.

CE5.3 Perform measurement on printed sheets of various parameters such as density, stamping gain, print contrast, trapping, tone error, gray content, rub resistance, light resistance, printability of the support, image displacement, temperature and conductivity, using the appropriate instruments and expressing the result of the measurement in the units and appropriate form.

CE5.4 Describe the influence of the lighting conditions (color temperature, illumination angle) of the colors of the adjacent surfaces, of the characteristics of the surface of the support (opacity, brightness, degree of The lilness and porosity) of the penetration and the drying for the measurement of the colour.

CE5.5 In a practical scenario of a process of measuring quality variables in digital printing, from a printed test:

-Relate the different elements involved in a control strip with the deviation of the required quality parameters.

-Identify, describe, and, where appropriate, represent defects to be controlled during the run.

-Relate the graphs resulting from the measurements: density, stamping gain, print contrast, trapping, tone error, gray content, image displacements, sliding degree, resistance to the rub, resistance to light, printability of the support, pH, conductivity with the parameters set in the case.

-Identify the control devices to be used.

CE5.6 Identify the risks and level of danger posed by the manipulation of the various materials, products and equipment used in digital printing.

CE5.7 Relate the products and materials used in printing with environmental regulations, considering the substitutes for products traditionally used to adapt to such regulations.

CE5.8 In a scenario of digital printing characterized by the operations to be performed:

-Identify and describe the security mechanisms of printing machines: stop buttons, protections, housings, grids, as well as the means of protection and clothing to be used.

-Describe the security conditions in the preparation and maintenance operations of the machines.

-Establish the safety and security measures to be taken, in accordance with the applicable regulations on the prevention of occupational and environmental risks and the specific instructions of the teams applicable to the different operations.

C6: Operate on the online manipulated bodies on compact digital printing machines, checking the quality of the product.

CE6.1 Identify online manipulated ones that can complete a compact digital printing machine: folding, lump-sum, and others.

CE6.2 Acknowledge through different catalogues of compact digital printing machines, the handling capabilities that are currently the compact groups of the machine.

CE6.3 In a practical scenario of online manipulated, from a compact digital printing machine and working instructions:

-Identify the manipulated to be performed from the given instructions.

-Enter the job parameters in the control panel.

-Check the lump-sum, funnel, stapling, and other process, according to the work instructions.

C7: Analyze occupational and environmental risk prevention plans and relevant applicable regulations to correctly use media, equipment, and materials in digital printing.

CE7.1 Relate and describe the rules regarding cleaning and order of the work environment in digital printing.

CE7.2 Describe the properties and uses of the most employed personal protective clothing and equipment in the graphic industry for the realization of digital printing.

CE7.3 Identify and describe rules for stopping and manipulating digital printing systems and machines.

CE7.4 Relating the materials used in digital printing with environmental regulations, considering the substitutes for the products used.

CE7.5 In a practical scenario of assessing security in digital printing, based on a number of occupational and environmental risk prevention plans for companies in the sector:

-Identify and describe the most relevant aspects of each plan, collected in the documentation that contains it.

-Identify and describe risk factors and situations for health and safety in plans related to that activity.

-Relate and describe the appropriate preventive measures and prevention methods established to prevent accidents.

Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real workbench:

C1 with respect to CE1.7; C2 with respect to CE2.3; C3 with respect to CE3.7 and CE3.8; C4 with respect to CE4.4 and CE4.5; C5 for CE5.5 and CE5.8; C6 for CE6.3; C7 for CE7.5; C7 for CE7.5.

Other capabilities:

Take responsibility for the work you are developing.

Comply with the correct production rules.

Respect internal company procedures and rules.

Recognize the organization's productive process.

Communicate effectively with the right people at every moment, respecting the channels established in the organization.

Prove a good professional.

Contents:

1. Digital printing processes

Print procedures.

Types of technologies.

Operations. Control parameters.

Printing Machines: Plims, coil, and others.

Main parts: features, structures, and types.

Applicable labour and environmental risk prevention regulations.

Protective measures.

2. Preparing and tuning equipment for digital printing

Feeder apparatus.

Placeholder, transport, and output of pliegos or coil.

Parties: mechanisms and regulation.

Printer body: cylinders, coatings, and injectors.

Inter group: inking, throttling, and control types of the inking.

Dynamic printer shapes: Image cylinder coatings, manufacturing, assembly, treatment and conservation.

Measuring Devices.

Machine regulation problems. Solutions.

Safety standards for machines, installations, and materials.

3. Media used in digital printing

Stationery: cardboard, paper, and others.

Non-paper media: plastic, metal, fabric, wood, glass, and others.

Material control. Defects and alterations.

Measurement equipment: hygrometer, precision balance and others.

Storage conditions.

4. Displaying elements: inks, toner, and others

Inks. Types. Features.

Toner. Types. Features.

Color Mix. Special colors.

Measurement equipment: viscosimeter, densitometer, and others.

Oils. Solvents. Varnishes.

Storage conditions.

5. The print run on digital

Manual or electronic readjustment of the mechanical dosage elements: inking and other.

Record the image on the media.

Review of the form. Readjusting the parameters of the form.

The speed of the machine. Raw materials and speed ratio.

Defects in digital printing. Cause/correction.

Printing and color of print: print sequence and others.

Checking the print with preprint tests.

Factors and situations of risk.

Personal protection equipment.

Applicable labour and environmental risk prevention regulations.

6. Quality control during the run

Software and computer equipment for monitoring the quality of the print. Applications.

Equipment for the control of the form: structure, characteristics and measurements.

Elements for control: control strips, side witness, and control areas.

Criteria to be followed in the quality control of the digital form, conditions in the control process, color temperature, lighting and observation angle.

Print control process: record, mass density, tonal value, stamping gain, print contrast, trapping, tone error, and gray content.

Control of the finished form: ink behavior on the media.

Media printability conditions.

Guidelines for the inspection of the form: sampling, reliability and measurement.

Digital print quality standards.

7. Compact machines. Online manipulated

Machine types. Features.

Manipulated working in line with digital printing.

Product Typology.

Control parameters.

Quality in the process and product.

8. Maintenance operations

Top-level maintenance.

Lubricants: oils, fats.

Cleaning sequence in digital printing equipment.

Solvents: organic and inorganic.

Applicable rules on the prevention of occupational risks and environmental protection.

Training context parameters:

Spaces and installations:

The spaces and facilities will provide a response, in the form of a classroom, a workshop, a workshop of practices, a laboratory or a singular space, to the training needs, according to the Professional Context established in the Unit Partner competence, taking into account the applicable regulations of the production sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.

Professional or former trainer profile:

1. Domain of knowledge and techniques related to the preparation of equipment, adjustment of parameters and realization of digital printing, which will be accredited by one of the following two forms:

-Level 1 academic training (Spanish Framework of Qualifications for Higher Education) or other higher level education related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.

2. Accredited pedagogical competence in accordance with what is established by the competent administrations.

ANNEX IV

Professional qualification: Calcographic and xylographic recording

Professional Family: Graphic Arts

Level: 2

Code: ARG216_2

General Competition

Record matrices in calcography and in xylography by preparing or starting from previous sketches and performing state tests, to obtain stampings in hollow or in relief, operating under conditions of safety and quality.

Competition Units

UC0687_2: Develop and interpret sketches for graphic work

UC0688_2: Write to xylography

UC0689_2: Record in Calcography

UC0690_2: Stampy and in relief

Professional Environment

Professional Scope

Develops its professional activity in the area of engraving and stamping in workshops dedicated to the creation of graphic work, in companies of public or private nature large, medium and small, both self-employed or and depending on your case, functional and/or hierarchically of a superior. The principles of universal accessibility are applied in the development of professional activity in accordance with the applicable regulations.

Productive Sectors

It is located in the productive sector of graphic artistic activities, in the subsector related to artistic creation by means of engraving and stamping and in any other sector that has some of these activities.

Relevant occupations and jobs

The terms of the following relationship of occupations and jobs are used with a generic and omnicomprensivo character of women and men.

Calcographic Recorders

Xilographers

Stamppers

Advisors on Calcograph and Xylography Engraving

Engraving Technicians

Print-to-the-water grabbers

Art grabbers to buril and the aguafort

Wood Cliches Recorder

Associated Training (480 hours)

Training Modules

MF0687_2: Expression techniques for graphic work (120 hours)

MF0688_2: Xylographic record (120 hours)

MF0689_2: Calcograph record (120 hours)

MF0690_2: Stamping in hole and in relief (120 hours)

COMPETITION UNIT 1: ELABORATE AND INTERPRET SKETCHES FOR GRAPHIC WORK

Level: 2

Code: UC0687_2

Professional Realizations and Realization Criteria:

RP 1: Select the graphical expression techniques for performing studies and sketches by choosing the most appropriate to engraving and stamping techniques.

CR 1.1 The materials, tools and procedures of graphic expression for the performance of sketches are valued by determining the adequacy of their resources to the techniques of engraving and stamping.

CR 1.2 Graphic expression materials, tools, and procedures are selected according to their nature and the qualities they provide as resources.

CR 1.3 Graphic expression techniques are chosen based on their suitability for the formal and expressive possibilities of engraving and stamping techniques.

RP 2: Develop notes and pre-sketch studies, following successive stages in the construction of the image to establish the basic compositional structure of the sketch.

CR 2.1 The degree of complexity and development of the sketches is established according to the characteristics of the chosen embossing and stamping techniques.

CR 2.2 The sketches are drawn by pointing to the basic shapes collected in general lines and masses.

CR 2.3 The format and dimensions of the work are established, taking into account the relationship between the footprint and the margins of the paper in the stamp that culminates the process.

CR 2.4 The compositional structure is sketched, as a basis for the construction of the image, establishing the centers of attention and the lines of force.

CR 2.5 The studies of the particular parts or aspects of the composition are carried out according to the needs of greater depth or detail in the elaboration of the final draft.

RP 3: Make the final sketch, completing the image construction, to serve as a model in the processes of making the matrices and their stamping.

CR 3.1 Previous stages of the image are collected in the sketch by applying the dimensional and compositional results obtained in the sketches, notes and previous studies.

CR 3.2 The development of the sketch is carried out using conventional graphic techniques and/or by specific computer equipment and software.

CR 3.3 The construction of the image in the sketch is carried out by means of the point and the line applying its constructive, descriptive, expressive, gestural or signic capacities and taking into account the own resources of the techniques of engraving and stamping.

CR 3.4 The color is applied in the sketch by establishing the required relationships between the tonal and chromatic values of the image according to the resources of the determined embossing and stamping techniques.

CR 3.5 The different tones of the image are applied in the development of the sketch by means of frames or by means of stains according to the needs of the established etching and stamping techniques.

CR 3.6 The obtained sketch is adjusted, if any, by making the required changes derived from the needs of the subsequent engraving and stamping process.

RP 4: Determine the visual characteristics of the sketches themselves or others for the graphic work, valuing their formal characteristics, meaning and style in relation to the engraving and stamping processes.

CR 4.1 Own sketches, preparatory to the graphic work, are valued, determining their materic and formal characteristics and choosing the materials, processes and techniques of engraving and stamping to use more like those characteristics.

CR 4.2 The external sketches, preparatory to the graphic work, are analyzed by determining the stylistic contribution of the author and/or the derivative of the different artistic styles applied.

CR 4.3 The sketches are analyzed considering the graphic-plastic proposals and the significant content (signic, representative, conceptual or symbolic) in relation to the engraving and stamping process.

CR 4.4 The style expressed in the sketches is identified by assessing the suitability of the etching or stamping technique to be used, respecting it in the subsequent development of the graphic image.

CR 4.5 The techniques and processes of engraving and stamping are determined, establishing the most appropriate with the needs identified and defined from the formal, meaning and style assessment carried out on the sketches.

RP 5: Get the graphic documents that collect the color selection and the investment of the original image respecting the formal and expressive features of the sketch.

CR 5.1 The investment of the sketches, if any, is carried out by applying the required methods, such as mirror-mode photocopies, inverted calco and others, depending on the type of structure of the composition and the characteristics graphics of the images, in relation to the graphical processes.

CR 5.2 The transfer of the image is performed by applying the required calco methods, respecting the structure of the composition and the formal, meaning and expressive values of the images.

CR 5.3 The image transfer process is controlled by checking that the basic structure and other formal and expressive values of the image conform to the sketch.

CR 5.4 The color selection of the image is performed by applying the methods required according to the nature of the images and the techniques of embossing and stamping determined in such a way that the recording of the images is guaranteed. arrays and the stamping order.

Professional Context:

Production media:

Media: papers, cartons, and fabrics. Materials, tools and tools for dry drawing techniques (graffiti, charcoal, pastels, coloured pencils, composite and fatty pencils); for wet drawing techniques (inks, pens and stylographs, pens, rods and brushes); for water paint techniques (watercolours, temperas, templies); and for solid, oily and mixed paint techniques (encaust, oils and acrylics). Specific computer equipment and software.

Products and results:

Materials for graphic expression: graffiti, charcoal, pastels, pencils, inks, watercolors and others, prepared. Notes, sketches, studies and sketches made. Investment of the sketches. Graphic documents of the color selection of the image.

Information used or generated:

Technical Bibliography, catalogues and monographs of graphic work, catalogues and samples of graphic and plastic material.

COMPETITION UNIT 2: WRITE TO XYLOGRAPHY

Level: 2

Code: UC0688_2

Professional Realizations and Realization Criteria:

RP 1: Prepare the materials, tools and tools for the xylographic engraving by selecting the most appropriate to the engraving techniques and performing the appropriate tests to ensure their correct status.

CR 1.1 The materials to be used: tacos, tables and others, are selected according to the different parameters that condition the size such as the type of wood, the sense of cut, the possible defects of knots or cracks, and/or the qualities of the material to be recorded: consistency, homogeneity, hardness, degree of drying and others.

CR 1.2 Tables and other materials are treated, by cutting, squatting, brushing or other operations, looking for the dimensions and finish required for the carving and stamping work to be developed.

CR 1.3 The tools to be used: blades, gubes, buriles, picks, formons, and all those that are necessary are selected according to the needs of the chosen xylographic technique.

CR 1.4 The tools are prepared by taking particular care of your cutting edge or cutting, applying the grinding and beveling techniques, sharpened and seated.

CR 1.5 The tools for correcting the wear and tear of the tools are arranged according to their shape, quality and needs.

CR 1.6 The quality and suitability of the materials used in the engraving processes are controlled, prior to their use, according to the results sought, carrying out the tests required to assess their characteristics and adjust their usage.

RP 2: Perform the xylographic engraving by applying the techniques of cutting or carving to fiber or embossing using the specific tools and applying the required safety measures.

CR 2.1 The engraving is transferred to the plate by the calco of the sketches on the prepared surface thereof so that the image is displayed on the taco by facilitating the cutting or engraving work.

CR 2.2 The cut or cross-over, and/or the embossing is carried out on the plate according to the character and own resources of these techniques according to the formal and expressive values sought by the recorder or set in the sketches.

CR 2.3 The incisions in the taco and the entallures in the table are performed according to the structure (veins) and other characteristics of the wood worked.

CR 2.4 The surface of the xylographic plate is worked by roughing the part corresponding to the blanks in the stamping and downgrading with the required depth according to the intended inking methods.

CR 2.5 The xylographic engraving is developed taking into account the effects that during the stamping, can cause the pressure and the inking on the xylographic relief, especially on details and interlates fine.

CR 2.6 Quality monitoring is carried out on the whole process, taking into account the correct choice and use of techniques, paper and tools according to the purposes of the recorder.

CR 2.7 The xylographic engraving operations are performed by applying the required occupational and environmental risk prevention measures.

RP 3: Get state tests that allow you to follow the development of the xylographic engraving using manual or press stamping procedures.

CR 3.1 The printing media and processes are adjusted to obtain state and countertest tests so that they faithfully collect the work done on the plate.

CR 3.2 Initial state tests are valued, checking their suitability for the engraving process and the intended purposes, making, where appropriate, the required modifications to the plate.

CR 3.3 The papers and inks are selected by carrying out tests of inking until they find the appropriate ones to collect the work of the matrix, according to the characteristics of the image and the methods of stamping chosen, recording the data obtained in different samples.

CR 3.4 The definitive pre-stamping test -B.A.T.-is performed including all the results of the previous processes, constituting reference for the subsequent run.

CR 3.5 Final state tests are valued by checking that they faithfully respond to the work done on the plate, avoiding in their stamping the use of any other effects or added to the work of the matrix.

Professional Context:

Production media:

Tacos and boards of wood or plates of other materials. Tools and tools of carpentry: saws, brushes, lijas and others. Tools and tools of xylography: blades, gubes, buriles, scoplos and formons. Sharp and settled useful: sharpstones, limes and others. Lupas and tell them. Printing materials and equipment: inks and their components, papers, rubs and presses. Tools for the application of ink: rollers, brushes and Japanese brushes.

Products and results:

Material for engraving: blades, gubes, buriles, picks and others, prepared. Fibre-recorded xylographic matrices. The invention relates to a counterfibre-recorded xylographic matrix. Status tests performed.

Information used or generated:

Technical literature. Catalogues and monographs of xylography. State tests. Applicable rules for the prevention of occupational and environmental risks. Historical, museum, contemporary and other information through specialized web pages.

COMPETITION UNIT 3: WRITE TO CALCOGRAPHY

Level: 2

Code: UC0689_2

Professional Realizations and Realization Criteria:

RP 1: Prepare materials, tools, and tools for calcographic engraving by selecting the most appropriate to engraving techniques and procedures and performing timely tests to ensure their correct status.

CR 1.1 The engraving plates are prepared by removing the cutting edges, polishing them up to a uniform and uniform surface, considering the requirements of adherence according to the material nature, the circulation and the characteristics of the engraving techniques to be applied.

CR 1.2 The varnishes to be used in the calcopgraphic engraving process are selected by applying affinity criteria to the process and assessing that their characteristics meet the quality needs required during the process of the process. recorded and later bitten.

CR 1.3 The engraving and incision tools: tips, buriles, rutches, berceau, and others of brunge and correction are prepared for use by checking their quality and correcting the wear defects they present.

CR 1.4 The tools necessary for sharpening and the correction of tool wear are available for use during the engraving process.

CR 1.5 The mordants or equipment used in the indirect engraving methods are prepared, in the concentration required according to the nature of the plates and the techniques and procedures of engraving to be used, with special attention to safety measures for the handling of these corrosive products.

CR 1.6 The products and useful aids used during the different engraving processes are available for use, respecting the safety conditions in their handling and avoiding, at all times, their proximity to the heat.

CR 1.7 The quality and suitability of the materials used during the engraving processes are controlled, prior to their use, according to the results sought, carrying out the necessary tests to identify their features and match their usage.

RP 2: Record the iron to obtain the matrix by applying the direct and/or indirect techniques of calcopgraphic engraving using the specific tools and applying the required safety measures.

CR 2.1 The image is transferred on the prepared surface of the plate by the calco of the sketches using the technique of transfer of each matrix, such as: role of calc, chalk, wax and others.

CR 2.2 The direct engraving of the iron is carried out using the tools and tools of incision, according to the own resources of the chosen techniques and according to the formal and expressive values sought and/or established in the sketches.

CR 2.3 The indirect engraving of the iron is carried out by applying the techniques in hollow, exposing some areas of the surface of the plate to the inders and reserving others by means of resins, varnishes or other products.

CR 2.4 The reservation and exposure of the plate to the bite is done, repeating the process until the sizes corresponding to the lines and tones sought are obtained.

CR 2.5 Quality monitoring is carried out mainly in the process, with attention to the choice and correct use of techniques and tools, according to the formal and expressive purposes of the recorder.

CR 2.6 The calcographic engraving process is performed by applying the required occupational and environmental risk prevention measures.

RP 3: Get the state tests that allow you to follow the development of the calcographic engraving, using manual or press stamping procedures.

CR 3.1 Status tests are performed using the stamping systems in calcopgraphic, faithfully collecting the work done on the matrix.

CR 3.2 The papers and inks are selected by conducting tests until they are suitable to collect the work of the matrix, according to the characteristics of the image and the methods of stamping, recording the data obtained in different samples.

CR 3.3 The stamping parameters remain constant in the execution of the successive state tests, preserving the fidelity to the recorded matrix, avoiding in their stamping the use of any other effects or added to the work of the iron.

CR 3.4 The state tests are checked, analyzing the adequacy of the engraving process to the intended purposes, such as recesses, relationship with the sketch and others, making, if necessary, the modifications required in the iron.

CR 3.5 The corrections and retouches of the embossed plate are performed, with appropriate tools and procedures, depending on the results obtained in the state tests and, where appropriate, the variations made in the tests.

CR 3.6 The definitive pre-stamping test -B.A.T.-is performed including all the results of the previous processes, constituting reference for the subsequent run.

Professional Context:

Production media:

Plates: copper, zinc, iron, plastics, and others. Tools and tools for cutting and sanding metals: shears, saws, limes and others. Calcographic engraving tools: tips, buriles, rutches, berceau and others. Varnishing materials and materials: varnishes, brushes and brushes. Resin and resin resins, sprays and others. Materials and equipment for metal bite: acids, buckets. Materials, tools and equipment for inking and stamping: inks and papers, spatulas, rollers, torcles and others.

Products and results:

Tools and materials for calcographic engraving: shears, saws, resins, acids and others, prepared. Recorded calcographic arrays. Status tests performed.

Information used or generated:

Technical literature. Catalogues and monographs of calcographic engraving. State tests. Applicable rules for the prevention of occupational and environmental risks. Internet consultations, international workshops and other recording and recording information.

COMPETITION UNIT 4: STAMP ON HOLE AND RELIEF

Level: 2

Code: UC0690_2

Professional Realizations and Realization Criteria:

RP 1: Review the hollow or embossed matrix and assess its characteristics to select the appropriate stamping techniques, according to the records of the recorder or artist.

CR 1.1 The matrix is either taco or iron is reviewed, valuing the particularities it presents in relation to the stamping such as: engraving techniques used, matrix status, complexity of inking and others.

CR 1.2 The engraver's indications are analyzed, valuing their involvement in the decision of the printing techniques and procedures to be chosen.

CR 1.3 The printing techniques and procedures, whether this manual or with press or torque, are chosen according to their fidelity to collect the work done in the matrix and, if necessary, taking into account the instructions of the established stamping.

RP 2: Carry out previous stamping tests to recognize the right inks and papers to perform the spin, taking into account the criteria and indications of the recorder.

CR 2.1 The equipment to be used to obtain the stamping tests is prepared by adjusting them according to the needs of the image and following the instructions for use.

CR 2.2 The pressure of the torque, the flat press or the vertical press is set for the spin according to the required results.

CR 2.3 The pressure (bed) relaxation and damping elements are chosen depending on the type of matrix, the stamping machine, and the processes used to create the image; establishing an optimal result relationship between all of them.

CR 2.4 Pre-print stamping tests are printed using the required materials: media, inks, and others and applying the selected stamping technique.

CR 2.5 The results obtained in the stamping test are valued in relation to the model stamp, making the necessary adjustments in the materials according to the characteristics of the matrix and the indications of the recorder (B.A.T.).

RP 3: Prepare the paper, inks, and equipment and useful for inking and embossing in hollow or embossed for use during the run, disposing of them in order and taking care of their correct handling.

CR 3.1 The presses are prepared by providing the appropriate pressure to the run, according to the thickness of the plate and the paper, as well as the felt and other auxiliary elements from the previous tests.

CR 3.2 The paper is formatted by tearing or cutting it based on the indications about the dimension and width of its margins for the printing of the prints.

CR 3.3 The paper is wetted according to the needs of the spin and according to the characteristics of the print: composition and gramage.

CR 3.4 The ink is prepared in sufficient quantity, adjusting its characteristics: shooting, viscosity and others, to the needs of the hollow or embossed stamping of the matrix.

CR 3.5 The inking materials such as: spatulas, rollers, tampons, tarlatans and others are prepared and arranged in order to be used during the inking of the spin.

CR 3.6 The felt, mantillas, and other auxiliary elements of hollow or embossed stamping are reviewed, checking their good condition and disposing them for use, having foreseen, if the print run is long, its replacement.

CR 3.7 The preparation of the materials is carried out by applying the required occupational and environmental risk prevention measures.

RP 4: Make the marking and recording of the stamping equipment by establishing the relationship between the image and the blanks of the stamp paper.

CR 4.1 The record of the hollow or embossed matrix is performed by taking into account the relationship between the footprint and the margins of the paper, as indicated by the recorder (B.A.T.).

CR 4.2 The stamping order is established, in the case of using more than one matrix-iron or taco-, depending on the inks and the structure of the image collected on the stamp.

CR 4.3 The different registration systems are selected according to the printing techniques used and the characteristics of the matrices.

CR 4.4 The different operations to achieve record care are performed by looking for the most accuracy to achieve the homogeneity of the prints.

CR 4.5 The marking is checked once the record is made, analyzing the correct array or matrix placement measures in relation to the placement of the support that will receive the stamping, maintaining the indications of the recorder (B.A.T.).

RP 5: Make the inking of the matrix for later transfer to paper, using the different techniques of inking and cleaning according to the nature and structure of the engraving.

CR 5.1 The inks are prepared by looking for the density required for the type of inking bae and adding in their case the appropriate loads according to application needs on the matrix.

CR 5.2 The inking of the matrix is carried out by applying the techniques of inking and cleaning of the matrices such as: inking with roll, poupee, carving and relief or other, according to the characteristics of the engraving, to achieve faithfully the plasmation in the paper of the recorder's work.

CR 5.3 The ink deposited on the hollow or embossed matrix is checked by checking the amount deposited on its surface, its homogeneous application and its adequacy to the nature of the matrix and its engraving.

CR 5.4 The operations of inking and cleaning, where appropriate, of the matrices in hollow or in relief are carried out by applying different techniques, such as: application of ink with rollers, spatulas, tarlatas, non-abrasive papers or others, always avoiding the wear of the matrix.

RP 6: Make the stamping by looking for the homogeneity of the prints, respecting the required quality, safety and environmental protection conditions.

CR 6.1 The matrix and paper are accurately positioned according to the previous records, taking care of a clean and proper handling.

CR 6.2 The maculature, mantillas, felts, and other auxiliary elements extend over the support so that they are at all times conducive to the proper transfer of the ink.

CR 6.3 The pressure is applied uniformly according to the characteristics of the press used or the ink is taken for the paper if the process is manual.

CR 6.4 The spin process is performed by avoiding significant variations that manifest in a noticeable lack of homogeneity of the prints.

CR 6.5 presses and other stamping means are used to apply the applicable labour and environmental risk prevention rules.

RP 7: Perform the drying and final pressing of the prints using the specific means and equipment, ensuring the conditions of conservation of the prints.

CR 7.1 The drying and pressing means and equipment are used according to the instructions for use, avoiding the loss of ink of the stamp and the satin of the white on the margins thereof.

CR 7.2 The handling of paper during drying and pressing processes is carried out in the light of the conditions of cleanliness and proper preservation of the image obtained in the engraving process.

CR 7.3 The drying of the prints is carried out by the methods of drying in rack, pressing in the vertical press in wet, pressing in the dry vertical press, and others, until the degree of humidity required for its conservation.

CR 7.4 The means to ensure proper conservation of the prints are used, taking into account the required environmental conditions and instructions for use.

Professional Context:

Production media:

Stamping media: papers and other media. Inks and additives. Materials, tools and equipment for inking: spatulas, tampons, rollers and others. Wetting equipment: water tubs, dryers and others. Stamping equipment: scrubbing, twisting and other presses. Drying and pressing equipment: rack drying, vertical wet press, dry vertical press and others.

Products and results:

Supports, inks, and printing materials prepared. Hollow prints. Embossed prints. Drying and pressing of the prints made.

Information used or generated:

Pre-stamping definitive tests (B.A.T.). Technical bibliography. Catalogues and monographs of calcographic engraving and xylography. Paper and ink catalogues. Applicable rules for the prevention of occupational and environmental risks.

TRAINING MODULE 1: EXPRESSION TECHNIQUES FOR GRAPHIC WORK

Level: 2

Code: MF0687_2

Associated with UC: Develop and interpret sketches for graphic work

Duration: 120 hours

Assessment capabilities and criteria:

C1: Recognize graphic expression techniques, selecting the most appropriate for engraving and stamping techniques.

CE1.1 Recognize and describe the main materials, tools, and graphic expression procedures.

CE1.2 Explain the fundamental resources that graphic expression techniques provide.

CE1.3 Relate resources that provide graphical expression techniques with those of a particular printmaking or stamping technique.

CE1.4 In a practical scenario characterized by a specific embossing or embossing technique:

-Select the most appropriate graphical expression techniques: water, solid, oily, mixed, or other.

-Determine the materials used according to the selected graphic expression technique: pigments, binders and solvents.

C2: Analyze the basic structure of proposed images, recognizing the fundamental elements that compose them and the relationships that are established between them.

CE2.1 Describe the basic elements of visual language and value them as the foundation of image construction.

CE2.2 Distinguished, visualizing and relating the basic compositional principles of different prints given by identifying the main lines of strength and the centers of attention.

CE2.3 Recognize and describe the main compositional structures in different images proposed from prints and prints.

CE2.4 Compare chromatic and light values of different images proposed from prints and prints, valuing the importance of those in the image construction.

C3: Make notes, studies, and sketches for graphic work by applying the techniques of graphic expression and using the basic elements of visual language and fundamental compositional principles.

CE3.1 Rate the use of sketches, notes, studies, and sketches as successive phases in the image-building process.

CE3.2 Apply the techniques of graphic expression, in different practical assumptions, making sketches and notes that collect the basic forms of a composition in lines, plots and/or stains established in relation to the determined tonal and chromatic values.

CE3.3 In a practical scenario for the elaboration of sketches and from notes and previous studies:

-Perform studies of particular parts or aspects that contribute to the elaboration of the sketch.

-Get the final sketches to pick up the work done in notes and previous studies, setting in them the tonal and chromatic values.

CE3.4 Rate the performance of the sketch as a means of personal and social expression, integrating it as a phase in the process of obtaining prints and prints.

C4: Recognize and value in different visual proposals, the technical and aesthetic aspects of the images or sketches.

CE4.1 Different from an assumption given the technical and aesthetic aspects of different images or sketches.

CE4.2 Describe the main formal characteristics of a given image.

CE4.3 From different images identify the most prominent significant content of each one.

CE4.4 Rate the formal, significant, or style characteristics of different visual proposals given.

C5: Make the investment of the graphic image on the calco guide taking into account its characteristics from a series of given sketches.

CE5.1 Describe the main methods of image inversion.

CE5.2 Recognize the main characteristics of a given matrix by relating them to the most appropriate investment and transfer methods.

CE5.3 Rate the characteristics of different images to invest in a guide calco considering the transfer process.

CE5.4 In different scenarios, properly characterized by different images:

-Apply color selections to the given images taking into account the order and record of the arrays.

-Perform the transfer of different types of images on arrays.

Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real workbench:

C1 with respect to CE1.4; C3 with respect to CE3.3; C5 with respect to CE5.3 and CE5.4.

Other capabilities:

Take responsibility for the work you are developing.

Demonstrate some autonomy in solving small contingencies related to their activity.

Interpret and execute work instructions.

Act quickly in problematic situations and not just wait.

Use time and effort to extend knowledge and supplemental information.

Contents:

1. Graphic expression materials, techniques and supports for the performance of sketches

Graphic expression useful.

Pigments, binders and solvents.

Dry and wet drawing techniques.

Water techniques, solid, oily and mixed paint.

Media.

2. Analyzing the structure of the image

Basic elements of the graphic-plastic language.

Visual field (figure-background relationship).

Organization of the elements in the two-dimensional space.

Strength lines and care centers.

Basic compositional structures.

3. The line as an image configurator

Constructive, descriptive, and expressive values of the line.

The line based on the different engraving and stamping techniques.

The negative positive line.

4. The stain and tonal values in the graphical image

Texture and tonal values in imaging.

Xilographic Tonal Techniques.

Calcographic Tonal Techniques.

Lithographic Tonal Techniques.

Tonal techniques are displayed.

Tonal techniques for other systems for obtaining graphic works.

5. The color in the graphic image

Constructive, descriptive, and expressive values of color.

Juxtaposition and overlay on color image.

Planning the image in color stamping processes.

Training context parameters:

Spaces and installations:

The spaces and facilities will provide a response, in the form of a classroom, a workshop, a workshop of practices, a laboratory or a singular space, to the training needs, according to the Professional Context established in the Unit Partner competence, taking into account the applicable regulations of the production sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.

Professional or former trainer profile:

1.-Domain of knowledge and techniques related to the elaboration and interpretation of sketches for graphic work, which will be accredited by one of the following two forms:

-Level 2 academic training (Spanish Framework of Qualifications for Higher Education), Technical Engineering, Technical Architecture, Diplomacy or other higher level of professional field.

-Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.

2.-Accredited pedagogical competence according to what the competent administrations establish.

FORMATIVE MODULE 2: XYLOGRAPHIC ENGRAVING

Level: 2

Code: MF0688_2

Associated with UC: Write to Xylography

Duration: 120 hours

Assessment capabilities and criteria:

C1: Recognize and prepare the materials, tools, and tools used in the xylographic engraving.

CE1.1 In different case studies and starting from different engraving materials, select the plates, tacos and tables with regard to:

-The nature of the material: type of wood.

-The sense of cutting the wood to fiber or to counter-fiber.

-The qualities of the material to be recorded: consistency, homogeneity, hardness, degree of drying and others.

-The possible defects that condition the size and the subsequent stamping.

CE1.2 Adjust different cleats given to give them a uniform thickness and a flat surface essential for stamping, applying the correct brushing and regruesing systems.

CE1.3 Prepare the tools for the correction of the wear of a given recording tools, adjusting them properly before starting the engraving of a matrix: sharpening stone, lijas and others.

CE1.4 In a practical scenario of a xylographic engraving process, characterized by a sketch and a wooden plate:

-Serrar and squadron the plate, adapting it to the format and dimension of the sketch.

-Pulir and, if necessary, treat the plate until the precise surface finish is achieved, depending on the needs of the work to be developed.

-Select the gubes, knives, according to the xylographic technique required for the engraving, preparing them by attending especially to their cutting edge or cutting.

CE1.5 In a practical scenario of preparing a xylographic engraving, characterized by a quality result:

-Control and adjust the materials used in the xylographic engraving processes.

-Perform the necessary tests to know their specific characteristics and usage.

CE1.6 Perform all operations by applying the required labor and environmental risk prevention standards.

C2: Apply fiber-to-fiber or engraving techniques in the making of matrices, following the directions of the previous sketch or those of the author of a work.

CE2.1 From a given sketch, transfer or heat the image on the prepared surface of the plate to better display the cut or engraving work.

CE2.2 Check that the preparation of the materials is in line with the expected results.

CE2.3 In a practical case, properly characterized by engraving techniques and from a given sketch:

-Record the iron matrix, applying the cutting or cutting procedures to fibre or from engraving to counterfibre, according to the nature and resources of these techniques and according to the expressive values sought by the artist or set in the sketches.

-Use in the creation of the matrix the necessary additive techniques, if required for the correct achievement of the matrix.

-Relate the structure of the veins and other characteristics of the wood worked with the incisions in the taco and the entallures of the table.

CE2.4 In a practical case, it is well characterized to perform the engraving of an iron, taking into account the effects that during the stamping can cause the pressure and the inking on the xylographic relief, in particular on details and fine-words, as well as on the additions of material due to the use of additive techniques.

CE2.5 From different xylographic plates, reduce the surfaces corresponding to the white in the stamping, leaving them with the necessary depth according to the intended methods of inking.

CE2.6 Perform all operations by applying required labor and environmental risk prevention standards.

C3: Perform status tests using the stamping procedures required in each case.

CE3.1 Identify the stamping procedures used for embossed arrays, valuing their characteristics.

CE3.2 From given state tests, check the adequacy of the work process to the intended purposes, using the status tests as indicators.

CE3.3 From a given xylographic matrix, perform different tests by testing inks, papers and other supports until they find the appropriate ones to collect the work of the matrix according to the characteristics of the image and the Chosen stamping methods.

CE3.4 In a practical case characterized by a color embossing, performing state tests paying special attention to the records and methods of the chosen inking: rainbow, size and relief, juxtaposition, overlay and others.

CE3.5 Identify the processes performed on a given B.A.T. model stamp by registering them to constitute the reference in a later edition.

CE3.6 In a practical case of drawing up stamping tests and from a xylographic matrix:

-Check that the stamping tests respond faithfully to the work done on the plate.

-Rate in your stamping the use of any other or added effects to the work of the matrix.

CE3.7 Perform all operations by applying required labor and environmental risk prevention standards.

C4: Rate the applicable labor and environmental risk prevention plans in the xylographic engraving process to correctly use media and security equipment.

CE4.1 Identify occupational risk prevention rules that affect the development of xylographic engraving operations.

CE4.2 Describe and apply the correct lighting conditions for the carving or engraving process.

CE4.3 Identify the tools and cutting tools and incision in the required safety conditions, taking care of the precautions due and describing appropriate protective measures as appropriate.

CE4.4 In a scenario that is characterized by a type workbench:

-Rate that tables, boards, and chairs are adapted to the ergonomic conditions needed to achieve a correct posture during work.

-Determine the optimal lighting conditions for the established workbench.

-Determine the treatment to be given to wood debris caused by the taco cut to work under optimal environmental conditions.

Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real workbench:

C1 with respect to CE1.1, CE1.4 and CE1.5; C2 with respect to CE2.3 and CE2.4; C3 with respect to CE3.3, CE3.4 and CE3.6; C4 with respect to CE4.4.

Other capabilities:

Take responsibility for the work you are developing.

Demonstrate some autonomy in solving small contingencies related to their activity.

Learn new concepts or procedures and effectively leverage training using acquired knowledge.

Propose alternatives with the aim of improving results.

Participate and actively collaborate on the work team.

Interpret and execute work instructions.

Contents:

1. Embossed

The workshop.

Organization.

Maintenance and security.

Materials, tool, and machinery.

Basic fundamentals.

The arrays.

Principles of embossed printing.

The flat press.

Graphic effects.

Applicable labor and environmental risk prevention rules.

Vertical press.

2. Linoleum engraving

Materials and Tools.

Getting tests.

Basic fundamentals.

Graphic effects.

Applicable labor and environmental risk prevention rules.

3. The xylography to fiber

Materials and Tools.

Etching of the array.

Wood's Telling.

Getting tests.

Applicable labor and environmental risk prevention rules.

4. Xylography a counterfibre

Materials and Tools.

Preparation of the taco: polishing, assembly, and others.

Etching of the array.

Getting tests.

Applicable labor and environmental risk prevention rules.

5. Chromatography in engraving

Getting tests in color.

Techniques and Records.

Embossed in size and relief.

Rainbow dye.

Juxtaposition of color.

Templates.

Applicable labor and environmental risk prevention rules.

6. Additive processes applied to embossed embossing

Materials.

Techniques.

Collagrafia.

Performing arrays by combining different techniques in relief.

Interaction between linoleum and xylography.

Interaction between xylography to fiber and counter-fiber.

Experimentation with new materials.

Applicable labor and environmental risk prevention rules.

Training context parameters:

Spaces and installations:

The spaces and facilities will provide a response, in the form of a classroom, a workshop, a workshop of practices, a laboratory or a singular space, to the training needs, according to the Professional Context established in the Unit Partner competence, taking into account the applicable regulations of the production sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.

Professional or former trainer profile:

1. Domain of knowledge and techniques related to the xylographic engraving, which will be credited by one of the following two ways:

-Level 1 academic training (Spanish Framework of Qualifications for Higher Education) or other higher level education related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.

2.-Accredited pedagogical competence according to what the competent administrations establish.

FORMATIVE MODULE 3: CALCOGRAPH ENGRAVING

Level: 2

Code: MF0689_2

Associated with UC: Record in Calcography

Duration: 120 hours

Assessment capabilities and criteria:

C1: Recognize and prepare the materials, tools, and tools used in the calcographic engraving.

CE1.1 Identify the different materials, tools, and tools used in the calcographic engraving, describing the characteristics of each one of them and their application in the process.

CE1.2 In a practical scenario characterized by a given engraving process:

-Successfully prepare the tools for use in case of need in the correction of the wear and tear of the tools to be used.

-Polishing and degreasing the plates in their case, seeking to homogenize the surface and optimizing the adherence to the different materials to be used to create image references and an optimal response to the mordants in case of work with indirect techniques.

CE1.3 From different engraving tools, check that the tools for recording by both direct and indirect methods: tip, rutches, brunitors and others, have the quality and the correction of the wear correct.

CE1.4 In a practical scenario characterized by a determined quality result, properly control and adjust the materials used in the calcopgraphic engraving processes, carrying out the necessary tests to recognize their specific characteristics and their use.

CE1.5 Select correctly the mordants required in the indirect techniques of calcopgraphic engraving, adapting their choice to the nature of the material used as the matrix.

CE1.6 To use different materials and materials for their use, respecting the optimal safety conditions, and controlling their quality and suitability for the desired results.

CE1.7 In a practical, calcopgraphic engraving scenario, characterized by a given iron and sketch:

-Check the quality and conditions of use of the tools to be used in the engraving process, both with direct and indirect methods: tip, roulettes, brunitors and others.

-Cut the plate by adapting it to the format and dimension of the sketch.

-Pulir and, if necessary, treat the matrix until the precise surface finish is achieved, depending on the needs of the work to be developed.

-Prepare the mordants used in the indirect techniques, adapting their choice to the nature of the material used as the matrix.

-Perform operations by applying the required risk and environmental prevention standards.

C2: Apply direct or indirect techniques to get calcopgraphic etchings by performing quality tracking in the process.

CE2.1 From a sketch transfer or heat the image on the prepared surface of the array to correctly display the work to be performed.

CE2.2 Check that the preparation of different given materials is in line with the expected results.

CE2.3 Choose the work order correctly in an array or arrays by taking the required concretion in a previous sketch at both the structural and color levels.

CE2.4 From a practical assumption of a calcopgraphic engraving characterized by the application of direct techniques: dry tip, buril and others, correctly choose the use of the same responding to the graphic effects previously set.

CE2.5 In a practical scenario of calcographic engraving in which different indirect techniques can be applied: line water, water ink, lifting techniques and others, correctly choose the use of the same and the materials involved in the process: varnishes, mordants and others, seeking the correct response to the previously established graphical effects.

CE2.6 From a practical assumption of a calcopgraphic engraving requiring the use of direct and indirect techniques to correctly choose the use of the same on the basis of order of use and graphic results previously set.

CE2.7 Perform all operations by applying the required risk and environmental prevention standards.

C3: Perform state tests that allow you to follow the engraving development using the stamping procedures required in each case.

CE3.1 Check the engraving process of different prints using the specified print media and processes.

CE3.2 Check, using state tests as indicators, the adequacy of the engraving process to the intended purposes.

CE3.3 In a practical case characterized by an image and certain methods of stamping, perform the workshop tests by rehearsing inks, papers and other supports until they find the appropriate ones to collect the work of the array according to the characteristics of the image.

CE3.4 In a practical case of a color-hole engraving perform state tests applied different inking methods such as: poupee, size and relief, juxtaposition, overlay, Hayter method and other, lending special attention to logging.

CE3.5 In a practical case, properly characterized by an iron and a model stamp:

-To properly collect the processes performed in the model stamp to make the reference in the subsequent edition.

-Check that the tests faithfully respond to the work done on the plate by avoiding, in its stamping, the use of any other effects or added to the work of the matrix.

-Perform all operations by applying the required environmental and risk prevention rules.

C4: Analyze the applicable labor and environmental risk prevention plans in the calcographic engraving process to correctly use media and security equipment.

CE4.1 Identify occupational risk prevention rules that affect the development of calcographic engraving operations.

CE4.2 Describe the correct lighting conditions for the calcographic engraving process.

CE4.3 Identify the tools and cutting tools and incision to be used in the necessary safety conditions, taking care of the precautions due and describing the required protective measures as appropriate.

CE4.4 In a scenario that is characterized by a type workbench:

-Rate that tables, boards, and chairs are adapted to the ergonomic conditions needed to achieve a correct posture during work.

-Determine the optimal lighting conditions for the established workbench.

Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real workbench:

C1 with respect to CE1.2, CE1.4 and CE1.7; C2 with respect to CE2.3, CE2.4, CE2.5, CE2.6 and CE2.7; C3 with respect to CE3.2, CE3.3, CE3.4 and CE3.5; C4 with respect to CE4.4.

Other capabilities:

Take responsibility for the work you are developing.

Demonstrate some autonomy in solving small contingencies related to their activity.

Learn new concepts or procedures and effectively leverage training using acquired knowledge.

Use time and effort to extend knowledge and supplemental information.

Act quickly in problematic situations and not just wait.

Demonstrate flexibility to understand changes.

Contents:

1. Write to hole

Historical principles.

The workshop.

Tools and machinery materials.

Organization.

Maintenance and security.

Basic fundamentals.

Principles of hollow printing.

Applicable labor and environmental risk prevention rules.

2. Calcograph engraving

Basic fundamentals.

The arrays.

The Calcographic Print.

The twist.

Graphic effects.

Applicable labor and environmental risk prevention rules.

3. Direct calcographic techniques

Technical processes.

Instruments and products.

Dry tip.

Buril.

Black way.

Graphic Effects.

Performing arrays by combining different techniques.

Materials and techniques.

Experimentation with new materials.

Applicable labor and environmental risk prevention rules.

4. Indirect calcographic techniques

The toothless.

Varnishes.

Resins.

Graphic Effects.

Performing arrays by combining different techniques.

Materials and techniques.

Experimentation with new materials.

5. Color Calcography

Color with a single iron.

Color with multiple irons.

Different system of records.

Getting tests in color.

Techniques and Records.

Embossed in size and relief.

Hayter Method.

Juxtaposition of color.

Overlay color.

Templates.

Training context parameters:

Spaces and installations:

The spaces and facilities will provide a response, in the form of a classroom, a workshop, a workshop of practices, a laboratory or a singular space, to the training needs, according to the Professional Context established in the Unit Partner competence, taking into account the applicable regulations of the production sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.

Professional or former trainer profile:

1. Domain of knowledge and techniques related to calcographic engraving, which will be credited by one of the following two ways:

-Level 1 academic training (Spanish Framework of Qualifications for Higher Education) or other higher level education related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.

2. Accredited pedagogical competence in accordance with what is established by the competent administrations.

TRAINING MODULE 4: EMBOSSING AND EMBOSSING

Level: 2

Code: MF0690_2

Associated with UC: Stampy in Hollow And Embossed

Duration: 120 hours

Assessment capabilities and criteria:

C1: Perform the tuning operations of the machines to be used in the stamping: torque, vertical press, and others, as well as the useful ones used in the stamping.

CE1.1 Describe the most common stamping machines, such as torque, vertical press, and others, identifying the item-to-point items.

CE1.2 Identify the adjustment mechanisms of the matrix-hollow or relief-on the different stamping machines.

CE1.3 Describe the different stamping tools such as scratches, rollers, tarlatans, and others, specifying their characteristics and use in the process.

CE1.4 In a practical scenario from a pre-run stamping test -B.A. T-, perform the stamping press regulation operations to be used: pressure, type and number of felt or other necessary materials for damping of the pressure between the machine and the plate, taking into account the choice of the required result.

C2: Select and perform the registration required for stamping, always looking for the greatest suitability with respect to the number of dies and stamping technique.

CE2.1 Identify the elements of the stamping equipment that make up the recording system and describe how it works.

CE2.2 From stamping test, select the appropriate registration system for the stamping to be carried out, whether a single stamping system is used or interlinked with the calcography and the xylography and always according to the B.A.T.

CE2.3 In a practical case of stamping of different matrices, establish the order of stamping of the same, depending on the inks and the desired result: transparency, opacity, overlap and others.

CE2.4 Determine the pressure in the torque or the vertical press that best responds to the characteristics of a given array by looking for the accuracy and homogeneity in the editing.

C3: Acondition the media to receive the print, adjusting the humidity, porosity, flexibility, and other parameters.

CE3.1 Describe the conditions to be met by the support to print in terms of humidity, gramage, thickness, and others, in relation to different stamping techniques.

CE3.2 Dispose different supports given to receive the impression, in a clean zone that guarantees its perfect condition, both during the stamping and throughout its life as printed, always avoiding any risk of contamination by fungi or other bacteria that may alter their proper conservation.

CE3.3 From media given to printing with certain environmental conditions, wetting in case necessary and in its fair measure, the support to be used in printing prints, adjusting them to the needs raised.

CE3.4 In a scenario of editing a stamp on different media:

-Rate the porosity and flexibility of each of the given media.

-Control throughout the editing: the atmosphere, humidity and luminosity of the workshop, to avoid both dimensional and other alterations.

C4: Apply the entintment and cleaning techniques of matrices, using the ink or other color incorporation system on the matrix.

CE4.1 Determine the correct placement at the inking table of inks or other color application systems, as well as of the necessary tools according to the needs of use during their application.

CE4.2 In a scenario of array inking:

-Check the correct state of the ink in relation to the type of inking to be performed: viscosity, transparency, and others.

-Adjust any other color application system required in the job: chinecollee and others, as well as correct fixing on the support that will receive the stamping.

CE4.3 Apply the techniques of inking and cleaning of given matrices, as well as any other system of incorporation of color, according to the characteristics of the engraving, to faithfully achieve the plasmation in the support of the recorder job.

CE4.4 In a practical case of matrices of properly characterized matrices:

-Prepare the ink in sufficient quantity for the intended run.

-Perform the inking operations, taking into account the homogeneous application of the appropriate ink to the nature of the matrix and its engraving.

CE4.5 Perform the cleaning of different matrices in hollow and in relief using materials that do not wear the engraving such as: white of Spain, gauze, tarlatas and others.

C5: Staging, controlling the correct homogeneity between the prints and applying the required environmental and labor risk prevention standards.

CE5.1 Recognize the different stamping processes used in hollow and embossed, describing the characteristics of each one.

CE5.2 Check the correct image recording on different color printed prints.

CE5.3 In a practical case characterized by a state test -B.A.T.-, perform the correct stamping by maintaining the regularity and quality required in the edition.

CE5.4 In a properly characterized stamping practice:

-Check each stamp that the color parameters are correct, strictly maintaining the B.A.T. reference

-Check the homogeneity of the print run.

-Apply the drying systems of the most appropriate prints in each case.

-Apply the pressing systems in case they are required.

-Perform all operations while respecting applicable labor and environmental risk prevention standards.

CE5.5 Perform all operations while respecting ergonomic conditions and safety measures.

CE5.6 Perform the drying and pressing of different prints using the means and equipment required to ensure correct finishing, and ensure optimal conservation conditions.

Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real workbench:

C1 with respect to CE1.4; C2 with respect to CE2.3; C3 with respect to CE3.2 and CE3.4; C4 with respect to CE4.2 and CE4.4; C5 with respect to CE5.4.

Other capabilities:

Take responsibility for the work you are developing.

Demonstrate some autonomy in solving small contingencies related to their activity.

Learn new concepts or procedures and effectively leverage training using acquired knowledge.

Use time and effort to extend knowledge and supplemental information.

Demonstrate flexibility to understand changes.

Habit to the organization's work rate.

Contents:

1. Embossing

The flat press.

Pressure throttling operations.

Stamping tools: spatulas, pletins, and others.

Other embossing media.

Applicable Labor And Environmental Risk Prevention Regulations.

2. Hollow stamping

The twist.

Regulatory operations.

Log systems.

Stamping tools: scratches, rollers, and others.

Applicable Labor And Environmental Risk Prevention Regulations.

3. Media used to receive the print

Types of papers.

Polyester.

Fabrics.

Cueros.

Escayolas et al.

Conditioning the media for stamping.

Applicable Labor And Environmental Risk Prevention Regulations.

4. Chromatography in stamping

Color stamping.

Techniques.

Records.

Different methods of inking.

5. Color Calcography

Techniques.

Records.

Inking methods with different stamping techniques.

6. The interaction in stamping between xylography and calcography

Techniques.

Records.

Entoning.

Training context parameters:

Spaces and installations:

The spaces and facilities will provide a response, in the form of a classroom, a workshop, a workshop of practices, a laboratory or a singular space, to the training needs, according to the Professional Context established in the Unit Partner competence, taking into account the applicable regulations of the production sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.

Professional or former trainer profile:

1. Domain of knowledge and techniques related to the embossing in hollow and embossed, which will be accredited by one of the following two forms:

-Level 1 academic training (Spanish Framework of Qualifications for Higher Education) or other higher level education related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.

2. Accredited pedagogical competence in accordance with what is established by the competent administrations.

ANNEX V

Professional qualification: Guilty and folding

Professional Family: Graphic Arts

Level: 2

Code: ARG217_2

General Competition

Autonomously perform the preparation and control of the machines, raw materials and auxiliary products needed and execute the cutting and folding of graphic material, according to productivity and quality established and intervening in the process taking into account the conditions of safety, quality and productivity.

Competition Units

UC0200_2: Operate in the graphical process under security, quality, and productivity

UC0691_2: Prepare raw materials and auxiliary products for binding

UC0692_2: Adjust parameters, synchronize equipment, and perform the cutting of graphic materials

UC0693_2: Adjust parameters, level elements, and perform folding

Professional Environment

Professional Scope

Develops its professional activity in the binding area dedicated to the folding and cutting of graphic products. In entities of a public or private nature, of large, medium and small size and regardless of their legal form, they generally work as an employed person and, where appropriate, depend on a superior. You may have staff in your position at times, for seasons or in a stable way. The principles of universal accessibility are applied in the development of professional activity in accordance with the applicable regulations.

Productive Sectors

It is located in the productive sector of graphic industries: graphic arts, manipulated and transformed at national or international level that have the subprocess of cutting and folding of graphic material: editorial products, newspapers, magazines, advertising, packaging and packaging, and in any other sector that has any of these activities.

Relevant occupations and jobs

The terms of the following relationship of occupations and jobs are used with a generic and omnicomprensivo character of women and men.

Guillotine Machines

Folding operators for editing

Commercial folding machines

Guilotinator machine operators

folding machine operators

Hand-binding guillotiners

Associated Training (450 hours)

Training Modules

MF0200_2: Processes in Graphic Arts (120 hours)

MF0691_2: Materies and binding products (90 hours)

MF0692_2: Preparing and executing the graphic materials cut (90 hours)

MF0693_2: Preparing and running the fold (150 hours)

COMPETITION UNIT 1: OPERATING IN THE GRAPHICAL PROCESS UNDER SECURITY, QUALITY, AND PRODUCTIVITY

Level: 2

Code: UC0200_2

Professional Realizations and Realization Criteria:

RP 1: Determine the characteristics of the graphical products to establish the appropriate manufacturing process, taking into account the available elements and applicable regulations.

CR 1.1 Graphic products are identified from the data provided by the originals, sketches and models, in response to the established technical specifications.

CR 1.2 The specifications on the graphic product to be performed are valued by identifying their typology and functional and communicative characteristics-product use, applicable regulations and others.

CR 1.3 The functional and technological relationships of the graphic product to be made are established according to its components: stationery, stuchaery, publishing, advertising, and others.

CR 1.4 The phases required for the reproduction of the graphic product: preprint, binding printing and finishes, are set from their specifications, introducing the data into the workflow.

RP 2: Perform the standardization of the production parameters in the workflows for each phase of the graphical product, according to the specifications set.

CR 2.1 The production phases in the graphical process are determined by specifying each of the elements involved in the process: technical parameters, product typology, and others.

CR 2.2 Production parameters are standardized in the workflow according to the typology of the graphic product: packaging, editorial product, billboard and others, following established procedures.

CR 2.3 The parameters and manufacturing elements of the graphic product at different stages of the process: preprint, printing, binding and transformed, are checked according to the technical specifications.

CR 2.4 The productive environment in each of the phases of the graphical process is determined from the established technical specifications.

CR 2.5 Graphic process tracking is done through workflows by facilitating planning, automation, procedures, and other factors that affect the production environment.

CR 2.6 The incidents that arise in the process are recorded in the workflow following established procedures to take the necessary corrective and preventive measures.

RP 3: Verify quality parameters in the process using specific equipment to obtain the product with the established standards.

CR 3.1 The most significant quality features in each of the phases of the process are identified according to established variables and attributes.

CR 3.2 The graphical product in process is checked, verifying that it complies with the fundamental concepts of quality in the different phases of its manufacturing according to the established standards and standards.

CR 3.3 Quality procedures at each stage of the manufacturing process of the graphic product are applied methodically according to the technical specifications of the product, using the specific measurement equipment.

CR 3.4 Control frequencies are applied according to the type of characteristics to be controlled and the number of product units to be obtained, following established procedures.

CR 3.5 The results and incidences of the quality control of the graphical product are recorded using the corresponding control sheets by entering them into the workflow.

CR 3.6 Quality verification in the graphical process is carried out in compliance with applicable labour and environmental risk prevention regulations.

Professional Context:

Production media:

Specific computers and software. Digital printer. Standards of communication. Workflows. Normalized light pupitre. Measurement and control tools and tools: densitometer, tipometer, odometer, colorimeter and spectrophotometer.

Products and results:

Production parameters entered into the workflow. Recorded quality control incidents. Completed control sheets. Failures or defects in the registered processes. Quality parameters identified throughout the graphical process.

Information used or generated:

Production order. Technical documentation of preprint, printing and post-pressure equipment and machines. Applicable rules for the prevention of occupational and environmental risks. Quality standards and standards to be applied in the graphical process. Technical equipment sheets. Maintenance manuals. Company quality control plans.

COMPETITION UNIT 2: PREPARE RAW MATERIALS AND AUXILIARY PRODUCTS FOR BINDING

Level: 2

Code: UC0691_2

Professional Realizations and Realization Criteria:

RP 1: Get the technical data on the binding raw materials from the production orders to start the process according to the technical and quality requirements.

CR 1.1 The production order is reviewed by checking that it contains all the technical and quality information relating to raw materials and ancillary products: papers, cartons, tails, steel wire, yarn, skins, fabrics and others, which are to be used in the binding process.

CR 1.2 The information on the auxiliary equipment to be used: tools, tools, forklifts, machines, seals, pallets, boxes and others is obtained from the production orders, establishing their use in relation to each of the raw materials to be used.

CR 1.3 The model, test or any other product that serves as a model, is contrasted with the indications of the work order by checking that both coincide to avoid errors in the preparation of the raw materials and the ancillary products.

CR 1.4 Raw material preparation operations are performed by applying the quality criteria established by the company.

RP 2: Review printed sheets by following established methods to ensure their quality in binding processes.

CR 2.1 The printed sheets are checked to verify their quality in terms of foliation, tracing, specific measures, scratch possibilities, repines, downpour, folding resistance, fibre sense, folding and folding. other, according to work order and/or according to model or test.

CR 2.2 The possible defects of printed sheets relating to: thickness, gramage, double-fold resistance, ripped, repainted, gloss and others that may have occurred in their printing phase are identified by taking the established corrective measures.

CR 2.3 The record elements of the specification such as height and side recording position are checked, ensuring that their positioning and entry into the machine match the specifications of the binding machines: Female, female, female, and other, according to the work order.

CR 2.4 Observed sheets that do not comply with the company's quality standards are withdrawn by applying the corrective measures in place.

RP 3: Prepare raw materials and ancillary products, applying established working methods to ensure continuity in the print run.

CR 3.1 The quantity and quality of raw materials and ancillary products are checked, ensuring their compliance with the production order.

CR 3.2 The raw materials are stacked in an orderly manner in the machine environment ensuring the continuity of production without interruption, complying with the applicable regulations for the prevention of occupational risks and environmental.

CR 3.3 Raw materials and ancillary products are prepared according to established working methods by ensuring their input and passing through the different machines that configure the binding processes.

CR 3.4 The measurement of parameters of the auxiliary products: viscosity, temperature, mixtures, is carried out by checking their suitability to the required quality specifications.

CR 3.5 The storage and storage of auxiliary products is done in an orderly manner, facilitating their location.

Professional Context:

Production media:

Binding materials: papers, cartons, fabrics, skins, wires, wire, tails, and others. Auxiliary equipment for binding: pallets, machines, seals, boxes and others. Printed sheets. Paper moisture controllers, squats, flexometers. Auxiliary equipment.

Products and results:

Quality control of raw materials, auxiliary products and printed sheets. Papers, fabrics, skins, cartons, cardboard and other stacked preparations for binding. Auxiliary products: tails, threads, steel wire, prepared for binding.

Information used or generated:

Work Order. Technical documentation of the raw materials. Maquettes. Model tests. Applicable rules for the prevention of occupational and environmental risks. Quality standards. Technical instructions for equipment.

COMPETITION UNIT 3: ADJUST PARAMETERS, SYNCHRONIZE EQUIPMENT, AND PERFORM GRAPHIC MATERIALS CUTTING

Level: 2

Code: UC0692_2

Professional Realizations and Realization Criteria:

RP 1: To regulate the mechanisms of commissioning and operation for the cutting of the graphic material, through its adjustment and synchronization, choosing the appropriate program according to the technical orders, to the work to be carried out and to the materials to be used.

CR 1.1 The job is visually checked according to the parameters of the work order, verifying that the supplied sheets do not present failures that make production difficult.

CR 1.2 Cut parameters are entered into the program by adjusting them according to the specifications that appear in the work order.

CR 1.3 The registration elements, front and side square and measuring systems, are adjusted to ensure their operation, applying the specific technical procedures.

CR 1.4 The elements and mechanisms of the power and output system are checked visually, guaranteeing the support correspondence to be cut with the format of the specification to be obtained.

CR 1.5 The operation of the machine is checked by checking its elements and starting up, correcting the anomalies by applying the technical procedures established.

RP 2: Check the status of the record, pressure, and cut elements to ensure the quality of the cut according to the job specifications.

CR 2.1 The adjustment of the squads is checked by ensuring its position at 90º, pressure of the foot, precision of the cut and avoiding the 'ear' effect.

CR 2.2 The use state of the quadrant is visually checked, detecting possible wear and tear, changing it if necessary.

CR 2.3 The blade is visually reviewed, checking for deficiencies such as lack of sharpening, irregular wear, mellas and others.

CR 2.4 The blade is changed, adjusting the accuracy of the cut to the manufacturer's technical specifications and complying with the applicable regulations on the prevention of occupational and environmental risks.

CR 2.5 The piss is leveled by adjusting to pressure depending on the type of material and quantity to be cut.

RP 3: Make the cut by achieving the optimal performance of the machines, the quality specified in the work order and respecting the established safety standards.

CR 3.1 The layout and position of the heels of the sheet are checked, before starting the cut, by performing a sample of the product cut.

CR 3.2 The cutting of the folds is done by controlling the speed of the machine, maintaining the adjustment parameters and the required quality levels according to the specifications of the work order.

CR 3.3 The control of the process is carried out by sampling established in the working method, confirming that the results of the cut comply with the required quality, especially observing the possible repainting, distortions in the cut format and others.

CR 3.4 The copies that are the object of the self-control are kept following the instructions of each company or the guidelines of self-control of each job.

RP 4: Flaging and/or placing the cut products in boxes or pallets, ensuring their integrity and clearly exposing the content information by means of carcloths.

CR 4.1 Cut-off products are placed in pallets or boxes, taking into account, if any, the instructions on the work order, preventing the subsequent handling and transport of the products from deteriorating.

CR 4.2 Carcloths are attached to the boxes or pallets according to the directions on the work order, facilitating the control of production and helping their easy subsequent identification.

CR 4.3 The packaged products are identified with carcloths indicating the model and number of copies it contains, as well as the information needed for identification.

CR 4.4 The flapping is carried out in compliance with the applicable labour and environmental risk prevention regulations.

RP 5: Record the work data of the cutting work, contributing to the control of production plans and the confirmation of the work, done with data of incidents, quality and productivity.

CR 5.1 Work data relating to tasks in each phase are identified in a way that facilitates product traceability.

CR 5.2 Cut, repainted, cut-off, and other mismatches are collected in the production parts as incidents of self-control.

CR 5.3 Production parts are completed by checking that the specified productivity matches the one obtained.

CR 5.4 Quality parameters: indicated measures, material behaviour, number of copies and consumption of material used are controlled during the run and are collected in the production part.

CR 5.5 The data on the print run is collected in the production parts, making it possible to analyze it in later work.

RP 6: Perform first-level cleaning and maintenance work by checking the security systems to keep the machines from cutting to point according to established procedures.

CR 6.1 The periodic greasing is performed according to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

CR 6.2 The operation of air circuits and filters is verified according to established maintenance standards.

CR 6.3 The components of the machines are maintained at the cleaning levels set out in the maintenance regulations.

CR 6.4 First-level maintenance is done following the planned plans and recording the required data in the procedures.

CR 6.5 Security systems are checked to maintain the machines and auxiliary folding equipment under established security conditions.

Professional Context:

Production media:

Guillotines, elevators, stackers, strapping-tying, vibrators. Specific computer system. Pliegos. Cardboard and other cutting materials. Pallet. Boxes. Carcloths.

Products and results:

Set to the guillotine. Cut sheets for further manipulation in another binding and/or manipulated phase. Cut copies for direct delivery to the customer packed in boxes or placed in pallet. Pre-print cut. First level maintenance performed.

Information used or generated:

Parts of work. Manuals of the manufacturer of the machine. Work Orders. Models or models. Applicable rules for the prevention of occupational and environmental risks. Technical information sheet for auxiliary products and maintenance records. Quality standards and standards.

COMPETITION UNIT 4: ADJUST PARAMETERS, LEVEL ELEMENTS, AND PERFORM FOLDING

Level: 2

Code: UC0693_2

Professional Realizations and Realization Criteria:

RP 1: Regulating the starting mechanisms for folding through its timing and adjustment according to the technical orders, the work to be performed and the materials to be used.

CR 1.1 The elements and mechanisms of the folding feeding system are checked by ensuring their correspondence with the support to be folded.

CR 1.2 The different stations to be used for folding are defined based on the type of product to be folded.

CR 1.3 The elements and mechanisms of the output system are verified, ensuring the reception and stacking of the support to be folded and the folding to be obtained.

CR 1.4 The correct operation of the machine is checked by checking its elements and starting up, correcting the anomalies, according to the production needs and following the technical instructions.

CR 1.5 Regulatory operations in compliance with applicable labour and environmental risk prevention regulations.

RP 2: Check the stations and accessories to be used in the folding to ensure the quality of the process according to the specifications and the authorized sample.

CR 2.1 The adjustment and levelling of the rollers and folding bags is performed by ensuring the accuracy of the folding.

CR 2.2 The cutting, drilling and/or cleft tools are adjusted and placed in the appropriate place, according to the folding to be made and the product to be obtained.

CR 2.3 The stacking table, the air of suction and separation of the pliegos, are adjusted by facilitating a correct feeding.

CR 2.4 The input profiles on the bags and/or blades are reset with the first adjustment plies, installing the appropriate balls to work in the carrier profiles and resetting the riders of the bags.

CR 2.5 The first adjustment sheets are folded with the speed at which they are going to work, checking the timing of the vacuum cycles and the cycles of the seasons.

CR 2.6 The latest precision corrections are made by adjusting the delivery mechanism and the counter.

CR 2.7 The testing operations for folding stations are performed in compliance with applicable labour and environmental risk prevention regulations.

RP 3: Perform folding by achieving the optimal performance of the machines, the quality specified in the work order, and respecting the established safety standards.

CR 3.1 Work order specifications such as: type of folding and imposition, folding execution program, and others apply in the performance of folding according to the established procedure.

CR 3.2 The required quality levels for each product are maintained in folding execution, obtaining the optimal rate of production of the folding.

CR 3.3 The run is performed by maintaining a visual control over the plies by controlling the absence of water, air bags, scratches and others.

CR 3.4 The folding control is performed on samples of folded products, confirming that the results of the folding meet the required quality in the working method.

CR 3.5 The observed defects are corrected during the run, taking samples and checking the quality of the product, especially the mismatches of folding, repainting, water and scratch foliation.

CR 3.6 The copies that are the subject of the self-control are stored according to the company's instructions or the self-control guidelines for each job.

CR 3.7 The run is performed in compliance with applicable labor and environmental risk prevention regulations.

RP 4: Flout and place folded products into boxes or pallets, preventing their deterioration and clearly exposing content information by means of carcloths.

CR 4.1 The folded products are flailing, packaged and stacked, preventing the deterioration of the same, handling the auxiliary machines used and avoiding stops in the production of the folding.

CR 4.2 The folded products are placed in pallets or boxes, taking into account, if any, the instructions on the work order, preventing the subsequent handling and transport of the products from deteriorating.

CR 4.3 Carfabrics are chosen based on size, color, and field regulations to be filled in.

CR 4.4 Carcloths are clearly filled out by identifying the contents and quantity of the boxes or pallets.

CR 4.5 The carcloths are attached to the boxes or to the pallets, according to the instructions on the work order, facilitating the control of the production and its subsequent identification.

CR 4.6 The strapping is done using the specific equipment and complying with applicable labour and environmental risk prevention regulations.

RP 5: Register the work data of the folding process to contribute to the control of production plans by introducing the incident, quality, and productivity data.

CR 5.1 Work data relating to tasks at each stage are identified, facilitating product traceability.

CR 5.2 Folding, repainting, foliating, stout, and other mismatches are collected in the production parts as incidents of self-control.

CR 5.3 Production parts are completed by checking that the specified productivity matches the one obtained.

CR 5.4 Quality parameters: type of folding, material behaviour, number of copies and consumption of material used are controlled during the run and are collected in the production part.

CR 5.5 The data on the print run is collected in the production parts, making it possible to analyze it in later work.

RP 6: Perform first-level maintenance jobs by checking the security systems to keep the machines to a point according to the established procedures.

CR 6.1 The components of the machines are maintained at the cleaning levels laid down in the company's maintenance regulations.

CR 6.2 First-level maintenance is performed following the planned plans and recording the required data in the procedures.

CR 6.3 Security systems are checked to maintain the machines and auxiliary folding equipment under the established security conditions.

CR 6.4 The work areas of your responsibility are maintained in cleanliness, order, and security conditions.

Professional Context:

Production media:

Bag Folding, Knife Folding and Combined Folding Machines; Stackers, Tenders and strapping, perforated, cut and cut blades and other auxiliary products. Pliegos. Cardboard and other folding materials. Flejadoras. Boxes. Pallet. Carcloths.

Products and results:

The folding of the folding. The perforated, perforated and/or cut folding of: diptics, triptics, sheets of 8-12-16-24 or 32 pages and others, maps, coupons answer, completions and other folded graphics products. Filled fabrics. Folded graphics products placed in boxes and/or pallet. Flapping products. First level maintenance performed.

Information used or generated:

Parts of work. Manuals of the manufacturer of the machine. Work orders. Models or models. Applicable rules for the prevention of occupational and environmental risks. Technical information sheet for auxiliary products and maintenance records. Quality standards and standards.

FORMATIVE MODULE 1: PROCESSES IN GRAPHIC ARTS

Level: 2

Code: MF0200_2

Associated with UC: Operate in the graphical process under security, quality, and productivity

Duration: 120 hours

Assessment capabilities and criteria:

C1: Analyze the entire graphical process and its different phases: preprint, binding and transformed printing, considering the communication between them using standardization models.

CE1.1 Explain the characteristics and type configuration of graphic arts companies according to the production phase: preprint, print, binding, transformed.

CE1.2 In a defined production environment, describe through workflows the sequence of tasks or operations for obtaining the product.

CE1.3 Analyze, from the design point of view, the characteristics of a given graphical product:

-Formats and measures.

-Typology.

-Colors.

-Media.

-Encuadernation and finish.

CE1.4 In a practical scenario of producing a given graphic product, relate and sequence the different preprint phases that have been involved in its elaboration:

-Text: body, family, style, paragraph, interline.

-Trams: line, point shape, and angulation.

-Color separation.

-Plot and paging systems used.

CE1.5 In a practical scenario of crafting a given graphical product, describe and recognize the characteristics of the printing system used according to:

-Type of media used.

-Tintas: classes and layers.

-Tramado.

-Profile of the characters.

-Footprint or relief on the media.

-Effects on printing.

-Number of passes on machines.

CE1.6 Analyze the different preprint, printing and binding and finishing systems, describing and relating their main phases to the machines, equipment, raw materials and products used.

CE1.7 Describe the most significant print electronic systems.

CE1.8 Describe and recognize the characteristics of the post-pressure process for the elaboration of a type graphic product according to the defined process and the materials used.

C2: Classify graphic products according to their composition and functional characteristics: stationery, carpeting, stanchery, editing and advertising.

CE2.1 Explain the functional characteristics of the different graphic products: Stationery, Carpet, Stucery, Editing and Advertising.

CE2.2 Identify the structural characteristics of the different graphic products: Stationery, Carpet, Stucery, Editing and Advertising.

CE2.3 From graphic product samples:

-Recognize its physicochemical composition and identify its functional capacity.

-Rate the communicative and functional capacity of the different graphic products.

-Classify the samples of proposed graphic products according to their nature and functionality: stationery, carpeting, stanchery, editing and advertising.

C3: Recognize and analyze color metrics and metrics used in graphic arts.

CE3.1 Identify chromatic spaces: RGB, CMYK, HSB, CIE Lab, used in graphic arts.

CE3.2 Describe the measurement equipment used in the color measurement: colorimeter, glitter, spectrophotometer, identifying the application of each of them.

CE3.3 Describe the various lighting sources, color temperature, and observation conditions to reproduce color under standardized conditions.

CE3.4 In a practical scenario of color measurement and from different samples of color originals:

-Identify color parameters: brightness, saturation, tone, and metamery index.

-Represent colorimetric values in chromatic spaces.

-Evaluate color differences and their ability to play in the graphical system.

-Make measurements of color variables with the colorimeter and the electrometer over different color samples indicating the readings in a template.

C4: Relating applicable labour and environmental risk prevention rules in the graphical process with the operations that are developed in each of its phases.

CE4.1 Recognize applicable labor and environmental risk prevention regulations in the graphical process.

CE4.2 Identify the security elements to be installed in the different places and risk teams in the graphical industries.

CE4.3 Using practical examples, identify the security labels that appear on the machines and products used in the graphical process.

CE4.4 Describe and relate the rules applicable to the prevention of occupational and environmental risks, with the different phases of the graphical process.

CE4.5 Recognize the environmental documents and procedures applied in the graphical process.

C5: Analyze the quality control process in a graphical arts 'process'.

CE5.1 Identify the fundamental phases and concepts of quality control in manufacturing in the graphic arts industries.

CE5.2 Describe a raw material receipt control process succinctly.

CE5.3 Describe the instruments used in quality control: densitometres, colorimeters, control strips and production line control devices, identifying their application in the different phases of the graphical process.

CE5.4 Perform densitometric and colorimetric measurements from a preprint test, and from certain print standards, by assessing that the color range reproduction is consistent with the set standards.

CE5.5 In a scenario of quality control in print processing, from a printed product, and established standards:

-Select the required measurement instrument.

-Perform metering instrument calibration.

-Perform densitometric, colorimetric, 'trapping', sliding, and gray balance measurements.

-Set the chromatic space.

-Perform different measures on the control strip.

-Check the setting with the set standards.

CE5.6 In a practical scenario of quality control in the process of transformed, from a graphical product to be bound and/or manipulate, identify and evaluate the defects detected in:

-Format and margins.

-Cutting marks.

-Log tokens.

-Signatures.

-Fibre sense.

-Repainted.

-Troquels.

CE5.7 Describe the most significant quality features of the products:

-Encuaderation and manipulated: subjective assessment, cut marks, tracks, log signals, collared.

-Resistance to folding.

-Resistance to rub.

-Printing: density, 'trapping', stamping gain, color balance, pasting, sliding, logging.

-Preprint: tests, standards.

Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real workbench:

C1 with respect to CE1.3, CE1.4 and CE1.5; C3 with respect to CE3.4; C5 with respect to CE5.4, CE5.5 and CE5.6.

Other capabilities:

Take responsibility for the work you are developing.

Demonstrate some autonomy in solving small contingencies related to their activity.

Respect internal company procedures and rules.

Maintain an assertive, empathetic and conciliatory attitude to others by demonstrating cordiality and kindness in dealing.

Recognize the organization's productive process.

Participate and actively collaborate on the work team.

Contents:

1. Graphical process

Types of graphic products.

Company types: organization and structure.

Standardization and communication models. Workflows.

Preprint systems. Classes of originals. Latent image, revealed process. Matching the digital workflow environment.

Input peripherals, output peripherals, specific software and hardware, processing and test systems.

Plotting and mounting. Elements of the assembly. Specific software.

Print systems. Equipment, capabilities, comparison of different systems.

Types of inks and media for each print system.

Encuaderation and transformed. Classes. Benefits. Teams. Features.

Paper and paperboard manipulated. Manipulated from other materials.

2. Color and its measurement

Nature of light.

Electromagnetic spectrum.

Philosophy of vision.

Chromatic Space.

Factors that affect color perception.

Color Theory. Additive and subtractive synthesis of color.

Color rendering systems: MUNSELL, RGB, HSL, HSV, PANTONE, CIE, CIE-Lab, GAFT.

Color measurement instruments: densitometres, colorimeters, glinometers, and spectrophotometers. Color assessment.

3. Standards for the prevention of labour and environmental risks applicable to graphic arts processes

Safety plans and rules.

Rules in force.

Signals and alarms.

Environmental regulations.

4. Quality in graphic arts processes

More characteristic tests, instruments and measurements.

Preprint quality: point gain, gray balance, and density.

Print variables (print density, contrast, penetration, fixed, stamping gain, color and gray balance).

Control areas in print. Measurement.

Quality in post-pressure.

Visual control of binding and manipulated.

Checking for bound and manipulated defects.

Standardization of quality.

5. Quality control in graphic arts

Quality in manufacturing.

Quality control. Concepts involved.

Control elements.

Control Phases: receipt of materials, processes, and products.

Rules and standards for the graphical process.

Training context parameters:

Spaces and installations:

The spaces and facilities will provide a response, in the form of a classroom, a workshop, a workshop of practices, a laboratory or a singular space, to the training needs, according to the Professional Context established in the Unit Partner competence, taking into account the applicable regulations of the production sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.

Professional or former trainer profile:

1. Domain of knowledge and techniques related to production operations in the graphical process under conditions of safety, quality and productivity, which will be accredited by one of the following two forms:

-Level 2 academic training (Spanish Framework of Qualifications for Higher Education), Technical Engineering, Technical Architecture, Diplomacy or other higher level of professional field.

-Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.

2. Accredited pedagogical competence in accordance with what is established by the competent administrations.

TRAINING MODULE 2: SUBJECTS AND PRODUCTS FOR BINDING

Level: 2

Code: MF0691_2

Associated with UC: Preparing raw materials and auxiliary products for binding

Duration: 90 hours

Assessment capabilities and criteria:

C1: Interpret work procedures in the preparation of raw materials in binding processes from production orders.

CE1.1 Perform a sequencing of the binding process by interpreting a type work order, identifying the materials used in each case.

CE1.2 Contrasting the indications of different work orders with a type model with indications for binding.

CE1.3 In a scenario of obtaining raw material data for binding, from a model model:

-Check that all data regarding the binding to be performed are shown in the model.

-Identify the required papers, cartons, threads and other materials according to the model.

-Rate established quality criteria.

CE1.4 In a scenario of identifying raw materials, from a production order type:

-Interpret the work order relating the technical and production information to the preparation of the raw materials and the auxiliary equipment to be used such as forklift trucks, machines, seals, pallets, boxes, sheets, binding and others.

-Recognize raw materials for different binding trains.

-Identify the auxiliary elements of the machines.

C2: Analyze the printed sheets with respect to their quality in the binding processes.

CE2.1 Perform measurements of printed sheets by handling the corresponding measuring devices by valuing the following properties:

-Square of the specification.

-Resistance to folding.

-Moisture from paper.

CE2.2 In a practical scenario of quality testing, from actual printed sheets check the quality in the following aspects:

-Foliation.

-The plotted.

-Record.

-Specific measures.

-Repines.

-Needle.

-Resistance to folding.

-Fibre sense.

-Roture in folding.

CE2.3 Detect, in real printed samples, defects that occurred in printing, using a spin with defective folds.

C3: Apply the preparation methods for raw materials and ancillary products for a binding process, in accordance with production requirements.

CE3.1 Interpret working methods, taken from the reality of a company, on handling raw materials and auxiliary binding products.

CE3.2 Analyze the characteristic storage process of binding companies.

CE3.3 Relate the materials with the procedures and conditions that your storage requires.

CE3.4 In a scenario of preparing raw materials and auxiliary products according to a real work order:

-Check the quantity and quality of raw materials and ancillary products.

-Appoint raw materials and auxiliary products and manipulate them according to established working methods to ensure their input and pass through the different machines that configure the binding processes.

-Identify established security rules to stack raw materials and auxiliary equipment.

C4: Evaluate the characteristics of the quality variables of the raw materials, using the appropriate instruments.

CE4.1 Relate the durability and behavior of the various supports used in binding with the alterations that they suffer because of: humidity and temperature, storage, the direction of the fiber.

CE4.2 Relate the durability and behavior of the various chemicals used in binding with the alterations that they suffer because of: temperature, humidity, composition, oxidation and light.

CE4.3 To differentiate the characteristics and operation of the measuring instruments used for the quality control of raw materials.

CE4.4 In a practical scenario of a test of binding materials, from measuring equipment:

-Handle the tools and measuring instruments: hygrometer, thermometer, precision scales, viscosimeter, microscope.

-Get the humidity, pressure, density, dimension variations of media, materials, and raw materials.

-Successfully express the results of the measures.

CE4.5 Check that the properties of the different raw materials used in the binding processes are in line with the characteristics of the materials to be bound and the final result for which they are intended.

Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real workbench:

C1 with respect to CE1.3 and CE1.4; C2 with respect to CE2.2; C3 with respect to CE3.4; C4 with respect to CE4.4.

Other capabilities:

Take responsibility for the work you are developing.

Respect internal company procedures and rules.

Habit to the business pace of the business.

Learn new concepts or procedures and effectively leverage training using acquired knowledge.

Transfer information clearly, in an orderly, structured, clear and precise manner respecting the channels established in the organization.

Recognize the organization's productive process.

Contents:

1. Binding raw materials

Plotted: classes and features.

Standard specifications for the pleadings.

Printed sheets for binding: repines and downpour.

Resistance to folding.

Fibre Sense.

Collapse in folding.

Queues. Types. Features.

Barnices. Types. Features.

Wire. Types. Features.

Threads. Types. Features.

2. Packaging and storage in binding

Storage conditions. Temperature and humidity.

Automatic storage systems.

Stacked. Carcloths.

Ators: operation and handling.

Seal: Types and Placement.

Pallets: placement and handling.

Boxes: types, material utilization.

Retracter: handling and utilization.

Applicable labour and environmental risk prevention regulations.

3. Auxiliary elements of the machines

Encuaderation. Benefits.

Types of machines for the binding process.

Components of the machines.

Auxiliary machines for machines.

Guillotins.

4. Quality control of binding raw materials

Quality of the printed.

Viscosity control.

Drying times.

Resistance to rub and scratch of varnishes and tails.

More characteristic tests and measurements.

Measuring devices: gyrometer, flexometer, gage, micrometer, thermometer and viscosimeter.

Training context parameters:

Spaces and installations:

The spaces and facilities will provide a response, in the form of a classroom, a workshop, a workshop of practices, a laboratory or a singular space, to the training needs, according to the Professional Context established in the Unit Partner competence, taking into account the applicable regulations of the production sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.

Professional or former trainer profile:

1.-Domain of knowledge and techniques related to the preparation of raw materials and ancillary products for binding, which shall be accredited by one of the following two forms:

-Level 2 academic training (Spanish Framework of Qualifications for Higher Education), Technical Engineering, Technical Architecture, Diplomacy or other higher level of professional field.

-Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.

2.-Accredited pedagogical competence according to what the competent administrations establish.

TRAINING MODULE 3: PREPARATION AND EXECUTION OF GRAPHIC MATERIALS CUTTING

Level: 2

Code: MF0692_2

Associated with UC: Adjust parameters, synchronize equipment, and perform the cutting of graphic materials

Duration: 90 hours

Assessment capabilities and criteria:

C1: Check the running of the cutting machine from the technical specifications.

CE1.1 Interpret the technical documentation of the cutting machine relating to its commissioning, operation and safety.

CE1.2 Rate the various cutting programs that include the equipment, relating them to the most common media to cut in the graphical process.

CE1.3 In a convenient start-up of the cutting machine, from a given work order:

-Analyze the machine's technical specifications.

-Check and review the elements of the cutting machine and its correct operation or status.

-Check the elements and mechanisms of the power and output system to ensure your correspondence with the support to be cut and the specification to be obtained.

-Locate and review the correct operation of the cutting machine security systems.

CE1.4 In a practical scenario of adjusting robotic auxiliary elements on a cutting machine, from given job data:

-Analyze the operation of each element and its synchronization with the cutting machine.

-Perform different programming by entering the data in the terminal of the cutting machine and checking its correct operation.

-Perform cutting machine programming with real examples of jobs to be cut, interpreting the orders of each job.

C2: Perform tuning operations on a cutting machine considering the characteristics of the media.

CE2.1 Recognize the cutting machine elements that must be adjusted based on the product characteristics to be cut: squads, quadrillos, blades, and others.

CE2.2 Identify the layout of the cut in different sheets and graphic products, performing a sample of the folding.

CE2.3 In a scenario of setting cutting equipment, based on the machine's technical instructions:

-Adjust the squads by checking the precision of the cut and the squadron, detecting defects in the regulation such as the 'ear' effect.

-Determine the state of the blade by valuing the sharpening, absence of mellas, anchorage and others, following the technical specifications.

-Perform the change of the defective blade and adjust it, meeting specific safety standards.

-Check the status of the quadrant and its leveling.

-Change and adjust the defective quadrant, complying with the specific security rules.

-Nivate the piss for different brackets to cut.

C3: Perform the operations of the cutting of the graphic material from quality specifications and respecting the required safety standards.

CE3.1 Identify the control elements to be monitored by the machine during a cutting process.

CE3.2 Identify applicable labor and environmental risk prevention regulations that must be met during a cutting process.

CE3.3 In a scenario of graphic material cutting, from given instructions:

-Interpret the work order and schedule the machine for this job.

-Schedule power and output systems and check their proper operation.

-Make the cut, checking the quality parameters set in the quality system for guillotined: sampling, detection of repintados, distortions in the cut due to lack of pressure, excessive posteta height, de-levelling of the squads and others.

-Perform a court-work, complying with applicable labor and environmental risk prevention regulations.

C4: Perform flapping and placement operations of products cut into boxes or pallets by identifying the products by means of carcloths.

CE4.1 Identify the signaling and identification systems used normally in binding processes.

CE4.2 Fill out carcloths for the identification of the contents of boxes and pallets of different job assumptions, according to the methods established in a model company.

CE4.3 In a practical case of strapping from the cut copies.

-Perform the strapping of the cut copies.

-Pack them in boxes looking for the perfect fit to avoid further deterioration.

-Put the boxes into pallet by looking for optimization in the transport.

-Attach the carcloths according to the instructions on the work order set for this assumption.

C5: Apply the first-level maintenance operations on the machines that are involved in the folding process.

CE5.1 Identify the grease points arranged on the cutting machines according to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

CE5.2 Perform the greasing of the intended grease points in the maintenance rules of the cutting machine.

CE5.3 Check air circuits and filters according to established maintenance rules.

CE5.4 Perform the cleaning of the elements set in the maintenance rules.

Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real workbench:

C1 with respect to CE1.3 and CE1.4; C2 with respect to CE2.2; C3 with respect to CE3.4; C4 with respect to CE4.4.

Other capabilities:

Take responsibility for the work you are developing.

Respect internal company procedures and rules.

Habit to the business pace of the business.

Learn new concepts or procedures and effectively leverage training using acquired knowledge.

Transfer information clearly, in an orderly, structured, clear and precise manner respecting the channels established in the organization.

Recognize the organization's productive process.

Contents:

1. Cutting procedure

Cutting process. Technological principles.

Operations. Control parameters.

Cutting machines.

Plotted: classes and features.

Standard specifications for the pleadings.

Safety standards for machines, installations, and materials.

2. Auxiliary elements of cutting machines

Blades: Usage parameters.

Blade change systems.

Quadrant: Usage parameters.

Replacing quadrilets.

Vibrating tables.

Robotic systems for the guillotined.

Emergency systems.

3. Operation and management of guillotines

Electromechanical elements.

Running the elements of the guillotine.

Programming of computer guillotins.

Programming for each job type.

Using the cutting programs.

Applicable labour and environmental risk prevention regulations.

Personal protection equipment.

Training context parameters:

Spaces and installations:

The spaces and facilities will provide a response, in the form of a classroom, a workshop, a workshop of practices, a laboratory or a singular space, to the training needs, according to the Professional Context established in the Unit Partner competence, taking into account the applicable regulations of the production sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.

Professional or former trainer profile:

1.-Domain of knowledge and techniques related to tuning parameters, synchronizing equipment and performing the cutting of graphic materials, which will be accredited by one of the following two ways:

-Level 1 academic training (Spanish Framework of Qualifications for Higher Education) or other higher level education related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.

2.-Accredited pedagogical competence according to what the competent administrations establish.

TRAINING MODULE 4: PREPARING AND RUNNING FOLDING

Level: 2

Code: MF0693_2

Associated with UC: Adjust parameters, level elements, and perform folding

Duration: 150 hours

Assessment capabilities and criteria:

C1: Perform maneuver and service operations on folding machines, adjusting them to the requirements of the work.

CE1.1 Recognize the elements of the folding: power system, stations, output system, identifying the characteristics of each.

CE1.2 Identify and explain the use of the handlers that allow to calibrate the elements that form the transmission and pressure equipment.

CE1.3 In a scenario of equipment tuning, from a conveniently characterized work order:

-Perform functional maneuvers in correspondence with the type and format of the support to be folded by correcting possible defects.

-Adjust the power and marker system elements and mechanisms based on the size and type of support.

-Adapt the mode of function of elements and mechanisms of the output system to the media and features of the spin.

C2: Perform regulation operation on the stations and accessories of the folding machine according to the requirements of the work.

CE2.1 Adjust the pressure of the rollers according to the thickness and characteristics of the support to be folded.

CE2.2 Adjust the bags in their positions, according to the interpretation of a given work order.

CE2.3 Perform leveling and regulation operations of folding bags, according to the technical data of a given work order.

CE2.4 Perform placement and adjustment operations on folding machines of the cutting, perforated, cutting, perforated and cleft useful, according to given working instructions.

CE2.5 Adjust the elements of the power apparatus into different type folding machines:

-Stacked table.

-Vacuum cleaner air regulation.

-Regulation of the separation of folds.

-Regulation of the stack height.

-Regulation of the canopy control.

CE2.6 Optimize the synchronization elements, guides, and transport systems in the folding for the passage of the specification according to a given requirement.

CE2.7 In a practical scenario of regulating folding equipment, from a work order conveniently characterized, regulate the mechanisms of:

-Input of the pleadings.

-Transport of pleadings in the folding.

-Output of documents.

-Placing items that are involved in folding the work order and regulating them.

C3: Perform folding operations using specific equipment from technical specifications.

CE3.1 Relate the machines and materials to be folded with the folding speed.

CE3.2 Describe the method and frequency of obtaining folded samples during a specific spin.

CE3.3 Describe the defects of the folding system.

CE3.4 Operate with the main folding machines to perform the run and achieve the required quality.

CE3.5 In a scenario of folding, from given printed ones:

-Relate the causes and effects of the readjustment of the folding parameters.

-Dispose the materials properly on the machines, in order to obtain the required results and times.

-Obtain the folding of the printed with the required quality.

-Identify the risks and level of danger posed by the handling of materials, products and equipment used in folding.

CE3.6 Identify and describe the security mechanisms of the various folding machines: stop buttons, protections, housings, as well as the means of protection and clothing to be used.

C4: Perform flapping operations and placing folded products into boxes or pallets by identifying the products by means of carcloths.

CE4.1 Identify the signaling and identification systems used normally in binding processes.

CE4.2 Fill out carcloths for the identification of the contents of boxes and pallets of different job assumptions, according to the methods established in a model company.

CE4.3 In a scenario of strapping, from the folded copies:

-Perform the flapping of the folded copies.

-Pack them in boxes looking for the perfect fit to avoid further deterioration.

-Put the boxes into pallet by looking for optimization in the transport.

-Attach the carcloths according to the instructions on the work order set for this assumption.

C5: Apply the first-level maintenance operations on the machines that are involved in the folding process.

CE5.1 Identify the grease points arranged in the folding machines according to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

CE5.2 Perform the greasing of the intended grease points in the maintenance rules of the folding machine.

CE5.3 Check air circuits and filters according to established maintenance rules.

CE5.4 Perform the cleaning of the elements set in the maintenance rules.

Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real workbench:

C1 with respect to CE1.3 and CE1.4; C2 with respect to CE2.3; C3 with respect to CE3.3; C4 with respect to CE4.3.

Other capabilities:

Take responsibility for the work you are developing.

Demonstrate some autonomy in solving small contingencies related to their activity.

Respect internal company procedures and rules.

Adapt to organization, organizational and technological changes as well as new situations or contexts.

Interpret and execute work instructions.

Act quickly in problematic situations and not just wait.

Contents:

1. Folding procedure

Process folding. Technological principles.

Operations. Control parameters.

Folding machines.

Plotted: classes and features.

Standard specifications of the pleadings. Relationship to each machine.

Safety standards for machines, installations, and materials.

2. Auxiliary elements of folding machines

Encuadernación, Finished and Manipulated. Classes. Benefits. Teams. Features.

Types of machines for the binding process.

Auxiliary materials of the folding machines.

Security regulations in folding processes.

Emergency systems.

3. Folding operation and handling

Electromechanical elements.

Operation of the folding elements.

Computer Folding Programming.

Programming for each job type.

Using the folding programs.

Adjusting the machine for folding.

Folding configurations for different types of folding.

Synchronization of the elements of the folding.

Applicable labour and environmental risk prevention regulations.

Personal protection equipment.

Training context parameters:

Spaces and installations:

The spaces and facilities will provide a response, in the form of a classroom, a workshop, a workshop of practices, a laboratory or a singular space, to the training needs, according to the Professional Context established in the Unit Partner competence, taking into account the applicable regulations of the production sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.

Professional or former trainer profile:

1.-Domain of knowledge and techniques related to the adjustment of parameters, leveling elements and the performance of folding, which will be credited by one of the following two ways:

-Level 1 academic training (Spanish Framework of Qualifications for Higher Education) or other higher level education related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.

2.-Accredited pedagogical competence according to what the competent administrations establish.

ANNEX VI

Professional qualification: Troquelado

Professional Family: Graphic Arts

Level: 2

Code: ARG218_2

General Competition

Prepare materials, adjust process elements, and perform material die-cutting, intervening in the graphical process taking into account safety, quality, and productivity conditions.

Competition Units

UC0200_2: Operate in the graphical process under security, quality, and productivity

UC0694_2: Prepare the die elements in relation to the support to transform

UC0695_2: Adjust process elements and perform die-cut

Professional Environment

Professional Scope

Develops its professional activity in the area of transformed into graphic companies dedicated to the elaboration of graphic material with die-cut finishes, in entities of public or private nature, small, medium and large, regardless of their legal form. It usually works for an employed person and depends, where appropriate, on the functional and/or hierarchically of a superior. He may occasionally have people in his position and/or be team boss. The principles of universal accessibility are applied in the development of professional activity in accordance with the applicable regulations.

Productive Sectors

It is located in the productive sector of graphic industries: graphic arts, manipulated and transformed nationally or internationally that die publishing products, advertising, packaging and packaging and others, and in any other sector that has any of these activities.

Relevant occupations and jobs

The terms of the following relationship of occupations and jobs are used with a generic and omnicomprensivo character of women and men.

Autoplatin die-chelator machines

Machine operators for making labels with groups or die-cut bodies online

Operators of machines for making corrugated cardboard with die-cut body

cylindrical die-cutter machines

Linking paper, air mail, or large-fit printing for envelopes and over-bag and other transformed machines

Paper die machines with single or no printing for envelopes, overbag, and other transformed

Machine-cutting minerator machines

Printer die-cutter machines

Relief Machines

Die preps

Paper, cardboard, and related materials die-cutting machine operators

Associated Training (330 hours)

Training Modules

MF0200_2: Processes in Graphic Arts (120 hours)

MF0694_2: Preparing the die (90 hours)

MF0695_2: Preparing and executing the die (120 hours)

COMPETITION UNIT 1: OPERATING IN THE GRAPHICAL PROCESS UNDER SECURITY, QUALITY, AND PRODUCTIVITY

Level: 2

Code: UC0200_2

Professional Realizations and Realization Criteria:

RP 1: Determine the characteristics of the graphical products to establish the appropriate manufacturing process, taking into account the available elements and applicable regulations.

CR 1.1 Graphic products are identified from the data provided by the originals, sketches and models, in response to the established technical specifications.

CR 1.2 The specifications on the graphic product to be performed are valued by identifying their typology and functional and communicative characteristics-product use, applicable regulations and others.

CR 1.3 The functional and technological relationships of the graphic product to be made are established according to its components: stationery, stuchaery, publishing, advertising, and others.

CR 1.4 The phases required for the reproduction of the graphic product: preprint, binding printing and finishes, are set from their specifications, introducing the data into the workflow.

RP 2: Perform the standardization of the production parameters in the workflows for each phase of the graphical product, according to the specifications set.

CR 2.1 The production phases in the graphical process are determined by specifying each of the elements involved in the process: technical parameters, product typology, and others.

CR 2.2 Production parameters are standardized in the workflow according to the typology of the graphic product: packaging, editorial product, billboard and others, following established procedures.

CR 2.3 The parameters and manufacturing elements of the graphic product at different stages of the process: preprint, printing, binding and transformed, are checked according to the technical specifications.

CR 2.4 The productive environment in each of the phases of the graphical process is determined from the established technical specifications.

CR 2.5 Graphic process tracking is done through workflows by facilitating planning, automation, procedures, and other factors that affect the production environment.

CR 2.6 The incidents that arise in the process are recorded in the workflow following established procedures to take the necessary corrective and preventive measures.

RP 3: Verify quality parameters in the process using specific equipment to obtain the product with the established standards.

CR 3.1 The most significant quality features in each of the phases of the process are identified according to established variables and attributes.

CR 3.2 The graphical product in process is checked, verifying that it complies with the fundamental concepts of quality in the different phases of its manufacturing according to the established standards and standards.

CR 3.3 Quality procedures at each stage of the manufacturing process of the graphic product are applied methodically according to the technical specifications of the product, using the specific measurement equipment.

CR 3.4 Control frequencies are applied according to the type of characteristics to be controlled and the number of product units to be obtained, following established procedures.

CR 3.5 The results and incidences of the quality control of the graphical product are recorded using the corresponding control sheets by entering them into the workflow.

CR 3.6 Quality verification in the graphical process is carried out in compliance with applicable labour and environmental risk prevention regulations.

Professional Context:

Production media:

Specific computers and software. Digital printer. Standards of communication. Workflows. Normalized light pupitre. Measurement and control tools and tools: densitometer, tipometer, odometer, colorimeter and spectrophotometer.

Products and results:

Production parameters entered into the workflow. Recorded quality control incidents. Completed control sheets. Failures or defects in the registered processes. Quality parameters identified throughout the graphical process.

Information used or generated:

Production order. Technical documentation of preprint, printing and post-pressure equipment and machines. Applicable rules for the prevention of occupational and environmental risks. Quality standards and standards to be applied in the graphical process. Technical equipment sheets. Maintenance manuals. Company quality control plans.

COMPETITION UNIT 2: PREPARE THE DIE-CUT ELEMENTS IN RELATION TO THE SUPPORT TO TRANSFORM

Level: 2

Code: UC0694_2

Professional Realizations and Realization Criteria:

RP 1: Get the technical data from the die to prepare from the production orders to start the process according to the technical and quality requirements.

CR 1.1 The production order is reviewed by checking that it contains all the technical and quality information to start the process of preparing the die: materials, job parameters, technical specifications and others.

CR 1.2 Production sheet data relating to die-to-die materials are collated with methods and equipment used in the company, valuing their viability.

CR 1.3 The technical information about the elements that make up the die is contrasted with the customer's specifications, models or authorized samples, checking their match.

CR 1.4 The possible incidents arising are recorded in the production order, noting the typology such as material incompatibility and others, according to the procedures established in the control plan.

RP 2: Prepare the die support and replacement material to power the die-cutting machine in a way that ensures the continuity of the process.

CR 2.1 The quantity and quality of the die support is checked by verifying that it corresponds to what is set in the production order.

CR 2.2 The die support is transported to the die-cutting machine in accordance with the established safety standards.

CR 2.3 The die support is manipulated and treated according to the established working methods by ensuring its input and passage through the machine and maintaining quality signs.

CR 2.4 The stack and the support stored conditions are checked periodically, according to the control plan set.

CR 2.5 The die support is signposted, maintaining identification and traceability through the process.

CR 2.6 The replacement material: cleft cutting blades, gums and necessary tools are prepared and available in sufficient quantity for eventual replacement when necessary.

RP 3: Prepare the die for the completion of the die-cut according to the technical specifications and media to be processed.

CR 3.1 Required gums are placed in the die preventing die support from sticking to the blades.

CR 3.2 The excess ejector is prepared according to the needs of the die support following the guidelines set out in the die-chelator's technical instructions.

CR 3.3 The poses separator is placed in the die following the specifications, so that its functionality is secured.

CR 3.4 The fix sheet is made with a blank sheet and a calco, applying a slight pressure on the anvil.

CR 3.5 Hend counterforms are performed using various systems such as cardboard, baquelite strips, chanel and their pitch widths are adjusted according to the thickness of the support by the use of gages.

CR 3.6 The flaxes are determined from the thickness and quality of the support, preparing them according to the shape and anchorage necessary for their disposal when their replacement is necessary.

CR 3.7 The die preparation operations are performed in compliance with the applicable labour and environmental risk prevention regulations.

RP 4: Review the die by visual observation to check that it corresponds to its plane and that its constituent elements are those specified.

CR 4.1 The measurements of the die, leftovers, figures and others, are checked by verifying that they correspond to the plane and to the corresponding production instructions.

CR 4.2 The cut and cleft blades are reviewed by checking their situation in the die, their perpendicular to the base and the notches for attachment to the poses.

CR 4.3 The die is inspected by replacing, if any, blades, gums and defective reliefs according to the established process.

CR 4.4 The die is manipulated according to the procedures established by the company, avoiding damage and damage to it.

CR 4.5 Troquels are protected and stored according to established standards, ensuring their preservation and duration.

CR 4.6 The use times of the die are recorded in the specific record sheets indicating the number of strokes and machine inputs to determine their useful life by valuing the recorded data.

Professional Context:

Production media:

Computer equipment, table with white light, papirometer, sword hygrometer, king foot, metric tape, palmer, gauge and shore durometer. Die elements: cutting blades, cleft blades, gums and others. Die supports: paper, cardboard, complex materials and others.

Products and results:

Complete Mounted and Ready. Support for prepared die. Cutting and cleft blades, flaxes and prepared repositioning gums. Stored dies.

Information used or generated:

Production order. Technical documentation of equipment and machine tools. Drawings and models of distribution, cutting and relief. Applicable rules for the prevention of occupational and environmental risks. Applicable standards and quality standards. Fix sheet.

COMPETITION UNIT 3: ADJUST PROCESS ELEMENTS AND PERFORM DIE-CUT

Level: 2

Code: UC0695_2

Professional Realizations and Realization Criteria:

RP 1: Regular the mechanisms of commissioning of the die-cutting machine according to the technical instructions, the work to be carried out and the materials to be used.

CR 1.1 The equipment and mechanisms of the power system of the die-cutting machine are checked by ensuring that they correspond to the die support, according to the technical requirements and the user manual.

CR 1.2 The proper operation of the machine is checked by checking its elements and starting up, correcting the anomalies by the established processes.

CR 1.3 The equipment and mechanisms of the evacuation system: ejector, eject needles, and poses separator are checked by ensuring their operation in correspondence with the die support and the product to be obtained.

CR 1.4 The die position elements in the die-cutting machine are controlled by checking their adjustment by observation in the parameters control panel of the die.

CR 1.5 Machine regulation operations are performed in compliance with applicable labour and environmental risk prevention standards.

RP 2: Perform the adjustment of the pressure on the die-cutting machine to ensure the machine blow required according to the technical specifications.

CR 2.1 The separation between platen and eardrum or anvil is leveled by ensuring the pressure of the press blow.

CR 2.2 The cut and the cleft are leveled using different hikes taking into account the thickness of the material to be used.

CR 2.3 The counterforms are lowered by avoiding unwanted marks on the die and jam support on the machine.

CR 2.4 The relief pressure is adjusted by preparing it to obtain the depth and the required stamping record.

CR 2.5 Pressure adjustment preparation operations are performed in compliance with applicable labor and environmental risk prevention regulations.

RP 3: Perform the die-cut, achieving the optimum performance of the machine, the quality specified in the work order and respecting the established safety standards.

CR 3.1 The die-cutting machine is set in motion by adjusting the speed to the optimum production requirements and the parameters required for the process and the current graphic product.

CR 3.2 The first die-cut graphic supports are controlled in sufficient quantity, by visual observation of the record of the die with the impression, parallel of cuts and wounds and absence of defects.

CR 3.3 The results of the die-cutting process are controlled by observing the following characteristics: clean cuts, depth and width of the hets, trepids, perforates and others.

CR 3.4 The control of the die-cutting process is carried out by monitoring the supports: cardboard, cardboard, complexes and others, according to samples, drawings, sketches and technical specifications of the work order.

CR 3.5 The obtained die-cut supports are checked sequentially, contrasting the samples obtained with the samples or models of the graphic product, according to the technical specifications.

CR 3.6 The correction and adjustment of the die-cutting machine is performed by operating on the elements and mechanisms of feeding, stamping and evacuation.

CR 3.7 The correction and adjustment of the materials is done by modifying its physical-mechanical characteristics: supplementing increases, changing strils, reinforcing reliefs and others.

CR 3.8 The die-cutting operations are carried out in compliance with the applicable labour and environmental risk prevention regulations.

RP 4: Perform first-level maintenance operations on the die-cutting machine, applying the established procedures.

CR 4.1 The components of the die-cutting machine are maintained at the cleaning levels laid down in the maintenance regulations.

CR 4.2 First-level maintenance is done following the planned plans and recording the required data in the procedures.

CR 4.3 The periodic greasing of the arranged grease points is performed according to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

CR 4.4 The operation of air circuits and filters is verified according to established maintenance standards.

CR 4.5 All security devices are checked according to current regulations.

CR 4.6 Machine elements are maintained at the cleaning levels set in the company's maintenance regulations.

CR 4.7 The auxiliary dust and trim elements are adjusted to avoid environmental contamination.

RP 5: Register the data from the die-cut process to contribute to the control of production plans by introducing the incident, quality and productivity data.

CR 5.1 The results and incidences of self-control are available in the control tabs for analysis.

CR 5.2 The possible incidences in the quality observed in the troquelated graphic product such as cracked, courteous, intermittent and other cuts are recorded in the production parts as incidents of self-control.

CR 5.3 Production orders are completed by checking that the productivity specified for the die-cut process matches the one obtained.

CR 5.4 The data obtained from the die-cutting process are recorded in the production parts, making it possible to analyse it in subsequent work.

Professional Context:

Production media:

Troquelar machine. Troquel. Table with white light, papirometer, sword hygrometer, king foot, metric tape, palmer, gauge, cleft reglete and shore durometer.

Products and results:

Put to the point of the die-chelator. Completed control sheets. Quality control performed on die-cut samples. Machine adjustments. Die-cut graphic supports. First-level maintenance.

Information used or generated:

Production order. Technical documentation of equipment and machine tools. Drawings and models of distribution, cutting and relief. Applicable rules for the prevention of occupational and environmental risks. Applicable quality standards and standards.

FORMATIVE MODULE 1: PROCESSES IN GRAPHIC ARTS

Level: 2

Code: MF0200_2

Associated with UC: Operate in the graphical process under security, quality, and productivity

Duration: 120 hours

Assessment capabilities and criteria:

C1: Analyze the entire graphical process and its different phases: preprint, binding and transformed printing, considering the communication between them using standardization models.

CE1.1 Explain the characteristics and type configuration of graphic arts companies according to the production phase: preprint, print, binding, transformed.

CE1.2 In a defined production environment, describe through workflows the sequence of tasks or operations for obtaining the product.

CE1.3 Analyze, from the design point of view, the characteristics of a given graphical product:

-Formats and measures.

-Typology.

-Colors.

-Media.

-Encuadernation and finish.

CE1.4 In a practical scenario of producing a given graphic product, relate and sequence the different preprint phases that have been involved in its elaboration:

-Text: body, family, style, paragraph, interline.

-Trams: line, point shape, and angulation.

-Color separation.

-Plot and paging systems used.

CE1.5 In a practical scenario of crafting a given graphical product, describe and recognize the characteristics of the printing system used according to:

-Type of media used.

-Tintas: classes and layers.

-Tramado.

-Profile of the characters.

-Footprint or relief on the media.

-Effects on printing.

-Number of passes on machines.

CE1.6 Analyze the different preprint, printing and binding and finishing systems, describing and relating their main phases to the machines, equipment, raw materials and products used.

CE1.7 Describe the most significant print electronic systems.

CE1.8 Describe and recognize the characteristics of the post-pressure process for the elaboration of a type graphic product according to the defined process and the materials used.

C2: Classify graphic products according to their composition and functional characteristics: stationery, carpeting, stanchery, editing and advertising.

CE2.1 Explain the functional characteristics of the different graphic products: Stationery, Carpet, Stucery, Editing and Advertising.

CE2.2 Identify the structural characteristics of the different graphic products: Stationery, Carpet, Stucery, Editing and Advertising.

CE2.3 From graphic product samples:

-Recognize its physicochemical composition and identify its functional capacity.

-Rate the communicative and functional capacity of the different graphic products.

-Classify the samples of proposed graphic products according to their nature and functionality: stationery, carpeting, stanchery, editing and advertising.

C3: Recognize and analyze color metrics and metrics used in graphic arts.

CE3.1 Identify chromatic spaces: RGB, CMYK, HSB, CIE Lab, used in graphic arts.

CE3.2 Describe the measurement equipment used in the color measurement: colorimeter, glitter, spectrophotometer, identifying the application of each of them.

CE3.3 Describe the various lighting sources, color temperature, and observation conditions to reproduce color under standardized conditions.

CE3.4 In a practical scenario of color measurement and from different samples of color originals:

-Identify color parameters: brightness, saturation, tone, and metamery index.

-Represent colorimetric values in chromatic spaces.

-Evaluate color differences and their ability to play in the graphical system.

-Make measurements of color variables with the colorimeter and the electrometer over different color samples indicating the readings in a template.

C4: Relating applicable labour and environmental risk prevention rules in the graphical process with the operations that are developed in each of its phases.

CE4.1 Recognize applicable labor and environmental risk prevention regulations in the graphical process.

CE4.2 Identify the security elements to be installed in the different places and risk teams in the graphical industries.

CE4.3 Using practical examples, identify the security labels that appear on the machines and products used in the graphical process.

CE4.4 Describe and relate the rules applicable to the prevention of occupational and environmental risks, with the different phases of the graphical process.

CE4.5 Recognize the environmental documents and procedures applied in the graphical process.

C5: Analyze the quality control process in a graphical arts 'process'.

CE5.1 Identify the fundamental phases and concepts of quality control in manufacturing in the graphic arts industries.

CE5.2 Describe a raw material receipt control process succinctly.

CE5.3 Describe the instruments used in quality control: densitometres, colorimeters, control strips and production line control devices, identifying their application in the different phases of the graphical process.

CE5.4 Perform densitometric and colorimetric measurements from a preprint test, and from certain print standards, by assessing that the color range reproduction is consistent with the set standards.

CE5.5 In a scenario of quality control in print processing, from a printed product, and established standards:

-Select the required measurement instrument.

-Perform metering instrument calibration.

-Perform densitometric, colorimetric, 'trapping', sliding, and gray balance measurements.

-Set the chromatic space.

-Perform different measures on the control strip.

-Check the setting with the set standards.

CE5.6 In a practical scenario of quality control in the process of transformed, from a graphical product to be bound and/or manipulate, identify and evaluate the defects detected in:

-Format and margins.

-Cutting marks.

-Log tokens.

-Signatures.

-Fibre sense.

-Repainted.

-Troquels.

CE5.7 Describe the most significant quality features of the products:

-Encuaderation and manipulated: subjective assessment, cut marks, tracks, log signals, collared.

-Resistance to folding.

-Resistance to rub.

-Printing: density, 'trapping', stamping gain, color balance, pasting, sliding, logging.

-Preprint: tests, standards.

Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real workbench:

C1 with respect to CE1.3, CE1.4 and CE1.5; C3 with respect to CE3.4; C5 with respect to CE5.4, CE5.5 and CE5.6.

Other capabilities:

Take responsibility for the work you are developing.

Demonstrate some autonomy in solving small contingencies related to their activity.

Respect internal company procedures and rules.

Maintain an assertive, empathetic and conciliatory attitude to others by demonstrating cordiality and kindness in dealing.

Recognize the organization's productive process.

Participate and actively collaborate on the work team.

Contents:

1. Graphical process

Types of graphic products.

Company types: organization and structure.

Standardization and communication models. Workflows.

Preprint systems. Classes of originals. Latent image, revealed process. Matching the digital workflow environment.

Input peripherals, output peripherals, specific software and hardware, processing and test systems.

Plotting and mounting. Elements of the assembly. Specific software.

Print systems. Equipment, capabilities, comparison of different systems.

Types of inks and media for each print system.

Encuaderation and transformed. Classes. Benefits. Teams. Features.

Paper and paperboard manipulated. Manipulated from other materials.

2. Color and its measurement

Nature of light.

Electromagnetic spectrum.

Philosophy of vision.

Chromatic Space.

Factors that affect color perception.

Color Theory. Additive and subtractive synthesis of color.

Color rendering systems: MUNSELL, RGB, HSL, HSV, PANTONE, CIE, CIE-Lab, GAFT.

Color measurement instruments: densitometres, colorimeters, glinometers, and spectrophotometers. Color assessment.

3. Standards for the prevention of labour and environmental risks applicable to graphic arts processes

Safety plans and rules.

Rules in force.

Signals and alarms.

Environmental regulations.

4. Quality in graphic arts processes

More characteristic tests, instruments and measurements.

Preprint quality: point gain, gray balance, and density.

Print variables (print density, contrast, penetration, fixed, stamping gain, color and gray balance).

Control areas in print. Measurement.

Quality in post-pressure.

Visual control of binding and manipulated.

Checking for bound and manipulated defects.

Standardization of quality.

5. Quality control in graphic arts

Quality in manufacturing.

Quality control. Concepts involved.

Control elements.

Control Phases: receipt of materials, processes, and products.

Rules and standards for the graphical process.

Training context parameters:

Spaces and installations:

The spaces and facilities will provide a response, in the form of a classroom, a workshop, a workshop of practices, a laboratory or a singular space, to the training needs, according to the Professional Context established in the Unit Partner competence, taking into account the applicable regulations of the production sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.

Professional or former trainer profile:

1. Domain of knowledge and techniques related to production operations in the graphical process under conditions of safety, quality and productivity, which will be accredited by one of the following two forms:

-Level 2 academic training (Spanish Framework of Qualifications for Higher Education), Technical Engineering, Technical Architecture, Diplomacy or other higher level of professional field.

-Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.

2. Accredited pedagogical competence in accordance with what is established by the competent administrations.

TRAINING MODULE 2: PREPARING THE DIE

Level: 2

Code: MF0694_2

Associated with UC: Preparing die-cut elements in relation to support to transform

Duration: 90 hours

Assessment capabilities and criteria:

C1: Interpret the work procedures in the preparation of the die elements, from production orders.

CE1.1 Perform a sequencing of the die-cut process by interpreting a work order taken from the productive reality, identifying the materials in each case.

CE1.2 In a practical assessment of working procedures for the production of a die, from a given production order:

-Check that the material to die corresponds to that of the order.

-Rate the method to use.

-Identify the capabilities of the intended machine.

CE1.3 From a hypothetical customer, analyze that the generated production order data meets the customer's specifications.

C2: Check the characteristics of the graphics support to die and the replacement materials of the die in relation to the equipment used.

CE2.1 Identify the supports used in die-cutting processes such as paper, cardboard, cardboard, complex supports and others, valuing their characteristics.

CE2.2 Recognize the replacement elements used in the manufacture of dies, such as: cutting blades, cleft blades and others.

CE2.3 From the specifications of a production order verify, the quantity of the die support, the quality of the support-material status, planning, registration and other-physical characteristics, cutting and squadron, repainted and others.

CE2.4 Manipulate and treat different types of graphic media to die so that your input and pass through a given machine does not suffer from stoppages or impairments.

CE2.5 In a scenario of die-cut from some work instructions given:

-Perform support traceability through the process by signaling and identifying it.

-Pillar and store the die-chelated support by fulfilling an established control for a proposed scenario.

-Identify die replacement materials: cutting blades, cleft blades, take-off gums, upside and others.

CE2.6 In a practical case of a die, prepare sufficient replacement materials for use if necessary, taking into account the type of die support and its spin.

C3: Perform die preparation operations by adjusting to the technical specifications, samples, and support to die.

CE3.1 Recognize die preparation instructions in different type work instructions.

CE3.2 Flout a die according to the shape and anchor required for replacement when necessary.

CE3.3 Engage a die so that it does not stick to the die support in the blades.

CE3.4 In a practical scenario of preparing a die from a die-cutter and working patterns:

-Prepare the ejector of leftovers by following the given guidelines.

-Ensure the functionality of the poses separator.

-Confect the fix sheet by using a blank sheet and a calco giving the appropriate anvil pressure.

-Perform the counterforms of the hended by the chanel systems, with cardboard, baquelite strips and others, adjusting their widths by gages.

C4: Contrast the die with its model plane to check its correspondence by visual observation and assess that the constituent elements are those specified.

CE4.1 Interpret the blueprints of a case exemplified case:

-Measures.

-Overrides.

-Figures.

-Distribution.

CE4.2 Review a die with respect to your model plane by checking that there are no blades or defective reliefs.

CE4.3 In a practical, die-checking scenario, from the model plane:

-Check the measurements of the die compared to the given plane.

-Rate the elements that make up the die in relation to the plane.

-Review the cut and cleft blades by checking their perpendicular to the base and the notches for attachment to the poses.

-Register the use of the die to determine its useful life by scoring: number of hits, machine input, and others.

-Use the measurement tools according to the parameters and variables set in the die-cut job.

CE4.4 Using an example taken from the productive reality, protect and store troquels according to established standards to ensure their conservation and duration.

Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real workbench:

C1 with respect to CE1.2; C2 with respect to CE2.2, CE2.5 and CE2.6; C3 with respect to CE3.4; C4 with respect to CE4.3.

Other capabilities:

Communicate effectively with the right people at every moment, respecting the channels established in the organization.

Demonstrate flexibility to understand changes.

Respect internal organization procedures and rules.

Habing to the organization's work rate

Interpret and execute work instructions.

Contents:

1. Die supports

Media types: paper, cardboard, plastics, complex materials, and others.

Physical and chemical properties of media.

Internal structure.

Composition.

Media behavior.

Manufacturers ' technical specifications sheets.

2. Die materials

Flats.

Blades.

Ejecting Gums; physical characteristics, types.

Carthinas.

Baquelite strips.

Chanel.

Reorder Materials.

3. Preparing the die

Distribution planes.

Realization and adjustments of hended counterforms.

Ejector from leftovers.

Poses tab.

fixes.

Stacking, storage, and signaling.

Applicable labour and environmental risk prevention regulations.

Training context parameters:

Spaces and installations:

The spaces and facilities will provide a response, in the form of a classroom, a workshop, a workshop of practices, a laboratory or a singular space, to the training needs, according to the Professional Context established in the Unit Partner competence, taking into account the applicable regulations of the production sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.

Professional or former trainer profile:

1.-Domain of knowledge and techniques related to the preparation of the die elements in relation to the support to be transformed, which will be credited by one of the following two forms:

-Level 1 academic training (Spanish Framework of Qualifications for Higher Education) or other higher level education related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.

2.-Accredited pedagogical competence according to what the competent administrations establish.

TRAINING MODULE 3: PREPARING AND EXECUTING THE DIE

Level: 2

Code: MF0695_2

Associated with UC: Adjust process elements and perform die-cut

Duration: 120 hours

Assessment capabilities and criteria:

C1: Perform regulatory operations on die-cutting equipment by means of commissioning and proper operation, in accordance with technical and production instructions.

CE1.1 Identify the elements of the die-cutting machine on which the adjustment is performed: start-up, pressure, unemployment and other.

CE1.2 Regular the input of the support into the power system of a die machine, achieving the continuous step of the support by the machine without stops or deterioration of the material.

CE1.3 In a practical scenario of adjusting the die-chelator, from a given media and work instructions:

-Adjust all machine elements and start up with proper operation.

-Adjust the equipment and mechanisms of the evacuation system: ejector, eject needles, poses separator, and others for the established support.

CE1.4 In a scenario of setting pressure in die-cutting machine, from a given graphical support:

-Adjust the separation between platen and eardrum to ensure press stroke pressure.

-Niven the cut and the cleft by measuring the thickness of the graphic support to die.

-Rebar the counterforms by avoiding unwanted marks and jams on the machine.

-Adjust the relief pressure by obtaining the required depth and stamping record.

C2: Perform the die-cut operation, monitoring the quality of the process by taking samples, according to specifications and model plans.

CE2.1 Identify the optimal speed parameters for the execution of the die on a type machine and the influence of the support in the process.

CE2.2 Perform the die-cut with constant production parameters on different materials and check the results, determining the relationship between parameters and supports.

CE2.3 Perform the die-cut process, modifying production variables and valuing their results for testing, determining the most appropriate.

CE2.4 In a practical case of die-cutting of a graphic support, from given production instructions:

-Check that the characteristics of the die-cutting process are in accordance with the required production parameters, speed, command desks, and others.

-Check the fibre address of the media.

-Select samples according to the marked periodicity.

CE2.5 In a practical scenario of quality testing in the die-cut process, from an already die-cut sample:

-Check the log for printing.

-Review the parallelism of cuts and hended.

-Check the absence of defect in the media.

CE2.6 In a practical scenario of adjusting the die-cut process, from monitored samples:

-Rate in samples the mismatches due to the machine and due to the elements of the die and support.

-Correct mismatches, operating on power, die-cut and/or evacuation mechanisms

-Correct the mismatches, modifying the physical-mechanical characteristics of the materials acting on the supplements, increases, change of strapping, reinforcement of reliefs and others.

C3: Apply first-level maintenance operations on the die-cut machines following the established maintenance rules.

CE3.1 Identify the grease points arranged on the die-cutting machines according to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

CE3.2 Perform the greasing of the grease points provided for in the maintenance rules of the die machine.

CE3.3 Check the air circuits and filters of the die-cutting machine according to the established maintenance standards.

CE3.4 Perform the cleaning of the elements set in the maintenance rules.

C4: Analyze occupational and environmental risk prevention plans and relevant applicable regulations to correctly use media and safety equipment in the die-cutting process.

CE4.1 Relate and describe the safety rules regarding the preparation and adjustment operations of the elements of the die-cut process.

CE4.2 Describe the properties and uses of the most employed personal protective clothing and equipment in the graphic industry for the preparation and completion of the die-cut.

CE4.3 In a practical assessment of safety in the die-cut process, based on a number of occupational and environmental risk prevention plans for companies in the processed sector:

-Identify and describe the most relevant aspects of each plan, collected in the documentation that contains it.

-Identify and describe risk factors and situations for health and safety in your plans.

-Relate and describe the appropriate preventive measures and prevention methods established to prevent accidents.

Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real workbench:

C1 with respect to CE1.3 and CE1.4; C2 with respect to CE2.4, CE2.5 and CE2.6; C4 with respect to CE4.3.

Other capabilities

Communicate effectively with the right people at every moment, respecting the channels established in the organization.

Demonstrate flexibility to understand changes.

Respect internal organization procedures and rules.

Habing to the organization's work rate

Interpret and execute work instructions.

Contents:

1. Die machines

Types and use of each type.

Applications for each die machine for each type of graphic product.

Inline machines with cardboard, microchannel, cardboard, and other manufacturing machines.

Top-level maintenance.

Safety standards for machines, installations, and materials.

Factors and situations of risk.

Protective measures.

Applicable labour and environmental risk prevention regulations.

2. Parts and mechanisms of a die machine

Set up and programming.

The input of the folds.

Mechanisms of operation of the machine.

Pletine.

Regulation of the die in the plate.

Pressures and Balanced Settings.

Output of Folds.

Eject system.

Environmental prevention and protection systems.

Personal protection equipment.

3. Die-cut quality control systems

Quality in manufacturing.

Quality control. Concepts involved.

Control elements.

Control Phases: receipt of materials, processes, and products.

Applicable quality rules.

Training context parameters:

Spaces and installations:

The spaces and facilities will provide a response, in the form of a classroom, a workshop, a workshop of practices, a laboratory or a singular space, to the training needs, according to the Professional Context established in the Unit Partner competence, taking into account the applicable regulations of the production sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.

Professional or former trainer profile:

1.-Domain of the knowledge and techniques related to the adjustment of the elements of the process and completion of the die-chelation, which will be accredited by one of the following two forms:

-Level 1 academic training (Spanish Framework of Qualifications for Higher Education) or other higher level education related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.

2.-Accredited pedagogical competence according to what the competent administrations establish.

ANNEX VII

Professional qualification: Graphic product design

Professional Family: Graphic Arts

Level: 3

Code: ARG219_3

General Competition

Develop graphic projects from the product's initial specifications by developing sketches, selecting and adapting color, images, and fonts, creating graphical elements, models, and final arts by using IT tools, performing budgets based on project characteristics and verifying the quality of the finished product.

Competition Units

UC0696_3: Develop graphic product projects

UC0697_3: Treat images and create graphic elements with the appropriate color management parameters

UC0698_3: Compose graphic elements, images, and texts according to typographical architecture theory and layout

UC0699_3: Prepare and verify end arts for distribution

Professional Environment

Professional Scope

Develops its professional activity in the graphic design department in graphic arts companies, publishers and communication companies in entities of public or private nature, small, medium and large and with independence from its legal form, it works both self-employed and self-employed. You may have staff in your position at times, for seasons or in a stable way. The principles of universal accessibility are applied in the development of professional activity in accordance with the applicable regulations.

Productive Sectors

It is located in the productive sectors of graphic, manipulated and transformed industries that design publishing products, advertising, packaging and packaging and in any other sector that has some of these activities.

Relevant occupations and jobs

The terms of the following relationship of occupations and jobs are used with a generic and omnicomprensivo character of women and men.

Grafists

Finalists art

Graphic Designers

Maquetists

Associated Training (600 hours)

Training Modules

MF0696_3: Graphic Products Project (180 hours)

MF0697_3: Creative image editing and graphic element design (150 hours)

MF0698_3: Typographical architecture and layout (120 hours)

MF0699_3: Final arts preparation (150 hours)

COMPETITION UNIT 1: DEVELOP GRAPHICAL PRODUCT PROJECTS

Level: 3

Code: UC0696_3

Professional Realizations and Realization Criteria:

RP 1: Determine the customer requirements regarding the graphical product project by collecting them in the report record, taking into account the needs study.

CR 1.1 The type of graphic product to be developed: communication, editorial, packaging and packaging, and the number of copies or reproductions, are clearly established with the client according to the objectives and the conditions economic.

CR 1.2 The characteristics of the final product are established with the customer by specifying the supports on which they are intended to be used and the technical and budgetary requirements, depending on the support or supports on the to use: printing, computer, tablet or smartphone, ebook or others.

CR 1.3 Data about the customer who performs the order are determined by valuing the product range, the type of services offered and the corporate image: logo, corporate colors, manual and corporate identity standards. your company.

CR 1.4 The data on the target audience are described, indicating: socio-economic level, age, gender, habits, attitudes and motivations; market studies and brief assessment of the competition.

CR 1.5 The texts, illustrations, or images are concretized with the client by determining which ones are contributed and what to create.

CR 1.6 Graphic product colors are specified with the customer using samples, colorimetric measurements, or manufacturer references.

CR 1.7 Minimum reporting requirements are agreed with the customer, contemplating according to product type: labeling, barcode, composition and expiration date or any other that sets applicable regulations.

CR 1.8 The characteristics of the product to be contained by the packaging and/or packaging to be designed, where appropriate, are recorded taking into account the nature, physical state, support, size, shape and toxicity, indicating the characteristics of the product. marking to be performed.

CR 1.9 The record report is reviewed with the customer by checking that all the information and specifications required for the project development are available, including, in addition, sketches, sketches and samples of any other graphical information provided by the client.

RP 2: Determine the technical characteristics according to the type of graphic, communication, editorial, packaging, or packaging, in order to define the instructions for the realization.

CR 2.1 The type of support or display device, the required software, the number of inks and the printing systems, to be used are selected according to the objectives, the budgetary constraints and the quality of the desired job.

CR 2.2 Formats are determined by ensuring that they are compatible with the media type and the chosen printing system.

CR 2.3 The cutting, cleft and folding conditions are established by considering the product requirements and the thickness and dimensions of the support.

CR 2.4 Finishes are chosen based on the conditions of use and the characteristics of the process, by agreeing with the client.

CR 2.5 The distribution of elements or the conditions of compaging are determined according to the type of graphic product, the final support the editorial line and the technical and economic conditions of the process.

CR 2.6 The selection of inks, supports and finishes is carried out taking into account legal, sanitary, environmental, conditions of use and hazardous requirements.

CR 2.7 The structural factors in the design of packaging/packaging, are established, addressing the needs of resistance, tightness, closure, inviolability, dispensing, ergonomics, versatility and protection against the forgery and others.

CR 2.8 The instructions concerning the technical characteristics of the product are briefly and clearly written in writing.

RP 3: Draw the outlines of the graphic product to design taking into account the technical and aesthetic characteristics and parameters of the product for further development.

CR 3.1 The format of the graphic product to be designed is established by looking for its adequacy to the target determined with the customer and the distribution or printing system chosen.

CR 3.2 The graphic elements are distributed harmoniously respecting the space-format in the composition.

CR 3.3 The objects are drawn by applying rendering techniques and normalization, and by maintaining the proportion of the objects represented, by specific programs or by the raised hand.

CR 3.4 The outlines of the outlines are run at once with clean, uniform strokes.

CR 3.5 Line thicknesses are executed by having the desired rules and effects present.

CR 3.6 Shadows and blurs are applied considering the limitations of the printing or output system.

RP 4: Develop graphic product sketches by applying basic design principles to respond to customer-raised needs.

CR 4.1 The sketches are prepared based on the parameters set out in the previous outlines and the needs raised for the graphic product to be designed.

CR 4.2 The design of the sketch is structured according to the principles of psychological association, proximity, similarity, continuity and material and cultural symmetry and respecting in its composition the principles of proportion, balance, reference, symmetry, harmony, tension and rhythm.

CR 4.3 The technical elements that make up the sketch are integrated using visual synthesis to combine ideas and materials.

CR 4.4 The message of the sketch graph is developed by applying visual discourse, seeking understanding and simplicity in the underlying ideas and enhancing innovative elements, cultural and/or contextual information. promote visual impact.

CR 4.5 The composition of the elements of the sketch is performed with respect to the principles of proportion, balance, reference, symmetry, harmony, tension and rhythm.

CR 4.6 The sketch is colored by applying color theory, respecting the conditions of readability, the principles of harmony, contrast, saturation and inverse proportion.

CR 4.7 The provisions of the texts are made taking into account the ergonomic conditions, reading habits and visual logic: hierarchization, coherence and meaning.

CR 4.8 The design developed in the sketch is tested, checking that it is suitable for reproduction.

RP 5: Develop the graphical product budget from technical features, delivery times, and market conditions.

CR 5.1 The print budget is requested by specifying all the characteristics of the graphic product such as: delivery times, size, number of images and color, type of tests, and delivery formats.

CR 5.2 The post-pressure budget is requested to indicate delivery times, number of sheets, type of binding, manipulated, peeled and packaged.

CR 5.3 Graphic standards are specified in the budget based on project characteristics and the type of graphic product designed.

CR 5.4 The creation budget is prepared by applying the fee rates recommended by the professional associations, market conditions and fees of the company of the designer.

CR 5.5 The budget is prepared by considering the costs of creation, manufacturing, distribution and intellectual property rights and patents or licenses.

Professional Context:

Production media:

Equipment and graphic design software. Presentation software. Image processing software. Budget-making software. Printing peripherals. Drawing and drawing tools and tools.

Products and results:

Record report. Instructions for making and manufacturing orders. Outlines of graphic products drawn. Sketches of graphic communication products, editorials, packaging and packaging developed. Budgets made.

Information used or generated:

Needs study. Legislation on intellectual property rights. Print budget. Post-pressure budget. Delivery times. Originals. Color samples. Media samples. Catalogues. Customer indications. Applicable rules for the database.

COMPETITION UNIT 2: TREAT IMAGES AND CREATE GRAPHIC ELEMENTS WITH THE APPROPRIATE COLOR MANAGEMENT PARAMETERS

Level: 3

Code: UC0697_3

Professional Realizations and Realization Criteria:

RP 1: Select file and image bank images for inclusion in the graphical product project, depending on the requirements of the order and the conditions of use.

CR 1.1 The selection criteria to be applied in the search for the images are set from the custom specifications set with the client.

CR 1.2 The possible membership of the proposed graphic product to a collection or series is considered, valuing the constraints that it assumes in the selection of the images.

CR 1.3 The search for images in files or image banks is done by applying well-defined parameters and criteria that match the results according to the needs set.

CR 1.4 The selection of images is done taking into account the technical aspects in terms of digitalization and reproduction.

CR 1.5 The preselected images are tested on the basis of price and intellectual property rights.

CR 1.6 The selected images are reviewed by checking that they have the optimal quality required for their playback.

CR 1.7 The selected images are archived, identifying them in a way that facilitates their subsequent localization in the project development.

RP 2: Calibrate, characterize, and obtain color profiles of cameras, scanners, and monitors to maintain color consistency in image capture and treatment processes.

CR 2.1 The calibration of the monitor is performed using the appropriate software and measuring devices, taking into account the standard observation conditions, brightness and contrast settings, colour temperature and values. of gamma.

CR 2.2 Camera calibration is done manually or automatically, performing white balance and color settings using specific software and measurement devices for later use in creation and profile handling.

CR 2.3 The characterization of the monitor is performed with the appropriate software and measuring devices, selecting the number of patches to be used according to the linearity of the device, maintaining the calibration conditions set.

CR 2.4 The characterization of the camera is done by letters recommended by the manufacturers of color management software, keeping the calibration conditions set.

CR 2.5 The characterization of the scanner is performed by standard letters, recording the gamma, black and white dot settings, verifying, the reference colorimetric values provided by the manufacturer of the characterization.

CR 2.6 The color profiles of monitors, scanners, and cameras are created using the color management software, selecting the type of storage model based on the degree of linearity of the device.

RP 3: Capture images using digital cameras, scanners, or others to incorporate them into the graphical project by adjusting their values, taking into account the characteristics of the original and the capture conditions.

CR 3.1 Calibration conditions and color profiles defined during characterization are maintained in capturing the images.

CR 3.2 The capture of images by digital camera and others, by adjusting the aperture of the diaphragma/speed, depending on the level of illumination and the desired depth of field, adopting the same values as fixed when getting the profile.

CR 3.3 Scanner capture is performed taking into account the adjustment of the input resolution to the output, the printing system, the magnification factor and the original type: line, continuous tone, or tramado.

CR 3.4 The captured images are transformed into a standard color space, once the image has been assigned to the color profile of the capture device, selecting the rendering purpose and the standard profile type, considering the main destination of the same (print or display on digital or other devices).

RP 4: Correct the images to achieve the desired effect in their editing, taking into account their characteristics, color management, environment conditions, and printing system.

CR 4.1 The monitor is checked, verifying that it maintains the calibration conditions for the profile used.

CR 4.2 The color settings in the image editing software are done by selecting the standard color profiles in the RGB and CMYK spaces.

CR 4.3 The color management settings in the image processing software are made by applying the recommendations of the manufacturers and the standardization organizations.

CR 4.4 The contrast in lights, shadows, and midtones are controlled by maintaining a proper balance and achieving the desired effects.

CR 4.5 The tonal characteristics of the illustrations are valued, checking that they conform to the actual values, correcting them in their case.

CR 4.6 The artistic effects on images are created using mergers, filters, layers, and other resources in the image processing software.

CR 4.7 The balance of gray and color is checked by checking that it is correct in computer editing and processing.

CR 4.8 The final conformity of the images is performed using the devices of printed or digital tests calibrated and characterized and taking into account the recommendations of the manufacturers and the organizations of the normalization.

CR 4.9 Image file formats are adjusted based on the features of the output device or the distribution system.

RP 5: Create the graphical elements using design software to respond to project needs.

CR 5.1 The software is checked by making the required adjustments considering the printing system, the compatibility of the files, the registration problems, the junctions and intersections, guides, margins, the lines Reference and others.

CR 5.2 Graphic elements are drawn using references to characteristic points of objects, control nodes, guides, or grids.

CR 5.3 The color model: RGB, CMYK, flat colors, and other models are selected in the creative process of the graphical elements, based on their consistency with the selected printing system.

CR 5.4 The creation of elements is developed in compliance with the technical requirements, the communication parameters, visual and aesthetic identity specified in the project, by the creative or the client.

CR 5.5 The color settings for the created image are made in the design program by applying the principles of color management.

CR 5.6 The page with the graphic elements created is configured for printing with respect to the desired scale, the thicknesses of the lines and the sizes of the bounds and the texts.

CR 5.7 Print adjustments are made by taking into account lineatures, plot angles, and conversions between color spaces set in the graphical creation.

CR 5.8 The graphic elements created are valued by checking that they meet the requirements of artistic, communication, and corporate identity established in the project.

Professional Context:

Production media:

Computer equipment. Bank of images. Color management software. Digital cameras. Scanners. Testing devices. Image processing software. Graphic design software. Color measurement devices. Densitometer, colorimeter and spectrophotometer. Multimedia devices: tablets, smartphones and others.

Products and results:

Images selected. Cameras and other calibrated, characterized and with colour profiles. Calibrated monitors, characterized and with color profiles. Calibrated scanners, characterized and with color profiles. Images created. Corrected images. Calibrated test devices. Digital files on different storage media. Revised printed and digital tests.

Information used or generated:

Normalization over color. Patches and letters of color. Letters of characterization. Technical specifications of the manufacturer. Specifications of the possible printing systems. Specifications of the order received. Paper samples and other supports. Color test or configuration. Analog and digital models.

COMPETITION UNIT 3: COMPOSE GRAPHIC ELEMENTS, IMAGES, AND TEXTS ACCORDING TO TYPOGRAPHICAL ARCHITECTURE THEORY AND LAYOUT

Level: 3

Code: UC0698_3

Professional Realizations and Realization Criteria:

RP 1: Define and perform master pages for the layout of the graphic product, using electronic editing programs, taking into account the technical and communication needs reflected in the sketches.

CR 1.1 The structure of the master page is established by considering the characteristics of the editorial product: books, magazines, newspapers, deployables and brochures, large formats.

CR 1.2 The composition of the elements is performed according to the indications of the sketch, applying the theory of the graphic architecture and layout.

CR 1.3 The margins, content boxes, and all graphic elements are defined on the master page, determining the product style unit.

CR 1.4 The margins and reference lines of the master page or models are marked on the master page by adjusting to the cutting, folding, and/or binding conditions that the graphic product carries.

RP 2: Select typographical characters to achieve the desired effects, taking into account the typographical architecture and the final support, generating style sheets if needed.

CR 2.1 Type characters are selected based on their interaction with the image, display media or display device, stamping, and aesthetic criteria.

CR 2.2 The fonts are chosen considering their availability and their cost according to the parameters marked in the project.

CR 2.3 The text is harmonized according to the body, style, and typographical family, applying the rules of composition and spelling.

CR 2.4 Paragraph adjustments are made by applying indentations, tabulations, interlinings, widows, orphans, and normalized partition and justification methods.

CR 2.5 Selected texts are reviewed by adjusting proportions, remits, grids, readability, kern, track, alignment, interlining, groupings, paragraphs, and creating style sheets if needed.

RP 3: Develop test models to display the graphical product based on the graphic product type.

CR 3.1 The test model for packaging and packaging is made by indicating its specific characteristics such as: number of pleated, flumped, closures and inner volume of the package among others.

CR 3.2 The layout of the editorial product is performed by marking its specific characteristics such as number of columns, headlines, boxes, families and typographical characters and others.

CR 3.3 The model of communication graphics products is made by marking its specific characteristics such as the format, chromatic values and others.

CR 3.4 The creative elements that can improve the results are incorporated into the test model according to the type of product, and type of target audience.

RP 4: Get the final model of the graphic product for customer approval, incorporating graphic elements, text and images.

CR 4.1 Image boxes are correctly placed and sized on the pages of the model, keeping the margins set.

CR 4.2 The images are trimmed and bound taking into account their dimensions and the dimensions of the box.

CR 4.3 The color display settings of the layout program are checked against the principles of color management and workflows.

CR 4.4 The contorneo of the image boxes is adjusted to the graphic elements according to the desired effects.

CR 4.5 Text boxes are linked so that the text flows and can be easily modified.

CR 4.6 The final layout is checked, valuing that it conforms to the client's needs and production needs.

Professional Context:

Production media:

Computer equipment. Layout software. Storage systems. Monitors. Image processing software. Graphic design software. Multimedia devices: tablets and smartphones and others.

Products and results:

Master Pages. Selected typographic characters. Style sheet. Adjusted paragraphs. Test models. Revised texts. Definitive models of: graphic communication products, editorial graphic products and graphic products of packaging and packaging. Squared and framed images. Digital files on different storage media. Print and digital testing.

Information used or generated:

Spelling rules. Sketches of the graphic product. Information about workflows. Samples of colour, paper or other supports. Display, filming, and print specifications.

COMPETITION UNIT 4: PREPARE AND VERIFY FINAL ARTS FOR DISTRIBUTION

Level: 3

Code: UC0699_3

Professional Realizations and Realization Criteria:

RP 1: Check the set of elements involved in the graphic product design to ensure reliability, analyzing the tests performed.

CR 1.1 The type of tests to be performed to check the quality of the design are selected considering the reliability of the results through the control of materials, processes and cost.

CR 1.2 The color reproduction in the tests is visually and colorimically checked by control strips, verifying density, contrast, gray balance, and color balance.

CR 1.3 The texts and the composition in the test are verified and corrected, applying the principles of ortho-typographical correction and using the standard correction signs.

CR 1.4 The possible variations between the test and the originals are checked by observing the color, text, and layout.

CR 1.5 Required retouches are indicated in the test, clearly pointing out the observed errors.

RP 2: Incorporate all necessary specifications and elements to the final art, making prototypes if necessary, for the manufacture of the graphic product.

CR 2.1 The elements required for the manufacture of the product: originals, fonts, colours, die-cut lines, colour profiles and other elements are attached to the final art.

CR 2.2 The technical feasibility of the designed graphic product is verified using a health check software.

CR 2.3 Media and formats are checked by checking that they are compatible with the workflow.

CR 2.4 The required color and paper samples are included in the final art indicating their characteristics for use by the printer.

CR 2.5 The functionality of the product is verified by creating, if necessary, the prototype of the graphic product.

CR 2.6 Digital originals are archived for reproduction in compliance with the recommendations of the applicable quality regulations on guidelines in the preparation, delivery and receipt of originals for production graphic.

RP 3: Adjust and retouch the final art for distribution and publication in printed or digital media, taking into account the particularities of the output to be uncovered.

CR 3.1 The images are compressed with the appropriate compression factor and method to the medium in which they are to be distributed or published.

CR 3.2 Type fonts are embedded or adjusted to avoid incompatibility problems.

CR 3.3 The format and size of the files are adjusted to the distribution and publication media in different media: printing, Web page, e-book, applications (App), interactive PDF, and others.

CR 3.4 The graphical presentation of the different versions is valued, checking their operation on different digital platforms: Web page, Application (App), interactive PDF, and others.

RP 4: Perform the quality control of the final product to check the execution of the indications made in the final art, verifying that it responds to the needs of the report record.

CR 4.1 Color reproduction is controlled by: densitometer, colorimeter or spectrophotometer, verifying among others the contrast, density, gray balance, color balance and colorimetric color values. reference.

CR 4.2 The media are checked by verifying that the grammage and size values correspond to those indicated in the log report.

CR 4.3 Printed reproduction is verified by means of storytellers, determining the absence of record defects, started or mots.

CR 4.4 The printed final product is inspected by checking the correct execution of finishes, folded, heaps, binding and others according to the design project.

CR 4.5 The digital product is verified by controlling its behavior across all planned distribution platforms and by checking the different elements of the associated design.

CR 4.6 The end product is valued, checking that it meets the customer's expectations or needs, adjusting to the order's indications.

Professional Context:

Production media:

Computer equipment. Storage systems. Scanners. Digital cameras and others. Check-up programs. Workflows. Color measurement devices. Test kits. Layout software. Image processing software. Graphic design software. Tipometers. Tell them. Densitometer. Colorimeter. Spectrophotometer. Multimedia devices: tablets, smartphones and others.

Products and results:

Printed design tests. Prototypes. Verified end arts. Final gear retouched. Images in compressed format. Digital files on different storage systems. Graphic presentations for different media. Quality control of different types of end arts on different platforms.

Information used or generated:

Retouches required and specifications for manufacturing. Workflow. Information about media and formats. Paper and colour samples. Digital originals. Specifications of the color of the print. Applicable rules of quality and particularities of the distribution platform. Models, analog and digital models, tests and others.

TRAINING MODULE 1: GRAPHIC PRODUCTS PROJECT

Level: 3

Code: MF0696_3

Associated with UC: Develop graphic product projects

Duration: 180 hours

Assessment capabilities and criteria:

C1: Develop the instructions for creating graphic products from the order of supposed clients.

CE1.1 Set the configuration of a report type record, determining the aspects and paragraphs to be contemplated.

CE1.2 List the characteristics of a product or service marketed by a company that should be taken into account when making a commercial graphic product offering.

CE1.3 In a practical scenario of elaboration of instructions on a graphic product design from a custom order:

-Perform the needs study by collecting customer, product, and target audience data.

-Analyze the sources of information and documentation.

-Develop the instructions for making the graphic product brief and clear, collecting it in a log report.

CE1.4 Specify the characteristics of different colors using sample or colorimetric measurements.

CE1.5 Select inks, supports and finishes, observing the main rules on product labeling and legal, health and environmental requirements.

CE1.6 Identify the main security procedures against copying and falsifying documents.

CE1.7 In a scenario of selecting colors for a type design, from different samples:

-Select the colors using four-letter letters.

-Select the most frequently used flat color samples in graphic arts.

-Find the commercial reference of the selected colors in the catalogs.

CE1.8 Analyze the elements of corporate identity to consider in the design of a graphic product from a manual of identity and of a supposed custom-characterized order.

C2: Value the technical parameters required for the production of different graphic products.

CE2.1 Identify formats that are compatible with the most common media types, display devices, and print systems.

CE2.2 Select the type of support, number of inks and printing systems, from a properly characterized scenario, adjusting to the budgetary constraints and the quality of the desired job.

CE2.3 Select the main binding methods and their implications for price, time, usage conditions, dimensions, and process characteristics.

CE2.4 Apply cutting, cleft, and folding conditions to a design based on thickness, support dimensions, and process conditions.

CE2.5 Evaluate the required finishes of a graphical product, depending on the conditions of use and the characteristics of the process.

CE2.6 Determine the conditions for the compaging of an editorial product, depending on its characteristics, the conditions of the reproduction or viewing process and the editorial line.

C3: Draw sketches of hand-raised graphics products, applying the most appropriate techniques and taking into account the characteristics and parameters of a given product.

CE3.1 Determine the most appropriate format for a type of graphic product to be developed and the distribution or print system chosen.

CE3.2 In a practical scenario of drawing up the outline of a graphical product, based on the technical specifications:

-Adjust the scale of the drawing to the chosen output format.

-Harmonically distribute the graphic elements in the composition, respecting the space-format.

-Draw by applying the rendering systems and drawing rules.

CE3.3 Draw by raised hand an outline keeping the proportion of the objects represented, using clean and uniform strokes and, if appropriate, applying the thicknesses recommended by the drawing rules.

C4: Develop sketches for the realization of a graphical project based on supposed instructions, using computer procedures and/or manuals suitable for reproduction.

CE4.1 Develop a sketch by applying the different sketch techniques.

CE4.2 Determine, on proposed sketches, if the minimum legibility conditions regarding typography and color usage are met.

CE4.3 In a scenario of evaluating sketches from a given project:

-Analyze whether the elaborate sketches reflect the underlying concepts with simplicity, if they have visual impact, and the reasons for it.

-Analyze whether the elaborate sketches meet the principles of proportion, balance, reference, symmetry, harmony, tension and rhythm.

-Adapt the sketches given to the most common printing systems, taking into account the technical requirements of each one.

CE4.4 In a practical scenario of sketching, from different typologies of graphic products to be performed:

-Develop a sketch of an editorial product from the typology of the given product.

-Develop the graphical component of a packaging or packaging from the typology of the given product.

-Develop the sketch of a communication product from the typology of the given product.

CE4.5 Prepare pre-prepared sketches for presentation to a supposed client.

C5: Elaborate, properly characterized, graphical project budgets by planning, costing and time.

CE5.1 Consider and account for costs in terms of intellectual property rights that are supposed to be a type graphic design job.

CE5.2 In a scenario of budgeting for the reproduction of a graphical product, from the given project:

-Rate the costs of creation, manufacturing, and distribution processes and materials.

-Classify the costs incurred by the proposed work, depending on its nature.

-Temporarily plan the implementation of the proposed order, setting delivery times according to the company's plans and the conditions imposed by each supplier.

-Make the budget by consulting market-based and recommended rates.

-Distribute the resources available to a company from a given job plan.

CE5.3 Ensure the feasibility of a supposed customer proposal by adjusting costs and times.

Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real workbench:

C1 with respect to CE1.3 and CE1.7; C2 with respect to CE2.2, CE2.4 and CE2.6; C3 with respect to CE3.2; C4 with respect to CE4.3 and CE4.4; C5 with respect to CE5.2.

Other capabilities:

Take Responsibility for the work you develop and the fulfillment of goals.

Participate and actively collaborate on the work team.

Finish the job based on criteria of suitability, speed, economy and effectiveness.

Propose alternatives with the aim of improving results.

Sharing information with the work team.

Demonstrate flexibility to understand changes.

Contents:

1. Graphical project methodology

Delimitation of customer requirements. Log report.

Search methods and sources of information.

Market knowledge: materials and services.

Guidelines for making instructions for realization.

Realization process: creativity incentive techniques.

Methods for proposal and selection of solutions.

Presentation techniques.

Planning tasks.

Distribution of resources.

Designing and budgeting: Calculation and cost planning. Estimation of times. Hiring and outsourcing of graphic services.

2. Creative and technical basics of graphic design

Graphic layout elements: lines, planes, volumes, texts, color, size, and shape.

Composition principles: repetition, structure, similarity, gradation, radiation, contrast, texture and perspective.

Bases of visual synthesis: simplicity, clarity, aesthetics and visual impact.

Visual impact components: innovation, information, context, scale, motion, color, and contrast.

Ergonomic conditions: readability and reading habits.

Disposition of titles and illustrations.

Typographies: components and families.

Criteria for selecting fonts in graphic design.

Theories of color. Symbolism associated with colors.

Principles, technical characteristics, formats, equipment and fields of application of printing systems: offset, hologravure, flexography, screen printing, digital printing.

Procedures and systems against copying and falsifying documents.

Influence of the printing system on the design features.

Phases of the graphic design.

3. Raw materials and media for the graphic product

Classification of media for printing.

Stationery: Components.

Paper manufacturing processes: preparation and manufacture of paste, laminate, calendering, coated and finished.

Paper types and application fields.

Specifications for paper purchase.

Inks: types and features.

Paper-ink interaction in print.

Other media types: features, processes, and print problems.

Applicable labour and environmental risk prevention regulations.

Commercial product labeling conditions.

4. Communication and corporate identity

Communication theory and communication strategies.

The brand: concepts, functions, evolution, and types.

Brand requirements: legibility, originality and expressiveness.

Figure and abstraction. Simplicity versus accumulation of concepts.

Visual identity graphic design: logos and graphic symbols.

The corporate identity manual. Definitions, content and presentation.

Rules for crafting the corporate identity manual.

Applications of visual identity to the design of promotional products.

5. Expression and graphic design techniques

Basic concepts.

Hand drawing raised. Sketch.

Graphic expression useful.

Sketch principles.

Composition and color.

Representation techniques.

Industrial drawing and normalization.

Work procedures.

Specific teams and programs.

6. Editorial graphic design

Classification of editorial products.

Editorial lines.

Elaboration of sketches.

Composition of an editorial product.

Guidelines for the design of an editorial product.

Manufacturing process.

Design workshop: graphic design of a journal and a book.

7. Graphic design of packaging and packaging

Basic concepts.

Factors to consider in packaging and packaging design.

Elaboration of sketches.

regulations. Applicable to the prevention of occupational and environmental risks.

Design Methodology.

Graphic analysis.

Manufacturing process.

Design workshop: graphic design of a packaging and packaging.

Training context parameters:

Spaces and installations:

The spaces and facilities will provide a response, in the form of a classroom, a workshop, a workshop of practices, a laboratory or a singular space, to the training needs, according to the Professional Context established in the Unit Partner competence, taking into account the applicable regulations of the production sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.

Professional or former trainer profile:

1.-Domain of knowledge and techniques related to the development of graphic product projects, which will be accredited by one of the following two ways:

-Level 2 academic training (Spanish Framework of Qualifications for Higher Education), Technical Engineering, Technical Architecture, Diplomacy or other higher level of professional field.

-Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.

2.-Accredited pedagogical competence according to what the competent administrations establish.

TRAINING MODULE 2: CREATIVE EDITING OF IMAGES AND GRAPHIC ELEMENT DESIGN

Level: 3

Code: MF0697_3

Associated with UC: Treat images and create graphical elements with the appropriate color management parameters

Duration: 150 hours

Assessment capabilities and criteria:

C1: Determine the images to be included in a graphical project, based on instructions given for their realization.

CE1.1 Set the criteria for choosing the images to include in a project from supposed instructions for creation.

CE1.2 Select the source of obtaining the most appropriate images from supposed budgetary and resource constraints.

CE1.3 Determine the technical characteristics of several proposed images.

CE1.4 Classify a set of images given according to their nature, analyzing the specific language of each.

CE1.5 In a scenario of selecting images for incorporation into a project, based on given instructions:

-Rate the adequacy of a set of images to the established project.

-Determine the price of the proposed images.

-Calculate costs in terms of the intellectual property of the proposed images.

CE1.6 Determine the inclusion of an image in a type project based on its price and the costs of intellectual property, based on supposed budgetary constraints.

C2: Play the color in the workflows for obtaining the graphic product, maintaining consistency and taking into account the basis of colorimetry and the principles of color management.

CE2.1 Apply the principles and concepts related to color vision, analyzing the main factors and phenomena on which it depends, in a given case.

CE2.2 Perform color measurements using specific equipment: densitometres, colorimeters, and spectrophotometers, applying the principles and bases of color measurement.

CE2.3 Interchange color specifications from one color space to another using computer tools.

CE2.4 Employ the main rules on standard conditions for the vision and comparison of certain established originals and reproductions.

CE2.5 Interpret the causes of the lack of consistency in the color reproduction processes or flows in a particular graphical product.

CE2.6 Explain the particularities of the measure of color differences and the different current models in an original type.

CE2.7 Measure color differences between different originals and reproductions using colorimeters or spectrophotometers with the help of computer utilities.

CE2.8 In a scenario of color management, from a given workflow:

-Describe the need and principles of the color management systems to be used.

-Identify the different phases for the application of the color management system: calibration, characterization, profile generation, and utilization.

-Apply the different quality standards on the use of color management systems.

-Characterize input, output, and display devices through letters, utilities, and color management software.

-Adjust color management programs for profiling, based on the recommendations of the rules and the same programs.

-Adjust the graphic design, color editing and layout programs to achieve the highest possible consistency according to the profiles obtained, the calibration conditions and the characteristics of the devices input, output, and display involved in the workflow.

C3: Capture and edit images by adjusting the technical parameters and maintaining calibration conditions and color profiles given for creation.

CE3.1 Capture different images using a scanner by adjusting the output resolution to a given print system and extension factor.

CE3.2 Capture different images using a digital camera by adjusting the zoom, the diaphragm/speed ratio and the illumination, depending on the effects to be achieved.

CE3.3 In an image editing scenario, from given instructions:

-Treat the proposed images using computer procedures for tuning to the instructions given for creation.

-Rate the correction of the proposed images and adjust the white balance, color depth, and color range to obtain a certain quality of reproduction.

-Integrate different images by creating merged mounts and creative effects without real references.

CE3.4 Edit and achieve a correct balance of gray and color in a series of proposed images.

CE3.5 Make the color management settings for the image processing software, following recommendations from manufacturers and standardization organizations.

CE3.6 Determine the final compliance of a proposed set of images through correctly calibrated and characterized test devices, as directed by manufacturers and organizations. normalization.

CE3.7 Determine the most appropriate computer file based on different applications of the proposed image and software.

CE3.8 Adjust the technical parameters of a proposed image to the most common printing systems.

C4: Develop graphic element creations, using design programs and considering image playback systems.

CE4.1 Play an illustration or a given graphic motif by means of computer procedures.

CE4.2 Adapting an illustration or graphic motif to some supposed instructions for creation.

CE4.3 In an alleged image creation graph, from given instructions:

-Adjust the preferences of the computer program: record, reference lines, margins and guides to a supposed job to develop properly characterized.

-Configure the page so that the image is printed at the desired scale, respecting line thicknesses, colors, dimensions of cotches, and texts.

-Drawing from reality objects, in the graphic design program, maintaining proportion and scale.

-Draw graphic elements using references to characteristic points of objects, control nodes, guides, or grids.

-Successfully perform color settings in the design program, taking into account the principles of color management.

-Create, select, or modify color specifications, taking into account the characteristics of the print or distribution systems.

-Apply shadows, frames, or gradients, taking into account the limitations of the print or output system.

Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real workbench:

C1 with respect to CE1.5; C2 with respect to CE2.8; C3 with respect to CE3.3; C4 with respect to CE4.3.

Other capabilities:

Take Responsibility for the work that you develop and achieve your goals.

Adapt to the organization by integrating into the system of technical-professional relations.

Demonstrate creativity in the development of the work you do.

Sharing information with the work team.

Demonstrate flexibility to understand changes.

Demonstrate interest in broad knowledge of the organization and its processes.

Contents:

1. Images and capture systems

Image types: photograph and/or illustration.

Photography concepts.

Evolution of the graphical image.

Technical evaluation of the image.

Image banks. Intellectual property.

Technical features of the scanners. Color resolution and depth.

Digital camera technical features: resolution, color depth, sensitivity, and white balance control.

Scanners and cameras: usage procedures.

Colorimetric principles of digital cameras and scanners.

2. Colorimetry and color management

The color: nature, spaces, and color coordinates.

Uniform color models. Models of color perception. Factors that affect perception.

Color measurement instruments: densitometres, colorimeters, and spectrophotometers.

The quality of the image: depth of color, white balance, gamma of color, contrast in lights, shadows and midtones.

The problem of color reproduction.

Color management elements: color management module and profiles for different platforms.

Recommendations for color specification and management.

Color settings in workflows.

Color management: calibration, characterization, and obtaining of scanner profiles, camera, and display device.

3. Capturing and analyzing images using computer tools

Tools types: vector and raster.

Image file formats. Application fields.

Setting the display device. Conditions and standards for the consideration of a computer monitor as a soft test device.

Program settings: Input resolution, color depth, color model, and color management.

Capture of images. Determination of white point, black dot, gamma and white balance. Choice of manual or automatic tuning.

Analysis of the image. Contrast in lights, shadows and medium tones. Balance of grays. Color balance.

Tuning the images: editing tools. Digitalization with new settings.

4. Digital image processing

Editing images. Modification of image, resolution, and color space sizes.

Work with channels. Quadricromies, flat inks and hexachromy.

Contrast settings, gray balance, color balance, brightness, saturation.

Selective color correction in the color editing program or color management program.

Filters: destructed, focus, blur.

Retouches, degraded, melted, and caled.

File storage. Formats and fields of application. Use based on the number of channels and the degree of compression.

Print Settings. Lineatures, output resolutions, and plot angles. Choice of the output color space, color management settings, and PostScript settings.

Color tests. Standards and recommendations for obtaining and accepting them.

5. Graphic design using specific programs

Basic concepts.

Computer tools available on the market.

Phases of the layout of a graphic element.

Setting up computer-assisted graphic design programs. Formats, guides, reticles.

Color Manager. Color management. Emulation modes.

Color specification methods in a graphic design program: RGB, CMYK, flat colors.

Design tools.

Edit Tools.

Digital Sketch.

Lights, shadows, and textures.

Color application to objects.

Print.

File storage.

Training context parameters:

Spaces and installations:

The spaces and facilities will provide a response, in the form of a classroom, a workshop, a workshop of practices, a laboratory or a singular space, to the training needs, according to the Professional Context established in the Unit Partner competence, taking into account the applicable regulations of the production sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.

Professional or former trainer profile:

1.-Domain of knowledge and techniques related to the processing of images and the creation of graphic elements with the appropriate color management parameters, which will be accredited by one of two forms following:

-Level 2 academic training (Spanish Framework of Qualifications for Higher Education), Technical Engineering, Technical Architecture, Diplomacy or other higher level of professional field.

-Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.

2.-Accredited pedagogical competence according to what the competent administrations establish.

TRAINING MODULE 3: TYPOGRAPHICAL ARCHITECTURE AND LAYOUT

Level: 3

Code: MF0698_3

Associated with UC: Compose graphic elements, images, and texts according to typographical architecture theory and layout

Duration: 120 hours

Assessment capabilities and criteria:

C1: Create master pages, sorting and classifying spaces, from a given sketch, using a computer program of layout.

CE1.1 Set the layout criteria from reading some supposed instructions for realization.

CE1.2 Sort and sort the spaces on the page by determining margins, line length, number of columns, and interline for a type graphic project.

CE1.3 In a practical scenario of creating master pages from the instructions of the graphical product to be performed and your sketch:

-Create the master pages taking into account the needs of various graphic products: communication, publishing, packaging and packaging.

-Perform the master page using a specific layout program according to the given graphical product.

-Sort the spaces on the master page by following the instructions in the given graphic product sketch: margins, cut lines, page blanks, and others.

-Correct, applying the principles of layout and the distribution of the spaces in the proposed models.

CE1.4 Adapting a model given to the most frequent folding and binding types used in the processing of graphic products.

C2: Select fonts and create style sheets, based on supposed instructions for their realization.

CE2.1 Classify a set of typographical fonts based on your aesthetic, analyzing your communicative power.

CE2.2 Identify the most common typographical families from their characteristic features.

CE2.3 Determine the readability of a given typography for different sizes, reading distances, printing systems, display devices, and color combinations of letter and background.

CE2.4 Determine the cost of using a number of given font fonts.

CE2.5 Determine the degree of availability of a given source group, both in the designer environment and in subsequent filming processes.

CE2.6 Value readability, aesthetics, cost, and availability on selected selected sources.

CE2.7 Define style sheets, defining sizes, text style, stroke thickness, character width, inclination, and colors for a given model.

C3: Distribute text and images by applying the parameters set to a designed model.

CE3.1 Include multiple images and texts in different proposed models.

CE3.2 Trim and frame multiple images given within proposed image boxes.

CE3.3 Link different text boxes so that text flows between them in an appropriate way.

CE3.4 Assign to each paragraph the text style that corresponds to it, according to different proposed style sheets.

CE3.5 In a practical simulation of text and image distribution, from the model and given instructions:

-Adjust the text of the model for correct display, modifying the partition, interlesuit, and justification methods.

CE3.6 In a scenario of defining color display settings in the layout program, taking into account the principles of color management and a proposed workflow:

-Adjust the layout program based on different display, filming, and print processes.

-Adjust the layout program to the development of a communication product to be reproduced printed or by digital media.

-Adjust the layout program to the development of an editorial product to be reproduced printed or by digital media.

Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real workbench:

C1 with respect to CE1.3; C2 with respect to CE2.7; C3 with respect to CE3.5 and CE3.6.

Other capabilities:

Take Responsibility for the work that you develop and achieve your goals.

Adapt to the organization by integrating into the system of technical-professional relations.

Demonstrate creativity in the development of the work you do.

Demonstrate interest in broad knowledge of the organization and its processes.

Act quickly in problematic situations and not just wait.

Adapt to new situations or contexts.

Contents:

1. Typographical architecture

Introduction to typography.

Parts of the type. Tipometry.

Visual variables in typography: plot thickness, expansion, or condensation and others.

Classification of typographical families.

Intellectual property rights in the use of fonts.

Readability criteria.

Typography and color.

General criteria for selection of fonts in a document.

Problems in selecting computer fonts according to platforms.

2. Page layout and composition

General layout principles.

Justification: methods and parameters.

Distribution of the blank space. Typographical color.

Distribution of text on an image. Arracada and tour.

Capitulars, indentations, and tabulation.

Columns, margins, line spacing, and line length.

Style sheets.

Typographical Aesthetics. Widows and orphans, peer interllatrine, and optical alignment.

Page size and proportions.

Structure of the model: margins and grid.

Layout Styles.

Parts of an editorial product.

3. Computer tools equipment and specific scheming programs

Concepts related to computer machine editing and editing.

Program Settings. Text and image boxes. Binding.

Creating master pages: numbering, splitting documents into sections.

Defining master pages according to the editorial product.

Work with text flows and with columns.

Text Adjustments: Character attributes, paragraph attributes, alignment and indentations, interlination, and space between paragraphs, tabs.

Control over word partition, text justification, and widow and orphan lines.

Contournament of text around graphics and image boxes.

Importing, manipulating, and exporting images.

Managing color in the layout programs.

Print Settings. Digital version display settings.

Specifying configurations for filming, printing, or converting to digital format.

Training context parameters:

Spaces and installations:

The spaces and facilities will provide a response, in the form of a classroom, a workshop, a workshop of practices, a laboratory or a singular space, to the training needs, according to the Professional Context established in the Unit Partner competence, taking into account the applicable regulations of the production sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.

Professional or former trainer profile:

1.-Domain of knowledge and techniques related to the composition of graphic elements, images and texts according to the theory of typographical architecture and the layout, which will be accredited by one of the two forms following:

-Level 2 academic training (Spanish Framework of Qualifications for Higher Education), Technical Engineering, Technical Architecture, Diplomacy or other higher level of professional field.

-Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.

2.-Accredited pedagogical competence according to what the competent administrations establish.

FORMATIVE MODULE 4: FINAL ART PREPARATION

Level: 3

Code: MF0699_3

Associated with UC: Preparing and verifying end arts for distribution

Duration: 150 hours

Assessment capabilities and criteria:

C1: Analyze design tests for a graphic product by controlling its correct playback.

CE1.1 Classify existing hardware or software tests based on their degree of reliability and cost.

CE1.2 visually check, by means of colorimeter or spectrophotometer, the color reproduction of a given printing test, using control strips to verify the density, the contrast, the balance of grays and the color balance.

CE1.3 Review the texts and composition of an alleged test of an on-line product displayed on the screen.

CE1.4 Use the set standards to indicate the retouches to be performed on an alleged test.

C2: Develop the final art and prototype of a graphic product, attaching the necessary indications, files and materials for correct reproduction.

CE2.1 Create the final art of an alleged graphic project.

CE2.2 Check the feasibility of an alleged final art by means of verification or check-up tools.

CE2.3 Adjust media and formats from an end art to different proposed workflows.

CE2.4 Determine the convenience of attaching color and paper samples to the final art of a given project.

CE2.5 Create prototypes by following different methods for a type graphic project.

C3: Adapt the final art of a designed graphic product by preparing it for distribution in digital 'off-line' and 'on-line' support.

CE3.1 Compress a series of images given using the most appropriate compression factor and method to the most common distribution media.

CE3.2 Adequating the format and size of several proposed files to the most frequent distribution media.

CE3.3 In a scenario of adapting the final arts of graphic products to different platforms, based on the following instructions:

-Adapt the final art for printing on paper support.

-Adapt the final art to be proposed to your on-screen presentation.

-Check fonts, images, and others in both art end art.

CE3.4 Check the operation of a given web design on different platforms and browsers.

CE3.5 Check the operation of a type design in digital format for on different platforms: PDAs, tablets, smartphones and others.

CE3.6 Check the operation of an eBook design and in different formats, on different digital platforms proposed.

C4: Control the quality of a graphic product by checking and verifying its correspondence with the data in a type record report.

CE4.1 Control the color reproduction of a given graphic product, using densitometer, colorimeter or spectrophotometer, verifying contrast, density, gray balance, color balance and colorimetric values of the reference colors.

CE4.2 Verify the grammages and dimensions of a set of proposed graphic products, checking that they conform to defined parameters.

CE4.3 Check, by means of accounts, the absence of registration defects, started or speckled in finished products.

CE4.4 Check the finishes, folded, heaps and binding of various finished products.

CE4.5 Verify the operation of the design in different browsers and digital platforms of various finished products.

Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real workbench:

C1 with respect to CE1.3; C2 with respect to CE2.2 and CE2.5; C3 with respect to CE3.3, CE3.4, CE3.5 and CE3.6; C4 with respect to CE4.1 and CE4.5

Other capabilities:

Take Responsibility for the work that you develop and achieve your goals.

Adapt to the organization by integrating into the system of technical-professional relations.

Demonstrate creativity in the development of the work you do.

Respect internal organization procedures and rules.

Sharing information with the work team.

Favor professional and personal development in the work team

Contents:

1. Final arts and prototypes

End art components: originals, fonts, color profiles, paper samples, and others.

Quality standards applicable to the delivery of digital originals for graphic production.

Digital formats of images and documents (TIFF-IT, EPS, PDF, JDF, and others).

Adaptation of the final art to the output system.

Verification of the adequacy of final art through check-up programs.

Prototype classes: advantages and disadvantages.

Elaboration of physical and digital prototypes: materials and production phases.

2. Digital environment in the design

Introduction to the digital environment: technical constraints.

On-line and off-line distribution.

Internet Services on the Internet.

Differences between design for print and digital design: resolution, fonts, and others.

Tools for the generation of digital books or documents.

Adjustments of conversion programs to electronic format: resolutions, linings, image compression factors, source embedding, color management, and others.

Computer files in the digital environment and their limitations with respect to the format.

Basic principles of digital graphic communication.

Verifying the operation of the application on different browsers and platforms.

3. Printed tests

Test Types.

Review of texts and layout in printed tests.

Ortho-typotypic rules: grammatical theory. Literary writing. Syntax. Spelling.

Correction of tests and symbology. Rules on signs of correction.

Checking color reproduction on printed tests. Use of control strips.

Rules for the indication of corrections to printed tests.

4. Quality control in the preparation of the final arts

Control of raw materials: films, plates, ink and supports.

Quality of image on the CTP iron.

Color control: densitometry, colorimetry, and spectrophotometry.

Standardization of printing processes. Applicable quality standards.

Standardization of finishing processes. Applicable quality standards.

Picture quality in the film: point gain, tuning and contrast.

Ink behavior: transfer, monochromatic deviation, tone error, grisness, and additionality.

Training context parameters:

Spaces and installations:

The spaces and facilities will provide a response, in the form of a classroom, a workshop, a workshop of practices, a laboratory or a singular space, to the training needs, according to the Professional Context established in the Unit Partner competence, taking into account the applicable regulations of the production sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.

Professional or former trainer profile:

1.-Domain of knowledge and techniques related to the preparation and verification of final arts for distribution, which will be accredited by one of the following two forms:

-Level 2 academic training (Spanish Framework of Qualifications for Higher Education), Technical Engineering, Technical Architecture, Diplomacy or other higher level of professional field.

-Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.

2.-Accredited pedagogical competence according to what the competent administrations establish.

ANNEX VIII

Professional qualification: Print and get the printer form

Professional Family: Graphic Arts

Level: 2

Code: ARG288_2

General Competition

Perform the imposition and filming of graphic products and obtain the printing forms by means of digital or conventional systems, ensuring their correct reproduction and treatment with respect to the different devices and systems printing, binding and processing and intervening in the graphical process according to the established quality and productivity.

Competition Units

UC0200_2: Operate in the graphical process under security, quality, and productivity

UC0920_2: Perform the imposition and filming of graphic jobs

UC0921_2: Get printer forms using direct digital systems

UC0922_2: Get printer shapes for offset, flexography, screen printing, and tampography by the conventional method

UC0923_2: Get the printer form for engraving

Professional Environment

Professional Scope

Develops its professional activity in the preprint area in graphic companies dedicated to obtaining printer forms for all print systems. In entities of a public or private nature, small, medium and large, and regardless of their legal form, they generally work as an employed person and, where appropriate, depend on a superior. He may occasionally have people in his position and/or be team boss. The principles of universal accessibility are applied in the development of professional activity in accordance with the applicable regulations.

Productive Sectors

It is located in the productive sector of graphic industries: graphic arts, manipulated and transformed that are dedicated to the obtaining of forms printers or in print companies in which the printer form is obtained in process and in any other sector that has any of these activities.

Relevant occupations and jobs

The terms of the following relationship of occupations and jobs are used with a generic and omnicomprensivo character of women and men.

Digital Taxation Technicians

Computer-to-plate (computer to plate-CTP) film equipment operators

Computer-to-film film equipment operators (computer to film-CTF)

Computer-to-screen (computer to screen-CTS) film equipment operators

Computer film equipment operators to photopolymer (computer to photopolymer-CTP)

Digital mounts

Printer-form preppers

plotters-assemblers

Printer-form passers

Huecogravure Cylinder preps

Cylinder recorder

screen-set screen-makers

Flexographic Cliché-confections

Tampographic cliché confections

Associated Training (450 hours)

Training Modules

MF0200_2: Processes in Graphic Arts (120 hours)

MF0920_2: Imposition and filming of graphic jobs (90 hours)

MF0921_2: Obtaining printer forms using direct digital systems (90 hours)

MF0922_2: Obtaining printer shapes for offset, flexography, screen printing, and tampography by the conventional method (90 hours)

MF0923_2: Obtaining printer form for engraving (60 hours)

COMPETITION UNIT 1: OPERATING IN THE GRAPHICAL PROCESS UNDER SECURITY, QUALITY, AND PRODUCTIVITY

Level: 2

Code: UC0200_2

Professional Realizations and Realization Criteria:

RP 1: Determine the characteristics of the graphical products to establish the appropriate manufacturing process, taking into account the available elements and applicable regulations.

CR 1.1 Graphic products are identified from the data provided by the originals, sketches and models, in response to the established technical specifications.

CR 1.2 The specifications on the graphic product to be performed are valued by identifying their typology and functional and communicative characteristics-product use, applicable regulations and others.

CR 1.3 The functional and technological relationships of the graphic product to be made are established according to its components: stationery, stuchaery, publishing, advertising, and others.

CR 1.4 The phases required for the reproduction of the graphic product: preprint, binding printing and finishes, are set from their specifications, introducing the data into the workflow.

RP 2: Perform the standardization of the production parameters in the workflows for each phase of the graphical product, according to the specifications set.

CR 2.1 The production phases in the graphical process are determined by specifying each of the elements involved in the process: technical parameters, product typology, and others.

CR 2.2 Production parameters are standardized in the workflow according to the typology of the graphic product: packaging, editorial product, billboard and others, following established procedures.

CR 2.3 The parameters and manufacturing elements of the graphic product at different stages of the process: preprint, printing, binding and transformed, are checked according to the technical specifications.

CR 2.4 The productive environment in each of the phases of the graphical process is determined from the established technical specifications.

CR 2.5 Graphic process tracking is done through workflows by facilitating planning, automation, procedures, and other factors that affect the production environment.

CR 2.6 The incidents that arise in the process are recorded in the workflow following established procedures to take the necessary corrective and preventive measures.

RP 3: Verify quality parameters in the process using specific equipment to obtain the product with the established standards.

CR 3.1 The most significant quality features in each of the phases of the process are identified according to established variables and attributes.

CR 3.2 The graphical product in process is checked, verifying that it complies with the fundamental concepts of quality in the different phases of its manufacturing according to the established standards and standards.

CR 3.3 Quality procedures at each stage of the manufacturing process of the graphic product are applied methodically according to the technical specifications of the product, using the specific measurement equipment.

CR 3.4 Control frequencies are applied according to the type of characteristics to be controlled and the number of product units to be obtained, following established procedures.

CR 3.5 The results and incidences of the quality control of the graphical product are recorded using the corresponding control sheets by entering them into the workflow.

CR 3.6 Quality verification in the graphical process is carried out in compliance with applicable labour and environmental risk prevention regulations.

Professional Context:

Production media:

Specific computers and software. Digital printer. Standards of communication. Workflows. Normalized light pupitre. Measurement and control tools and tools: densitometer, tipometer, odometer, colorimeter and spectrophotometer.

Products and results:

Production parameters entered into the workflow. Recorded quality control incidents. Completed control sheets. Failures or defects in the registered processes. Quality parameters identified throughout the graphical process.

Information used or generated:

Production order. Technical documentation of preprint, printing and post-pressure equipment and machines. Applicable rules for the prevention of occupational and environmental risks. Quality standards and standards to be applied in the graphical process. Technical equipment sheets. Maintenance manuals. Company quality control plans.

COMPETITION UNIT 2: PERFORM THE IMPOSITION AND FILMING OF GRAPHIC JOBS

Level: 2

Code: UC0920_2

Professional Realizations and Realization Criteria:

RP 1: Determine the technical specifications to generate the imposition of digital or conventional form, of the graphic products from the job specifications.

CR 1.1 The production criteria of the work are defined by specifying their particularities and the technical characteristics, depending on their dimensions and shape, the page format and the definition of the graphic structure.

CR 1.2 The technical specifications on the printing system, the production flow, and the characteristics of the systems of creation of the printer form are valued considering their impact on the imposition of the work.

CR 1.3 The printer shape, maximum or minimum work area, pincer and jaw margins, and other variables according to the particularities of the printing machine, are determined according to the established technical specifications.

CR 1.4 The criteria for taxation are set out in the light of the processes and the finishing and binding characteristics required for the production of the graphic product.

CR 1.5 The different types of tracing that may be contained in the imposition and the assemblies are determined by considering the special characteristics of the product and the possibility of using different printing systems and/or printing machines and/or different end systems.

CR 1.6 Digital files are verified by checking that they meet all the requirements to generate the digital or conventional taxation of graphic products, based on the job specifications.

RP 2: Make the necessary tracing for digital taxation or the assembly of the photoliths, in the conventional way, taking into account the technical specifications of the creation of the printer form, the printing and the processes of finishes.

CR 2.1 Data on the printer shape such as: maximum and minimum work area for both paper and printing, clamp and jaw margins and other variables are identified by assessing the particularities of the machine printing.

CR 2.2 The imposition of the photoliths is based on the technical characteristics of the binding and finishing systems defined for the graphic product, such as the development of the quadrillos, their folding and paging according to the type of binding.

CR 2.3 The layout for special graphics products: printed die-cut, packaging and packaging, is done for the verse (face A) and/or front (face B), optimizing the maximum printing area and taking into account the characteristics techniques of the finishing machines.

CR 2.4 The information marks necessary for the control and adjustment of the printer form are incorporated in the conventional imposition to the astron by performing the assembly of the pages and applying for the same a color code for each item: lines, marks, and others.

CR 2.5 The different registration, cutting, folding or lump marks are incorporated into the development of the layout by defining bending and cutting cotes, print heels, signatures, folding cutouts, die lines and others according to the order.

RP 3: Perform digital taxation, as directed by the work order, to obtain the correct placement of all elements, verifying the final result and generating the definitive file.

CR 3.1 The order of the pages or graphic products that contain the digital documents, their complete or fragmented integration into the tax is set according to the work order and the test or model.

CR 3.2 The digital files are attached to the laying out, according to the instructions on the work order, respecting the exact position and distance between them and with respect to the established print area.

CR 3.3 The tax work is validated by visual observation of the end result, using the preview options in the enforcement program.

CR 3.4 Digital tax work is verified by a printed test where the information marks, the married pages and the content of the printer form are faithfully simulated, controlling the end result of the work. expected.

CR 3.5 The definitive file is generated, following the instructions of the work order, according to the needs of the subsequent process: filming of computer to plate (computer to plate -CTP-), computer filming to film (computer to film -CTF-), computer-to-screen filming (computer to screen -CTS-), computer-to-photopolymer filming (computer to photopolymer -CTP-), digital printing systems, or other distribution environments.

RP 4: Filming digital files, either taxes or on loose pages, to get the photolito, verifying that the separations are correct and contain all the elements.

CR 4.1 The film maker is calibrated and characterizes by sending the manufacturer's own linearization wedges to the same, ensuring that the density of the black is adequate by means of the appropriate instrument, and introducing into the RIP driver for possible deviations using a reset curve.

CR 4.2 The data relating to the compensation of the stamping gain, provided by the printer, is entered in the device's RIP controller.

CR 4.3 The film processor is kept in perfect working order, verifying the status of the liquids, its regenerated, the appropriate speed and temperature.

CR 4.4 Digital files are dumped in the preprint workflow by setting the order of preprint and its full or fragmented integration.

CR 4.5 Digital files, whether they are taxes or on loose pages, are sent to film from the workflow, introducing the appropriate parameters to the printing team to use.

CR 4.6 The photoliths obtained are disclosed in the process, controlling the maintenance of the appropriate speed and temperature and following the applicable regulations for the prevention of occupational and environmental risks.

CR 4.7 The separation that forms the graphical work is checked, verifying the absence of defects and their correspondence with the digital files, according to the technical specifications.

CR 4.8 Machine adjustment perforations made in the photolith are verified, checking that it is in line with the preregistration elements of the printing machine.

RP 5: Perform the imposition and assembly of the photoliths using the conventional method, for the past of the printer form, verifying that the separations are correct and contain all the elements.

CR 5.1 The photoliths received are checked, observing their correct design in relation to the printing system, their cleaning and the absence of defects that can cause unwanted effects in the past of irons.

CR 5.2 Color and color separations are checked, verifying that they include indications of the color they represent.

CR 5.3 The imposition of the photoliths is performed on the astralones, provided with pre-registration dies and according to the strip needs and removes in the printing.

CR 5.4 The photoliths are cut if there are meeting pages, excess blood and film leftovers, avoiding the creation of edges in the cuts and the superposition of photoliths, thus preventing unwanted effects in the past of plates.

CR 5.5 The photoliths, adjustment and recording elements, guides, heels and measurement scales of stamping densities are fixed to the astron using transparent adhesive materials and products, adjusting each of the color separations over different astralones.

CR 5.6 The tests of the assemblies (ferros) are performed by performing the exposure of the assemblies on special paper and their later revealed.

CR 5.7 The ferros fold and cut, forming the ring, checking the contents and the correct location and cutting of all the elements that make up the assembly.

CR 5.8 Operations are performed in compliance with applicable labour and environmental risk prevention regulations.

Professional Context:

Production media:

Computer equipment. Test equipment for taxation and assembly. Film-maker. Processor. RIP. Storage devices. Testing software. Digital tax creation software. Workflows, software module for verification and control of digital taxation. Raw materials for testing systems for taxation. Raw materials for the process of filming photoliths (film). Raw materials for manual imposition assembly (astralones). Photoliths. Adhesive materials and products for assembly. Assembly table. Tools and assembly material. Tools and measuring instruments: rules, tipometer, storytellers.

Products and results:

Plotted performed. Imposition of the (digital or conventional) work performed. Proof of imposition, position tests, proof of correction and proof of conformity. Configuration, characterization and calibration of devices. Manual mounts already imposed. Fotoliths taxes or on loose pages. Ferros. Test prototypes.

Information used or generated:

Production order. Sheet of technical specifications. Information about the printing system. Information provided by the printer: maximum printing area, pincer margin, volteal system of the specifications and other variables of the machines. Information provided with regard to post-pressure: binding, stitching, cutting, slits, folding, lump-sum and handling and peculiarities of other finishing processes. Technical documentation of the preprint, printing and finishing equipment. Applicable rules of quality. Applicable rules for the prevention of occupational and environmental risks.

COMPETITION UNIT 3: GET PRINTER FORMS USING DIRECT DIGITAL SYSTEMS

Level: 2

Code: UC0921_2

Professional Realizations and Realization Criteria:

RP 1: Adjust and configure the preferences and plotting options in the printer form creation system, calibrating and characterizing the device, for the correct obtaining of the shape.

CR 1.1 Input folders or queues are created and configured by their association with work curves (frame options) created in the controller RIP.

CR 1.2 The data relating to the type of work to be performed and the limitations of the printing system are incorporated into the RIP, adapting the possibilities of the controller program in terms of the generation of the frame for the work perform, creating a specific queue in the required cases.

CR 1.3 The RIP is configured by including the tramway method to be used: conventional, stochastic hybrid frame, or others depending on the type of job to be printed.

CR 1.4 Printer form creation systems are kept in perfect working order by doing control through the RIP.

CR 1.5 The processing system for creating the printer form remains in the optimal state of operation, verifying the status of the liquids, their regenerated, the appropriate speed and temperature.

CR 1.6 The stability of the system of creation of the printer form is verified, by obtaining the linearization wedges of the manufacturer assuring, with suitable instruments, that the density of the black is the minimum appropriate and the percentage point has not suffered deviations.

CR 1.7 Possible deviations in the percentage of point read in the printer form are incorporated into the controller RIP by a readjustment curve of the support behavior and again verifying the result.

CR 1.8 Data regarding the compensation of the stamping gain, provided by the printer, are entered in the device's RIP controller.

RP 2: Get the printer form for offset printing, using the direct computer to plate (CTP), verifying that the color separations of the graphic work are correct and contain all the required elements.

CR 2.1 The digital file is sent to the printer shape creation system with the machine settings and settings set in the job specifications.

CR 2.2 The parameters of the devices of the direct-to-iron system are maintained in the optimum values, regulating them if necessary and complying with the applicable rules of prevention of occupational risks and environmental.

CR 2.3 The waste generated during the process is treated, following the procedures established by the company, complying with the applicable regulations for the prevention of occupational and environmental risks.

CR 2.4 The number of sheets obtained is checked by verifying that they correspond to the number of the required color separations.

CR 2.5 The offset printing forms are reviewed by checking that they correspond to the requirements for the job and that they have been obtained in quality conditions without apparent defects, and that their contents are according to the digital files and the job specifications.

RP 3: Get the printer form for flexographic printing, using the direct computer system to photopolymer (computer to photopolymer-CTP), verifying that the color separations of the graphic work are correct and contain all the elements.

CR 3.1 The photopolymer plate is prepared for exposure according to the characteristics of the output device: thickness, margins and others.

CR 3.2 The digital file is sent to the printer form creation system with the appropriate machine settings and settings.

CR 3.3 The process of pre-exposure of the photopolymer as a relief depth test, is performed by validating the result.

CR 3.4 The photopolymer exposure process is performed by ensuring the conditions of surface adhesion and hardness.

CR 3.5 The parameters of the devices of the processing of the direct system to photopolymer are maintained in the optimal values, regulating them if necessary and complying with the applicable regulations of prevention of occupational risks and environmental.

CR 3.6 The waste generated during the process is treated by applying the procedures established by the company, complying with the applicable regulations on the prevention of occupational and environmental risks.

CR 3.7 The number of the photopolymers obtained is checked by ensuring that they correspond to the number of the required color separations.

CR 3.8 The printer forms of the review check that they correspond to the requirements for the work and that they have been obtained in quality conditions with no apparent defects, and that their contents are according to the digital files and job specifications.

RP 4: Get the printer form for screen printing, using the appropriate computer-to-screen (computer to screen-CTS) system, verifying that the color separations of the graphic work are correct and contain all the elements.

CR 4.1 The type of screen mesh to be used is chosen taking into account the specific characteristics of the job type to be printed.

CR 4.2 The screen screen is prepared by removing the fatty substances it may contain.

CR 4.3 The digital file is sent to the printer form creation system with the appropriate machine settings and settings.

CR 4.4 The exposure process of the screen screen is performed by ensuring the impermeability and permeability conditions of the printer form.

CR 4.5 The parameters of the devices of the direct system to screen the screen are maintained in the optimal values, regulating them if necessary and complying with the applicable rules of risk prevention labor and environmental.

CR 4.6 The waste generated during the process is treated by applying the procedures established by the company, complying with the applicable regulations on the prevention of occupational and environmental risks.

CR 4.7 The number of screen-screen displays obtained is checked by ensuring that it corresponds to the number of required color separations.

CR 4.8 The screens are reviewed by checking that they correspond to the requirements for the work and that they have been obtained in quality conditions without apparent defects, and that their contents are according to the files digital and to the job specifications.

Professional Context:

Production media:

Computer and software. RIP controller of the printer form creation device. Devices for creating different printer forms. Design software. Digital files of the job. Raw materials for process of creating printer forms. Chemical products for the processing system of different types of printers. Measuring instruments: tipometer, odometer, densitometer, plate densitometer, digital control strips for printing and control of the creation of the printer form, control strips from past to iron.

Products and results:

Setting and configuring the printer shape creation system preferences performed. Hatch options for the specific print system set. Devices for obtaining the calibrated and characterized printer form. Processor in optimal working conditions. Printing forms for different printing systems: offset plates, photopolymers and screen-screen displays. Quality control in progress.

Information used or generated:

Production order. Sheet of technical specifications. Information about the printing system and its conditions, the workflow and quality control established. Information provided by the printer: maximum printing area, pincer margin, and other machine variables, stamping gain curve. Applicable rules of quality. Applicable rules for the prevention of occupational and environmental risks.

COMPETITION UNIT 4: GET PRINTER SHAPES FOR OFFSET, FLEXOGRAPHY, SERIOGRAPHY, AND TAMPOGRAPHY BY THE CONVENTIONAL METHOD

Level: 2

Code: UC0922_2

Professional Realizations and Realization Criteria:

RP 1: Check the status of the photoliths and/or assemblies for their insolation, verifying that they are in accordance with the required printing conditions.

CR 1.1 The photoliths and/or assemblies received are examined and verified, observing their correct trampling, cleaning and absence of defects in both manufacturing and inappropriate use and which may cause undesirable effects in the insolation of the printer form.

CR 1.2 The photoliths and/or mounts received are valued, checking that they are provided with the pre-registration dies, if any, appropriate to the printing machine.

CR 1.3 The received mounts are checked, verifying that they include the adjustment and recording elements, guides, heels, and measurement scales of the printing densities that are appropriate to the printing system to be used.

CR 1.4 Received mounts are reviewed, collating that all the color separations required to perform the print job are.

RP 2: Get the plate for offset printing, performing the heat stroke and processing, with the required quality.

CR 2.1 The correct operation of the light source and the vacuum system of the insolator is checked by activating the equipment according to the device manual.

CR 2.2 The insolder is configured by the adjustments of the exposures and the vacuum, adjusting them to the quality conditions required for the work to be insolar.

CR 2.3 The plates used are checked in advance, ensuring that their condition meets the minimum quality conditions for their use.

CR 2.4 The mounted photolith is placed, along with the plate, in the vacuum press, adjusting the insolder by means of the appropriate mechanisms until a perfect vacuum is achieved.

CR 2.5 The insolation of the photoliths in the iron is done by adjusting the values of intensity of the light source and time of exposure, obtaining a transfer of the image to the plate with the parameters of quality required for the print system to use.

CR 2.6 The plate processor is configured by checking that they are working properly, in terms of the status of liquids, regeneration, roller drag, speed and temperature.

CR 2.7 The insolated irons are processed, introduced into the process and adjusted for the required speed and temperature values in compliance with applicable labour and environmental risk prevention regulations.

CR 2.8 The sheets obtained are validated, checking the quality of the processed by the use of specific control strip or measuring instruments (control strips/densitometer).

RP 3: Get the photopolymer for flexographic printing, performing the insolation of the photoliths and the processed, with the required quality.

CR 3.1 The insolder is configured by acting on the light source and the vacuum system by following the manual instructions of the device.

CR 3.2 The photopolymers used are checked by ensuring that their condition responds to the minimum quality conditions for their correct use.

CR 3.3 The mounted photolith is placed, along with the photopolymer, in the insolator by activating the vacuum system according to the technical instructions.

CR 3.4 The pre-stroke of the photopolymer is performed, achieving the required hardness and surface adhesion.

CR 3.5 The insolation of the photopolymer is performed by adjusting the intensity values of the light source and exposure time, thereby obtaining a transfer of the image to the photopolymer with the required quality parameters for the flexographic printing system.

CR 3.6 The photopolymer processor is reviewed by checking its operation as regards the status of liquids, regeneration, roller drag, speed and temperature.

CR 3.7 Insolated photopolymers are processed, introduced into the process, adjusting the values of speed and temperature, achieving a process with the required quality parameters for the printing system. flexographic and complying with applicable labour and environmental risk prevention regulations.

CR 3.8 The photopolymers obtained are validated, checking that they have been performed correctly by using specific control strip or measuring instruments (control strips/densitometer).

RP 4: Get the screen for screen printing, performing the heat stroke and processing, with the required quality.

CR 4.1 The insolder is configured by acting on the light source and the vacuum system by following the manual instructions of the device.

CR 4.2 The screen to insolar is prepared, selecting the type of tissue, the mesh opening and the appropriate density.

CR 4.3 The mounted photolith is placed, along with the screen, in the insolator, activating the vacuum system according to the technical instructions.

CR 4.4 The insolation of the photoliths on the screen is performed by adjusting the intensity values of the light source and the exposure time, thereby obtaining a transfer of the image to the printer form with the quality parameters. required for the screen printing system.

CR 4.5 The insolated display is revealed using mechanical or manual water jet systems.

CR 4.6 Screen drying is done using a heat source (dryer), until you remove the moisture that it contains.

CR 4.7 The obtained printer forms are validated, checking that they have been performed correctly by using specific control strip or measuring instruments (control strips/densitometer).

CR 4.8 Operations are performed in compliance with applicable labour and environmental risk prevention regulations.

RP 5: Get the printout or printer shape for printing in tampgraphy, with the required quality.

CR 5.1 The photoliths and/or assemblies are reviewed by observing their cleanliness and the absence of defects, both in the manufacture and in the improper use, and which may cause undesirable effects in the heat stroke.

CR 5.2 The photoliths and/or assemblies received are checked, verifying their correct linearature and tramway associated with the tampographic printing system.

CR 5.3 The printout or form printer is obtained by the appropriate procedure, verifying that it has been created based on the specifications of the graphic product to be made.

CR 5.4 The raw material for the buffer element is chosen in such a way that it responds to the minimum quality conditions for the subsequent printing to be performed reliably.

CR 5.5 The printer shape obtained is checked, verifying that it conforms to the technical specifications.

CR 5.6 Operations are performed in compliance with applicable labour and environmental risk prevention regulations.

Professional Context:

Production media:

Photolito with the image of the printer form. Printer forms: offset plates, photopolymers, screen-screen screens and tampography engravings. Insolers. Processing and drying of printing forms. Chemical products for the processing and finishing system of the printing forms. Measuring instruments: tipometer, odometer, densitometer, control strips from past to iron.

Products and results:

Photoliths and checked mounts. Insolers, processors and dryers of configured and prepared printers. Controlled and prepared chemicals and solvents. Insolated printer forms of: offset, flexography, screen printing, and tampography.

Information used or generated:

Production order. Sheet of technical specifications. Information about the printing system and its conditions, the workflow and quality control established. Information provided by the printer: maximum printing area, pincer margin and other machine variables, stamping gain curve. Applicable rules of quality. Applicable rules for the prevention of occupational and environmental risks.

COMPETITION UNIT 5: GET THE PRINTER SHAPE FOR HUECOGRAVURE

Level: 2

Code: UC0923_2

Professional Realizations and Realization Criteria:

RP 1: Prepare the printing cylinders on the etching for electronic recording by verifying their correct finishing.

CR 1.1 The received huecogravure printing cylinders are checked, verifying that they conform to the technical specifications and the type of print machine to be used.

CR 1.2 Cleaning the cylinders is done using mechanical means or by means of specific chemical agents.

CR 1.3 The coating of the cylinders is performed, applying the necessary electrolytic baths to the desired characteristics.

CR 1.4 Immersion baths are made by equipping the cylinder with the necessary layers of material (nickel, copper on the steel/iron heart), according to the instructions of the work order and complying with the applicable regulations of prevention of occupational and environmental risks.

CR 1.5 Cylinder grinding is done by removing the excess copper, leaving it ready for later polishing.

RP 2: Set up the tramway options and curves in the controller RIP and calibrate the system to obtain the shape of the etching.

CR 2.1 The RIP is configured, including the hatch method to be used depending on the type of job to be printed.

CR 2.2 The cylinder recording curves are created, adapting to the typologies of graphic works to be performed from the determination of variables such as plot line, tilt of the wall of the alveolo, speed of engraving and others.

CR 2.3 Possible deviations in the percentage of the point read in the simulation are incorporated into the controller RIP using a readjustment curve of the support behavior and again verifying the result.

CR 2.4 The calibration of the recording head is performed periodically and in each process of creating the printer form.

CR 2.5 The engraving control test is released to the device by verifying the tolerance margins in the depth of the engraving and its values with respect to the pre-selected recording curve.

CR 2.6 The tolerance margins in the engraving depth are reviewed by checking that they maintain the recording curve values indicated in the technical specifications.

CR 2.7 The periodic control and validation of the device's condition is executed, through the maintenance processes, ensuring its proper functioning.

RP 3: Record the printer shape for the printout system, verifying that the cylinders are correct, that the color separations of the graphic work are correct, and that they contain all the elements.

CR 3.1 The cylinders to be recorded are selected by reference to the recording device and the technical specifications of the job.

CR 3.2 The number of cylinders to be written is determined based on the number of color separations the job has.

CR 3.3 The cylinder is mounted on the electronic recording machine using appropriate mechanisms to facilitate its correct location.

CR 3.4 Files are sent to the write RIP, validating that the image data acquisition is correct.

CR 3.5 The processing of data acquired by the controller RIP is done by verifying the generation of the printer form.

CR 3.6 The recording orders of the cylinders are sent to the cylinder recorder, checking that it is performed correctly according to the specifications, or validation of the engraving test, by means of suitable instruments (electron microscope).

CR 3.7 The recorded cylinder is validated, checking that the engraving has been performed without any visible problems or defects in the obtained printer form.

CR 3.8 The separations that make up the graphical work are verified, checking that they correspond to the requirements for the work and that they have been obtained in quality conditions and without apparent defects.

Professional Context:

Production media:

Computer and software. RIP controller of the cylinder creation device, output peripherals, and storage devices. Devices for electrolysis and electroplating of cylinders. Software for creating the tramway for printing in a huecogravure. Device for recording the cylinder. Raw materials for the creation of cylinders (nickel, chromium, copper). Measuring instruments: electronic microscope, digital control strips for printing and control of the creation of the printer.

Products and results:

Rapper options in the RIP for configured huecogravure printing. Plotted graphic work prepared for cylinder creation. Device for recording the calibrated and characterized cylinder. Engraved and prepared cylinder for printing machine assembly.

Information used or generated:

Production order, sheet of technical specifications, information about the printing system and its conditioning, workflow and quality control. Applicable rules of quality. Applicable rules for the prevention of occupational and environmental risks.

FORMATIVE MODULE 1: PROCESSES IN GRAPHIC ARTS

Level: 2

Code: MF0200_2

Associated with UC: Operate in the graphical process under security, quality, and productivity

Duration: 120 hours

Assessment capabilities and criteria:

C1: Analyze the entire graphical process and its different phases: preprint, binding and transformed printing, considering the communication between them using standardization models.

CE1.1 Explain the characteristics and type configuration of graphic arts companies according to the production phase: preprint, print, binding, transformed.

CE1.2 In a defined production environment, describe through workflows the sequence of tasks or operations for obtaining the product.

CE1.3 Analyze, from the design point of view, the characteristics of a given graphical product:

-Formats and measures.

-Typology.

-Colors.

-Media.

-Encuadernation and finish.

CE1.4 In a practical scenario of producing a given graphic product, relate and sequence the different preprint phases that have been involved in its elaboration:

-Text: body, family, style, paragraph, interline.

-Trams: line, point shape, and angulation.

-Color separation.

-Plot and paging systems used.

CE1.5 In a practical scenario of crafting a given graphical product, describe and recognize the characteristics of the printing system used according to:

-Type of media used.

-Tintas: classes and layers.

-Tramado.

-Profile of the characters.

-Footprint or relief on the media.

-Effects on printing.

-Number of passes on machines.

CE1.6 Analyze the different preprint, printing and binding and finishing systems, describing and relating their main phases to the machines, equipment, raw materials and products used.

CE1.7 Describe the most significant print electronic systems.

CE1.8 Describe and recognize the characteristics of the post-pressure process for the elaboration of a type graphic product according to the defined process and the materials used.

C2: Classify graphic products according to their composition and functional characteristics: stationery, carpeting, stanchery, editing and advertising.

CE2.1 Explain the functional characteristics of the different graphic products: Stationery, Carpet, Stucery, Editing and Advertising.

CE2.2 Identify the structural characteristics of the different graphic products: Stationery, Carpet, Stucery, Editing and Advertising.

CE2.3 From graphic product samples:

-Recognize its physicochemical composition and identify its functional capacity.

-Rate the communicative and functional capacity of the different graphic products.

-Classify the samples of proposed graphic products according to their nature and functionality: stationery, carpeting, stanchery, editing and advertising.

C3: Recognize and analyze color metrics and metrics used in graphic arts.

CE3.1 Identify chromatic spaces: RGB, CMYK, HSB, CIE Lab, used in graphic arts.

CE3.2 Describe the measurement equipment used in the color measurement: colorimeter, glitter, spectrophotometer, identifying the application of each of them.

CE3.3 Describe the various lighting sources, color temperature, and observation conditions to reproduce color under standardized conditions.

CE3.4 In a practical scenario of color measurement and from different samples of color originals:

-Identify color parameters: brightness, saturation, tone, and metamery index.

-Represent colorimetric values in chromatic spaces.

-Evaluate color differences and their ability to play in the graphical system.

-Make measurements of color variables with the colorimeter and the electrometer over different color samples indicating the readings in a template.

C4: Relating applicable labour and environmental risk prevention rules in the graphical process with the operations that are developed in each of its phases.

CE4.1 Recognize applicable labor and environmental risk prevention regulations in the graphical process.

CE4.2 Identify the security elements to be installed in the different places and risk teams in the graphical industries.

CE4.3 Using practical examples, identify the security labels that appear on the machines and products used in the graphical process.

CE4.4 Describe and relate the rules applicable to the prevention of occupational and environmental risks, with the different phases of the graphical process.

CE4.5 Recognize the environmental documents and procedures applied in the graphical process.

C5: Analyze the quality control process in a graphical arts 'process'.

CE5.1 Identify the fundamental phases and concepts of quality control in manufacturing in the graphic arts industries.

CE5.2 Describe a raw material receipt control process succinctly.

CE5.3 Describe the instruments used in quality control: densitometres, colorimeters, control strips and production line control devices, identifying their application in the different phases of the graphical process.

CE5.4 Perform densitometric and colorimetric measurements from a preprint test, and from certain print standards, by assessing that the color range reproduction is consistent with the set standards.

CE5.5 In a scenario of quality control in print processing, from a printed product, and established standards:

-Select the required measurement instrument.

-Perform metering instrument calibration.

-Perform densitometric, colorimetric, 'trapping', sliding, and gray balance measurements.

-Set the chromatic space.

-Perform different measures on the control strip.

-Check the setting with the set standards.

CE5.6 In a practical scenario of quality control in the process of transformed, from a graphical product to be bound and/or manipulate, identify and evaluate the defects detected in:

-Format and margins.

-Cutting marks.

-Log tokens.

-Signatures.

-Fibre sense.

-Repainted.

-Troquels.

CE5.7 Describe the most significant quality features of the products:

-Encuaderation and manipulated: subjective assessment, cut marks, tracks, log signals, collared.

-Resistance to folding.

-Resistance to rub.

-Printing: density, 'trapping', stamping gain, color balance, pasting, sliding, logging.

-Preprint: tests, standards.

Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real workbench:

C1 with respect to CE1.3, CE1.4 and CE1.5; C3 with respect to CE3.4; C5 with respect to CE5.4, CE5.5 and CE5.6.

Other capabilities:

Take responsibility for the work you are developing.

Demonstrate some autonomy in solving small contingencies related to their activity.

Respect internal company procedures and rules.

Maintain an assertive, empathetic and conciliatory attitude to others by demonstrating cordiality and kindness in dealing.

Recognize the organization's productive process.

Participate and actively collaborate on the work team.

Contents:

1. Graphical process

Types of graphic products.

Company types: organization and structure.

Standardization and communication models. Workflows.

Preprint systems. Classes of originals. Latent image, revealed process. Matching the digital workflow environment.

Input peripherals, output peripherals, specific software and hardware, processing and test systems.

Plotting and mounting. Elements of the assembly. Specific software.

Print systems. Equipment, capabilities, comparison of different systems.

Types of inks and media for each print system.

Encuaderation and transformed. Classes. Benefits. Teams. Features.

Paper and paperboard manipulated. Manipulated from other materials.

2. Color and its measurement

Nature of light.

Electromagnetic spectrum.

Philosophy of vision.

Chromatic Space.

Factors that affect color perception.

Color Theory. Additive and subtractive synthesis of color.

Color rendering systems: MUNSELL, RGB, HSL, HSV, PANTONE, CIE, CIE-Lab, GAFT.

Color measurement instruments: densitometres, colorimeters, glinometers, and spectrophotometers. Color assessment.

3. Standards for the prevention of labour and environmental risks applicable to graphic arts processes

Safety plans and rules.

Rules in force.

Signals and alarms.

Environmental regulations.

4. Quality in graphic arts processes

More characteristic tests, instruments and measurements.

Preprint quality: point gain, gray balance, and density.

Print variables (print density, contrast, penetration, fixed, stamping gain, color and gray balance).

Control areas in print. Measurement.

Quality in post-pressure.

Visual control of binding and manipulated.

Checking for bound and manipulated defects.

Standardization of quality.

5. Quality control in graphic arts

Quality in manufacturing.

Quality control. Concepts involved.

Control elements.

Control Phases: receipt of materials, processes, and products.

Rules and standards for the graphical process.

Training context parameters:

Spaces and installations:

The spaces and facilities will provide a response, in the form of a classroom, a workshop, a workshop of practices, a laboratory or a singular space, to the training needs, according to the Professional Context established in the Unit Partner competence, taking into account the applicable regulations of the production sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.

Professional or former trainer profile:

1. Domain of knowledge and techniques related to production operations in the graphical process under conditions of safety, quality and productivity, which will be accredited by one of the following two forms:

-Level 2 academic training (Spanish Framework of Qualifications for Higher Education), Technical Engineering, Technical Architecture, Diplomacy or other higher level of professional field.

-Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.

2. Accredited pedagogical competence in accordance with what is established by the competent administrations.

FORMATIVE MODULE 2: IMPOSING AND FILMING GRAPHIC JOBS

Level: 2

Code: MF0920_2

Associated with UC: Performing the imposition and filming of graphic jobs

Duration: 90 hours

Assessment capabilities and criteria:

C1: Determine the different layout methods used in the imposition of graphic jobs.

CE1.1 Identify the data required to plot a type graphic product.

CE1.2 Define the job stream feature of creating a manual layout.

CE1.3 Describe the job stream characteristic of creating a digital layout.

CE1.4 Identify and describe the various symbols used in the layout and assembly:

-Cut lines.

-folding lines.

-Margin of tweezers.

-Record crosses.

-Signatures.

-Tacks.

-The die lines and other items needed in printing.

CE1.5 From the technical specifications and/or the mockup of a given graphic product extract the information from:

-Production flow.

-Print systems.

-Printer form creation system.

-Finishing and binding types.

-Launch schema.

CE1.6 From a graphical product type determine the type of layout based on:

-The original class.

-The format of the print machine.

-The available paper size.

-The binding class.

-The printing system.

C2: Perform digital and/or conventional plots based on given technical specifications.

CE2.1 Identify the characteristics that determine the layout of the layout, taking into account the printing, binding and finishing systems and systems of graphic products.

CE2.2 Perform a layout, incorporating data on a given printer form: maximum and minimum work area for both paper and printing, pincer margins and others.

CE2.3 Make a layout for the imposition of a supposed die-cut graphic product, duly characterized, optimizing the maximum print area.

CE2.4 Perform a layout by marking the spaces for the correct location of the pages in a manual imposition scenario.

CE2.5 In different practices incorporate into an astron the information marks needed for control and adjustment in manual imposition, applying a color code for each element.

CE2.6 In a scenario of digital taxation based on instructions given:

-Add record, cut, fold, and lump marks to the layout development.

-Dispose the launch of the digital file.

-Indicate the order and layout of the pages according to the specification format set out in the given specifications.

C3: Perform digital file impositions using specific software, checking the final result and generating final standardized files.

CE3.1 Identify the characteristics that need to be valued from the computing applications of taxation, describing their particularities.

CE3.2 Describe the different processes of digital taxation, depending on the computer program and the workflow used.

CE3.3 Identify page storage formats, their features, and compatibility with enforcement programs.

CE3.4 Dispose the page files and the formats of the pages required to perform a particular imposition.

CE3.5 In a scenario of digital taxation from a base layout:

-Add the digital files to be imposed, by setting the order of them.

-Join the digital files to the layout of the imposition.

-Validate the tax job, by visual verification of the end result.

-Get a printed test, verifying the end result.

CE3.6 In a scenario of digital taxation of a magazine from a digital file and given instructions:

-Perform the imposition from a defined enforcement layout.

-visually verify the distribution and placement of the pages.

-Check the correct layout of the cutting and folding recording and auxiliary elements on screen.

-Get tests for taxing digital files, checking the correct distribution and placement of pages in the documents.

CE3.7 In a scenario of digital taxation of a book, based on the impositions of the pages and given instructions:

-Generate the definitive file: Pdf, Ps, Tiff, or others, depending on the needs of the defined print process.

-Check the correct disposition of all elements on screen.

-Get an imposition test from the generated file, checking the correct distribution and placement of the pages.

C4: Perform digital file footage already imposed or loose pages, obtaining photoliths with the specified quality given.

CE4.1 Describe the features and operation of film-makers.

CE4.2 Explain the different mechanisms of the film processor and its function in the processing of the photolith.

CE4.3 Describe the characteristics of the different raw materials used in obtaining photoliths: films, processing liquids.

CE4.4 Identify configuration operations based on the type of the film.

CE4.5 Describe the characteristics and limitations of the different types of hatching: conventional, stochastic or hybrid.

CE4.6 Explain the calibration process of the film-makers.

CE4.7 Describe the characteristics and operation of the measuring instrument used in the filming of the photolith.

CE4.8 Relate the causes, reasons, and effects of setting the parameters on the film, taking into account the technical data of the process and the work to be done:

-Point gain.

-Record and burst.

-Overprint and color reserve.

-Sandeg specification.

-quadricromy black: UCR, GCR.

-Transfer curves.

CE4.9 Perform RIP and Filer Self-Check Operations, in accordance with the protocols established by the manufacturers.

CE4.10 Starting from a type film, select the appropriate materials to obtain the photolith.

CE4.11 In a scenario of obtaining photoliths, from a digital file and given specifications:

-Identify the process of obtaining the photolith.

-Successfully place the photosensitive material on the film.

-Expose the photosensitive material.

-Process the photosensitive material.

-Evaluate the quality of the product obtained: point, exposure, resolution, and other percentages, detecting possible anomalies.

-Consider environmental protection measures to be taken into account in the process.

CE4.12 In a given scenario of a given photolith, check the quality of the color separations with the following observations and measurements:

-Search for stripes, scrapes, and other damage from the photolith.

-Value of the point of the nuances and semitons.

-Lineatures and Angulations.

-Moare.

-Correct color separation.

C5: Perform impositions using the conventional method using photoliths, getting the correct record in the color separations.

CE5.1 Describe the process followed in a conventional imposition.

CE5.2 Identify tools and materials used in a conventional imposition process.

CE5.3 In a scenario of preparation of photoliths for imposition, based on instructions given:

-Check the absence of scratches, stripes, and other failures.

-Check the presence and accuracy of the required record items.

-Perform all operations in compliance with applicable labor and environmental risk prevention regulations.

CE5.4 Place a previously defined layout on the mounting table and properly position the astralons on which the pages are mounted.

CE5.5 Mounting the photoliths of the pages on the astron while respecting the exact position and distance between them and with respect to the printing area established in a previously defined layout.

CE5.6 Mounting the photoliths of the various color separations of a given graphic product with accuracy, getting a correct record.

CE5.7 visually verify the quality and accuracy of impositions performed on astralones by matching with the technical specifications of properly characterized graphic projects.

CE5.8 Get ozalic tests ('ferros ') of a given imposition, checking the positioning of the elements of the assembly and complying with the applicable regulations for the prevention of occupational and environmental risks.

Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real workbench:

C1 with respect to CE1.5 and CE1.6; C2 with respect to CE2.6; C3 with respect to CE3.5, CE3.6 and CE3.7; C4 with respect to CE4.4, CE4.8, CE4.9, CE4.11 and CE4.12; C5 with respect to CE5.3.

Other capabilities:

Recognize the organization's productive process.

Demonstrate some autonomy in solving small contingencies related to their activity.

Respect internal company procedures and rules.

Interpret and execute work instructions.

Act quickly in problematic situations and not just wait.

Demonstrate flexibility to understand changes.

Contents:

1. The layout of the folds

Job format, paper format, and product format in the product specification.

Folding. Folding shapes: folding in parallel, cross, zig-zag, combined.

Folds or signatures.

Legacies and Married.

Married classes: regular, irregular, funnel.

The specification and the printing: pull and remove, flip in horizontal and/or vertical.

Layout types and considerations: Cutting, folding and recording marks, tweezers, jaws, guides, and heels.

The signature and standard marks.

2. Digital or electronic taxation

Electronic Taxation.

Features of electronic enforcement programs.

Performing process.

File Formats.

Digital Plots.

Imposing the pages.

Workflows.

3. Filming of photoliths

Types and features of the film makers.

Types and features of film processors.

RIPs drivers. Features.

Calibration and characterization of the film makers.

Generation of the hatch.

Filming methods.

Color separations.

Processed from photoliths.

Applicable labour and environmental risk prevention regulations.

4. Manual imposition

The layout used.

The conventional imposition of pages.

Performing process.

Photomite review.

Imposing color separations.

Materials and instruments used in manual enforcement.

Applicable labour and environmental risk prevention regulations.

Training context parameters:

Spaces and installations:

The spaces and facilities will provide a response, in the form of a classroom, a workshop, a workshop of practices, a laboratory or a singular space, to the training needs, according to the Professional Context established in the Unit Partner competence, taking into account the applicable regulations of the production sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.

Professional or former trainer profile:

1.-Domain of knowledge and techniques related to the imposition and filming of graphic works, which will be credited by one of the following two ways:

-Level 1 academic training (Spanish Framework of Qualifications for Higher Education) or other higher level education related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.

2.-Accredited pedagogical competence according to what the competent administrations establish.

TRAINING MODULE 3: OBTAINING PRINTER FORMS USING DIRECT DIGITAL SYSTEMS

Level: 2

Code: MF0921_2

Associated with UC: Get Printer Forms Using Direct Digital Systems

Duration: 90 hours

Assessment capabilities and criteria:

C1: Configure preferences and plotting options on printer form creation systems, based on the typology and technical specifications of a graphical product.

CE1.1 Differentiate and describe the features and operation of the various systems for creating printer forms.

CE1.2 Identify configuration operations based on the typology of the printer form creation device.

CE1.3 Describe the characteristics and limitations of the different types of tramling: conventional, stochastic or hybrid.

CE1.4 Relate the causes, reasons and effects of the adjustment of the parameters in the different exposure teams, taking into account the technical data of the process and the work to be performed:

-Point gain.

-Record and burst.

-Overprint and color reserve.

-Sandeg specification.

-quadricromy black: UCR, GCR.

-Transfer curves.

CE1.5 Configure a RIP based on the type of hatch specified in a type production sheet.

CE1.6 In a scenario of setting options for plotting, based on a given technical specification:

-Incorporate the RIP information about the work typology to be performed.

-Enter the print machine's stamp gain compensation curve.

-Introduce the limitations of the printing system to be used, depending on the given technical specifications.

CE1.7 Use the input folders or queues by associating them to the presettings of the frame options previously created in a RIP.

CE1.8 In a scenario of testing different digital files based on some instructions and some forms of printer:

-Verify its validity for obtaining the printer form.

-Describe the characteristics of digital files.

-Recognize the most common defects in digital files.

C2: Calibrate and characterize printer-form-building devices using the appropriate measuring instruments.

CE2.1 Different and describe the features and operation of the various printer-form building devices.

CE2.2 Explain the process of calibration and characterization of the different creation devices of the printer form.

CE2.3 Describe the characteristics and operation of measuring instruments used in creating printer shapes.

CE2.4 In a practical simulation of equipment preparation, perform RIP self-check operations and the exposure units according to the protocols established by the manufacturer.

CE2.5 In a convenient device calibration scenario for obtaining printer forms, from a type device:

-Calibrate and characterize the printer shape creation team using the procedure set by the manufacturer.

-Verify the stability of the printer shape creation system using the appropriate measuring instrument.

-Verify the correct playback of the percentage point by the manufacturer's own linearisation wedges.

-Modify possible point percentage deviations.

-Incorporate the support behavior readjustment curve to the RIP.

-Enter the offset gain curve of a printing machine type.

CE2.6 In a scenario of control of the processing of the printer form, from given instructions:

-Control the quality of the processed using manual control tasks by verifying: the status of the liquids, regenerated, speed and proper temperature.

-methodically perform maintenance operations: tank cleaning and regeneration of processing liquids.

-Meet applicable labor and environmental risk prevention regulations.

C3: Get printer shapes for offset, using direct computer-to-plate (CTP) system, checking the quality of the final result.

CE3.1 Describe the features and operation of the computer-to-plate printer (computer to plate-CTP) printer creation equipment.

CE3.2 Explain the different processing mechanisms used to obtain the printer form.

CE3.3 Describe the characteristics of the different particular raw materials of computer-to-plate (computer to plate-CTP) systems: processing plates and liquids.

CE3.4 Rate the use of printer-form-taking equipment based on established printing systems and working characteristics, duly characterized.

CE3.5 Select the appropriate materials to obtain the printer form, considering the type of the form-get device, in properly characterized practical assumptions.

CE3.6 In a practical scenario of obtaining printer forms for offset, from a digital file and given technical specifications:

-Identify the process of obtaining the printer form.

-Successfully place the photosensitive material on the device.

-Expose the photosensitive material.

-Process the photosensitive material.

-Evaluate the quality of the product obtained: point, exposure, resolution, and other percentages, detecting possible anomalies.

CE3.7 In given color separations, check the quality of the same with the following observations and measurements:

-Search for stripes, scrapes, and other form damage.

-Value of the point of the nuances and semitons.

-Lineatures and Angulations.

-Moare.

-Correct color separation.

C4: Get printing forms for flexography, using the direct computer system to photopolymer (computer to photopolymer-CTP), checking the quality of the final result.

CE4.1 Describe the characteristics and operation of the direct computer equipment to photopolymer (computer to photopolymer-CTP) of creating the printer form in flexography.

CE4.2 Explain the different processing mechanisms used to obtain the printer form.

CE4.3 Describe the characteristics of the different particular raw materials of computer systems to photopolymer (CTP): photopolymers, processing liquids and others.

CE4.4 Determine the pre-registration system: micro-points, perforations, and others, more appropriate to given technical specifications.

CE4.5 Determine the equipment for obtaining printer forms based on established print systems and working characteristics.

CE4.6 Select the appropriate materials to obtain the printer form, considering the type of device for obtaining the photopolymer.

CE4.7 In a practical scenario of obtaining printer forms for flexography, from a digital file and given technical specifications:

-Identify the process of obtaining the printer form.

-Successfully place the photopolymer on the device.

-Pre-insolar the photopolymer.

-Perform the subsequent insolation of the photopolymer, if the computer technology to photopolymer (CTP) used requires it.

-Process the photopolymer.

-Evaluate the quality of the product obtained: percentage of point, exposure, resolution, depth of engraving, hardness of the photopolymer and others, detecting possible anomalies.

-Prepare the photopolymers taking into account the printing machine's fixing systems.

CE4.8 In given color separations, check the quality of the same with the following observations and measurements:

-Search for stripes, scrapes, and other photopolymer defects.

-Value of the point of the nuances and semitons.

-Lineatures and Angulations.

-Moare.

-Correct color separation.

-Revented and color overlays.

-Correction of dimensional deformation due to the curvature of the printer cylinder.

C5: Get printing forms for screen printing, using direct computer-to-screen (computer to screen-CTS) system, checking the quality of the final result.

CE5.1 Describe the features and operation of computer-to-screen (computer to screen-CTS) computer systems for creating the printer form in screen printing.

CE5.2 Explain the different processing mechanisms used to obtain the printer form.

CE5.3 Describe the characteristics of the different particular raw materials of computer-to-screen (CTS) systems: screens, emulsions, processing liquids, and others.

CE5.4 Determine the most appropriate pre-registration system to given technical specifications.

CE5.5 Select the process to get screens based on the characteristics of the established print team and some job features.

CE5.6 Select the appropriate materials to obtain the printer form, considering the type of device to get the screen.

CE5.7 In a practical scenario of obtaining printer forms for screen printing, from a digital file and given technical specifications:

-Identify the process of obtaining the printer form.

-Perform pre-screen preparation.

-Successfully place the display on the device.

-Perform the display of the screen, if the computer-to-screen (computer to screen-CTS) technology used requires it.

-Process the screen.

-Evaluate the quality of the product obtained: point percentages, exposure, resolution, mesh status, emulsion status, and others, detecting possible anomalies.

-Prepare the screens by taking into account the frames and the printing equipment.

CE5.8 In given color separations, check the quality of the same with the following observations and measurements:

-Search for stripes, scrapes, and other form damage.

-Value of the point of the nuances and semitons.

-Lineatures and Angulations.

-Moare.

-Correct color separation.

-Correct mounting and tensioning on frames.

Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real workbench:

C1 with respect to CE1.4, CE1.6 and CE1.8; C2 with respect to CE2.4, CE2.5 and CE2.6; C3 with respect to CE3.4, CE3.6 and CE3.7; C4 with respect to CE4.5, CE4.7 and CE4.8; C5 with respect to CE5.7 and CE5.8.

Other capabilities:

Recognize the organization's productive process.

Demonstrate some autonomy in solving small contingencies related to their activity.

Respect internal company procedures and rules.

Demonstrate flexibility to understand changes.

Act quickly in problematic situations and not just wait.

Interpret and execute work instructions.

Contents:

1. Configuring the systems

Typology of equipment.

Features and operation.

Configuring the RIP.

Preferences and plotting options.

Configuration technical data.

Frames: lineature, angle, and percentage point.

Trout technologies: features and utilization.

Point gain.

2. Raw materials for obtaining printer forms by direct digital systems

Features and application.

Printer shapes for offset: irons. Types and features.

Printer shapes for flexography: photopolymers. Types and features.

Printer shapes for screen printing: screen screens. Types and features.

Emulsions. Types and properties.

Revealed and finished products of the printer form. Types and features.

Applicable labour and environmental risk prevention regulations.

3. Obtaining printer forms using direct digital systems

Direct to iron. Types and characteristics. Operation.

Benchmarking between different technologies.

Calibrating and configuring device to obtain printer forms.

Measurement instruments. Features and operation.

Lineup cots.

Characteristics and management of insolers.

Features and handling of processors.

Maintenance and cleaning of devices.

Applicable labour and environmental risk prevention regulations.

Quality control of the insolated plates.

Defects of the printing forms: variation of the point, greasing, veil, breasts and scratches, defects of the emulsion, defects of the processed.

Training context parameters:

Spaces and installations:

The spaces and facilities will provide a response, in the form of a classroom, a workshop, a workshop of practices, a laboratory or a singular space, to the training needs, according to the Professional Context established in the Unit Partner competence, taking into account the applicable regulations of the production sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.

Professional or former trainer profile:

1.-Domain of knowledge and techniques related to obtaining printer forms through direct digital systems, which will be accredited by one of the following two ways:

-Level 1 academic training (Spanish Framework of Qualifications for Higher Education) or other higher level education related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.

2.-Accredited pedagogical competence according to what the competent administrations establish.

FORMATIVE MODULE 4: OBTAINING PRINTER SHAPES FOR OFFSET, FLEXOGRAPHY, SERIGRAPHY, AND TAMPOGRAPHY BY THE CONVENTIONAL METHOD

Level: 2

Code: MF0922_2

Associated with UC: Get printer shapes for offset, flexography, screen printing, and tampography by the conventional method

Duration: 90 hours

Assessment capabilities and criteria:

C1: Check for photoliths and/or assemblies, verifying their validity for the insolation of printer forms in offset printing, flexography, screen printing and tampography systems.

CE1.1 Describe the characteristics of the plot: angulation, linearity, and dot shape.

CE1.2 Explain the most common defects given in the photoliths.

CE1.3 Recognize the adjustment and recording elements, guides, heels and scales of measurement densities used in photoliths and assemblies for the printing forms of offset printing systems, flexography, screen printing and tampography.

CE1.4 In a scenario of testing photoliths, based on the following instructions:

-Check that the photoliths have no defects that produce unwanted effects in the insoled posterior.

-Verify that the hatch and lineature are the appropriate for the print system to use.

-Check that all the photoliths contain the adjustment and recording elements and the stamping densities scales, as well as the number of color separations it contains.

C2: Insolar and process irons for offset printing, starting from their corresponding photoliths and controlling the quality of the result.

CE2.1 Describe the characteristics and operation of the insolation and processing equipment of the plates for offset printing.

CE2.2 Explain the insolation and processing mechanisms used to obtain the iron for offset printing.

CE2.3 Recognize the characteristics of the different raw materials used for the insolation and processing of plates for offset printing: films or photoliths, plates and liquids for processing.

CE2.4 In a practical scenario of an offset plate insolation process, from a set of facilitated photoliths:

-Select the iron based on the printing machine.

-Prepare presensitized irons, valuing the correct emulsifier.

-Drill through the plates taking into account the printing machine's jaws.

-Successfully position the astron on the iron.

-Place the iron in the heat stroke press.

-Perform the vacuum in the insolder.

-Schedule the amount of light and time depending on the material and characteristics of the original.

-Insolar the irons.

CE2.5 In a practical case of offset plate processing, from an insolated set of irons provided:

-Control and replenish processed liquids, taking into account safety, health and environmental protection standards.

-Adjust the processing temperature and speed parameters.

-Process the irons.

-Control the quality of the sheets obtained, replaying possible anomalies.

CE2.6 In a practical scenario of a given offset plate processing operation, check the quality of color separations in offset printing plates, based on technical specifications with observations and measurements to be performed:

-Search for stripes, scrapes, and other damage to the printer form.

-Adequate density of black areas in separations.

-Value of the point of the nuances and semitons.

-Lineatures and Angulations.

-Moare.

-Correct color separation.

-Revented and color overlays.

C3: Insolar and process photopolymers for flexographic printing, starting from their corresponding photoliths and controlling the quality of the result.

CE3.1 Describe the characteristics and operation of the heat-stroke and photopolymer processing equipment for flexographic printing.

CE3.2 Explain the insolation and processing mechanisms used to obtain the photopolymer for flexographic printing.

CE3.3 Recognize the characteristics of the different raw materials used for the insolation and processing of photopolymers for flexographic printing: films or photoliths, photopolymers and processing and solvent products.

CE3.4 In a practical scenario of photopolymer insolation, from a set of facilitated photoliths:

-Select the type of photopolymer based on the printing machine.

-Rate the correct emulsifier of the photopolymers.

-Perform pre-heat if the characteristics of the photopolymer require it.

-Successfully position the photoliths on the photopolymer.

-Place the photopolymer together with the photoliths in the heat stroke press.

-Perform the vacuum in the insolder.

-Schedule the amount of light and time depending on the material and characteristics of the original.

-Perform the insolation by getting the anchor and entrenching the final image zones of the photopolymer.

CE3.5 In a practical process of processing photopolymers, from a set of heat-treated photopolymers provided:

-Control and replenish processed liquids, taking into account safety, health and environmental protection standards.

-Adjust the processing temperature and speed parameters.

-Process the photopolymers.

-Perform the drying of the photopolymer.

-Control the quality of the photopolymers obtained: point percentages, exposure, resolution, depth of engraving, hardness of the photopolymer and others, detecting possible anomalies.

-Prepare the photopolymers taking into account the printing machine's fixing systems.

CE3.6 According to technical specifications of a given photo-polymer processing operation, check the quality of colour separations in the photopolymer for flexographic printing, with the observations and measurements following:

-Search for stripes, scrapes, and other damage to the printer form.

-Adequate density of black areas in separations.

-Value of the point of the nuances and semitons.

-Lineatures and Angulations.

-Moare.

-Correct color separation.

-Revented and color overlays.

-Correction of dimensional deformation due to the curvature of the printer cylinder.

C4: Insolar and process screens for screen printing, starting with their corresponding photoliths and controlling the quality of the result.

CE4.1 Describe the characteristics and operation of the screen insolation equipment for screen printing.

CE4.2 Explain the processing mechanisms used to obtain the screen for screen printing.

CE4.3 Recognize the characteristics of the different raw materials used for the insolation and processing of screens for screen printing: films or photoliths, screens, emulsions and processed products.

CE4.4 According to technical specifications of a given screen printing process, select the appropriate materials to obtain the screen, considering:

-The type of the form-get device.

-The class of film to use.

-The screen class to use: fabric type, mesh opening, and density.

-The type of emulsion.

-The processing system.

-The frames to use.

-The type of raclet to use.

-The inks to use.

-The screen printing equipment.

CE4.5 In a practical scenario of the insolation of screen-screen displays and from a set of facilitated photoliths:

-Select the screen based on the print team.

-Prepare the screens.

-Successfully position the photolith on the screen.

-Place the screen in the insolder.

-Perform the vacuum in the insolder.

-Schedule the amount of light and time depending on the material and characteristics of the original.

-Insolar the screens.

CE4.6 In a scenario of processed screen-screen processing, from a set of insolated screens provided:

-Control and regulate the processing water pressure.

-Process the screens, taking into account safety, health and environmental protection standards.

-Perform the drying of the screens.

-Control the quality of the obtained screens, replaying possible failures.

-Perform, if appropriate, the necessary hardened and conservation processes based on the characteristics of the emulsion and the screen.

CE4.7 According to technical specifications of a given screen processing operation, check the quality of color separations on screens for screen printing, with the following observations and measurements:

-Search for stripes, scrapes, and other damage to the printer form.

-Adequate density of black areas in separations.

-Value of the point of the nuances and semitons.

-Lineatures and Angulations.

-Moare.

-Correct color separation.

-Correct mounting and tensioning on frames.

C5: Get the printer form of tampography, starting from its corresponding photoliths and controlling the quality of the result.

CE5.1 Describe the characteristics and operation of the insoled and processed equipment of printer shapes for tampography.

CE5.2 Explain the insolation and processing mechanisms used to obtain the printer form for printing.

CE5.3 Recognize the characteristics of the different raw materials used for the insolation and processing of printing forms for the printing of tampographic printing: films or photoliths, clichés and processed products.

CE5.4 According to technical specifications of a given tambography process, select the appropriate materials to obtain the cliché, considering:

-The type of the form-get device.

-The class of film to use.

-The class of cliché to use.

-The type of emulsion.

-The processing system.

-The size of the printing machine.

CE5.5 In a practical scenario of heatstroke heat stroke and, from a set of facilitated photoliths:

-Select the clichés based on the print team.

-Prepare the clichés.

-Successfully position the photolith over the cliché.

-Place the cliché on the insolder.

-Perform the vacuum in the insolder.

-Schedule the amount of light and time depending on the material and characteristics of the original.

-Insolar the cliché.

CE5.6 In a practical scenario of processing tampographic clichés and, from a set of unsold-out clichés facilitated:

-Control and replenish processed liquids, taking into account safety, health and environmental protection standards.

-Process the cliché.

-Control the quality of the clichés obtained, exposure, depth of engraving, hardness of the cliché and others, detecting possible anomalies.

-Perform the necessary conservation processes based on the characteristics of the emulsion and the cliché.

CE5.7 According to technical specifications of a given cliché processing operation, check the quality of color separations in the cliché for tampographic printing, with the following observations and measurements:

-Search for stripes, scrapes, and other damage to the printer form.

-Adequate density of black areas in separations.

-Correct color separation.

Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real workbench:

C1 with respect to CE1.4; C2 with respect to CE2.4, CE2.5 and CE2.6; C3 with respect to CE3.4, CE3.5, CE3.6; C4 with respect to CE4.4, CE4.5, CE4.6 and CE4.7; C5 with respect to CE5.4, CE5.5, CE5.6 and CE5.7.

Other capabilities:

Recognize the organization's productive process.

Demonstrate some autonomy in solving small contingencies related to their activity.

Respect internal company procedures and rules.

Interpret and execute work instructions.

Act quickly in problematic situations and not just wait.

Demonstrate flexibility to understand changes.

Contents:

1. Raw materials for obtaining printer forms by the conventional method

Different types of raw materials: photoliths, printing forms, emulsions, processing products, and solvents.

Characteristics and types of photoliths.

Photolite Defects.

Adjustment and recording elements in the photolith.

Color Separations in Fotoliths: Trapper, Angulation, and Lineature.

Features and types of printer shapes.

Conventional Offset Plates.

Types of photopolymers.

screen-screen screens: type of fabric, mesh opening, and density.

Tampographic clichés. Features.

Types of emulsions: from photoliths and screen-screen displays.

Processing products for different printer forms. Features.

Applicable labour and environmental risk prevention regulations.

2. Equipment and methods of insolation

Characteristics and operation of the equipment.

Mechanisms tuning elements.

Offset plate insolers.

Photopolymer insolers.

Screen-screen insolders.

Tampographic Clichés.

Sources of light.

Vacuum presses.

Heatstroke methods: features and techniques.

3. Processing equipment and methods

Characteristics and operation of the equipment.

Mechanisms tuning elements.

Offset plate processor.

Photopolymer Processor.

Processed screen screens.

Tampographic cliché processor.

Setting parameters: temperature and speed.

Control and regeneration of liquids.

Processing methods: features and techniques.

Applicable labour and environmental risk prevention regulations.

Printers by conventional method.

Training context parameters:

Spaces and installations:

The spaces and facilities will provide a response, in the form of a classroom, a workshop, a workshop of practices, a laboratory or a singular space, to the training needs, according to the Professional Context established in the Unit Partner competence, taking into account the applicable regulations of the production sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.

Professional or former trainer profile:

1.-Domain of knowledge and techniques related to obtaining forms printers for offset, flexography, screen printing and tampography by the conventional method, which will be credited by one of two forms following:

-Level 1 academic training (Spanish Framework of Qualifications for Higher Education) or other higher level education related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.

2.-Accredited pedagogical competence according to what the competent administrations establish.

FORMATIVE MODULE 5: OBTAINING THE PRINTER FORM FOR A HUECOGRAVURE

Level: 2

Code: MF0923_2

Associated with UC: Get the printer form for engraving

Duration: 60 hours

Assessment capabilities and criteria:

C1: Prepare cylinders by following the procedures set out in given technical specifications.

CE1.1 Describe the process of preparing the engraving cylinders.

CE1.2 Explain the various cleaning and degreasing systems of hologravure cylinders.

CE1.3 Define the principles of electrolysis.

CE1.4 List the different coatings and properties of a huecogravure cylinder.

CE1.5 Describe the characteristics and purpose of the various immersion electrolytic baths.

CE1.6 In a practical case of cylinder development, from technical specifications given the process of taking into account the characteristics of the cylinder:

-Check the received cylinders, determining their adequacy to the technical specifications.

-Clean cylinders by mechanical means, electrolytic processes or by chemical agents.

-Apply the different coatings using the corresponding bathrooms.

-Rectify cylinders, removing excess material.

-Polishing the cylinder mechanically by obtaining a surface with the required roughness.

-Control the quality of the cylinders obtained, assessing hardness, roughness, caliber and absence of defects.

C2: Configure and calibrate devices for the creation of holoengraving cylinders, according to typology and given technical specifications.

CE2.1 Differential and describe the characteristics and operation of the recording systems of hologravure cylinders and their calibration modes.

CE2.2 Defend configuration operations based on the typology of the recording device.

CE2.3 Describe the characteristics and limitations of the different types of alveolus, inclination (emptying angle) and their relationship to the angle and line.

CE2.4 Explain the calibration process for cylinder recording equipment.

CE2.5 Perform calibration operations of the engraving units, in a cylinder, periodically and in accordance with the protocols established by the manufacturers.

CE2.6 In a scenario of calibration of the equipment involved in a recording process, from given instructions:

-Verify the correct reproduction of the lines, angulatures and point percentages by the standardized tests recommended by the manufacturers.

-Detect possible percentage point deviations originating from the recording process.

-Detect possible deviations from the RIP.

-Incorporate the support behavior readjustment curve to the RIP.

CE2.7 In a scenario of setting up the RIP, based on some technical instructions for work given:

-Configure the RIP based on the type of hatch to use.

-Incorporate the RIP information about the work typology to be performed.

Set the limitations of the engraving printing system.

C3: Perform electronic engraving on a diamond-head-embossed printer cylinder.

CE3.1 Describe the characteristics and operation of the diamond head engraving equipment.

CE3.2 Describe the characteristics and operation of the measuring instruments used in the recording of cylinders.

CE3.3 Select the appropriate cylinder by considering the recording device and the technical characteristics of the work in properly characterized practical assumptions.

CE3.4 Check the correct and appropriate disposition of the record items.

CE3.5 In a practical scenario of engraving cylinders and starting from a digital file and given technical specifications:

-Successfully place the cylinder in the tape drive of the recording unit.

-Perform the engraving of the cylinder.

-Evaluate the quality of the product obtained: point, depth, line, angle, and other percentages, detecting possible anomalies.

-Apply the recorded cylinder preservation procedures for storage.

CE3.6 Check the quality of color separations with the following observations and measurements:

-Search for hits and other damage to the shape.

-Value of the point of the nuances and semitons.

-Lineatures and Angulations.

-Moare.

-Correct color separation.

Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real workbench:

C1 with respect to CE1.6; C2 with respect to CE2.6 and CE2.7; C3 with respect to CE3.5 and CE3.6.

Other capabilities:

Recognize the organization's productive process.

Demonstrate some autonomy in solving small contingencies related to their activity.

Respect internal company procedures and rules.

Demonstrate flexibility to understand changes.

Act quickly in problematic situations and not just wait.

Participate and actively collaborate on the work team.

Contents:

1. Preparing cylinders

Preparation process.

Cleaning and degreasing systems.

Principles of electrolysis. Electrolytic baths. Purpose.

Types of coatings.

Rectification of cylinders.

Mechanical polishing of cylinders. Roughness.

Cylinder defects: point variation, greasing, etching defects, hits, and others.

Quality control in the preparation of cylinders.

Applicable labour and environmental risk prevention regulations.

2. Setting up the cylinder recording system

Features and operation.

Configuration operations.

Types of alveoli. Flush angle.

Measurement instruments.

Calibration and configuration of cylinder recording equipment.

Calibration protocols.

Configuring the controller RIP.

Percentage of Point. Linearature. Angulature.

3. Cylinder engraving systems

Procedure and features.

Recording devices.

Record items.

Electronic cylinder recorder unit. Types and features

Measurement instruments.

Color separations.

Finish, storage and storage of cylinders.

Training context parameters:

Spaces and installations:

The spaces and facilities will provide a response, in the form of a classroom, a workshop, a workshop of practices, a laboratory or a singular space, to the training needs, according to the Professional Context established in the Unit Partner competence, taking into account the applicable regulations of the production sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.

Professional or former trainer profile:

1.-Domain of knowledge and techniques related to obtaining the printer form for hollows, which will be credited by one of the following two ways:

-Level 1 academic training (Spanish Framework of Qualifications for Higher Education) or other higher level education related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.

2.-Accredited pedagogical competence according to what the competent administrations establish.

ANNEX IX

Professional qualification: Litography

Professional Family: Graphic Arts

Level: 2

Code: ARG289_2

General Competition

Perform and process different types of lithographic matrices, starting from previous or own sketches and performing state tests to obtain lithographic prints in the various lithographic printing systems, operating under security and quality conditions.

Competition Units

UC0687_2: Develop and interpret sketches for graphic work

UC0924_2: Perform lithographic arrays

UC0925_2: Stampar in lithography

Professional Environment

Professional Scope

Develops its professional activity in the lithographic area in workshops dedicated to the engraving and lithographic printing and in art galleries specialized in graphic work in entities of a small size public or private, medium and large and regardless of its legal form both self-employed and dependent, in its case, functional and/or hierarchically of a superior. The principles of universal accessibility are applied in the development of professional activity in accordance with the applicable regulations.

Productive Sectors

It is located in the productive sector of graphic artistic activities, in the subsector related to artistic creation by lithography and in any other sector that has some of these activities constituting its own print subsector or in any production sector that has this activity.

Relevant occupations and jobs

The terms of the following relationship of occupations and jobs are used with a generic and omnicomprensivo character of women and men.

Lithography Recorder

Lithography Prints

Lithographic Stone Recorder

lithographic press operators

Advisors in lithography

Associated Training (450 hours)

Training Modules

MF0687_2: Expression techniques for graphic work (120 hours)

MF0924_2: lithographic processing (210 hours)

MF0925_2: Litographic stampation (120 hours)

COMPETITION UNIT 1: ELABORATE AND INTERPRET SKETCHES FOR GRAPHIC WORK

Level: 2

Code: UC0687_2

Professional Realizations and Realization Criteria:

RP 1: Select the graphical expression techniques for performing studies and sketches by choosing the most appropriate to engraving and stamping techniques.

CR 1.1 The materials, tools and procedures of graphic expression for the performance of sketches are valued by determining the adequacy of their resources to the techniques of engraving and stamping.

CR 1.2 Graphic expression materials, tools, and procedures are selected according to their nature and the qualities they provide as resources.

CR 1.3 Graphic expression techniques are chosen based on their suitability for the formal and expressive possibilities of engraving and stamping techniques.

RP 2: Develop notes and pre-sketch studies, following successive stages in the construction of the image to establish the basic compositional structure of the sketch.

CR 2.1 The degree of complexity and development of the sketches is established according to the characteristics of the chosen embossing and stamping techniques.

CR 2.2 The sketches are drawn by pointing to the basic shapes collected in general lines and masses.

CR 2.3 The format and dimensions of the work are established, taking into account the relationship between the footprint and the margins of the paper in the stamp that culminates the process.

CR 2.4 The compositional structure is sketched, as a basis for the construction of the image, establishing the centers of attention and the lines of force.

CR 2.5 The studies of the particular parts or aspects of the composition are carried out according to the needs of greater depth or detail in the elaboration of the final draft.

RP 3: Make the final sketch, completing the image construction, to serve as a model in the processes of making the matrices and their stamping.

CR 3.1 Previous stages of the image are collected in the sketch by applying the dimensional and compositional results obtained in the sketches, notes and previous studies.

CR 3.2 The development of the sketch is carried out using conventional graphic techniques and/or by specific computer equipment and software.

CR 3.3 The construction of the image in the sketch is carried out by means of the point and the line applying its constructive, descriptive, expressive, gestural or signic capacities and taking into account the own resources of the techniques of engraving and stamping.

CR 3.4 The color is applied in the sketch by establishing the required relationships between the tonal and chromatic values of the image according to the resources of the determined embossing and stamping techniques.

CR 3.5 The different tones of the image are applied in the development of the sketch by means of frames or by means of stains according to the needs of the established etching and stamping techniques.

CR 3.6 The obtained sketch is adjusted, if any, by making the required changes derived from the needs of the subsequent engraving and stamping process.

RP 4: Determine the visual characteristics of the sketches themselves or others for the graphic work, valuing their formal characteristics, meaning and style in relation to the engraving and stamping processes.

CR 4.1 Own sketches, preparatory to the graphic work, are valued, determining their materic and formal characteristics and choosing the materials, processes and techniques of engraving and stamping to use more like those characteristics.

CR 4.2 The external sketches, preparatory to the graphic work, are analyzed by determining the stylistic contribution of the author and/or the derivative of the different artistic styles applied.

CR 4.3 The sketches are analyzed considering the graphic-plastic proposals and the significant content (signic, representative, conceptual or symbolic) in relation to the engraving and stamping process.

CR 4.4 The style expressed in the sketches is identified by assessing the suitability of the etching or stamping technique to be used, respecting it in the subsequent development of the graphic image.

CR 4.5 The techniques and processes of engraving and stamping are determined, establishing the most appropriate with the needs identified and defined from the formal, meaning and style assessment carried out on the sketches.

RP 5: Get the graphic documents that collect the color selection and the investment of the original image respecting the formal and expressive features of the sketch.

CR 5.1 The investment of the sketches, if any, is carried out by applying the required methods, such as mirror-mode photocopies, inverted calco and others, depending on the type of structure of the composition and the characteristics graphics of the images, in relation to the graphical processes.

CR 5.2 The transfer of the image is performed by applying the required calco methods, respecting the structure of the composition and the formal, meaning and expressive values of the images.

CR 5.3 The image transfer process is controlled by checking that the basic structure and other formal and expressive values of the image conform to the sketch.

CR 5.4 The color selection of the image is performed by applying the methods required according to the nature of the images and the techniques of embossing and stamping determined in such a way that the recording of the images is guaranteed. arrays and the stamping order.

Professional Context:

Production media:

Media: papers, cartons, and fabrics. Materials, tools and tools for dry drawing techniques (graffiti, charcoal, pastels, coloured pencils, composite and fatty pencils); for wet drawing techniques (inks, pens and stylographs, pens, rods and brushes); for water paint techniques (watercolours, temperas, templies); and for solid, oily and mixed paint techniques (encaust, oils and acrylics). Specific computer equipment and software.

Products and results:

Materials for graphic expression: graffiti, charcoal, pastels, pencils, inks, watercolors and others, prepared. Notes, sketches, studies and sketches made. Investment of the sketches. Graphic documents of the color selection of the image.

Information used or generated:

Technical Bibliography, catalogues and monographs of graphic work, catalogues and samples of graphic and plastic material.

COMPETITION UNIT 2: PERFORM LITHOGRAPHIC ARRAYS

Level: 2

Code: UC0924_2

Professional Realizations and Realization Criteria:

RP 1: Prepare materials, tools, and tools for lithographic drawing by selecting the most suitable for lithographic techniques and performing the appropriate tests to ensure their correct status and operation.

CR 1.1 The materials and useful used in obtaining the lithographic image: pencils and lithographic bars, greases, brushes, tips, pens, scrapers, lijas, emulsions, light sources and others, are prepared by checking their fitness and, where appropriate, making any necessary modifications to their status for use.

CR 1.2 Fixed liquids: wetting solution, additives (gum arabic and others) and acids (phosphoric, nitric and others), used in the process of fixing the images, preparing their qualities and adjusting the composition and the proportions of its formulas according to the nature of the matrices and the techniques and procedures used in the making of the images.

CR 1.3 The handling of corrosive products such as: phosphoric acid, nitric acid and others is carried out in compliance with the applicable labour and environmental risk prevention regulations.

CR 1.4 The products and useful aids used in the drawing and fixing processes of the matrices (tools, tools, fixed liquids, additives, acids and others) are arranged in an orderly manner for their use respecting the safety conditions in their handling and avoiding proximity to hot spots of flammable substances.

CR 1.5 The quality and suitability of the materials used in the drawing and fixing processes of the lithographic image are controlled, prior to their use, according to the desired results, carrying out the required tests. identifying their characteristics and adapting them to their use in the process.

CR 1.6 The selection of the materials for the lithographic drawing is based on the tests carried out in order to match the desired results.

RP 2: Select and prepare the lithographic arrays for correct image transfer, using the most appropriate materials and tools to the chosen technique.

CR 2.1 The lithographic matrices-stones or irons-are selected according to the nature of the material, hardness, consistency, porosity, type of emulsion, size, thickness and possible defects and imperfections, according to the characteristics required for the lithographic drawing techniques and the intended run.

CR 2.2 Matrices that present images of previous etchings are cleaned by removing the drawings by physical and/or chemical means.

CR 2.3 The lithographic stone is polished by leveling the upper surface with the base and looking for a uniform thickness, using in its case the specific tools: thicknesses, rule and other elements, checking the regularity of its thickness.

CR 2.4 The lithographic stone is granted using abrasive of different calibers, from more to less, generating a surface that presents an optimal and homogeneous granate suitable to the chosen technique to obtain the image.

CR 2.5 The angles and edges of the top face of the lithographic stone are rounded with lime avoiding their hincado on the stand.

CR 2.6 Metal plates are disprepared by removing rust, dirt and grease, until a surface is achieved that favors correct wetting.

CR 2.7 The matrix-stone or iron-is covered with a thin film of gum arabic preserving it from the stains of grease and dirt.

CR 2.8 Litographic matrices are prepared in compliance with applicable labour and environmental risk prevention regulations.

RP 3: Perform and fix the graphic composition by applying the different drawing or lithographic reporting resources and techniques considering the formal and expressive parameters indicated to obtain the matrix.

CR 3.1 The calco of the sketches or other images are performed on the prepared matrices by applying the required recording methods, taking into account the characteristics of the same and the nature of the graphic composition.

CR 3.2 The lithographic drawing is performed directly on the matrix, where appropriate, using the techniques and the specific material resources and developing the required graphical processes.

CR 3.3 The transfer of the images on the prepared matrix to the effect is performed by applying the reporting techniques and controlling the correct transfer of the graphic composition.

CR 3.4 The retouches, changes and corrections in the image plotted on the matrix are made using the materials, useful: pumice stone, scrapers, tips and others, and other resources, according to the characteristics of the image.

CR 3.5 The emulsified matrix is insoled and reveals respecting the tonal values of the image and ensuring its correct set.

CR 3.6 The surface of the matrix is acidic, applying a specific solution increasing the capacity to receive ink in the areas worked with pencils and other fatty means, as well as the capacity to collect moisture in the reserved surfaces enabling the image to be fixed.

CR 3.7 The process of fixing the image is checked by performing different intermediate tests and verifying the correspondence between the established formal values and the composition obtained.

CR 3.8 Quality monitoring is carried out mainly in the process with attention to the correct choice and use of the techniques and useful according to the formal and expressive purposes.

Professional Context:

Production media:

Lithographic arrays of stone or metal (zinc, aluminum). Compas of thicknesses, rules, caliber and other tools to measure thicknesses. Tell them and magnifiers. Levigors, pumice stone, abrasives of different thicknesses (sands, carborundo and others). Limes and scrapers. Graphic materials: pencils and lithographic bars, greases, brushes, pens, scrapers, lijas and others. Emulsions and light sources. Moisturising solutions, gum arabic, acids (phosphoric, nitric and others), solvents and additives. Resin and talc. Personal protective equipment. Useful and cleaning products. Waste containers.

Products and results:

Report of images. Lithographic matrices: stones, plates and others. Prepared materials. Quality testing.

Information used or generated:

Bibliography, catalogues and monographs of lithography. Sketches. Applicable rules for the prevention of occupational and environmental risks.

COMPETITION UNIT 3: STAMP IN LITHOGRAPHY

Level: 2

Code: UC0925_2

Professional Realizations and Realization Criteria:

RP 1: Prepare paper or other supports, inks, tools, materials, and other tools necessary for stamping, disposing of them in order and taking into account the safety conditions in their handling.

CR 1.1 The paper or other media is chosen according to the image characteristics sought or established in the sketches and the chosen stamping system (direct or indirect), providing it in sufficient quantity for the print run.

CR 1.2 The paper is formatted by tearing or cutting it based on the indications about the dimension and width of its margins for the printing of the prints.

CR 1.3 The paper is wetted using humidifiers such as vaporizers, sponges and others, according to the needs of the print run and according to the characteristics of the paper: composition and gramage.

CR 1.4 The preparation of other supports: fabrics, metal, acrylics and others is performed taking into account their dimensional variations, textures and other factors that may influence the end result.

CR 1.5 The inks are chosen and/or prepared, in sufficient quantity, adjusting their characteristics: shooting, viscosity and others, obtaining the tones and the qualities of consistency appropriate to the conditions of the stamping of the matrix, to the type of support and the characteristics of the image.

CR 1.6 The rollers are prepared to be used in an appropriate manner and place according to their use, keeping them in good cleaning and degreasing conditions during the run and, if this is a long time, providing for their use. substitution.

CR 1.7 Sponges, scrapers, spatulas and other humidification and inking tools are available for use, preserved in good condition during stamping.

RP 2: Prepare the press for direct or indirect pressure, providing it for the stamping, placing the matrix in it and adjusting the pressure.

CR 2.1 The matrix is placed in the press of direct pressure, cradling it on the trolley or mounting it on the platen, avoiding any inequity or foreign body that affects it when putting pressure on it and delimiting the race of the cart preventing the rake or blade from exceeding the stone measurements.

CR 2.2 The rake or blade, in the press of direct pressure, is selected considering the measures of the stone, ensuring the correct state of the leather that covers it.

CR 2.3 The pressure adjustment is made according to the needs of the support to be printed, the inks and the nature of the work to be stamped and according to the characteristics of the stamping system used.

CR 2.4 The press eardrum is lubricated, applying fat by spatula and disposing of these materials for use and application in stamping.

CR 2.5 Press grilling and cleaning of the elements in contact with the matrix or paper are carried out using the security elements of the machine.

CR 2.6 The printer cylinder mantilla is cleaned with the appropriate solvent, ensuring that it is in correct condition for stamping.

CR 2.7 The felts used in the direct stamping with torque are chosen according to their type, thickness, number or other characteristics, having them in order for use.

CR 2.8 All operations are performed in compliance with applicable labour and environmental risk prevention regulations.

RP 3: Prepare the arrays to print by disposing of them for inking and stamping, making the necessary registration, respecting the formal and expressive values of the image.

CR 3.1 The required registration system is applied by establishing, where appropriate, the order of stamping of the matrices as the result sought (transparency, opacity, overlap or other) and taking into account the nature and the characteristics of the inks.

CR 3.2 The adjustment of the tweezers that hold the paper and the devices for marking the same is done according to the correct record of the stamp.

CR 3.3 The matrix is cleaned with the appropriate solvent and wet with water until the pigment is removed and the surface is cleaned up to be inked.

CR 3.4 The matrix is wetted with the sponge and is inked with the roller, uniformly and without pressure, until the parts corresponding to the image receive the necessary ink, taking care that the reserved area maintains the humidity.

CR 3.5 The formal and expressive values of the image are reviewed taking into account the author's indications and/or the details gathered in the sketches.

RP 4: Perform pre-print stamping tests to find the required inking and pressure, taking into account the criteria and indications of the author and/or those collected in the sketches.

CR 4.1 The pressure adjustments of the equipment are made by stamping with different maculatures and making the appropriate arrangements until the required pressure is achieved to obtain the model stamp.

CR 4.2 The adjustment of the maculature in number of sheets, thickness and hardness is performed according to the support, inks and nature of the work done.

CR 4.3 The progressive inking of the matrix is carried out in consecutive tests, lifting the image until the proper intonation of the ink is achieved.

CR 4.4 The pre-print stamping test is performed by verifying that it collects the results according to the author's indications and/or the details collected in the sketches in order to serve as a model in the later pulled

CR 4.5 Testing operations are carried out in compliance with applicable labour and environmental risk prevention regulations.

RP 5: Perform the run to get the prints looking for the homogeneity between them, the correct handling of the paper and the equipment according to the required quality conditions.

CR 5.1 The previously moistened matrix is evenly inked by the roll, making uniform movements until the image is filled.

CR 5.2 The imposition of the paper is done by adjusting it with the established marks and according to the chosen registration system.

CR 5.3 Printing is carried out by applying the pressure directly to the eardrum covering the paper and the stone, or indirectly by interposition of the printer cylinder, according to the type of press used.

CR 5.4 The marking and removal of the sheets is done by making a clean paper handling, avoiding the hands, scratches, repins and others.

CR 5.5 The process of the spin is performed by avoiding significant variations that manifest in a noticeable lack of homogeneity of the prints.

CR 5.6 The operations to obtain the prints are carried out in compliance with the applicable regulations on the prevention of occupational and environmental risks.

RP 6: Perform the drying and pressing of the prints using the required equipment to ensure their preservation.

CR 6.1 The drying and pressing means and equipment are used in accordance with the instructions for use, avoiding the loss of ink from the stamp and the satin of the target at the margins thereof.

CR 6.2 The handling of paper during drying and pressing processes is carried out in the light of the cleaning and correct preservation of the lithographic image.

CR 6.3 Means to ensure the correct preservation of the prints: dry, permanent papers and other drying elements are used when saving the lithographic prints, achieving the desired effect, taking into account environmental conditions.

CR 6.4 The drying of the prints is carried out by the methods of drying in rack, pressed in vertical press in wet, pressing in the dry vertical press, and others, until the degree of humidity required for its conservation.

CR 6.5 The means to ensure proper conservation of the prints are used in compliance with applicable labour and environmental risk prevention regulations and instructions for use.

Professional Context:

Production media:

Stamping supports: papers, fabrics, metals, acrylics and others. Inks and their components. Lithographic arrays. Materials, tools and equipment of inking: spatulas, rollers and others. Humidification useful: vaporizers, sponges and others. Printing equipment: lithographic presses for direct and indirect stamping, adapted torcles. Equipment, systems and means of drying and pressing. Personal protective equipment.

Products and results:

Papers, inks, rollers and other supports and prepared materials. Prepared stamping presses. Pre-print run tests. Printed lithographic prints. Presses: direct and/or indirect preparations.

Information used or generated:

sketches and/or indications of the author. Technical bibliography, Catalogs and monographs of lithography, Catalogues of papers and inks. Applicable rules for the prevention of occupational and environmental risks.

TRAINING MODULE 1: EXPRESSION TECHNIQUES FOR GRAPHIC WORK

Level: 2

Code: MF0687_2

Associated with UC: Develop and interpret sketches for graphic work

Duration: 120 hours

Assessment capabilities and criteria:

C1: Recognize graphic expression techniques, selecting the most appropriate for engraving and stamping techniques.

CE1.1 Recognize and describe the main materials, tools, and graphic expression procedures.

CE1.2 Explain the fundamental resources that graphic expression techniques provide.

CE1.3 Relate resources that provide graphical expression techniques with those of a particular printmaking or stamping technique.

CE1.4 In a practical scenario characterized by a specific embossing or embossing technique:

-Select the most appropriate graphical expression techniques: water, solid, oily, mixed, or other.

-Determine the materials used according to the selected graphic expression technique: pigments, binders and solvents.

C2: Analyze the basic structure of proposed images, recognizing the fundamental elements that compose them and the relationships that are established between them.

CE2.1 Describe the basic elements of visual language and value them as the foundation of image construction.

CE2.2 Distinguished, visualizing and relating the basic compositional principles of different prints given by identifying the main lines of strength and the centers of attention.

CE2.3 Recognize and describe the main compositional structures in different images proposed from prints and prints.

CE2.4 Compare chromatic and light values of different images proposed from prints and prints, valuing the importance of those in the image construction.

C3: Make notes, studies, and sketches for graphic work by applying the techniques of graphic expression and using the basic elements of visual language and fundamental compositional principles.

CE3.1 Rate the use of sketches, notes, studies, and sketches as successive phases in the image-building process.

CE3.2 Apply the techniques of graphic expression, in different practical assumptions, making sketches and notes that collect the basic forms of a composition in lines, plots and/or stains established in relation to the determined tonal and chromatic values.

CE3.3 In a practical scenario for the elaboration of sketches and from notes and previous studies:

-Perform studies of particular parts or aspects that contribute to the elaboration of the sketch.

-Get the final sketches to pick up the work done in notes and previous studies, setting in them the tonal and chromatic values.

CE3.4 Rate the performance of the sketch as a means of personal and social expression, integrating it as a phase in the process of obtaining prints and prints.

C4: Recognize and value in different visual proposals, the technical and aesthetic aspects of the images or sketches.

CE4.1 Different from an assumption given the technical and aesthetic aspects of different images or sketches.

CE4.2 Describe the main formal characteristics of a given image.

CE4.3 From different images identify the most prominent significant content of each one.

CE4.4 Rate the formal, significant, or style characteristics of different visual proposals given.

C5: Make the investment of the graphic image on the calco guide taking into account its characteristics from a series of given sketches.

CE5.1 Describe the main methods of image inversion.

CE5.2 Recognize the main characteristics of a given matrix by relating them to the most appropriate investment and transfer methods.

CE5.3 Rate the characteristics of different images to invest in a guide calco considering the transfer process.

CE5.4 In different scenarios, properly characterized by different images:

-Apply color selections to the given images taking into account the order and record of the arrays.

-Perform the transfer of different types of images on arrays.

Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real workbench:

C1 with respect to CE1.4; C3 with respect to CE3.3; C5 with respect to CE5.3 and CE5.4.

Other capabilities:

Take responsibility for the work you are developing.

Demonstrate some autonomy in solving small contingencies related to their activity.

Interpret and execute work instructions.

Act quickly in problematic situations and not just wait.

Use time and effort to extend knowledge and supplemental information.

Contents:

1. Graphic expression materials, techniques and supports for the performance of sketches

Graphic expression useful.

Pigments, binders and solvents.

Dry and wet drawing techniques.

Water techniques, solid, oily and mixed paint.

Media.

2. Analyzing the structure of the image

Basic elements of the graphic-plastic language.

Visual field (figure-background relationship).

Organization of the elements in the two-dimensional space.

Strength lines and care centers.

Basic compositional structures.

3. The line as an image configurator

Constructive, descriptive, and expressive values of the line.

The line based on the different engraving and stamping techniques.

The negative positive line.

4. The stain and tonal values in the graphical image

Texture and tonal values in imaging.

Xilographic Tonal Techniques.

Calcographic Tonal Techniques.

Lithographic Tonal Techniques.

Tonal techniques are displayed.

Tonal techniques for other systems for obtaining graphic works.

5. The color in the graphic image

Constructive, descriptive, and expressive values of color.

Juxtaposition and overlay on color image.

Planning the image in color stamping processes.

Training context parameters:

Spaces and installations:

The spaces and facilities will provide a response, in the form of a classroom, a workshop, a workshop of practices, a laboratory or a singular space, to the training needs, according to the Professional Context established in the Unit Partner competence, taking into account the applicable regulations of the production sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.

Professional or former trainer profile:

1.-Domain of knowledge and techniques related to the elaboration and interpretation of sketches for graphic work, which will be accredited by one of the following two forms:

-Level 2 academic training (Spanish Framework of Qualifications for Higher Education), Technical Engineering, Technical Architecture, Diplomacy or other higher level of professional field.

-Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.

2.-Accredited pedagogical competence according to what the competent administrations establish.

FORMATIVE MODULE 2: LITHOGRAPHIC PROCESSING

Level: 2

Code: MF0924_2

Associated with UC: Perform lithographic arrays

Duration: 210 hours

Assessment capabilities and criteria:

C1: Determine the materials, tools, and tools to use in obtaining the image, depending on the type of lithographic matrix.

CE1.1 Identify the most used materials in the process of obtaining the image in the lithographic matrix.

CE1.2 Test with pencils, lithographic bars, greases, brushes, tips, pens, scrapers, lija, emulsions and light sources, checking their quality, condition and correct operation.

CE1.3 Successfully prepare the moisturizing solution, the additives: gum arabic and others, and the acids: phosphoric, nitric and others, adapting their choice to the nature of the stones or irons.

CE1.4 In a material preparation scenario characterized by a quality result:

-Test the use and response of materials: paper, inks and others, which allow the control and knowledge of their specific characteristics, checking their quality, status and correct operation.

-Dispose all the materials and materials to be used by facilitating their location and respecting optimal security conditions.

-Perform all operations in compliance with applicable labor and environmental risk prevention rules.

C2: Prepare different lithographic arrays based on their nature and composition.

CE2.1 Identify lithographic arrays by taking into account the nature of the material: stone, metal, emulsified and without emulsifying.

CE2.2 Recognize the types and qualities of given metal plates.

CE2.3 Explain the techniques used in the preparation of lithographic arrays.

CE2.4 In a practical scenario characterized by different lithographic arrays, make a selection based on:

-The nature of the material: stone, metal, emulsified or unemulsified.

-The qualities of the stone: hardness, consistency, porosity, thickness, and physicochemical qualities.

-The types and qualities of the metal arrays.

-The different emulsions of the arrays.

CE2.5 In a practical scenario of preparing stones or lithographic plates, and starting from different matrices with previous images:

-Remove images or drawings present in the array, using physical and/or chemical means.

-Puff the printing surface in the lithographic matrix, homogenizing it and looking for the correct level as well as the parallelism between its faces.

-Perform measurements using the most appropriate tools: compas, rule, caliber, and others.

-Ungrease the matrix, if any, by obtaining a fat-free surface and impurities, favoring wetting and inking.

C3: Apply drawing techniques or lithographic reporting to create and fix the image in the matrix, valuing the formal and expressive aspects that characterize the image.

CE3.1 Recognize the nature of different graphical compositions given, establishing the differences between them and specifying the materials used.

CE3.2 Identify technical image transfer differences over lithographic arrays.

CE3.3 In a scenario of preparing lithographic arrays using lithographic report, and starting from a sketch:

-Relate the structure and other characteristics of the array with the sketch, choosing the most appropriate one.

-Reserve margins and white areas with gum arabic to avoid greasing them in the drawing process.

-Report the image, from the given sketch, on the prepared surface of the matrix, facilitating its visualization.

-Process the matrix with the right bite to its nature-stone, metal, or others-ensuring the stability of the image and its inking capacity, as well as the hydrological capacity of the white areas.

CE3.4 In a scenario of preparing lithographic matrices using drawing techniques, from a given sketch:

-Analyze the expressive values sought by the artist or set in the sketches.

-Draw the matrix by applying the image creation procedures that are more appropriate to the character of the work.

-Apply the own resources of these techniques, taking into account the graphic effects sought.

-Make the necessary corrections by using the correct correction tools: pumice stone, scrapers, tips and other tools.

-Process the matrix with the appropriate mortooth, ensuring the stability of the image and its inking capacity, as well as the hydrophilic capacity of the white areas.

CE3.5 Insolar and reveal an emulsified matrix, respecting the tonal values of the image and ensuring the correct fixed of the photolithography.

CE3.6 In a practical case characterized by a chromatography and from the corresponding matrices:

-Identify the stones for each color.

-Check the validity and adequacy of the plates or stones.

-Verify and adjust the registration system by adapting it to the nature of the plates or stones and the nature of the graphic composition.

CE3.7 Perform all operations in compliance with applicable labor and environmental risk prevention rules.

C4: Value media and safety equipment in the lithographic process in relation to applicable standards for the prevention of occupational and environmental risks.

CE4.1 Recognize the ideal lighting conditions for the drawing process in the lithographic matrix.

CE4.2 Identify the necessary security conditions in the use of drawing, processing, emulsifying, insolated, and revealed array tools.

CE4.3 Given a work situation of type work rate the ergonomic conditions necessary to achieve a correct posture during the work, and analyze if the tables, boards and chairs are adapted to the ergonomic conditions required.

CE4.4 In different scenarios of measurement of media and safety equipment and given a plan of prevention of occupational risks and environmental protection:

-Identify the risks and level of danger posed by the manipulation of the mordants, solvents and other chemicals used in the lithographic stamping.

-Manipulate the mordants, solvents and other chemicals, using the individual protective equipment to be used.

-Use individual protective equipment in accordance with the rules of action in the handling and storage of the mordants, solvents and other chemicals used in the lithographic stamping.

Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real workbench:

C1 with respect to CE1.4; C2 with respect to CE2.4 and CE2.5; C3 with respect to CE3.3, CE3.4 and CE3.6; C4 with respect to CE4.4.

Other capabilities:

Take responsibility for the work you are developing.

Demonstrate some autonomy in solving small contingencies related to their activity.

Learn new concepts or procedures and effectively leverage training using acquired knowledge.

Participate and actively collaborate on the work team.

Act quickly in problematic situations and not just wait.

Respect internal organization procedures and rules.

Contents:

1. Fundamental principles of lithography

The lithography workshop. Organization and maintenance.

Materials, tools and machinery for lithography.

Basics of lithography.

The arrays.

Principles of lithographic printing.

Direct stamping.

Indirect stamping.

Graphic effects.

Applicable labour and environmental risk prevention regulations.

2. Preparing the lithographic matrix

Materials and Tools.

Fundamental differences between different types of arrays.

Stone granate (bulk stack, abrasives, and others).

Chemical and mechanical farms of metal matrices.

Presensitized, positive and negative plates.

3. Lithography on stone

Materials and Tools.

Creating the image on the array.

Processed from the stone.

Getting tests.

4. Lithography on metal

Materials and Tools.

Creating the image on the array.

Processed on the iron.

Getting tests.

5. Photolithography

Materials and Tools.

Basic principles of photolithography.

Photolitographic procedures.

Getting tests.

6. Chromatography in lithography

Techniques and Records.

Methods for application of color in lithography.

Decomposition of the image.

Transparency.

Fondinos.

Training context parameters:

Spaces and installations:

The spaces and facilities will provide a response, in the form of a classroom, a workshop, a workshop of practices, a laboratory or a singular space, to the training needs, according to the Professional Context established in the Unit Partner competence, taking into account the applicable regulations of the production sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.

Professional or former trainer profile:

1.-Domain of knowledge and techniques related to performing lithographic arrays, which will be credited by one of the following two ways:

-Level 1 academic training (Spanish Framework of Qualifications for Higher Education) or other higher level education related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.

2.-Accredited pedagogical competence according to what the competent administrations establish.

FORMATIVE MODULE 3: LITHOGRAPHIC PRINTING

Level: 2

Code: MF0925_2

Associated with UC: Stampar in lithography

Duration: 120 hours

Assessment capabilities and criteria:

C1: Value materials and tools used in the lithographic stamping process, performing the necessary checks and regulatory operations.

CE1.1 Identify the most common tools and tools used in lithographic printing processes.

CE1.2 Prepare different stamping tools: spatulas, rollers, and others, providing them correctly for easy identification and use in stamping processes.

CE1.3 Format different media by adapting them to the characteristics of a particular edition.

CE1.4 In a scenario of preparing materials to stamp:

-Choose the papers or other media tipio by assessing their suitability for the type of stamping to be performed.

-Rate the state of the inks to be used in the spin by checking its filmogena capacity, its tonality, and its intensity.

-Determine the most suitable roller for stamping by valuing its nature, hardness and size.

C2: Carry out lithographic presses, both direct and indirect pressure, and have them for stamping.

CE2.1 Identify adjustment mechanisms in lithographic presses.

CE2.2 Set the cleaning order of the zone where the arrays are placed by keeping it smooth, without any inequality that might affect the application of the pressure.

CE2.3 Carry out pressure tests, both in direct and indirect stamping, by adjusting the pressure to be applied by adapting it to the support to be printed, to the inks to be used and to the type of stamping to be performed.

CE2.4 From a model stamp to carry out the operations of regulation of the press of stamping: pressure, type and number of felt, mantilla, maculature or other materials necessary for the damping of the pressure between the machine and the array.

CE2.5 Choose the type, thickness, characteristics, and number of the felt to be used in a direct stamping.

CE2.6 Choose the type of blade and the thickness of the most appropriate maculature in a direct printing on lithographic press.

CE2.7 In a scenario of indirect stamping in offset tests:

-Check the correct cleaning of the printer cylinder mantilla.

-Place the array on the support ready for that purpose, ensuring the correct set of the array.

-Maintain the correct greasing of the press and the eardrum, as well as their cleanliness in compliance with the applicable regulations on the prevention of occupational and environmental risks.

C3: Perform the record in the lithographic stamping by looking for the most suitability with respect to the support, the number of inks to be stamped, and the technique to use.

CE3.1 Determine the order of stamping, in the case of using more than one matrix according to the inks and the result of quality given: transparency, opacity, overlap and others.

CE3.2 Select the appropriate array record system for the different stamping systems that can be used.

CE3.3 In a scenario of lithographic printing, from a given matrix:

-Acondition the arrays to print, performing their correct cleaning by applying the appropriate solvent and the subsequent washing.

-Maintain the moisture content of an array, allowing the correct application of the ink and keeping the non-image zones without fat.

-Set the stamping order, in the case of using more than one matrix, depending on the inks and the desired result: transparency, opacity, overlap, and others.

CE3.4 In a practical registration scenario for stamping, from different matrices and a model stamp:

-Select the registration system required for stamping by searching for accuracy and homogeneity on the prints.

-Apply the chosen registration system in a direct stamping.

-Apply the chosen registration system in an indirect or interrelated stamping between the two and the result is in accordance with the model stamp.

C4: Prepare the supports to be stamped by ensuring their degree of humidity, porosity, flexibility and others.

CE4.1 Determine the required cleaning conditions to place the media that will receive the impression that ensures your perfect state during the stamping.

CE4.2 Humate different supports, forcing dilation, getting the pores to open, thus facilitating the ink input.

CE4.3 Set in control to be maintained in a type edition, on different elements of the environment: the atmosphere, degree of humidity and luminosity of the workshop to avoid both dimensional and any other alterations nature.

CE4.4 To properly place printed supports, always avoiding any risk of contamination by fungi or other bacteria, which may alter their correct conservation.

C5: Use lithographic array inking techniques, applying the ink or other color incorporation system on the matrix taking into account its nature and structure.

CE5.1 Set the correct layout of inks or other color application systems, as well as the necessary tools, at the inking table.

CE5.2 In a practical assumption of inking, from a given array:

-Check the viscosity, transparency and other characteristics of the ink, taking into account the type of inking.

-Use other color application systems: chinecollee, fondino, and others, adjusting them to work requirements.

-Run the inking taking into account the moisture content of the array.

-Perform stamping tests based on the homogeneous application of the ink, depending on the nature of the matrix and the engraving.

-Test by testing the correct fixing of the inks on the support that will receive the stamping.

CE5.3 In a practical scenario of inking tests, from a model stamp:

-Apply inking techniques according to the lithograph characteristics.

-Use any other color incorporation system to accurately translate the image into the media.

CE5.4 From the model stamp, perform the correct application of the color on the matrix.

C6: Perform lithographic prints, controlling the correct homogeneity between the prints, within the required quality, and applying applicable labor and environmental risk prevention standards.

CE6.1 Identify the operations to be performed in the printing process in lithography: inking of matrices, imposition of the support, and others.

CE6.2 In a scenario of preparing the stamping, from a given lithographic array:

-Perform the correct imposition of the support, taking into account the marks and record requirements.

-Adjust and/or modify pressure systems, both in direct and indirect system presses, getting a correct impression.

-Check each stamp for correct registration and color parameters, strictly maintaining the B.A.T. reference

CE6.3 In a properly-characterized scenario, from a model stamp:

-Perform the correct stamping by maintaining the homogeneity, regularity.

-Control the quality required in the edition.

-Perform all operations in compliance with applicable labor and environmental risk prevention regulations.

CE6.4 In a practical scenario of conditioning of prints and from different stamped supports:

-Select the required drying systems for each stamp.

-Use dry, permanent, and other papers to protect already printed prints.

-Apply the pressing systems in case they are required.

C7: Recognize and analyze prints and printing techniques used, according to their technical and graphic characteristics.

CE7.1 Identify the most commonly used stamping techniques.

CE7.2 Recognize in the stamp the technical characteristics of the lithography.

CE7.3 Recognize in different prints the technical characteristics of the photolithography.

CE7.4 In a practical assessment of stamping techniques and from a series of prints:

-Analyze the characteristics and conditions of the media on which the stamping was performed.

-Identify the properties and characteristics of the inks used in the stamping.

-Rate the printing techniques used in the different prints.

-Identify the methods used to obtain the chromatography in the prints.

-Analyze the graphic style of the stamp relative to previous sketches or tests (B.A.T.).

-Set the possible correction, if necessary, of the technical resolution of the analyzed stamp.

Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real workbench:

C1 with respect to CE1.4; C2 with respect to CE2.7; C3 for CE3.3 and CE3.4, C5 for CE5.2 and CE5.3; CE6 for CE6.2, CE6.3 and CE6.4; C7 for CE7.4.

Other capabilities:

Take responsibility for the work you are developing.

Demonstrate some autonomy in solving small contingencies related to their activity.

Learn new concepts or procedures and effectively leverage training using acquired knowledge.

Demonstrate flexibility to understand changes.

Interpret and execute work instructions.

Respect internal organization procedures and rules.

Contents:

1. Direct lithographic printing

The lithographic press.

The twist.

Press regulation: pressures, felt, mantilla and maculature.

Log systems in direct stamping.

Stamping tools: spatulas, rollers, and others.

Applicable labour and environmental risk prevention regulations.

2. Indirect lithographic stamping

The press get offset tests.

Lithographic ironing systems.

Regulation of press pressures sacchars.

Log systems in indirect stamping.

Stamping tools: scratches, rollers, and others.

Applicable labour and environmental risk prevention regulations.

3. Media used to receive lithographic printing

Roles: types, characteristics, and properties.

Polyester: properties.

Fabrics: types and features.

Formatting and conditioning the media for stamping.

4. Chromatography stamping

inking techniques.

Inks characteristics: viscosity, transparency, and others.

Color stamping features.

Methods and systems for color application: chinecollee, fondino, and others.

Record methods. Record marks.

Stamping tests.

Control in color application.

Training context parameters:

Spaces and installations:

The spaces and facilities will provide a response, in the form of a classroom, a workshop, a workshop of practices, a laboratory or a singular space, to the training needs, according to the Professional Context established in the Unit Partner competence, taking into account the applicable regulations of the production sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.

Professional or former trainer profile:

1.-Domain of knowledge and techniques related to printing in lithography, which will be credited by one of the following two ways:

-Level 1 academic training (Spanish Framework of Qualifications for Higher Education) or other higher level education related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.

2.-Accredited pedagogical competence according to what the competent administrations establish.

ANNEX X

Professional qualification: Operations on sewn trains

Professional Family: Graphic Arts

Level: 2

Code: ARG290_2

General Competition

Perform the materials preparation and control works of the machines by running the funnel/stitched with wire and the standard/stitched with vegetable yarn and intervening in the graphic process according to the safety, quality and productivity and established.

Competition Units

UC0200_2: Operate in the graphical process under security, quality, and productivity

UC0691_2: Prepare raw materials and auxiliary products for binding

UC0926_2: Adjust parameters, synchronize equipment, and perform binding with staple

UC0927_2: Adjust parameters, level elements, and make the standard and stitched with vegetable thread

Professional Environment

Professional Scope

Develops its professional activity in the department of binding in operations of funnel/stitched with wire and standard/stitched with plant yarn within the family of graphic arts, editorial, press, advertising and packaging. In entities of a public or private nature, large, medium and small, regardless of their legal form, they generally work as an employed person and, where appropriate, depend on a superior. The principles of universal accessibility are applied in the development of professional activity in accordance with the applicable regulations.

Productive Sectors

It is located in the productive sector of graphic industries and is constituted in a subsector of its own industrial binding that has the process of binding and wire-stitched with wire and standard/stitched with vegetable yarn publishing products, newspapers, magazines, advertising, and others, and in any other sector that has any of these activities.

Relevant occupations and jobs

The terms of the following relationship of occupations and jobs are used with a generic and omnicomprensivo character of women and men.

Grapa binder machines

Plant-thread-raising and harvesting machines

Drivers of plant-based sewing machines

Folding machine operators

Alzator machine operators

Associated Training (480 hours)

Training Modules

MF0200_2: Processes in Graphic Arts (120 hours)

MF0691_2: Materies and binding products (90 hours)

MF0926_2: Encuadernación with staple (120 hours)

MF0927_2: Alted and stitched with vegetable thread (150 hours)

COMPETITION UNIT 1: OPERATING IN THE GRAPHICAL PROCESS UNDER SECURITY, QUALITY, AND PRODUCTIVITY

Level: 2

Code: UC0200_2

Professional Realizations and Realization Criteria:

RP 1: Determine the characteristics of the graphical products to establish the appropriate manufacturing process, taking into account the available elements and applicable regulations.

CR 1.1 Graphic products are identified from the data provided by the originals, sketches and models, in response to the established technical specifications.

CR 1.2 The specifications on the graphic product to be performed are valued by identifying their typology and functional and communicative characteristics-product use, applicable regulations and others.

CR 1.3 The functional and technological relationships of the graphic product to be made are established according to its components: stationery, stuchaery, publishing, advertising, and others.

CR 1.4 The phases required for the reproduction of the graphic product: preprint, binding printing and finishes, are set from their specifications, introducing the data into the workflow.

RP 2: Perform the standardization of the production parameters in the workflows for each phase of the graphical product, according to the specifications set.

CR 2.1 The production phases in the graphical process are determined by specifying each of the elements involved in the process: technical parameters, product typology, and others.

CR 2.2 Production parameters are standardized in the workflow according to the typology of the graphic product: packaging, editorial product, billboard and others, following established procedures.

CR 2.3 The parameters and manufacturing elements of the graphic product at different stages of the process: preprint, printing, binding and transformed, are checked according to the technical specifications.

CR 2.4 The productive environment in each of the phases of the graphical process is determined from the established technical specifications.

CR 2.5 Graphic process tracking is done through workflows by facilitating planning, automation, procedures, and other factors that affect the production environment.

CR 2.6 The incidents that arise in the process are recorded in the workflow following established procedures to take the necessary corrective and preventive measures.

RP 3: Verify quality parameters in the process using specific equipment to obtain the product with the established standards.

CR 3.1 The most significant quality features in each of the phases of the process are identified according to established variables and attributes.

CR 3.2 The graphical product in process is checked, verifying that it complies with the fundamental concepts of quality in the different phases of its manufacturing according to the established standards and standards.

CR 3.3 Quality procedures at each stage of the manufacturing process of the graphic product are applied methodically according to the technical specifications of the product, using the specific measurement equipment.

CR 3.4 Control frequencies are applied according to the type of characteristics to be controlled and the number of product units to be obtained, following established procedures.

CR 3.5 The results and incidences of the quality control of the graphical product are recorded using the corresponding control sheets by entering them into the workflow.

CR 3.6 Quality verification in the graphical process is carried out in compliance with applicable labour and environmental risk prevention regulations.

Professional Context:

Production media:

Specific computers and software. Digital printer. Standards of communication. Workflows. Normalized light pupitre. Measurement and control tools and tools: densitometer, tipometer, odometer, colorimeter and spectrophotometer.

Products and results:

Production parameters entered into the workflow. Recorded quality control incidents. Completed control sheets. Failures or defects in the registered processes. Quality parameters identified throughout the graphical process.

Information used or generated:

Production order. Technical documentation of preprint, printing and post-pressure equipment and machines. Applicable rules for the prevention of occupational and environmental risks. Quality standards and standards to be applied in the graphical process. Technical equipment sheets. Maintenance manuals. Company quality control plans.

COMPETITION UNIT 2: PREPARE RAW MATERIALS AND AUXILIARY PRODUCTS FOR BINDING

Level: 2

Code: UC0691_2

Professional Realizations and Realization Criteria:

RP 1: Get the technical data on the binding raw materials from the production orders to start the process according to the technical and quality requirements.

CR 1.1 The production order is reviewed by checking that it contains all the technical and quality information relating to raw materials and ancillary products: papers, cartons, tails, steel wire, yarn, skins, fabrics and others, which are to be used in the binding process.

CR 1.2 The information on the auxiliary equipment to be used: tools, tools, forklifts, machines, seals, pallets, boxes and others is obtained from the production orders, establishing their use in relation to each of the raw materials to be used.

CR 1.3 The model, test or any other product that serves as a model, is contrasted with the indications of the work order by checking that both coincide to avoid errors in the preparation of the raw materials and the ancillary products.

CR 1.4 Raw material preparation operations are performed by applying the quality criteria established by the company.

RP 2: Review printed sheets by following established methods to ensure their quality in binding processes.

CR 2.1 The printed sheets are checked to verify their quality in terms of foliation, tracing, specific measures, scratch possibilities, repines, downpour, folding resistance, fibre sense, folding and folding. other, according to work order and/or according to model or test.

CR 2.2 The possible defects of printed sheets relating to: thickness, gramage, double-fold resistance, ripped, repainted, gloss and others that may have occurred in their printing phase are identified by taking the established corrective measures.

CR 2.3 The record elements of the specification such as height and side recording position are checked, ensuring that their positioning and entry into the machine match the specifications of the binding machines: Female, female, female, and other, according to the work order.

CR 2.4 Observed sheets that do not comply with the company's quality standards are withdrawn by applying the corrective measures in place.

RP 3: Prepare raw materials and ancillary products, applying established working methods to ensure continuity in the print run.

CR 3.1 The quantity and quality of raw materials and ancillary products are checked, ensuring their compliance with the production order.

CR 3.2 The raw materials are stacked in an orderly manner in the machine environment ensuring the continuity of production without interruption, complying with the applicable regulations for the prevention of occupational risks and environmental.

CR 3.3 Raw materials and ancillary products are prepared according to established working methods by ensuring their input and passing through the different machines that configure the binding processes.

CR 3.4 The measurement of parameters of the auxiliary products: viscosity, temperature, mixtures, is carried out by checking their suitability to the required quality specifications.

CR 3.5 The storage and storage of auxiliary products is done in an orderly manner, facilitating their location.

Professional Context:

Production media:

Binding materials: papers, cartons, fabrics, skins, wires, wire, tails, and others. Auxiliary equipment for binding: pallets, machines, seals, boxes and others. Printed sheets. Paper moisture controllers, squats, flexometers. Auxiliary equipment.

Products and results:

Quality control of raw materials, auxiliary products and printed sheets. Papers, fabrics, skins, cartons, cardboard and other stacked preparations for binding. Auxiliary products: tails, threads, steel wire, prepared for binding.

Information used or generated:

Work Order. Technical documentation of the raw materials. Maquettes. Model tests. Applicable rules for the prevention of occupational and environmental risks. Quality standards. Technical instructions for equipment.

COMPETITION UNIT 3: ADJUST PARAMETERS, SYNCHRONIZE EQUIPMENT, AND PERFORM BINDING WITH STAPLE

Level: 2

Code: UC0926_2

Professional Realizations and Realization Criteria:

RP 1: Get the data for the preparation of the layer/wire stitching binding from the production orders to initiate the process according to the technical and quality requirements.

CR 1.1 The model or model that accompanies the work order is checked before starting the preparation of the wire stitching machine by contrasting it with the work order data, checking the number of Specifications, signatures, meetings, denials and others.

CR 1.2 Quality controls defined in the work order are identified, interpreting the characteristics of the work order.

CR 1.3 The technical instructions that appear on the work order are identified by validating them to initiate the preparation of the machine.

CR 1.4 The technical instructions regarding the types of stacked, finished, and labeled are checked by checking that they appear on the work order.

RP 2: Adjust and synchronize machine mechanisms and wire-stitched auxiliary equipment for commissioning according to the technical characteristics of the work and the materials to be used.

CR 2.1 The supplied sheets are checked visually, observing that they do not present anomalies that hinder their subsequent production process, such as: repainted, breakage in the folding and downpour placing them in the stations of lump-sum for your power.

CR 2.2 Lump stations are prepared by placing the squadrons, suction suction cups, optical reception and drop controls, annulling the bodies that are not to be used.

CR 2.3 Paper feeding stations are prepared by checking the matching of the foot or the head of the funnel of each of the sheets and the cover, ensuring the correct disposal of the same.

CR 2.4 The number of staples, the placement of the same and the pressure exerted by the stapler heads, as well as the type of wire that feeds them, conform to the technical characteristics of the work to be performed.

CR 2.5 The preparation of the trilateral guillotine is performed according to the measures of the product, adjusting the guides according to the format and the product to be cut and leveling the foot according to the support to be cut, changing the blade if deficiencies such as mellas, burrs, and others are observed.

CR 2.6 The elements and mechanisms of the stacking and output system are adjusted by checking their proper functioning, performing the same according to the work in progress.

CR 2.7 Adjustment operations are performed in compliance with applicable labour and environmental risk prevention regulations.

RP 3: Perform the print run to obtain the stapled product, according to the instructions on the work order, achieving the optimal performance of the machines and performing the established quality controls.

CR 3.1 The wire-stitched/wire-stitched machine is launched by checking the synchronisation of the recording elements, guides, palpators, staples controls, alignment controls and others, ensuring their correct operation.

CR 3.2 The collection and feeding of materials needed for production, such as pliegos, wire, strapping, and others, is done in such a way as to avoid unnecessary stops.

CR 3.3 Quality control is performed according to the frequency established by the company, ensuring the uniformity of the results throughout the run, especially observing the possible scratches and drag marks during the production process.

CR 3.4 The specimens that are the object of the control are saved according to the company's instructions or the guidelines for the control of the work order.

CR 3.5 Quality-related data is recorded in accordance with the instructions set out by the company for its contrast with the standard values.

CR 3.6 The optimum speed of the wire stitching machine is maintained throughout the run, recording and reporting the detected incidents during the run.

CR 3.7 Production data is identified and recorded in the company-enabled document in order to contribute to the control of production and cost plans.

CR 3.8 The handling of the staple stitching machine is performed in compliance with applicable labor and environmental risk prevention regulations.

RP 4: Flaging and/or placing the products stapled into boxes or pallets for transport, ensuring their integrity and clearly exposing the information by means of carnets.

CR 4.1 The labels necessary for the identification of the products and pallets are obtained through the computer systems that are generated or provided by the responsible ones.

CR 4.2 The stapled products are fleshed, packaged, and/or put into boxes, according to the instructions on the work order, using the auxiliary machines according to the established procedures.

CR 4.3 The graped products are placed in pallets, following the directions of the work order, preventing the subsequent handling and transport of the products from deteriorating the staple product.

CR 4.4 The packaged products are identified with carcloths or labels indicating the model and number of copies it contains, as well as the information required for identification.

CR 4.5 The carnets or labels are attached to the boxes and/or pallets according to the instructions on the work order, facilitating the control of the production and assisting their easy subsequent identification.

CR 4.6 The flapping and auxiliary equipment are handled in compliance with the applicable labour and environmental risk prevention regulations.

RP 5: Perform first-level maintenance on the wire/stapled stitching machines by checking the security systems to keep the stapling machines to the point according to the established procedures.

CR 5.1 The periodic greasing is performed according to the instructions of the manufacturer of the wire stitching machine.

CR 5.2 The operation of circuits, stapling heads, and air filters is verified according to established maintenance standards.

CR 5.3 The components of the wire/stapled stitching machines as well as the auxiliary tools, are maintained at the required cleaning levels according to established maintenance regulations and procedures.

CR 5.4 First-level maintenance is done by following the planned plans and recording the required data according to the established procedures.

CR 5.5 Security systems are checked to maintain wire-stitched machines in optimal security conditions according to established procedures.

Professional Context:

Production media:

Wire-Stitching Funnel, trilateral guillotine. Auxiliary equipment: stacker, strapping machines. Pliegos. Wire. Flaxes. Carcloths. Pallets. Computer media.

Products and results:

Magazines or brochures stapled finished. Magazines or brochures for subsequent production process. Finished copies for direct delivery to the customer. Sausage plies. Wire-stitched plies. Adjustment and synchronization of auxiliary machines and equipment. Flapping and palletized products. Quality control of the product. First-level maintenance.

Information used or generated:

Parts of work. Manuals of the manufacturer of the machine. Work Orders. Models. Ferros. Plan for the prevention of occupational risks and environmental protection. Technical information sheet for auxiliary products and maintenance records. Quality standards.

COMPETITION UNIT 4: ADJUST PARAMETERS, LEVEL ELEMENTS, AND MAKE THE STANDARD AND STITCHED WITH VEGETABLE THREAD

Level: 2

Code: UC0927_2

Professional Realizations and Realization Criteria:

RP 1: Get the data for the preparation of the lump-sum operations and sewn with plant yarn from the production orders to start the process according to the technical and quality requirements.

CR 1.1 The model or model that accompanies the work order is checked before starting the preparation of the standard machines and stitched with vegetable yarn, contrasting it with the data of the work order, checking: number of Sheets, Paging and Other Paging.

CR 1.2 Quality controls defined in the work order are identified by interpreting the characteristics of the work order.

CR 1.3 The technical instructions that appear on the work order are identified by validating them in order to initiate the preparation of the lump-sum machines and stitched with plant yarn.

CR 1.4 The technical instructions regarding the types of stacked, finished, and labeled are checked to appear on the work order.

RP 2: Prepare the machine up and run to obtain the standard product, according to the instructions on the work order, by performing the quality controls established.

CR 2.1 The paper feeding stations are prepared by checking the matching of the foot or the head of the standard of each of the sheets, ensuring the correct disposal of the same, annulling the bodies that do not leave to be used.

CR 2.2 The plies are mounted on a machine footing, each of them being located as close as possible to the station corresponding to their signature and checked visually by observing that they do not have any anomalies that make it difficult to follow. production.

CR 2.3 The power of the folds in each station is continuously being performed by avoiding unnecessary stops.

CR 2.4 The lump-sum is performed by maintaining the optimum speed of the machine, verifying that each station makes the fall of one's specification in one in each pass.

CR 2.5 Quality control is performed according to the frequency established by the company or according to the instructions on the work order, ensuring the uniformity of the results throughout the run.

CR 2.6 The specimens that are the object of the control are kept following the instructions of each company or the guidelines of control of the work order, recording the data for its contrast with the standard values.

CR 2.7 The raised pliegos are prepared by differentiating them from each other by means of the visual identification by carcloths for the process of stitching with plant yarn.

CR 2.8 Machine handling is performed in compliance with applicable labor risk prevention and environmental protection regulations.

RP 3: Regular and adjust the mechanisms of the stitching machine with plant yarn for commissioning, in accordance with the technical characteristics of the work and the materials to be used.

CR 3.1 The raised sheets or blocks are checked visually by observing that all signatures are without prepositions and do not have anomalies that hinder their subsequent production process.

CR 3.2 The possible differences between the product to be sewn and the model are checked in advance, making a sample of the product and comparing it to the model or model.

CR 3.3 The parameters of the work for the stitching of the folds are introduced into the computer or control panel of the machine, adjusting them according to the measures of the box, number of sheets, number of pages of each product, type of opening of the ring, number of pages of the book and others.

CR 3.4 The squats of the plant-based stitching machine are adjusted by introducing the measurements into the feed station of the folds.

CR 3.5 The adjustment for the transport and opening of the pliers is done by regulating the suction of the suction cups or the length of the pusher or pincer.

CR 3.6 The easel, needles, punches and hooks are adjusted taking into account the characteristics of the paper to be sewn.

CR 3.7 The parameters relating to the number of seams, position and pressure exerted by the stitching heads, the type of yarn and others, are inserted into the machine's control panel, adjusting them to the specifications of the order. of the job and/or the job to be performed.

CR 3.8 The elements and mechanisms of the stacking and output system are adjusted according to the requirements of the process, checking their correct operation.

RP 4: Perform the spin to obtain the product stitched, according to the instructions on the work order, achieving the optimal performance of the machines and the quality specified in the work order.

CR 4.1 The plant-based stitching machine is branded by checking the timing of the recording elements, guides, coils, alignment controls, and others and ensuring their proper functioning.

CR 4.2 The collection and feeding of materials needed for production, such as pliegos and yarn, is done in such a way that unnecessary stops are avoided.

CR 4.3 The quality control of the stitcher is done by following the instructions on the work order, ensuring the uniformity of the results along the run.

CR 4.4 The specimens that are the object of the control are stored according to the company's instructions or the guidelines for the control of the work order.

CR 4.5 Quality-related data is recorded by applying established procedures for contrast to standard values.

CR 4.6 The optimum speed of the plant-based stitching machine is maintained throughout the run, recording and reporting the detected incidents during the run.

CR 4.7 Production data is recorded in the company-enabled document in order to contribute to the control of production and cost plans, identifying all required data.

CR 4.8 The management of the plant-based stitching machine is carried out in compliance with applicable labour and environmental risk prevention regulations.

RP 5: Place products sewn into pallets for internal transport, ensuring their integrity and clearly exposing content information by means of carnets.

CR 5.1 The sewn products are placed in pallets, following the directions of the work order, avoiding that in the subsequent handling and transport of the same they may deteriorate.

CR 5.2 Carfabrics are chosen based on the size, color, and field to be filled in.

CR 5.3 Carnets are clearly filled out by identifying in content and quantity of boxes or pallets.

CR 5.4 The carnets are attached to the pallets according to the directions of the work order facilitating the control of the production and helping to their later identification.

CR 5.5 The excess of the folds is stacked, identified and stored, facilitating its recovery during consecutive processes.

RP 6: Perform first-level maintenance on plant-based stitching machines and check the safety systems to maintain the standard machines and stitched with plant yarn to the point according to the procedures set.

CR 6.1 The periodic greasing is performed according to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

CR 6.2 The operation of the circuits, stitching heads and air filters is verified according to the established maintenance standards.

CR 6.3 The components of the plant-based stitching machines as well as the auxiliary tools are maintained at the cleaning levels laid down in the maintenance regulations.

CR 6.4 First-level maintenance is done following the planned plans and recording the required data in the procedures.

CR 6.5 Auxiliary machines and equipment are maintained under established security conditions, regularly checking safety systems.

Professional Context:

Production media:

Alzers, stitching with plant yarn. Auxiliary equipment: Stackers. Computer media. Pliegos. Vegetable yarn. Carcloths. Pallets.

Products and results:

Set to the point of the lift and the stitcher. Winged pliegos. Plies sewn with vegetable yarn. Blocks of books, magazines or brochures prepared for subsequent binding. Products stacked and identified by means of carcloths. Quality control of the product. First-level maintenance.

Information used or generated:

Parts of work. Manuals of the manufacturer of the machine. Work Orders. Models. Quality Procedures. Applicable plans and rules for the prevention of occupational and environmental risks. Technical information sheet of auxiliary equipment and maintenance records. Applicable quality standards.

FORMATIVE MODULE 1: PROCESSES IN GRAPHIC ARTS

Level: 2

Code: MF0200_2

Associated with UC: Operate in the graphical process under security, quality, and productivity

Duration: 120 hours

Assessment capabilities and criteria:

C1: Analyze the entire graphical process and its different phases: preprint, binding and transformed printing, considering the communication between them using standardization models.

CE1.1 Explain the characteristics and type configuration of graphic arts companies according to the production phase: preprint, print, binding, transformed.

CE1.2 In a defined production environment, describe through workflows the sequence of tasks or operations for obtaining the product.

CE1.3 Analyze, from the design point of view, the characteristics of a given graphical product:

-Formats and measures.

-Typology.

-Colors.

-Media.

-Encuadernation and finish.

CE1.4 In a practical scenario of producing a given graphic product, relate and sequence the different preprint phases that have been involved in its elaboration:

-Text: body, family, style, paragraph, interline.

-Trams: line, point shape, and angulation.

-Color separation.

-Plot and paging systems used.

CE1.5 In a practical scenario of crafting a given graphical product, describe and recognize the characteristics of the printing system used according to:

-Type of media used.

-Tintas: classes and layers.

-Tramado.

-Profile of the characters.

-Footprint or relief on the media.

-Effects on printing.

-Number of passes on machines.

CE1.6 Analyze the different preprint, printing and binding and finishing systems, describing and relating their main phases to the machines, equipment, raw materials and products used.

CE1.7 Describe the most significant print electronic systems.

CE1.8 Describe and recognize the characteristics of the post-pressure process for the elaboration of a type graphic product according to the defined process and the materials used.

C2: Classify graphic products according to their composition and functional characteristics: stationery, carpeting, stanchery, editing and advertising.

CE2.1 Explain the functional characteristics of the different graphic products: Stationery, Carpet, Stucery, Editing and Advertising.

CE2.2 Identify the structural characteristics of the different graphic products: Stationery, Carpet, Stucery, Editing and Advertising.

CE2.3 From graphic product samples:

-Recognize its physicochemical composition and identify its functional capacity.

-Rate the communicative and functional capacity of the different graphic products.

-Classify the samples of proposed graphic products according to their nature and functionality: stationery, carpeting, stanchery, editing and advertising.

C3: Recognize and analyze color metrics and metrics used in graphic arts.

CE3.1 Identify chromatic spaces: RGB, CMYK, HSB, CIE Lab, used in graphic arts.

CE3.2 Describe the measurement equipment used in the color measurement: colorimeter, glitter, spectrophotometer, identifying the application of each of them.

CE3.3 Describe the various lighting sources, color temperature, and observation conditions to reproduce color under standardized conditions.

CE3.4 In a practical scenario of color measurement and from different samples of color originals:

-Identify color parameters: brightness, saturation, tone, and metamery index.

-Represent colorimetric values in chromatic spaces.

-Evaluate color differences and their ability to play in the graphical system.

-Make measurements of color variables with the colorimeter and the electrometer over different color samples indicating the readings in a template.

C4: Relating applicable labour and environmental risk prevention rules in the graphical process with the operations that are developed in each of its phases.

CE4.1 Recognize applicable labor and environmental risk prevention regulations in the graphical process.

CE4.2 Identify the security elements to be installed in the different places and risk teams in the graphical industries.

CE4.3 Using practical examples, identify the security labels that appear on the machines and products used in the graphical process.

CE4.4 Describe and relate the rules applicable to the prevention of occupational and environmental risks, with the different phases of the graphical process.

CE4.5 Recognize the environmental documents and procedures applied in the graphical process.

C5: Analyze the quality control process in a graphical arts 'process'.

CE5.1 Identify the fundamental phases and concepts of quality control in manufacturing in the graphic arts industries.

CE5.2 Describe a raw material receipt control process succinctly.

CE5.3 Describe the instruments used in quality control: densitometres, colorimeters, control strips and production line control devices, identifying their application in the different phases of the graphical process.

CE5.4 Perform densitometric and colorimetric measurements from a preprint test, and from certain print standards, by assessing that the color range reproduction is consistent with the set standards.

CE5.5 In a scenario of quality control in print processing, from a printed product, and established standards:

-Select the required measurement instrument.

-Perform metering instrument calibration.

-Perform densitometric, colorimetric, 'trapping', sliding, and gray balance measurements.

-Set the chromatic space.

-Perform different measures on the control strip.

-Check the setting with the set standards.

CE5.6 In a practical scenario of quality control in the process of transformed, from a graphical product to be bound and/or manipulate, identify and evaluate the defects detected in:

-Format and margins.

-Cutting marks.

-Log tokens.

-Signatures.

-Fibre sense.

-Repainted.

-Troquels.

CE5.7 Describe the most significant quality features of the products:

-Encuaderation and manipulated: subjective assessment, cut marks, tracks, log signals, collared.

-Resistance to folding.

-Resistance to rub.

-Printing: density, 'trapping', stamping gain, color balance, pasting, sliding, logging.

-Preprint: tests, standards.

Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real workbench:

C1 with respect to CE1.3, CE1.4 and CE1.5; C3 with respect to CE3.4; C5 with respect to CE5.4, CE5.5 and CE5.6.

Other capabilities:

Take responsibility for the work you are developing.

Demonstrate some autonomy in solving small contingencies related to their activity.

Respect internal company procedures and rules.

Maintain an assertive, empathetic and conciliatory attitude to others by demonstrating cordiality and kindness in dealing.

Recognize the organization's productive process.

Participate and actively collaborate on the work team.

Contents:

1. Graphical process

Types of graphic products.

Company types: organization and structure.

Standardization and communication models. Workflows.

Preprint systems. Classes of originals. Latent image, revealed process. Matching the digital workflow environment.

Input peripherals, output peripherals, specific software and hardware, processing and test systems.

Plotting and mounting. Elements of the assembly. Specific software.

Print systems. Equipment, capabilities, comparison of different systems.

Types of inks and media for each print system.

Encuaderation and transformed. Classes. Benefits. Teams. Features.

Paper and paperboard manipulated. Manipulated from other materials.

2. Color and its measurement

Nature of light.

Electromagnetic spectrum.

Philosophy of vision.

Chromatic Space.

Factors that affect color perception.

Color Theory. Additive and subtractive synthesis of color.

Color rendering systems: MUNSELL, RGB, HSL, HSV, PANTONE, CIE, CIE-Lab, GAFT.

Color measurement instruments: densitometres, colorimeters, glinometers, and spectrophotometers. Color assessment.

3. Standards for the prevention of labour and environmental risks applicable to graphic arts processes

Safety plans and rules.

Rules in force.

Signals and alarms.

Environmental regulations.

4. Quality in graphic arts processes

More characteristic tests, instruments and measurements.

Preprint quality: point gain, gray balance, and density.

Print variables (print density, contrast, penetration, fixed, stamping gain, color and gray balance).

Control areas in print. Measurement.

Quality in post-pressure.

Visual control of binding and manipulated.

Checking for bound and manipulated defects.

Standardization of quality.

5. Quality control in graphic arts

Quality in manufacturing.

Quality control. Concepts involved.

Control elements.

Control Phases: receipt of materials, processes, and products.

Rules and standards for the graphical process.

Training context parameters:

Spaces and installations:

The spaces and facilities will provide a response, in the form of a classroom, a workshop, a workshop of practices, a laboratory or a singular space, to the training needs, according to the Professional Context established in the Unit Partner competence, taking into account the applicable regulations of the production sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.

Professional or former trainer profile:

1. Domain of knowledge and techniques related to production operations in the graphical process under conditions of safety, quality and productivity, which will be accredited by one of the following two forms:

-Level 2 academic training (Spanish Framework of Qualifications for Higher Education), Technical Engineering, Technical Architecture, Diplomacy or other higher level of professional field.

-Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.

2. Accredited pedagogical competence in accordance with what is established by the competent administrations.

TRAINING MODULE 2: SUBJECTS AND PRODUCTS FOR BINDING

Level: 2

Code: MF0691_2

Associated with UC: Preparing raw materials and auxiliary products for binding

Duration: 90 hours

Assessment capabilities and criteria:

C1: Interpret work procedures in the preparation of raw materials in binding processes from production orders.

CE1.1 Perform a sequencing of the binding process by interpreting a type work order, identifying the materials used in each case.

CE1.2 Contrasting the indications of different work orders with a type model with indications for binding.

CE1.3 In a scenario of obtaining raw material data for binding, from a model model:

-Check that all data regarding the binding to be performed are shown in the model.

-Identify the required papers, cartons, threads and other materials according to the model.

-Rate established quality criteria.

CE1.4 In a scenario of identifying raw materials, from a production order type:

-Interpret the work order relating the technical and production information to the preparation of the raw materials and the auxiliary equipment to be used such as forklift trucks, machines, seals, pallets, boxes, sheets, binding and others.

-Recognize raw materials for different binding trains.

-Identify the auxiliary elements of the machines.

C2: Analyze the printed sheets with respect to their quality in the binding processes.

CE2.1 Perform measurements of printed sheets by handling the corresponding measuring devices by valuing the following properties:

-Square of the specification.

-Resistance to folding.

-Moisture from paper.

CE2.2 In a practical scenario of quality testing, from actual printed sheets check the quality in the following aspects:

-Foliation.

-The plotted.

-Record.

-Specific measures.

-Repines.

-Needle.

-Resistance to folding.

-Fibre sense.

-Roture in folding.

CE2.3 Detect, in real printed samples, defects that occurred in printing, using a spin with defective folds.

C3: Apply the preparation methods for raw materials and ancillary products for a binding process, in accordance with production requirements.

CE3.1 Interpret working methods, taken from the reality of a company, on handling raw materials and auxiliary binding products.

CE3.2 Analyze the characteristic storage process of binding companies.

CE3.3 Relate the materials with the procedures and conditions that your storage requires.

CE3.4 In a scenario of preparing raw materials and auxiliary products according to a real work order:

-Check the quantity and quality of raw materials and ancillary products.

-Appoint raw materials and auxiliary products and manipulate them according to established working methods to ensure their input and pass through the different machines that configure the binding processes.

-Identify established security rules to stack raw materials and auxiliary equipment.

C4: Evaluate the characteristics of the quality variables of the raw materials, using the appropriate instruments.

CE4.1 Relate the durability and behavior of the various supports used in binding with the alterations that they suffer because of: humidity and temperature, storage, the direction of the fiber.

CE4.2 Relate the durability and behavior of the various chemicals used in binding with the alterations that they suffer because of: temperature, humidity, composition, oxidation and light.

CE4.3 To differentiate the characteristics and operation of the measuring instruments used for the quality control of raw materials.

CE4.4 In a practical scenario of a test of binding materials, from measuring equipment:

-Handle the tools and measuring instruments: hygrometer, thermometer, precision scales, viscosimeter, microscope.

-Get the humidity, pressure, density, dimension variations of media, materials, and raw materials.

-Successfully express the results of the measures.

CE4.5 Check that the properties of the different raw materials used in the binding processes are in line with the characteristics of the materials to be bound and the final result for which they are intended.

Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real workbench:

C1 with respect to CE1.3 and CE1.4; C2 with respect to CE2.2; C3 with respect to CE3.4; C4 with respect to CE4.4.

Other capabilities:

Take responsibility for the work you are developing.

Respect internal company procedures and rules.

Habit to the business pace of the business.

Learn new concepts or procedures and effectively leverage training using acquired knowledge.

Transfer information clearly, in an orderly, structured, clear and precise manner respecting the channels established in the organization.

Recognize the organization's productive process.

Contents:

1. Binding raw materials

Plotted: classes and features.

Standard specifications for the pleadings.

Printed sheets for binding: repines and downpour.

Resistance to folding.

Fibre Sense.

Collapse in folding.

Queues. Types. Features.

Barnices. Types. Features.

Wire. Types. Features.

Threads. Types. Features.

2. Packaging and storage in binding

Storage conditions. Temperature and humidity.

Automatic storage systems.

Stacked. Carcloths.

Ators: operation and handling.

Seal: Types and Placement.

Pallets: placement and handling.

Boxes: types, material utilization.

Retracter: handling and utilization.

Applicable labour and environmental risk prevention regulations.

3. Auxiliary elements of the machines

Encuaderation. Benefits.

Types of machines for the binding process.

Components of the machines.

Auxiliary machines for machines.

Guillotins.

4. Quality control of binding raw materials

Quality of the printed.

Viscosity control.

Drying times.

Resistance to rub and scratch of varnishes and tails.

More characteristic tests and measurements.

Measuring devices: gyrometer, flexometer, gage, micrometer, thermometer and viscosimeter.

Training context parameters:

Spaces and installations:

The spaces and facilities will provide a response, in the form of a classroom, a workshop, a workshop of practices, a laboratory or a singular space, to the training needs, according to the Professional Context established in the Unit Partner competence, taking into account the applicable regulations of the production sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.

Professional or former trainer profile:

1.-Domain of knowledge and techniques related to the preparation of raw materials and ancillary products for binding, which shall be accredited by one of the following two forms:

-Level 2 academic training (Spanish Framework of Qualifications for Higher Education), Technical Engineering, Technical Architecture, Diplomacy or other higher level of professional field.

-Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.

2.-Accredited pedagogical competence according to what the competent administrations establish.

TRAINING MODULE 3: BINDING WITH STAPLE

Level: 2

Code: MF0926_2

Associated with UC: Adjust parameters, synchronize equipment, and perform binding with staple

Duration: 120 hours

Assessment capabilities and criteria:

C1: Perform preparation and adjustment operations on standard and wire-wire-wire-wire-wire machines, synchronizing the start-up mechanisms, according to the requirements of the work.

CE1.1 Identify the mechanisms of preparation in the binding machines with wire staple/wire wire in situ or by means of catalogues and machine plans.

CE1.2 Recognize the standard stations, identifying their components: squats, suction cups and others.

CE1.3 In a practical scenario, for the preparation of lump-sum machines and wire-wire binding, from a given work order:

-Check that the pliegos supplied for binding do not present anomalies that hinder their subsequent production.

-Prepare the lump-sum stations, placing the squadrons, suction cups, optical controls of the modified specifications, and the drop tray of the fold.

-Prepare the paper feeding stations, load them correctly, checking the match of the foot or the head of the funnel of each of the folds and the cover.

-Control record elements, guides, palpators, staples controls, and power controls, so that their operation is secure and constant.

-Adjust the position and pressure of the stapler heads and have the wire type appropriate to the specifications of the work indicated in the work order.

-Prepare the trilateral guillotine, adjusting the guides according to the format and the product to be cut, as well as the leveling of the foot according to the support to be cut for proper operation.

-Check the quality of the cutting of the blades and, in the case of a dent or rebaba, change them safely and correctly.

CE1.4 Adjust the elements and mechanisms of the stacking and output system of a stitched machine with given wire thread, checking its correct operation to avoid jams and defective products.

C2: Carry out the wire wire binding operations, starting with job specifications, performing the quality controls and respecting the required safety standards.

CE2.1 Recognize the wire-wire binding machines, describing their components and the operational of each of them: feeding, flat, funnel and others.

CE2.2 Interpret the required instructions for the wire staple/thread specified in a type work order.

CE2.3 In a wire thread bound scenario from a given work order:

-Regular the mechanisms of the folding feed stations.

-Graped heads.

-Trilateral.

-Output and stacking.

CE2.4 Operate with the main binder machines with staple to perform the run and achieve the required quality.

CE2.5 Dispose the materials properly on the machines, in order to obtain the required results and times.

CE2.6 In a practical scenario of framing with staple, from some materials to binding:

-Set the appropriate speed of the machine in relation to the materials to be bound.

-Relate the causes and effects of the readjustment of the binding parameters.

-Get the bound copies of the printed with the required quality.

CE2.7 Describe the method and frequency of obtaining bound samples, during a specific run, in accordance with the requirements of an established quality system.

CE2.8 In a practical assessment of security assessment in the process and given a plan of protection of occupational risks and environmental protection:

-Identify the risks and level of danger posed by the handling of materials, products and equipment used in the binding with staple.

-Identify and describe the security mechanisms of the various stapler machines: stop buttons, protections, housings, as well as the individual protective equipment to be used.

-To recognize the protocols of action in relation to the treatment of the waste produced in the job.

C3: Perform strapping and placement operations for wire staple/wire-bound products in boxes or pallets.

CE3.1 Identify the signaling and identification systems used normally in the binding processes with staple.

CE3.2 Fill out carnets for the identification of box and pallet contents of different job assumptions, according to the methods established in a model company.

CE3.3 In a practical case of strapping, from sausages/stitched with wire thread:

-Perform the flapping of the raised/stitched specimens with wire thread.

-Pack them in boxes looking for the perfect fit to avoid further deterioration.

-Put in pallets the emcked/sewn copies with wire thread for subsequent binding.

CE3.4 Given staple bound products, place them in boxes and/or pallets, attaching the carnets according to the indications of an established work order.

C4: Apply first-level maintenance operations on machines that are involved in the binding process.

CE4.1 Identify, on a given staple binding machine, the grilling points arranged, following the machine manufacturer's instructions.

CE4.2 Interpret the maintenance rules for the stapler binding machines.

CE4.3 On a given staple binding machine, and following established maintenance standards, perform the greasing of the intended grease points and check the air circuits and filters.

CE4.4 Perform the cleaning of the elements set out in the maintenance rules.

Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real workbench:

C1 with respect to CE1.3; C2 with respect to CE2.3, CE2.6 and CE2.8; C3 with respect to CE3.3.

Other capabilities:

Participate and actively collaborate on the work team.

Interpret and execute work instructions.

Demonstrate flexibility to understand changes.

Respect internal organization procedures and rules.

Habit to the organization's work rate.

Take responsibility for the work you are developing.

Contents:

1. Binding procedures with staple/wire thread

Grapa bound process. Technological principles.

Operations. Control parameters.

Grayer-bound machines.

Applicable labour and environmental risk prevention regulations.

2. Preparation of binder machines with wire staple/wire thread

Handlers. Preparation and calibration.

Electromechanical elements.

Settings and synchronization.

Preparing to funnel stations.

Preparing stapler headers.

Preparing the trilateral guillotine.

Record items.

Stack and output elements.

Applicable labour and environmental risk prevention regulations.

3. Operation and handling of binder machines with wire staple/wire

Operating the elements of the binding machine.

Mechanisms of the binding machines.

Quality control in the process.

System-specific defects.

Top-level maintenance.

Safety rules related to machine handling.

Personal protection equipment.

Training context parameters:

Spaces and installations:

The spaces and facilities will provide a response, in the form of a classroom, a workshop, a workshop of practices, a laboratory or a singular space, to the training needs, according to the Professional Context established in the Unit Partner competence, taking into account the applicable regulations of the production sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.

Professional or former trainer profile:

1.-Domain of knowledge and techniques related to tuning parameters, synchronizing equipment and performing the binding with staple, which will be credited by one of the following two ways:

-Level 1 academic training (Spanish Framework of Qualifications for Higher Education) or other higher level education related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.

2.-Accredited pedagogical competence according to what the competent administrations establish.

FORMATIVE MODULE 4: STANDARD AND STITCHED WITH VEGETABLE YARN

Level: 2

Code: MF0927_2

Associated with UC: Adjust parameters, level elements, and make the standard and stitched with plant yarn

Duration: 150 hours

Assessment capabilities and criteria:

C1: To carry out regulatory operations in mechanisms of maneuver and service of the machines to make the lump-sum and sewn with plant yarn under conditions of quality.

CE1.1 Identify and explain the use of the handlers that allow to calibrate and prepare the elements that make up the plant-based binding equipment.

CE1.2 In a convenient machine-setting scenario, from a conveniently-characterized work order and an attached model or model:

-Check that the work order data corresponds exactly to the model or model, identifying all the data contained in it.

-Successfully interpret the technical instructions collected in the work order.

-Identify in the work order the data relating to the number of folds, pagination, and others.

-Identify the quality controls required in the work order and its practical application.

CE1.3 Introduce the preparation data of the lump-sum machine and sewn with plant yarn in the control panel thereof.

C2: Carry out regulatory operations on the mechanisms for the implementation of the standard machines and sewn with plant yarn, adapting them to the type of work and materials used.

CE2.1 Identify the start-up mechanisms in the lump-sum machines and stitched with plant yarn.

CE2.2 Recognize the adjustment elements in the stitching stations such as needles, punches, and others.

CE2.3 In a practical scenario of regulating the lump-sum mechanisms and stitching with plant yarn, from a number of documents and a given work order:

-Prepare the paper feeding stations of the machine, load them correctly and check the match of the foot or the head of the standard of each of the folds and the cover.

-Adjust, in the stitching machine with plant yarn, the number of seams, the position and pressure of the cossers.

-Dispose the appropriate thread type to the work needs specified in the work order.

-Control and adjust, in the stitching machine with plant yarn, the distance between books for the correct differentiation of each unit.

-Adjust the suction of the suction cups, the length of the pusher and control and adjust the easel, the needles, the punches and the hooks in relation to the paper to be sewn.

-Control the recording elements and power controls on the machines so that their operation is secure and constant.

CE2.4 Adjust the elements and mechanisms of the stacking system, separation and output of a given machine, checking its correct operation to avoid jams and defective products.

C3: Carry out standard operations and sewn with plant yarn, adjusting to the requirements of the work by performing the quality controls and respecting the required safety standards.

CE3.1 Interpret the necessary instructions for the lump sum and stitched with specified plant yarn in a given work order.

CE3.2 Describe the method and frequency of obtaining sewn samples during a specific run, in accordance with the requirements of the established quality system.

CE3.3 Relate machines and materials to binding with plant yarn with the appropriate speed.

CE3.4 In a standard case scenario/stitched with plant yarn, from a given fold and work order:

-Dispose the folds on the machines properly, in order to obtain the required results and times.

-Perform the run and achieve the required quality by operating with the standard machines and stitched with plant yarn.

-Get the copies stitched with the required quality.

CE3.5 Relate the causes and the most common effects in the readjustment of the parameters of the bound bound with plant yarn.

CE3.6 Identify and describe the safety mechanisms of the various binder machines stitched with plant yarn: stop buttons, protections and housings.

CE3.7 In a practical scenario of lump-sum operations and given a plan of prevention of occupational risks and environmental protection:

-Identify the risks and level of danger posed by the handling of materials, products and equipment used in the binding of plant yarn.

-Identify the action rules that appear in the plan related to the lump-sum operations as well as the individual protective equipment to be used.

-To recognize the protocols of action in relation to the treatment of the waste produced in the job.

C4: Perform flapping and placement operations of products sewn with plant yarn into boxes or pallets, identifying the products by means of carnets.

CE4.1 Identify the signaling and identification systems used normally in plant-based stitching processes.

CE4.2 Fill out carnets for the identification of box and pallet contents of different job assumptions, according to the methods established in a model company.

CE4.3 In a practical case of strapping from raised/stitched specimens with plant yarn:

-Make the flapping of the raised/stitched specimens with plant yarn.

-Pack them in boxes looking for the perfect fit to avoid further deterioration.

-Place the raised/sewn specimens with vegetable yarn into pallets for further binding.

CE4.4 Given products sewn with plant yarn, place them in boxes and pallets by attaching the carnets according to the indications of a work order.

C5: Apply first-level maintenance operations on the machines involved in the lump-sum process and stitched with plant yarn.

CE5.1 Identify the grease points arranged according to the standard machines and sewn with plant yarn according to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

CE5.2 Perform the greasing of the grease points provided for in the standards for the maintenance of the standard and sewn machines.

CE5.3 Check air circuits and filters according to established maintenance rules.

CE5.4 Perform the cleaning of the elements set in the maintenance rules.

Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real workbench:

C1 with respect to CE1.2; C2 with respect to CE2.3 and CE2.4; C3 with respect to CE3.4 and CE3.7; C4 with respect to CE4.3.

Other capabilities:

Take responsibility for the work you are developing.

Participate and actively collaborate on the work team.

Respect internal company procedures and rules.

Demonstrate some autonomy in solving small contingencies related to their activity.

Communicate effectively with the right people at every moment, respecting the channels established in the organization.

Demonstrate flexibility to understand changes.

Contents:

1. Plant yarn binding procedures

Process of stitching with plant yarn. Technological principles.

Operations. Control parameters.

Flat machines and stitched with plant yarn.

Applicable labour and environmental risk prevention regulations.

2. Preparation and setting up of the standard machines

Regulation of production parameters.

Preparation of maneuver and service mechanisms.

Electromechanical elements.

Preparing the power stations.

Regulation of the standard units.

Preparing the output units.

Applicable labour and environmental risk prevention regulations.

3. Preparation and setting up of plant-based sewing machines

Regulation of production parameters.

Preparation of maneuver and service mechanisms.

Electromechanical elements.

Preparing the power stations.

Output systems.

Regulation of the stitching units of the plant-based stitching machines.

Preparing the output units.

Applicable labour and environmental risk prevention regulations.

4. Operation and handling of standard machines

Optimal performance of the lump-sum machines.

Adjustments to the machine during the lump-sum.

Quality control in the lump-sum.

Driving, stacking, and output systems.

First-level cleaning and maintenance.

Applicable labour and environmental risk prevention regulations.

5. Operation and handling of plant-based stitching machines

Optimal performance of stitching machines.

Operation of the elements of the sewing machine with plant yarn.

Fit into the machine during the stitching with plant yarn.

Machines configurations for each job type.

First-level cleaning and maintenance.

Applicable labour and environmental risk prevention regulations.

Personal protection equipment.

Training context parameters:

Spaces and installations:

The spaces and facilities will provide a response, in the form of a classroom, a workshop, a workshop of practices, a laboratory or a singular space, to the training needs, according to the Professional Context established in the Unit Partner competence, taking into account the applicable regulations of the production sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.

Professional or former trainer profile:

1.-Domain of knowledge and techniques related to the adjustment of parameters, levelling of elements and realization of the standard and stitched with plant yarn, which will be accredited by one of the following two forms:

-Level 1 academic training (Spanish Framework of Qualifications for Higher Education) or other higher level education related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.

2.-Accredited pedagogical competence according to what the competent administrations establish.

ANNEX XI

Professional Qualification: Treatment and Mastration of Graphics Elements in Preprint

Professional Family: Graphic Arts

Level: 2

Code: ARG291_2

General Competition

Digitalize and deal with texts and images, integrating them with the layout and/or compaging, guaranteeing their correct reproduction in the medium and established support, intervening in the graphic process according to the quality and determined productivity.

Competition Units

UC0200_2: Operate in the graphical process under security, quality, and productivity

UC0928_2: Digitalize and perform image processing using computer applications

UC0929_2: Digitalize and Treat Text by Computer Applications

UC0930_2: Perform graphical product layout and/or compaging

Professional Environment

Professional Scope

Develops its professional activity in the area of preprint in graphic companies dedicated to the treatment of images and texts and to the layout of them. In entities of a public or private nature, small, medium and large, and regardless of their legal form, they generally work as an employed person and, where appropriate, depend on a superior. He may occasionally have people in his position and/or be team boss. The principles of universal accessibility are applied in the development of professional activity in accordance with the applicable regulations.

Productive Sectors

It is located in the productive sector of graphic industries: graphic arts, publishing companies, manipulated and transformed that treat images and texts integrating them by means of the layout in editorial products, advertising, periodicals, packaging and packaging, and in any other sector that has any of these activities.

Relevant occupations and jobs

The terms of the following relationship of occupations and jobs are used with a generic and omnicomprensivo character of women and men.

Preprint technicians

Text preparets

Teclists

Machines/compaginators

Image preps

Digital file preparers

Compaginators in digital

Scans/Color Specialists

Test Operators

Preprint integrators

Photographic retokers

Associated Training (600 hours)

Training Modules

MF0200_2: Processes in Graphic Arts (120 hours)

MF0928_2: Digital image processing (210 hours)

MF0929_2: Text processing for layout (90 hours)

MF0930_2: Graphical product (180 hours) Maquetation and Compaging

COMPETITION UNIT 1: OPERATING IN THE GRAPHICAL PROCESS UNDER SECURITY, QUALITY, AND PRODUCTIVITY

Level: 2

Code: UC0200_2

Professional Realizations and Realization Criteria:

RP 1: Determine the characteristics of the graphical products to establish the appropriate manufacturing process, taking into account the available elements and applicable regulations.

CR 1.1 Graphic products are identified from the data provided by the originals, sketches and models, in response to the established technical specifications.

CR 1.2 The specifications on the graphic product to be performed are valued by identifying their typology and functional and communicative characteristics-product use, applicable regulations and others.

CR 1.3 The functional and technological relationships of the graphic product to be made are established according to its components: stationery, stuchaery, publishing, advertising, and others.

CR 1.4 The phases required for the reproduction of the graphic product: preprint, binding printing and finishes, are set from their specifications, introducing the data into the workflow.

RP 2: Perform the standardization of the production parameters in the workflows for each phase of the graphical product, according to the specifications set.

CR 2.1 The production phases in the graphical process are determined by specifying each of the elements involved in the process: technical parameters, product typology, and others.

CR 2.2 Production parameters are standardized in the workflow according to the typology of the graphic product: packaging, editorial product, billboard and others, following established procedures.

CR 2.3 The parameters and manufacturing elements of the graphic product at different stages of the process: preprint, printing, binding and transformed, are checked according to the technical specifications.

CR 2.4 The productive environment in each of the phases of the graphical process is determined from the established technical specifications.

CR 2.5 Graphic process tracking is done through workflows by facilitating planning, automation, procedures, and other factors that affect the production environment.

CR 2.6 The incidents that arise in the process are recorded in the workflow following established procedures to take the necessary corrective and preventive measures.

RP 3: Verify quality parameters in the process using specific equipment to obtain the product with the established standards.

CR 3.1 The most significant quality features in each of the phases of the process are identified according to established variables and attributes.

CR 3.2 The graphical product in process is checked, verifying that it complies with the fundamental concepts of quality in the different phases of its manufacturing according to the established standards and standards.

CR 3.3 Quality procedures at each stage of the manufacturing process of the graphic product are applied methodically according to the technical specifications of the product, using the specific measurement equipment.

CR 3.4 Control frequencies are applied according to the type of characteristics to be controlled and the number of product units to be obtained, following established procedures.

CR 3.5 The results and incidences of the quality control of the graphical product are recorded using the corresponding control sheets by entering them into the workflow.

CR 3.6 Quality verification in the graphical process is carried out in compliance with applicable labour and environmental risk prevention regulations.

Professional Context:

Production media:

Specific computers and software. Digital printer. Standards of communication. Workflows. Normalized light pupitre. Measurement and control tools and tools: densitometer, tipometer, odometer, colorimeter and spectrophotometer.

Products and results:

Production parameters entered into the workflow. Recorded quality control incidents. Completed control sheets. Failures or defects in the registered processes. Quality parameters identified throughout the graphical process.

Information used or generated:

Production order. Technical documentation of preprint, printing and post-pressure equipment and machines. Applicable rules for the prevention of occupational and environmental risks. Quality standards and standards to be applied in the graphical process. Technical equipment sheets. Maintenance manuals. Company quality control plans.

COMPETITION UNIT 2: DIGITALIZE AND PERFORM IMAGE PROCESSING USING COMPUTER APPLICATIONS

Level: 2

Code: UC0928_2

Professional Realizations and Realization Criteria:

RP 1: Check the originals of the images, classifying and adapting them for treatment taking into account the established production process and its technical characteristics.

CR 1.1 The original reception is reviewed by checking the technical specifications, the needs of the production process and/or the technical characteristics of the model.

CR 1.2 The transparent, opaque and original printed transparencies are checked against the characteristics of the support, the good status of the originals and the value of the viability of reproduction.

CR 1.3 The technical characteristics of the digital originals: color mode, color depth, size and others, are verified, modifying them according to the production process, the corresponding profiles of the tests and the corresponding printing machines and the final support, following the instructions on the work order.

CR 1.4 The originals are classified according to the type of support and the different processes to be performed on the defined workflow.

RP 2: Perform color management maintenance on digitalizing devices and on monitors to maintain their consistency in the imaging process, according to the technical instructions.

CR 2.1 The calibration of the monitor is performed, following the guidelines established in the technical procedure, by means of specific application, determining the characteristics of luminance and its tolerance in the device, adjusting brightness and contrast, and prefixing the color temperature and range by observing under normalized conditions.

CR 2.2 The characterization of the monitor is performed according to the guidelines established in the technical procedure, by means of the specific application module and the appropriate measuring instrument (screen colorimeter or spectrophotometer), storing the result obtained from a color profile on the operating system and keeping it active for the computer applications that are used.

CR 2.3 The calibration of the digitizing devices is carried out in accordance with the guidelines laid down in the technical procedure, by means of the procedures laid down by the manufacturer through his/her own acting on software options that control them.

CR 2.4 The characterization of the digitizer device is carried out according to the guidelines established in the technical procedure, using specific applications and digitalizing, in predetermined conditions, a letter of standard color or pattern developed.

RP 3: Perform the scanning of images for your treatment, according to the product's technical specifications and defined quality standards.

CR 3.1 Original images are cleaned by removing specks, dust, or others that may alter reproduction.

CR 3.2 The originals are prepared for digitalization by marking the frames, cuts, enlargement/reduction factor and other indications, taking into account the characteristics of the frames, the capture equipment and the technical characteristics of the product.

CR 3.3 The preparation of the digitizer device is done by adjusting and configuring all the parameters required for scanning.

CR 3.4 The color profiles of the images are selected based on the scanning device, the image support and the specified color space, depending on the needs of the production process.

CR 3.5 The color control of the images is applied to the color spaces, the characteristic response of the digitizer device, and the treatment with respect to the image support and the color of the original.

CR 3.6 Device parameters are configured by setting the frames, escalates, and resolutions according to the production sheet specifications and the needs of the production process.

CR 3.7 The digital reproduction of the original is adapted to the technical specifications of production, using the tools and specific computer applications.

CR 3.8 The digitized images are checked on screen by assessing their quality, detecting possible deviations of color, errors in the lights and shadows and other defects, valuing their composition and verifying that the original The digital obtained is suited to the job specifications.

RP 4: Perform the digital processing of images, using computer applications, to match them to the needs of the final product, adjusting to the technical specifications of the production process.

CR 4.1 The preparation of the necessary equipment in the imaging process is performed by checking its calibration and the active color profile of the monitor.

CR 4.2 The configuration of color management in computer imaging applications is made by considering the recommendations of manufacturers and standardization organizations, as well as color flow established in the production process.

CR 4.3 Color transformations are performed by applying the color control rules set for the production flow.

CR 4.4 Color corrections in respect of the original are made by adjusting the quality according to the requirements of the final product.

CR 4.5 Defects, impurities and unwanted elements are removed by retouching tools, improving the quality of the final product.

CR 4.6 The definitive images are adapted to the technical characteristics of the medium or established medium: paper, web, multimedia or other supports, and to the needs of the production process.

CR 4.7 The correction of digital images of images is done by considering the indications given in the printed tests using the appropriate computer applications.

CR 4.8 Possible quality control incidents are recorded in the corresponding control sheets.

RP 5: Perform image photomontages using specific software, to match them to the needs of the final product, adjusting to the model and/or technical specifications.

CR 5.1 The images required to perform the photomontage are classified according to their digital characteristics, color space, resolution, and others.

CR 5.2 The images that integrate the photomontage are technically valued and are specifically treated by adapting them to the required technical particularities.

CR 5.3 The assembly is made with images that maintain among them appropriate qualities of harmony, naturalness and color balance.

CR 5.4 Required masks and masks are performed by applying technical criteria according to the merging needs.

CR 5.5 The fusion of the photomontage is performed smoothly and imperceptible by eliminating the pronounced steps.

CR 5.6 The photomontage file is stored using the image format appropriate to the needs of the production process.

RP 6: Perform and treat vector graphic elements using computer applications to integrate them into the production process, adapting them to technical specifications.

CR 6.1 The preparation of the required equipment in the vector drawing is performed by checking its calibration, and the active color profile of the monitor.

CR 6.2 The configuration of color management in vector drawing computing applications is made by considering the recommendations of manufacturers and standardization organizations and color control flow. established in the production process.

CR 6.3 The values obtained in the color management configuration are set as the preferences of the application that you are working with.

CR 6.4 Vector charts are created by specific computer applications by achieving the appropriate optimization for their playback, by checking their quality through intermediate print tests.

CR 6.5 The colors defined in the vector graphics are checked according to the color flow set and the limitations of the final playback device.

CR 6.6 The color transformations of the vector graphics are made by adapting them to the color specifications set for the production flow.

CR 6.7 The functionality of vector graphics is valued by checking the existence and accuracy of all component elements, as well as the availability of the fonts used.

CR 6.8 The vector charts are stored in the appropriate file format for the production flow, verifying that they meet the established quality standards and that the format is appropriate to the production flow.

RP 7: Get intermediate and final tests for the color and quality of the images, depending on the production process, applying the technical and quality specifications established and verifying their correct realization.

CR 7.1 The preparation of the test device is performed according to the procedure established in the company, complying with the applicable regulations for the prevention of occupational and environmental risks.

CR 7.2 Test devices are adjusted by performing the configuration and calibration of the test devices according to the established quality standards.

CR 7.3 The choice of raw materials, supports and inks for obtaining the tests is performed according to the type, quality and device.

CR 7.4 The tests are obtained by launching the digital file with the appropriate printing parameters to the output device according to the type, quality and objective of the test, according to the technical specifications and requirements. of the final product.

CR 7.5 The control and stability of the printed test process, as well as its final result, is performed through the quality procedures established by the company.

CR 7.6 The evidence obtained is verified by verifying that they lack the technical anomalies of the printing process and that they contain all the control and recording elements necessary to assess the colour and quality of the image.

Professional Context:

Production media:

Computer equipment. Digitizing devices. Test kits. Colour measurement and control devices: densitometer, colorimeter and spectrophotometer. Monitors. Scanning software, image processing and vector drawing. Workflows, color control software, and check-up programs. Image banks and vector graphics. Raw materials for testing systems. Normalized light pupitre and mounting table. Tools and measuring instruments: rules, tipometer, storytellers.

Products and results:

Digitized images. Framed images. Corrected images. Photomontages in digital support performed. Graphics, logos and vector products in digital support. Color tests, correction tests, and contract tests.

Information used or generated:

Production order. Sheet of technical specifications. Information on the production process of the product. Established workflow and quality control. Check and check sheets. Information provided by the customer: sketches and models of the graphic product. Specific color libraries. Paper catalogues or other media. Image catalogues and vector graphics. Technical process of characterization and calibration. Technical documentation of preprint teams, applications, and workflows. Applicable rules of quality. Applicable rules for the prevention of occupational and environmental risks.

COMPETITION UNIT 3: DIGITIZE AND DEAL WITH TEXTS USING COMPUTER APPLICATIONS

Level: 2

Code: UC0929_2

Professional Realizations and Realization Criteria:

RP 1: Rate the received texts to determine your reproduction method, according to the technical specifications and/or the model.

CR 1.1 The texts are identified by checking the technical specifications and the indications provided by the client.

CR 1.2 The accuracy of the received texts and the character set is checked according to the technical specifications of the product and the originals provided.

CR 1.3 The format and encoding of the text files that are received in digital media is checked against the particularities of the computer application of layout and/or compaging.

CR 1.4 The readability of paper-supported texts is valued taking into account the specifications of the production sheet and determining its digitalization or typing.

RP 2: Perform the digitisation of the texts for further processing, using the equipment and computer applications appropriate to the subsequent production process.

CR 2.1 The configuration of the parameters in the scanning software is performed according to the needs of the texts to be digitised.

CR 2.2 The text is digitized by optical reading and character recognition equipment and applications according to the criteria set out in the technical specifications.

CR 2.3 The already digitized text is purged of the possible errors committed by the character recognition application following the spelling rules.

CR 2.4 The text is composed, if any, with the typographic specified in the work instructions and following the spelling rules.

CR 2.5 The text files are stored in files, adapting the format to the needs of the computer application of layout and/or compaging.

RP 3: Perform text processing using typographical styles to suit technical specifications, using computer equipment and applications appropriate to the established workflow.

CR 3.1 Digital fonts are selected and loaded into the text composition program according to the operating system used and the technical specifications.

CR 3.2 The character set of the fonts used is suited to the spelling needs of the texts according to the editorial specifications or style books.

CR 3.3 The text is treated typographically according to the criteria set out in the technical specifications and/or style book or corporate identity provided by the client.

CR 3.4 The color application to the texts is done using the standardized color libraries or other custom colors according to the technical specifications.

CR 3.5 The typographical styles of the texts are generated by following the technical and/or model guidelines, or are imported from the existing digital model.

CR 3.6 The text files are stored in files, adapting the format to the needs of the computer application of layout and/or compaging and of the defined workflow.

RP 4: Apply in the digital file, the corrections of the texts indicated in the printed tests, in order to adapt it to the technical specifications, using the equipment and computer applications suitable to the workflow set.

CR 4.1 The correction of the texts is performed by interpreting the signs of correction indicated in the original by the corrector according to applicable quality regulations.

CR 4.2 The text corrections are applied according to the composition and typographical rules, according to the criteria set out in the printed tests.

CR 4.3 The corrected file is stored in the format appropriate to the needs of the computer application of layout and/or compaging.

Professional Context:

Production media:

Computer equipment. Scanners. Test kits. Printing peripherals. Software for the treatment of texts, layout and digitalization. Typographies. Useful and measuring instruments: tipometer, tell them. Letters, ranges, and color catalogs.

Products and results:

Texts received and checked. Digitisation of texts. Texts purged and processed. Incidents of quality control. Defined typographical styles. Color libraries for selected text. Texts corrected in digital form based on the indications of the corrector.

Information used or generated:

Production order. Sheet of technical specifications. Customer-facilitated information: graphic product sketches, graphic product models, sample products, style book, and others. Typographical catalogue. Technical documentation of the equipment. Ortho-typographical correction rules. Proof of correction. Applicable rules of quality. Applicable rules for the prevention of occupational and environmental risks.

COMPETITION UNIT 4: PERFORM GRAPHICAL PRODUCT LAYOUT AND/OR LAYOUT

Level: 2

Code: UC0930_2

Professional Realizations and Realization Criteria:

RP 1: Verify the digital files needed for the layout and/or compaging of the graphic products by checking the originals, technical specifications and/or model.

CR 1.1 The receipt of the text and image files is performed by checking the existence and correct correspondence of the files in relation to the specifications.

CR 1.2 The received texts and images are verified by checking that they conform to the technical specifications of the established product and/or the model.

CR 1.3 The format of the digital documents (text, image and others) received is checked and adjusted, where appropriate, taking into account the characteristics of the computer application of layout and/or compaging.

CR 1.4 The digital documents needed for the layout received through the Internet or on physical digital media (external hard disks, CDs, DVDs and others) are identified by ordering and sorting according to the protocol determined by the company.

RP 2: Perform the master pages to achieve the digital previews, following the technical indications and/or model model and using the required computer equipment and applications.

CR 2.1 The preparation of the equipment used in the layout is performed by checking the calibration and the active color profile of the monitor.

CR 2.2 The configuration of color management in the computing applications of layout is performed considering the recommendations of the manufacturers and the standardization organizations and the color control flow established in the production process.

CR 2.3 Master pages are generated by introducing parameters relative to margins, number of columns and others, adding in the same the appropriate marks of folding, cutting and other according to the needs of the subsequent process productive.

CR 2.4 Common ornamental elements and the page foliation method are applied by locating all of them in their correct position within the master pages.

CR 2.5 The cross-linking and structuring of the product is carried out taking into account the balanced distribution, the graphisms and the counter-isms and the tonal value of the composition.

CR 2.6 The digital preview is done by incorporating the boxes or frames of text and image common to all the pages, according to the criteria set out in the technical specifications and/or the technical model.

CR 2.7 The technical areas and lines of the package or label (expiry date, ink-free areas, climbing lines, cleft and others) are enclosed in the model, taking into account the die and the style book of the label. product.

CR 2.8 Type styles are generated by considering the original, model, style book, and/or technical specifications of the product.

CR 2.9 The differential graphic element boxes or frames are located and configured by placing them on their corresponding pages, respecting the graphical architecture of the product.

RP 3: Perform the layout and/or compaging from the model model to obtain the final product, using the computer applications appropriate to the process.

CR 3.1 The layout is carried out considering the particularities of the product: books, magazines, brochures, posters, mail products, advertising, remenderia products, products intended for stanchery, packaging, packaging and other products, from the model model.

CR 3.2 The text dump is performed by checking its accuracy and formatting using the typographical style sheets.

CR 3.3 Compaging of text is performed according to established composition rules.

CR 3.4 The color application to the elements of the pages that require it is done using the standardized color libraries or other custom colors according to the technical specifications.

CR 3.5 The integration of all compositional elements, texts, images and illustrations, is done by applying the specifications of the established color flow, ensuring that all the parameters are the appropriate according to the indications set on the work order.

CR 3.6 The structure and distribution of the machined product is corrected by following the indications given in the printed tests.

CR 3.7 The correction of the machined texts is carried out by interpreting and correctly applying the standard correction signs and following the composition and typographical rules according to the criteria laid down in the tests. correction.

CR 3.8 The machined and corrected computer file is stored in the appropriate format, following the company's file stored protocol rules.

RP 4: Get intermediate tests of the machined graphic product to check the location of the images and the quality of the product by following the standards of the production process and the quality control set.

CR 4.1 The preparation of the test device is performed according to the technical instructions, respecting the established standards of occupational risk prevention and environmental protection.

CR 4.2 Machine settings and test device configuration are performed according to established quality standards and preprint flow needs.

CR 4.3 The raw materials are determined according to the typology and quality of the test, checking the quality according to established procedures and standards.

CR 4.4 Tests are obtained by launching the digital file with the appropriate print parameters to the output device.

CR 4.5 The obtained tests are reviewed, checking that they contain all the necessary control and registration elements and all the elements of the layout and/or compaging: blood, loins, heaps, folds and others.

RP 5: Adapt the digital product to the medium and output support established, performing the necessary operations to optimize it according to the needs of the production process, following the technical specifications and the quality control set.

CR 5.1 The digital product is verified by verifying the existence and accuracy of all the graphic elements used in it: documents, typefaces, images and illustrations.

CR 5.2 The images and graphic elements used are adapted to the appropriate color and resolution mode according to the production process and the final support.

CR 5.3 The computer files that form all of the work are generated within the enterprise flow through the specific computing applications.

CR 5.4 End files are generated with the applications set from the working documents and with the required specifications based on the production system and the final support.

Professional Context:

Production media:

Computer equipment. Test kits. Printing peripherals. Colour measurement and control devices: densitometer, colorimeter and spectrophotometer. Software for the treatment of texts, image processing, layout and vector drawing. Workflows, color control software, and checkup programs. Image banks, vector graphics and typographies. Raw materials for testing systems. Assembly table. Tools and equipment for layout and assembly. Useful and measuring instruments: tipometer, tell them. Letters, ranges and colour catalogues. Digital model models. Images, graphics, logos and vector products in digital support.

Products and results:

Master pages made. Color libraries for the selected layout. Test models, revised models and final models in digital support. Texts machined in digital support. Models in digital support of books, magazines, brochures, posters, mail products, advertising, products of remenderia, products destined for stanchery, packaging, packaging and others. Color tests, position tests.

Information used or generated:

Production order. Information on the production process of the product. Information provided by the customer: sketches of the graphic product, models of the graphic product. Letters, ranges and colour catalogues. Image catalogues and vector graphics. Typographical catalogue. Technical documentation of preprint teams, applications, and workflows. Ortho-typographical correction rules. Applicable quality standards. Applicable rules for the prevention of occupational and environmental risks.

FORMATIVE MODULE 1: PROCESSES IN GRAPHIC ARTS

Level: 2

Code: MF0200_2

Associated with UC: Operate in the graphical process under security, quality, and productivity

Duration: 120 hours

Assessment capabilities and criteria:

C1: Analyze the entire graphical process and its different phases: preprint, binding and transformed printing, considering the communication between them using standardization models.

CE1.1 Explain the characteristics and type configuration of graphic arts companies according to the production phase: preprint, print, binding, transformed.

CE1.2 In a defined production environment, describe through workflows the sequence of tasks or operations for obtaining the product.

CE1.3 Analyze, from the design point of view, the characteristics of a given graphical product:

-Formats and measures.

-Typology.

-Colors.

-Media.

-Encuadernation and finish.

CE1.4 In a practical scenario of producing a given graphic product, relate and sequence the different preprint phases that have been involved in its elaboration:

-Text: body, family, style, paragraph, interline.

-Trams: line, point shape, and angulation.

-Color separation.

-Plot and paging systems used.

CE1.5 In a practical scenario of crafting a given graphical product, describe and recognize the characteristics of the printing system used according to:

-Type of media used.

-Tintas: classes and layers.

-Tramado.

-Profile of the characters.

-Footprint or relief on the media.

-Effects on printing.

-Number of passes on machines.

CE1.6 Analyze the different preprint, printing and binding and finishing systems, describing and relating their main phases to the machines, equipment, raw materials and products used.

CE1.7 Describe the most significant print electronic systems.

CE1.8 Describe and recognize the characteristics of the post-pressure process for the elaboration of a type graphic product according to the defined process and the materials used.

C2: Classify graphic products according to their composition and functional characteristics: stationery, carpeting, stanchery, editing and advertising.

CE2.1 Explain the functional characteristics of the different graphic products: Stationery, Carpet, Stucery, Editing and Advertising.

CE2.2 Identify the structural characteristics of the different graphic products: Stationery, Carpet, Stucery, Editing and Advertising.

CE2.3 From graphic product samples:

-Recognize its physicochemical composition and identify its functional capacity.

-Rate the communicative and functional capacity of the different graphic products.

-Classify the samples of proposed graphic products according to their nature and functionality: stationery, carpeting, stanchery, editing and advertising.

C3: Recognize and analyze color metrics and metrics used in graphic arts.

CE3.1 Identify chromatic spaces: RGB, CMYK, HSB, CIE Lab, used in graphic arts.

CE3.2 Describe the measurement equipment used in the color measurement: colorimeter, glitter, spectrophotometer, identifying the application of each of them.

CE3.3 Describe the various lighting sources, color temperature, and observation conditions to reproduce color under standardized conditions.

CE3.4 In a practical scenario of color measurement and from different samples of color originals:

-Identify color parameters: brightness, saturation, tone, and metamery index.

-Represent colorimetric values in chromatic spaces.

-Evaluate color differences and their ability to play in the graphical system.

-Make measurements of color variables with the colorimeter and the electrometer over different color samples indicating the readings in a template.

C4: Relating applicable labour and environmental risk prevention rules in the graphical process with the operations that are developed in each of its phases.

CE4.1 Recognize applicable labor and environmental risk prevention regulations in the graphical process.

CE4.2 Identify the security elements to be installed in the different places and risk teams in the graphical industries.

CE4.3 Using practical examples, identify the security labels that appear on the machines and products used in the graphical process.

CE4.4 Describe and relate the rules applicable to the prevention of occupational and environmental risks, with the different phases of the graphical process.

CE4.5 Recognize the environmental documents and procedures applied in the graphical process.

C5: Analyze the quality control process in a graphical arts 'process'.

CE5.1 Identify the fundamental phases and concepts of quality control in manufacturing in the graphic arts industries.

CE5.2 Describe a raw material receipt control process succinctly.

CE5.3 Describe the instruments used in quality control: densitometres, colorimeters, control strips and production line control devices, identifying their application in the different phases of the graphical process.

CE5.4 Perform densitometric and colorimetric measurements from a preprint test, and from certain print standards, by assessing that the color range reproduction is consistent with the set standards.

CE5.5 In a scenario of quality control in print processing, from a printed product, and established standards:

-Select the required measurement instrument.

-Perform metering instrument calibration.

-Perform densitometric, colorimetric, 'trapping', sliding, and gray balance measurements.

-Set the chromatic space.

-Perform different measures on the control strip.

-Check the setting with the set standards.

CE5.6 In a practical scenario of quality control in the process of transformed, from a graphical product to be bound and/or manipulate, identify and evaluate the defects detected in:

-Format and margins.

-Cutting marks.

-Log tokens.

-Signatures.

-Fibre sense.

-Repainted.

-Troquels.

CE5.7 Describe the most significant quality features of the products:

-Encuaderation and manipulated: subjective assessment, cut marks, tracks, log signals, collared.

-Resistance to folding.

-Resistance to rub.

-Printing: density, 'trapping', stamping gain, color balance, pasting, sliding, logging.

-Preprint: tests, standards.

Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real workbench:

C1 with respect to CE1.3, CE1.4 and CE1.5; C3 with respect to CE3.4; C5 with respect to CE5.4, CE5.5 and CE5.6.

Other capabilities:

Take responsibility for the work you are developing.

Demonstrate some autonomy in solving small contingencies related to their activity.

Respect internal company procedures and rules.

Maintain an assertive, empathetic and conciliatory attitude to others by demonstrating cordiality and kindness in dealing.

Recognize the organization's productive process.

Participate and actively collaborate on the work team.

Contents:

1. Graphical process

Types of graphic products.

Company types: organization and structure.

Standardization and communication models. Workflows.

Preprint systems. Classes of originals. Latent image, revealed process. Matching the digital workflow environment.

Input peripherals, output peripherals, specific software and hardware, processing and test systems.

Plotting and mounting. Elements of the assembly. Specific software.

Print systems. Equipment, capabilities, comparison of different systems.

Types of inks and media for each print system.

Encuaderation and transformed. Classes. Benefits. Teams. Features.

Paper and paperboard manipulated. Manipulated from other materials.

2. Color and its measurement

Nature of light.

Electromagnetic spectrum.

Philosophy of vision.

Chromatic Space.

Factors that affect color perception.

Color Theory. Additive and subtractive synthesis of color.

Color rendering systems: MUNSELL, RGB, HSL, HSV, PANTONE, CIE, CIE-Lab, GAFT.

Color measurement instruments: densitometres, colorimeters, glinometers, and spectrophotometers. Color assessment.

3. Standards for the prevention of labour and environmental risks applicable to graphic arts processes

Safety plans and rules.

Rules in force.

Signals and alarms.

Environmental regulations.

4. Quality in graphic arts processes

More characteristic tests, instruments and measurements.

Preprint quality: point gain, gray balance, and density.

Print variables (print density, contrast, penetration, fixed, stamping gain, color and gray balance).

Control areas in print. Measurement.

Quality in post-pressure.

Visual control of binding and manipulated.

Checking for bound and manipulated defects.

Standardization of quality.

5. Quality control in graphic arts

Quality in manufacturing.

Quality control. Concepts involved.

Control elements.

Control Phases: receipt of materials, processes, and products.

Rules and standards for the graphical process.

Training context parameters:

Spaces and installations:

The spaces and facilities will provide a response, in the form of a classroom, a workshop, a workshop of practices, a laboratory or a singular space, to the training needs, according to the Professional Context established in the Unit Partner competence, taking into account the applicable regulations of the production sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.

Professional or former trainer profile:

1. Domain of knowledge and techniques related to production operations in the graphical process under conditions of safety, quality and productivity, which will be accredited by one of the following two forms:

-Level 2 academic training (Spanish Framework of Qualifications for Higher Education), Technical Engineering, Technical Architecture, Diplomacy or other higher level of professional field.

-Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.

2. Accredited pedagogical competence in accordance with what is established by the competent administrations.

TRAINING MODULE 2: DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING

Level: 2

Code: MF0928_2

Associated with UC: Digitalize and Perform Image Treatment Using Computer Applications

Duration: 210 hours

Assessment capabilities and criteria:

C1: Perform original preparation operations by classifying and adapting them according to their characteristics, and considering the technical instructions.

CE1.1 Recognize the signs and terminology used in a given production order.

CE1.2 From a production order that is made easier to recognize the printing system, the printer-like system, and the workflow.

CE1.3 In a practical case of classification of originals, from a production order and given originals:

-Check the good status of the originals.

-Rate the viability of digital reproduction or treatment.

-Classify the originals according to the media: transparent, opaque, and printed originals.

CE1.4 Given digital originals and taking into account instructions related to the production process, test kits and corresponding profiles, adapt the following characteristics: color mode, resolution, color depth, extension -tiff, jpg, raw, and others-dimensions of the digital image and others.

C2: Operate with computers and computer applications in digital imaging and digital imaging processes.

CE2.1 Relating and sequencing the different phases of imaging and imaging processes in particular graphical projects.

CE2.2 Recognize and describe the characteristics and operation of different imaging and imaging equipment.

CE2.3 Identify and describe the characteristics and capabilities of the different imaging and imaging applications.

CE2.4 Determine the necessary imaging and imaging equipment and imaging applications, based on the given technical specifications.

CE2.5 In a practical case of operations with scanning equipment, from given instructions:

-Recognize the options and parameters of scanning programs.

-Operate with imaging and imaging equipment with skill and skill.

-Handle the IT applications of scanning and imaging with sufficiency and agility.

C3: Apply color management maintenance and assurance procedures in imaging and imaging programs, simulating different production environments.

CE3.1 Describe the fundamentals of color and its perception and limitations regarding physical devices for capturing, viewing, and reproducing.

CE3.2 Recognize quality recommendations regarding color reproduction in the production process.

CE3.3 Prepare imaging and imaging equipment, bringing them to the optimal operating conditions according to the manufacturers ' recommendations and a technical color management procedure in the Devices given.

CE3.4 Perform instrumental control measurements using colorimeters and spectrophotometers on equipment and materials provided and following given procedural instructions.

CE3.5 In a practical case of color management and following a given procedure instructions:

-Calibrate and characterize imaging and imaging devices using the available target methods, by means of appropriate instruments.

-Generate device profiles using the appropriate applications.

-Configure your computer applications to properly manage profiles for different graphical environments.

CE3.6 Configure color management of computer applications, taking into account the color flow set in a given production order.

C4: Digitalize images by applying the technical criteria according to the needs of different products provided and the reproduction processes of the same.

CE4.1 Identify different types of originals by describing their characteristics.

CE4.2 Explain the reproduction needs of the different types of originals: original line, grayscale, color, and vector.

CE4.3 Describe the characteristics of digital images.

CE4.4 Explain the characteristics of file formats used for the export and storage of digital data in the scanning and imaging processes.

CE4.5 Recognize and determine defects and anomalies in original provided.

CE4.6 In a practical scenario of imaging for scanning, based on some original technical specifications and given:

-Review the quality of images to be digitized.

-Identify and separate the originals based on analog (opaque or transparent) and digital support.

-Identify and separate the originals based on their subsequent playback, by file format (bitmap or vector) and mode (line, grayscale, or color).

-Determine the originals that will require treatment for quality reasons or job specifications.

-Specify/Identify the originals that will conform to the photo mounts.

-Determine the necessary computers and computer applications.

CE4.7 In a practical scenario of image scanning, from technical specifications and original given:

-Clean and dispose of the originals on scanning support.

-Calculate the size and resolution of digitalization based on the reproduction and the technologies of obtaining the printer form.

-Configure the scanning program parameters, considering the characteristics of the original and the final product you want to obtain.

-Select the color profiles set in the technical specifications.

-Perform the appropriate framing to the technical specifications.

-Set the parameters for color correction in the scanning process by improving the color of the original images.

-Digitalize the images.

-Store images using the appropriate file format depending on the output media set.

C5: digitally treat images using computer applications, optimizing them based on the end product, media or established support and production instructions.

CE5.1 Describe the features and limitations of the images provided based on the characteristics of their format.

CE5.2 In a practical scenario of image processing, based on technical specifications and digital originals given:

-Modify resolution/size using image processing applications while maintaining the required quality based on the end product.

-Perform the frames indicated in the technical specifications by using image processing applications.

-Perform image profiling by following the criteria set in the technical specifications.

-Store digital images in file format suitable for production processing.

CE5.3 From digital photographic originals provided, detect and specify chromatic errors: dominant, gray balance or others.

CE5.4 In a practical scenario of image optimization from a given technical specification and digital originals, perform the color correction of the images using image processing applications:

-Checking the range of tones.

-Adjusting the light and shadow settings.

-Adjusting the tone media.

-Removing color dominant.

-Balance the colors.

-Focusing the images as they require it.

CE5.5 In a practical scenario of retouching images from the technical specifications and the digital originals provided, perform the retouching of the images using image processing applications:

-Removing the impurities of the scanning process.

-Replaying the damaged parts of the images.

-Removing the items indicated in the technical specifications.

-Alarming or replacing funds.

C6: Perform image mounts using computer applications by getting soft and imperceptible merges.

CE6.1 Describe the color configuration process for photomontage applications.

CE6.2 Detailed digital imaging techniques.

CE6.3 In a practical scenario of photomontage of images from images given characterized by their balance of color, harmony and naturalness and according to previous indications and sketches provided, perform the assembly of the same taking into account the following operations:

-Select and prepare images by calculating the dimensions, resolutions, and frames required for photomontage.

-Adjust the color profiles and modes of the selected images to the given color flow.

-Perform the necessary retouches on the chosen images, considering the final assembly.

-Make masks and cuts on the selected images, taking into account the final assembly.

-Mounting the images according to the previous indications and sketches provided.

-Perform the light and shadow adjustment required to obtain an imperceptible merge.

-Adjust the color of images to achieve uniform photomontage chromaticity.

-Archive it in the format most appropriate to the job features.

CE6.4 From a sketch, perform the overlay/merge of two images, following an order in the process:

-Perform the required frames to fit the sketch.

-Adjust the size and resolution of the images, adapting them to the final mount.

-Rate the optimal layout of the images to achieve a soft and imperceptible melt.

-Generate the required masks to merge the images.

-Merge the images using the appropriate tools to hide the photomontage.

-Match the lights and shadows of the images.

-Adjust the color of the images in the mount.

C7: Perform and modify vector graphics using computer applications, adapting them to the final product and the production process.

CE7.1 Describe the characteristics of vector graphics.

CE7.2 Define the features and limitations of file formats for vector graphics.

CE7.3 Perform vector graphics using vector drawing applications, based on provided sketches.

CE7.4 Play vector graphics using vector drawing applications, starting with bitmap originals.

CE7.5 Modify vector graphics by optimizing them for playback based on the technical specifications of properly characterized graphical projects.

CE7.6 Rate the adequacy of vector graphics, checking that the color definition is adapted to the color specifications defined in the technical specifications provided.

CE7.7 Value vector graphics functionality, checking the existence and accuracy of all component elements, following the technical specifications and sketches provided.

CE7.8 Store vector drawings in the appropriate file format for a defined production flow.

C8: Develop intermediate and final images of the images, using the appropriate output devices and verifying their quality and accuracy.

CE8.1 Describe the fundamentals of color and its perception and limitations with respect to physical reproduction devices.

CE8.2 Recognize the quality recommendations of national and international organizations regarding color reproduction in the production process.

CE8.3 Identify the calibration process for test devices.

CE8.4 Detailed the elements and instruments required for the quality control of the tests.

CE8.5 Calibrate test-generating devices so that stability is achieved in the response of the test and that ensures the repeatability of the results obtained for each configuration.

CE8.6 Perform quality control over the test device by properly employing the wedges (patterns) and the required measuring instrument (densitometer or spectrophotometer).

CE8.7 In a scenario of preparing intermediate tests from given instructions:

-Interpret production orders by identifying the final print process and its characteristics.

-Perform the tests, applying the appropriate guidelines to get the most faithful emulations possible to the final playback conditions.

-Perform tests, using the optimal testing device based on the type, quality, and objective of the test specified in the given production order.

-Coding the digital files with the obtained tests, valuing their agreement and accuracy.

-Rate the tests by checking by means of the recording elements and the necessary measuring instruments (densitometer or spectrophotometer) that lack anomalies and which comply with the minimum quality guidelines established for the device.

-Check the characteristics and quality of the raw materials used, valuing their use according to the type of test to be obtained.

Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real workbench:

C1 with respect to CE1.3; C2 with respect to CE2.1 and CE2.5; C3 with respect to CE3.4, CE3.5 and CE3.6; C4 with respect to CE4.6 and CE4.7; C5 with respect to CE5.2, CE5.4 and CE5.5; C6 with respect to CE6.3 and CE6.4; C7 with respect to CE7.5 and CE7.6; C8 with respect to CE8.5, CE8.6, CE8.7.

Other capabilities:

Comply with the correct production rules.

Demonstrate some autonomy in solving small contingencies related to their activity.

Prove a good professional.

Finish the job within the set deadlines.

Participate and actively collaborate on the work team.

Act quickly in problematic situations and not just wait.

Contents:

1. Color reproduction

The human visual system. Phenomena of color perception.

Interpretation of color.

Chromatic spaces and color models.

Color sorting systems: letters and color libraries.

Color reproduction techniques: linearature, angulation, point percentages, plot point formation, hatch techniques.

2. Color management maintenance procedures

Color temperature.

Color Management Systems. Operation and components.

Administration of color in the operating system and in the various applications.

Workflows for color management.

Calibration and profile generation.

Quality measurements of chromatic values in color management procedures.

Quality measurement and control instruments: densitometres, colorimeters and spectrophotometers.

Recommendations for color specification and management. Applicable quality regulations.

3. Preparing originals

Types of originals and features.

Image libraries.

Technical evaluation of the image.

Image marking techniques.

Digital file settings.

4. Scanning images

Image capture principles (photomultiplier, CMOS, CCD).

Types of scanners and operation.

Image capture features: threshold, optical density, dynamic range, color depth, interpolation.

Resolution. Concept, needs, calculation and application.

Principles, features, and handling of scanning applications.

Configuring color management in scanning applications.

Image correction and adjustment techniques in capture and scanning.

The quality of the image: depth of color, white balance, gamma of color, contrast in lights, shadows and midtones.

5. Digital image processing

Features of the digital image. Resolution and interpolation limitations.

Contrast settings, gray balance, color balance, brightness, saturation.

Filters: destructed, focus/blur.

Retouches, degraded, melted, and caled.

Image File Formats. Features and application. Compression principles and algorithms.

Principles, features, and management of digital image processing applications.

Configuring color management in digital image processing applications.

Selection and masking techniques.

Color correction techniques and tools.

Photo retouching methods and tools.

Image digital mount techniques.

6. Vector graphics

Characteristics of vector charts.

Bezier Curves. Features and behavior.

Procedures for vector drawing.

Principles, features, and management of vector drawing applications.

Configuring color management in vector drawing applications.

Vector file formats. Features and application.

7. Testing in preprint

Test Types: Position, Correction, Color, Imposition.

Test systems. Types and features.

Calibration and profiling of test systems.

Test Quality Control in Preprint: Control Elements. Control strips and patches, record elements, scales.

Densitometric and colorimetric measurements.

Rules and recommendations for getting tests. Applicable quality regulations.

Print systems.

Trapper features: linearature, plot angles, plot point formation, and percent.

Trapper techniques: conventional, irrational, stochastic and hybrid.

Training context parameters:

Spaces and installations:

The spaces and facilities will provide a response, in the form of a classroom, a workshop, a workshop of practices, a laboratory or a singular space, to the training needs, according to the Professional Context established in the Unit Partner competence, taking into account the applicable regulations of the production sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.

Professional or former trainer profile:

1.-Domain of knowledge and techniques related to the digitisation and realization of image processing by means of computer applications, which will be accredited by one of the following two forms:

-Level 1 academic training (Spanish Framework of Qualifications for Higher Education) or other higher level education related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.

2.-Accredited pedagogical competence according to what the competent administrations establish.

TRAINING MODULE 3: TREATMENT OF TEXTS FOR LAYOUT

Level: 2

Code: MF0929_2

Associated with UC: Digitalize and Treat Text by Computer Applications

Duration: 90 hours

Assessment capabilities and criteria:

C1: Operate with specific computer applications and applications in the process of obtaining, processing and correcting texts.

CE1.1 Describe the most significant equipment used in the treatment of texts.

CE1.2 Identify the most commonly used text processing applications.

CE1.3 Sequencing the different phases of the text processing processes: preparation of the original, composition, compaging and correction, describing the tasks to be performed on each one.

CE1.4 Describe the process to be performed based on the original type: typed text or text in digital format.

CE1.5 In a practical scenario of operations with text processing equipment from given instructions:

-Operate with the procurement and treatment teams of texts with competence, skill and speed.

-Handle the computing applications of obtaining and treating texts with sufficiency and agility.

-Operate with the keyboard quickly, reached the speed of 200 clicks per minute maintained.

C2: Digitalize and type texts, using computers and computer applications.

CE2.1 Describe the features and operation of text recognition and character optical reading applications.

CE2.2 Select the appropriate process for obtaining the text, valuing the quality of different originals provided.

CE2.3 In a practical scenario of digitizing texts from an original and given specifications:

-Choose the text scanning program.

-Perform scanning by following the technical specifications.

-Purge text, based on spelling rules.

-Store text files in the appropriate format according to the needs of the layout application.

CE2.4 From a particular original:

-Choose the appropriate text treatment program to type the text.

-Type the text, using the keyboard with dexterity and speed.

-Debug the text, taking into account the spelling rules and established indications.

-Store text files in the appropriate format according to the needs of the layout application.

C3: Treating texts using computers and computer applications, and optimizing them for layout.

CE3.1 Define the text processing process required based on the process of layout.

CE3.2 Identify the different file formats to import/export text, valuing the degree of compatibility and composition capabilities.

CE3.3 Apply spelling and composition rules in different texts.

CE3.4 Recognize the signs of correction, explaining your transcript.

CE3.5 Identify the regulations applicable to the correction of texts.

CE3.6 Create or import typographical styles by following the technical guidelines and the model.

CE3.7 Format the text by applying typographical styles by following the instructions provided.

C4: Correct simple spelling errors in printed or on-screen texts, applying the composition rules and the conventional signs.

CE4.1 Recognize the ortho-typo correction rules and the signs and calls used.

CE4.2 From printed and corrected text tests interpret the corrections indicated by the corrector.

CE4.3 From printed and corrected text tests interpret the corrections indicated by the corrector.

CE4.4 In a practical scenario of applying text corrections from the original given:

-Detect on screen defects and anomalies marked in text: misspellings, repetitions, mixing and transposition of characters, carelessness of composition rules.

-Apply appropriate corrective measures, depending on the indications and the established aesthetic criteria.

-Correct the texts using the appropriate computer applications.

-Check the correct spelling composition of the corrected texts.

Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real workbench:

C1 with respect to CE1.5; C2 with respect to CE2.3 and CE2.4; C4 with respect to CE4.4.

Other capabilities:

Comply with the correct production rules.

Demonstrate some autonomy in solving small contingencies related to their activity.

Prove a good professional.

Finish the job within the set deadlines.

Participate and actively collaborate on the work team.

Act quickly in problematic situations and not just wait.

Contents:

1. Text scanning and processing equipment and applications

Text scanning equipment. Types and features.

Character-optical read applications. Features and operation.

Text processing applications. Features and operation.

Keyboard Operational.

2. Typography

Anatomy of type. Parts and terminology.

Typology of the letter: strings, varieties, or classes.

Types classifications.

Digital typography: types and features.

Tippometry. Measurement systems of the type.

Typographical Aesthetics.

3. Composition rules

Structuring the graphic message.

Tonal value of the composition.

Legability and communication.

Graphisms: letters or characters, figures, and other signs.

Contragrafiscus or blanks. Classes: interlesuit, white between words, interline, white between columns, margins.

Text layout: alignment, justification, columns, paragraph type, arracadas.

4. Correcting text in preprint processes

Spelling correction. Phases of the correction.

Symbology. Grammatical rules.

Signs of correction.

Quality regulations applicable to signs of correction.

Training context parameters:

Spaces and installations:

The spaces and facilities will provide a response, in the form of a classroom, a workshop, a workshop of practices, a laboratory or a singular space, to the training needs, according to the Professional Context established in the Unit Partner competence, taking into account the applicable regulations of the production sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.

Professional or former trainer profile:

1.-Domain of knowledge and techniques related to the digitisation and processing of texts by means of computer applications, which will be accredited by one of the following two forms:

-Level 1 academic training (Spanish Framework of Qualifications for Higher Education) or other higher level education related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.

2.-Accredited pedagogical competence according to what the competent administrations establish.

TRAINING MODULE 4: SCHEMING AND PAGING OF GRAPHIC PRODUCTS

Level: 2

Code: MF0930_2

Associated with UC: Perform the layout and/or paging of graphic products

Duration: 180 hours

Assessment capabilities and criteria:

C1: Operate with specific computer applications and applications in the process and layout processes.

CE1.1 Describe the most significant equipment used in the layout and/or compaging.

CE1.2 Identify the most used layout applications.

CE1.3 Sequence the different phases of the process of layout: preparation of the original, composition, layout, compaging and correction, describing the tasks to be performed in each one.

CE1.4 Describe the layout process to be performed based on the final product to be obtained in supposed projects.

CE1.5 In a practical scenario of operations with scheming programs based on given instructions,

-Operate with equipment programs with competence and skill.

-Handle the computing applications of skill and skill.

-Operate with the keyboard quickly and skilfully.

C2: Perform the master pages of digital models using computer applications, from the model model.

CE2.1 Describe the process of configuring the color of the layout applications.

CE2.2 Describe the diagramming techniques and grid systems for the elaboration of the master pages.

CE2.3 Select the most suitable layout application for different scenarios of master page processing.

CE2.4 Configure layout applications to properly manage profiles and digital color flow for different graphical environments.

CE2.5 Make master pages for type pages and differential pages by applying aesthetic and readability criteria.

CE2.6 Distribute blanks and stains in a balanced way, maintaining the tonal value of the composition.

CE2.7 In a practical scenario of making a master page from a given model and model instructions:

-Adjust the master pages of the models prior to the needs of the subsequent production process: cutting, folding, binding and others.

-Generate the styles for fonts by applying the typographical and tippometric criteria set out in the mockup and the technical specifications provided.

-To incorporate into the master pages the boxes or frames of text and image common to all the product, applying the criteria set out in the model model and taking into account the particularities of the same and its contents.

-Incorporate into the master pages of the previous models the headers, footers, foliation, fillets, funds, and other items common to the entire document.

CE2.8 In a scenario of testing a machined graphic product, based on instructions and a model model given:

-Rate the model with aesthetic and readability criteria.

-Check for the existence and accuracy of typographical styles.

-Check that the boxes or frames of text and image comply with the models of the model model.

-Check that the headers, footers, foliation, and other elements meet the prompts.

C3: Perform the layout and compaging of graphic products from and model models.

CE3.1 Identify the different file formats for importing/exporting text and images, valuing the degree of compatibility.

CE3.2 Recognize the terminology used in layout and compaging.

CE3.3 Identify the files needed to perform the layout/compaging of a type graphic product.

CE3.4 In a scenario of a graphical product layout based on a given instructions:

-Perform text dump on previously defined mockups, applying typographical stylesheets, composition rules, and considering the indications of technical specifications.

-Check the compatibility of image formats to include in the layout.

-To frame and trim images for integration on the page.

-Integrate images and illustrations in the product layout, with the dimensions and the frame precise and respecting the established color flow, according to the model model.

-Compaginate the various pages that compose the graphic product, preserving the graphical architecture of the page.

-Contrast even and odd pages, facing them to value the aesthetics of the product.

CE3.5 In a practical scenario of adjusting a layout from a given printed test:

-Correct the distribution and structuring of the model product, following the indications given in the printed tests.

-Correct the texts correctly interpreting the correction signs reflected in the tests, following the composition and spelling rules.

-Store the machined computer files in accordance with the established storage protocol rules.

C4: Get tests following quality control and production process standards.

CE4.1 Identify the devices used to obtain model testing.

CE4.2 Describe the layout elements to be checked for testing: blood, loins, heaps, folds, and others.

CE4.3 In a practical scenario of obtaining test for layout based on given instructions:

-Check the calibration of test-generating devices.

-Perform tests according to specified technical specifications.

-Coding the digital files with the obtained tests, valuing their agreement and accuracy.

-Check that the tests lack failures and meet the minimum quality guidelines set for the device.

-Check that the tests reflect all of the layout elements: blood, loins, heaps, folds, and others.

C5: Adapt digital graphics products to the media and support set in the technical specifications provided.

CE5.1 Check finished layout files by verifying the existence and accuracy of all graphic elements (typographies, images and illustrations) used in it, in previously defined graphical projects.

CE5.2 Check the images and illustrations of properly specified graphics, verifying the color mode and resolution depending on the production process and the final support.

CE5.3 Process files from the job using the appropriate computer applications, generating the final files according to the established production process: electronic book, web, multimedia, printer forms, digital taxation and other.

CE5.4 Rate end files, checking the adequacy of features and resolutions based on the production and final support process set on properly characterized production orders.

CE5.5 Check the functionality of end files in the final broadcast media: Web server, tablets, and others.

CE5.6 Rate the optimization of the generated graphical resources to the chosen distribution media.

Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real workbench:

C1 with respect to CE1.5; C2 with respect to CE2.7 and CE2.8; C3 with respect to CE3.4 and CE3.5; C4 with respect to CE4.3.

Other capabilities:

Comply with the correct production rules.

Demonstrate some autonomy in solving small contingencies related to their activity.

Prove a good professional.

Finish the job within the set deadlines.

Participate and actively collaborate on the work team.

Interpret and execute work instructions.

Recognize the organization's productive process.

Contents:

1. Computer equipment and applications for layout

Computing equipment.

Computing applications. Features and operation.

Text and image integration computing applications.

Color management in the layout programs.

Type-management computing applications.

2. Basic principles of layout

Interpretation of the model model.

Standards in making guidelines.

Performing and marking techniques.

Diagramming techniques: distribution of spaces and proportions.

Grid Systems.

Layout Styles.

Architecture and aesthetics of the page.

The graphic message, structuring, and readability.

Typography and Tippometry.

Graffiti and counter-cracking. Tonal value of the composition.

Quality regulations applicable to the composition.

Compaging rules.

3. Machining techniques

Concepts and techniques of electronic layout and compaging.

Creating typographical styles.

Creating previous models (master pages).

Work with text flows.

Importing images and illustrations.

File Formats. Features and application.

4. Layout of graphic elements in preprint

Configuring color management in preprint layout applications.

Compaging of illustrations and images.

Configuring the word partition.

Configuring the control of widowed and orphaned lines.

Typology of printed forms: editorial, editorial and commercial print.

The book: external and internal parts.

Preparing the layout for Web, tablet, and other dissemination.

Training context parameters:

Spaces and installations:

The spaces and facilities will provide a response, in the form of a classroom, a workshop, a workshop of practices, a laboratory or a singular space, to the training needs, according to the Professional Context established in the Unit Partner competence, taking into account the applicable regulations of the production sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.

Professional or former trainer profile:

1.-Domain of knowledge and techniques related to the realization of the layout and/or compaging of graphic products, which will be accredited by one of the following two forms:

-Level 1 academic training (Spanish Framework of Qualifications for Higher Education) or other higher level education related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.

2.-Accredited pedagogical competence according to what the competent administrations establish.

ANNEX XII

Professional qualification: Developing multimedia publishing products

Professional Family: Graphic Arts

Level: 3

Code: ARG293_3

General Competition

Develop projects for the realization of multimedia publishing products, determining the aspects of functionality, interaction and usability, defining their architecture, making the design of the graphic and multimedia elements necessary to obtain and publish the product, managing and controlling the quality of the multimedia publishing product.

Competition Units

UC0935_3: Determine the multimedia publishing project specifications

UC0936_3: Design the multimedia publishing product

UC0937_3: Generate and publish multimedia publishing products

UC0938_3: Manage and control the quality of the multimedia publishing product

Professional Environment

Professional Scope

Develops its professional activity in the digital publishing department of multimedia publishing companies of editorial products; books, magazines, web pages, periodic press, education and training companies, media communication, in entities of a small, medium and large size, public or private, regardless of their legal form. You can work for your own or others, depending on your case, functionally or hierarchically of a superior. You may have staff in your position at times, for seasons or in a stable way. The principles of universal accessibility are applied in the development of professional activity in accordance with the applicable regulations.

Productive Sectors

It is located in the productive publishing sector, graphic industries and advertising that publish in web environment editorial and/or graphic products, and in any other sector that has some of these activities.

Relevant occupations and jobs

The terms of the following relationship of occupations and jobs are used with a generic and omnicomprensivo character of women and men.

Multimedia Design Technicians

Multimedia Editorial Project Technicians

Multimedia Production Technicians

Multimedia Publishing Product Designers

Consultant to Media Consultant

Multimedia Project Machines

Associated Training (570 hours)

Training Modules

MF0935_3: Multimedia Publishing Product Projects (120 hours)

MF0936_3: Multimedia publishing product design (150 hours)

MF0937_3: Implementation and publishing of multimedia publishing products (210 hours)

MF0938_3: Managing the quality of multimedia publishing products (90 hours)

COMPETITION UNIT 1: DETERMINE THE MULTIMEDIA PUBLISHING PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS

Level: 3

Code: UC0935_3

Professional Realizations and Realization Criteria:

RP 1: Develop the specifications document to describe the features of the multimedia publishing product, in accordance with the requirements set by the company and/or customer descriptions in the project.

CR 1.1 The overall aspect and functional aspects of the product are described from the specifications or descriptions received, identifying the particular digital publishing product: electronic book, publication on Internet and others.

CR 1.2 The operating platform, including the operating system and product development platform are determined from the indications given in the order.

CR 1.3 The technology of the pages and screens, the type of support, static or dynamic, and the aspects relating to the hosting of the pages, in the case of multimedia products destined for the Internet, are concretized in the document of specifications.

CR 1.4 The graphical aspects are described in the document, differentiating all of its elements, based on the style book and working out if it does not exist.

CR 1.5 The functionalities, content tree, and navigation are described in the multimedia product specification document according to the explanations or descriptions received.

CR 1.6 The processing of translations and the use of different languages, if any, are detailed in the document of specifications of the multimedia product according to the specifications of the order.

CR 1.7 Accessibility, usability conventions, and other standardization: applicable quality standards and others, are determined in the multimedia product specification document in accordance with standards and standards established by the publishing company.

CR 1.8 The multimedia elements that are part of the editorial product are defined in the specification document by establishing the origin and conditions of use specified by the agencies of image banks and multimedia by pointing, where there is, legal or technical limitations.

RP 2: Adapt, in collaboration with the design manager, the company-style book to the integration needs of the graphical and multimedia elements in the commissioned product.

CR 2.1 The graphical elements of the order: fonts, color palettes and other specifications that are deducted from the customer order are structurally collected in the adaptation of the style book.

CR 2.2 Multimedia design elements and other functional elements: color palettes, templates, icon collections, symbols and buttons, logos, dynamic elements, and tables and lists of interactivity codes detail the production regulations governing product development according to the company's rules.

CR 2.3 The usual company conventions and rules on texts, images, drawings, sounds, locutions, videos and other elements apply in the adaptation of the style book following the marked editorial line.

CR 2.4 The notes on the navigation dynamics are collected in the style document according to the specifications.

CR 2.5 The adaptation of the rules of style are developed to be sufficiently flexible and allow the simple and reasonable integration of possible extensions or modifications of the multimedia editorial product.

CR 2.6 The graphic elements are collected in a structured way in the style book adaptation.

RP 3: Specify the quality standards that the final multimedia publishing product must meet to ensure its functionality, accessibility and usability according to the initial specifications and its style book.

CR 3.1 The requirements of the multimedia publishing product are identified, considering them in the definition of quality standards and in the criteria of presentation, functionality and usability.

CR 3.2 The standards for on-screen presentation are selected according to the specifications of the order and the style book.

CR 3.3 The functionality standards are determined by considering the specifications of the order and the expected dynamic behavior.

CR 3.4 The usability standards for the digital product are specified including ergonomics, accessibility and internationalisation and properly documenting them, taking into account the applicable regulations of prevention of occupational and environmental risks.

RP 4: Establish the distribution of human and technological resources in collaboration with the editing team, for the realization of the multimedia publishing product, taking into account established quality standards and proposing improvements.

CR 4.1 Human resource distribution planning is valued by measuring efficiency parameters with respect to the intended product by agreeing with the graphic designer and the programming officer.

CR 4.2 The distribution of technological resources is estimated in collaboration with the programming officer, in accordance with the quality standards set out in the order of the product.

CR 4.3 The distribution and allocation of human resources is valued by a clear and concrete proposal that improves the allocation in the specification document.

CR 4.4 The distribution proposal is made by optimising technological resources and improving the process, taking into account the applicable regulations on the prevention of occupational and environmental risks.

CR 4.5 The final assessment of the distribution of human and technological resources is dealt with by the relevant person, in accordance with the final organization of the information received.

RP 5: Determine, in collaboration with the editing team, the feasibility of the project, estimating the costs of the multimedia publishing product and taking into account established quality standards.

CR 5.1 The costs and times that are derived from customer specifications are identified by valuing, along with the editing team, their impact on the total project cost.

CR 5.2 Image bank information and the costs of multimedia elements are estimated, valuing their viability.

CR 5.3 The intervention of national or international agents in the development of the project is valued, estimating the cost in the feasibility study.

CR 5.4 The assessments of the resources required to perform the product are detailed in a clear and comprehensive manner in the preparation of the general budget.

CR 5.5 The economic feasibility study is included in the project documentation for the development of the multimedia publishing product.

Professional Context:

Production media:

Computer and mobile devices with different configurations and operating systems. Information shared storage devices. Internet connection. Software: Treatment of texts. Project planning and monitoring software. Computer software for budgets Quality control software.

Products and results:

Specifications document drawn up. Adapted style book. Feasibility study carried out. Specifications for quality control functionality, accessibility and usability, specified. Organization of human and technological resources. Economic estimation of the multimedia publishing product.

Information used or generated:

Customer-contributed information. Applicable quality standards. Technical sheets. Study of offers. Tariffs. Image bank catalogues and multimedia elements. Directory of national and international rights management agencies. Specifications for quality control. Models. Style book. Corporate identity manual. Company quality manual or procedure manual. Technical documentation. Quality control software. Applicable rules for the prevention of occupational and environmental risks.

COMPETITION UNIT 2: DESIGN THE MULTIMEDIA PUBLISHING PRODUCT

Level: 3

Code: UC0936_3

Professional Realizations and Realization Criteria:

RP 1: Establish the most appropriate architecture to develop the multimedia publishing product, according to the specifications, proposing alternatives if necessary.

CR 1.1 The assessments of the software, hardware and network architectures required for the development of the multimedia publishing product are defined, justifying their suitability according to the given specifications.

CR 1.2 Decisions on the architecture chosen for product development are reasoned and justified in a reference document.

CR 1.3 Product requirements regarding the information architecture are analyzed, collecting them in writing in a manner consistent with the specifications.

CR 1.4 The alternatives proposed in the reference document for product development are reviewed by checking that they are viable, satisfactorily meet the specifications of the order and clearly show the differences to be able to select one of them.

RP 2: Create and select graphic elements to incorporate into the multimedia publishing product, taking into account the principles of design theory.

CR 2.1 The graphic elements of the multimedia publishing product are selected considering the product typology-web page, electronic book, interactive digital resource, application for mobile devices, consoles and others-and the principles of graphic design theory-proportion, balance, reference, symmetry, harmony, tension and rhythm-.

CR 2.2 The texts that are integrated in the screens are selected considering: fonts or families typographic, styles, proportions, bodies, remits, grids, legibility, kern, track, alignment, interlinings, clusters, paragraphs, orphans, widows and others.

CR 2.3 The creative development of graphic elements is carried out by applying the requirements of visual perception and readability-dimensions, body of texts, color contrasts, reading habits, and others.

CR 2.4 The creative development of graphic elements is in line with the requirements of the multimedia product, through the application of the principles of psychological association by proximity, similarity, continuity and symmetry. material and cultural, and others.

CR 2.5 Multimedia products for mobile devices are developed by applying the 'liquid' format characteristics of their screens for the choice of text bodies, fonts and graphic elements.

CR 2.6 The graphic elements created are adjusted or met with the specifications of the multimedia publishing project's order.

RP 3: Design the sketches of the multimedia publishing product, to display the product structure using screens from the specifications document and/or your style book.

CR 3.1 Previous navigation sketches of the multimedia publishing product are determined by considering the specifications document and/or style book.

CR 3.2 Previous navigation sketches are done by designing the different screens that make up the multimedia publishing product, using the appropriate production means of production.

CR 3.3 The recommendations of the style book and specifications are considered in the elaboration of the previous sketches of presentation of the information, applying the appropriate quality standards.

CR 3.4 The requirements of artistic character, communication and corporate identity apply in the sketches of the editorial product, solving satisfactorily the problems raised in the order of the product.

CR 3.5 The created or pre-existing graphical elements are integrated into the screens of the sketches, adjusting to the technical specifications set.

CR 3.6 The navigation, interaction, and functionality elements are determined in the sketch using undetailed traits from the technical specifications.

CR 3.7 Alternative sketches, duly differentiated from each other, are presented to the client, enabling the selection and possible acceptance of any of the proposals by the client.

CR 3.8 Design work is carried out in compliance with applicable labour and environmental risk prevention regulations.

RP 4: Determine the multimedia elements needed to obtain the editorial product, taking into account the sketches elaborated and adjusting to the established specifications.

CR 4.1 The multimedia elements required for the editorial product are identified from the previous sketches considering the determination of the multimedia elements and the specifications of the order.

CR 4.2 The texts, photographs, drawings, sounds, locutions, videos, animations among others, are determined from the specifications and the specific type of digital publishing product in question: electronic book or publication on the Internet.

CR 4.3 The necessary multimedia elements are selected from digital files and databases by keeping them available for use and taking into account the legal aspects of their use.

CR 4.4 Multimedia elements that are not available are included in an alternative proposal contemplating their replacement or their order.

Professional Context:

Production media:

Computer equipment with different configurations and operating systems. Information shared storage devices. Internet connection. Access to data banks. Software: Treatment of texts, images and layout. Graphical authoring software. Project planning and monitoring software. Production software. Quality control software.

Products and results:

Software and hardware architectures established for product development. Graphic elements designed and selected for the multimedia product. Sketches of the multimedia publishing product made. Selected multimedia elements. Technical documentation sheets for the rights of use of the elements.

Information used or generated:

Digital files for multimedia objects. Specifications document. Style book. Specifications for quality control. Information provided by the customer. Applicable quality standards. Specifications for the reservation of rights and fees for the use of multimedia and functional elements. Specifications for quality control. Corporate identity manual. Company quality manual or procedure manual. Technical documentation. Applicable rules for the prevention of occupational and environmental risks.

COMPETITION UNIT 3: GENERATE AND PUBLISH MULTIMEDIA PUBLISHING PRODUCTS

Level: 3

Code: UC0937_3

Professional Realizations and Realization Criteria:

RP 1: Develop prototypes, in collaboration with the editing team, to materialize the multimedia publishing project using brand, script and presentation languages, or author tools that are suitable for with specifications.

CR 1.1 The development phases of the prototype are set according to the product typology, the delivery time, according to the design departments and the computer developers.

CR 1.2 The development of the prototype is initiated by considering the screens of screens, interactions and functionality gathered in the specification and in the style book.

CR 1.3 The required mounting instruments are selected according to the instructions of the order and taking into account the typology of the product.

CR 1.4 The set of optimized multimedia elements are assembled in the prototype, simulating the functionality in different devices correctly.

CR 1.5 The spatial and temporal integration of the multimedia elements is performed according to the specifications and with the expected dynamic behavior.

CR 1.6 The type of multimedia product: web pages, electronic book, interactive digital resource, application for mobile devices, consoles and the characteristics thereof, is determined, considering their specificities in the Development of the prototype for proper implementation according to the technical specifications.

CR 1.7 The programming solutions developed for the elaboration of the prototype conform to the specifications of the order and the characteristics of the devices of reading and the requirements of interaction using the required tools.

CR 1.8 The development of the prototypes is done in collaboration with the editing team.

RP 2: Implement, in collaboration with the editing team, the set of links, parameterizations and control elements necessary to achieve the functionality provided in the multimedia product, taking into account the indications of the specification document on the functional and interaction aspects.

CR 2.1 The development phases of the product functionality are established according to the product typology, the delivery time and according to the graphic designer and the programming officer.

CR 2.2 Navigation, interaction and functional aspects are defined by concreting them from the sketches of the screens and the modifications established in the prototype development.

CR 2.3 The integration of navigation, interaction and functional elements within the graphical aspect of the screens is performed in accordance with the overall aesthetics of the screen and keeping the harmony with the rest of the screen. elements.

CR 2.4 The links and control elements are implemented by adjusting to the specified functionality, interaction, and navigation.

CR 2.5 The parameterization of interactive elements, aids, exception treatment, and error messages are checked by verifying that they are consistent with the specified navigation.

CR 2.6 The expected functionality of the screens is checked with the designed schemas.

CR 2.7 The implementation is done in collaboration with the editing team.

RP 3: Publish the final multimedia product by adapting it to the defined distribution platform: web pages, e-book, interactive digital resource, mobile app, consoles and others, according to the required functionality, usability, and accessibility specifications.

CR 3.1 The publication phases of the final multimedia product are set according to the product typology, the delivery time and according to the editing departments.

CR 3.2 The multimedia product is mounted using the generated screens and elements.

CR 3.3 The multimedia product is implemented according to the specifications using the appropriate computer applications, on the specified distribution platforms, being delivered for evaluation to the editing department.

CR 3.4 The corrections derived from the expected checks are incorporated into the product constituting the final multimedia publishing product.

CR 3.5 The final multimedia product is published on the distribution platforms or defined formats by performing the relevant backups.

CR 3.6 Digital product updates, such as certain online journal sections, digital publication supplements, product catalogues and others, are performed using the most popular publishing tools. appropriate, achieving the final product indicated in the specifications.

CR 3.7 The final multimedia product is checked, valuing that it conforms to the standards designated by the customer in the order and also meets the conventions and normalizations of the sector to which it is addressed: accessibility for disabled WAI-W3C, usability, among others.

CR 3.8 Publication works are performed in compliance with applicable labour and environmental risk prevention regulations.

Professional Context:

Production media:

Computer equipment with different configurations and operating systems. Information shared storage devices. Internet connection. Access to data banks. Software: Tools for the generation of multimedia products. Web document authoring tools. Specific software utilities and software. Project planning and monitoring software. Quality control software. Applicable rules for the database.

Products and results:

Prototypes of developed multimedia publishing products. Implementation of links, parameterizations, and control elements performed. Published final multimedia product: Electronic book. Interactive digital resource and others. Web pages. Encyclopedias and dictionaries on interactive support and on the Internet and others. Publication of the multimedia publishing product.

Information used or generated:

Digital files for multimedia objects. Digital sketches. Information provided by the customer. Applicable quality standards. Technical sheets. Corporate identity manual. Company quality manual or procedure manual. Applicable rules for the prevention of occupational and environmental risks. Applicable rules for the database.

COMPETITION UNIT 4: MANAGE AND CONTROL THE QUALITY OF THE MULTIMEDIA PUBLISHING PRODUCT

Level: 3

Code: UC0938_3

Professional Realizations and Realization Criteria:

RP 1: Get operational and 'usability' tests on the prototype of the multimedia publishing product, to ensure that you fit the specifications by performing a quality control document.

CR 1.1 The tests to be performed are determined by assessing the characteristics of the prototype considering its suitability for the analysis of the different functional, interactive and design aspects present in the project.

CR 1.2 The criteria for the operation and usability of the prototypes are found to correspond to those foreseen in the document of specifications of the multimedia product and the functional tests to be carried out.

CR 1.3 The evaluation and internal checking of the prototypes are carried out in accordance with the planning set out in the specification document: technical specifications of operation and quality standards applicable.

CR 1.4 The functional and usability aspects are subject to the tests set out in the quality control protocol by collecting in a quality control document whether or not they have passed the tests and specifying, where appropriate, localized failures.

CR 1.5 Prototypes that have not passed the tests are sent to the production area, indicating the failures for their adjustment according to the company quality manual.

RP 2: Evaluate the final multimedia publishing product and its adequacy to the defined distribution platform, Web pages, electronic book, interactive digital resource, application for mobile devices, consoles and others from of the prototype.

CR 2.1 Testing for final multimedia editorial product evaluation is done by selecting those required for compatibility with browsers, operating systems, and others.

CR 2.2 The incorporation of the corrections into the prototype and its functionality are checked according to the quality assurance system of the company.

CR 2.3 The assessment of the appearance and functioning of the published multimedia product is made following clear and measurable criteria according to the indicators defined in the specifications.

CR 2.4 The evaluation of the user experience on the multimedia product is done by applying the thought and the mechanics of the playability (gamification).

CR 2.5 The corrections in the prototype and its functionality are checked by applying the quality assurance system of the company.

CR 2.6 The assessment document is made by incorporating the description of all the problems encountered in the final product publication into the defined distribution platform.

RP 3: Develop the documentation necessary to ensure the correct use of the final product, taking into account the applications and formats used in the assembly, as well as the technical and maintenance manuals.

CR 3.1 The formats of the technical documentation, the technical and maintenance manuals, and the user, and the distribution of human and material resources are established considering the typology of the product, the delivery time, and according to the graphic designer and the programming officer.

CR 3.2 The technical characteristics, the format of the elements created and used and the legal conditions of use are collected in the technical documentation of the product of internal use, thus facilitating their manageability, describing them clearly and concretely.

CR 3.3 New applications and architectures developed especially for the product are incorporated into the product's technical documentation, indicating hardware, software and network architectures, and platforms compatible.

CR 3.4 The different aspects of the project are included in the technical and maintenance manuals, describing them according to the size of the project and with the necessary amplitude or detail.

CR 3.5 The guidance and the system of user assistance are collected in a user manual, in a clear and didactic way, facilitating the learning and use of the product.

RP 4: Establish the plan to track the distribution and use of the multimedia publishing product to develop proposals for improvement and future developments.

CR 4.1 The defined strategy for obtaining distribution and usage data is established by following the company's procedures.

CR 4.2 The distribution monitoring plan is established by reflecting the relevant data: user profiles, distribution channels, temporary and spatial consumption, and complaints and problems detected, in relation to the objectives and following the procedures established by the company.

CR 4.3 The product usage tracking plan is established by reflecting the relevant data: user profiles, usage indicators of product utilities and applications, claims and improvement proposals, in relation to with the objectives of the product and following the procedures established by the company.

CR 4.4 The processing of user data is defined in a transparent manner and with respect for user privacy and respect for data protection regulations.

CR 4.5 The improvements and possible developments of the multimedia product are documented in a motivated report, clearly establishing the technical feasibility, the investment required and the estimated return.

Professional Context:

Production media:

Computer equipment with different configurations and operating systems. Laser printers. Information shared storage devices. Internet connection. Software: Treatment of texts. Project planning and tracking software.

Products and results:

Quality Check Result Document. Performance and usability tests performed. Evaluation of the multimedia publishing product. Publication document of the multimedia product. Distribution reports. Application usage assessment reports. Plan to track the distribution and use of the product made.

Information used or generated:

Quality control process report. Digital files of multimedia objects. Digital prototypes. Final multimedia product. Information provided by the customer. Applicable standards of quality. Technical sheets. Specifications for quality control. Models. Style book. Corporate identity manual. Company quality manual or procedure manual. Quality control software. Applicable rules for the prevention of occupational and environmental risks. Legal, technical and product maintenance documentation. Specifications for usability and accessibility. Assessment of the user experience. Gamification theory. Applicable rules for the database.

TRAINING MODULE 1: MULTIMEDIA PUBLISHING PRODUCT PROJECTS

Level: 3

Code: MF0935_3

Associated with UC: Determine the specifications of multimedia publishing projects

Duration: 120 hours

Assessment capabilities and criteria:

C1: Determine the characteristics of the functions and processes involved in the development of a multimedia publishing product according to the typology of the product.

CE1.1 Identify the usual multimedia publishing products, electronic book, digital newspaper, digital advertising, web pages and others, describing their main features.

CE1.2 Describe the process of developing a multimedia publishing product and list the participating agents.

CE1.3 From a series of given multimedia products:

-Perform a functional analysis of the HR involved in the process, depending on the characteristics of each product.

-Identify resource sources for each product, as well as its legal and technical usage characteristics.

-Identify the operating platform for each of them.

CE1.4 Explain what are the aspects that should be collected by the document of specifications of an editorial product such as: global aspect, operating platform, and others.

CE1.5 Explain what types of requirements should be included in an editorial product specification document: product functionality, languages, and others.

CE1.6 Identify a stable, flexible, complete and unambiguous set of editorial product requirements.

CE1.7 In a practical scenario of determining the characteristics of a multimedia publishing product, based on a given order:

-Describe each of the multimedia editorial product requirements according to their degree of compliance.

-Categorize the set of requirements for the multimedia publishing product order according to its nature.

-Identify relationships and dependencies between the requirements of the multimedia publishing product order.

-Develop product schemas that exemplify the navigation and appearance of the end product.

C2: Develop the specifications document for a multimedia publishing product by collecting the graphical, functional, and quality aspects of the product.

CE2.1 Explain what are the product type and functional aspects to be collected by the specifications document for an editorial product.

CE2.2 Explain what types of technology requirements should be included in a specifications document for an editorial product.

CE2.3 Identify a stable, flexible, complete and unambiguous set of editorial product requirements.

CE2.4 Select from a style book, the graphical aspects of a given multimedia product.

CE2.5 Describe the specifications that identify the different multimedia elements.

CE2.6 Develop product schemas that exemplify the navigation and appearance of the end product.

CE2.7 Categorize a set of requirements for a multimedia editorial product order according to its nature.

CE2.8 Describe each of the requirements of a multimedia publishing product according to its degree of compliance.

CE2.9 Identify relationships and dependencies between requirements of a given set of multimedia publishing product custom.

C3: Develop the style book of a multimedia publishing product from a multimedia publishing product custom.

CE3.1 Define what a style book is and what the scope of the book is.

CE3.2 Characterize each of the design aspects of a multimedia publishing product according to the usual conventions of the organization requesting the order.

CE3.3 Explain the main features of the multimedia elements and the functional elements.

CE3.4 Specify the navigation restrictions that should govern the behavior of a multimedia publishing product.

CE3.5 In a practical scenario of determining style rules for a multimedia publishing product from given specifications:

-Determine what design aspects govern the development of the multimedia publishing product.

-Rate the formal conventions that companies develop.

-Develop the style book that collects the product's general specifications and the obligations of the corporate identity manual.

C4: Set quality standards for a multimedia publishing product according to initial specifications.

CE4.1 Explain that it is a quality standard and which can be applied to the development of a multimedia publishing product.

CE4.2 Relate aspects that make up the quality document of a multimedia publishing product.

CE4.3 Identify the parameters that can be used to define the quality of a multimedia publishing product.

CE4.4 Compare quality parameters, in terms of usability and utility, that a multimedia publishing product must meet.

CE4.5 Set the appropriate metric for a set of usability and utility parameters according to the initial specifications.

CE4.6 In a practical scenario of defining quality standards for a multimedia publishing product, based on standard parameters:

-Identify the quality parameters that affect the product.

-Define the final product acceptance tests.

-Develop the quality document according to the quality parameters identified and the established metrics of the multimedia publishing product.

C5: Plan the different processes involved in the realization of a multimedia publishing product.

CE5.1 Identify the indicators that allow you to measure the effectiveness of a defined job plan for the creation of multimedia products.

CE5.2 Analyze different specification documents for different multimedia product creation projects with the proposed allocation of resources, valuing the assigned distribution and the specifications of defined quality.

CE5.3 In a practical resource optimization scenario for the development of a multimedia publishing product from a given project:

-Identify the technical resources needed to be able to develop the product according to initial specifications, as well as established quality standards.

-Make a proposal to optimize technological resources that will improve the process and to promote compliance with the applicable regulations on the prevention of occupational and environmental risks.

-Determine the human resources required to achieve the intended objectives for the product defined in the project.

-Describe the necessary technological resources as well as their correct distribution.

-Check that every technological resource necessary for the development of the multimedia publishing product has associated clear and correct recommendations on its use.

-Plan the duration of the project and the use of the resources identified during the execution of the project.

CE5.4 Develop the schema for a given multimedia product, drafting the specification document, and indicating the phases that should appear in that schema:

-Product design with client presentation, validation, and possible corrections.

-Mapping and defining styles.

-Creating prototypes and templates.

C6: Value the economic viability of a multimedia publishing project, valuing the graphical and functional aspects of initial specifications, as well as some quality standards.

CE6.1 Explain that it is an economic feasibility study of a multimedia product and what the parameters that define it are.

CE6.2 Identify the types of risks that may occur during the execution of the development of a multimedia publishing product and how a contingency plan for those risks should be developed.

CE6.3 Point out the consequences of the implementation of quality, health and environmental protection systems in the feasibility study.

CE6.4 Quantify the cost of resources, including multimedia elements, that have been planned as necessary for the development of a multimedia publishing product.

CE6.5 Identify possible risks that may occur during the development of a multimedia publishing product.

CE6.6 In a practical study of the feasibility of a multimedia publishing product, based on a given multimedia editorial project:

-Determine the cost of the graphic elements to be used.

-Determine the cost of the functional elements.

-Perform the feasibility study considering both costs.

Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real workbench:

C1 with respect to CE1.3 and CE1.7; C2 to CE2.6 and CE2.7; C3 to CE3.5; C4 to CE4.6; C5 to CE5.3; C6 to CE6.6.

Other capabilities:

Take Responsibility for the work you develop and the fulfillment of goals.

Participate and actively collaborate on the work team.

Adapt to new situations or contexts.

Act quickly in problematic situations and not just wait.

Habit to the organization's work rate.

Demonstrate interest in broad knowledge of the organization and its processes.

Contents:

1. Multimedia publishing projects

Type of multimedia publishing projects.

Multimedia editorial product requirements.

Phases of elaboration of a multimedia publishing project.

Multimedia products developed: web pages, DVDs, e-books, digital magazines, digital newspapers, online training courses, digital educational resources, mobile applications, widgets and others.

Adaptation of editorial products. Creation of multimedia publishing products from other existing ones.

Typologies (functional, data, usability, user, and environment) and requirements relationships.

Multimedia editorial product project requirements.

Development of schemas for multimedia publishing products.

The scheduling process.

Resources to use in multimedia product development.

Planning for the technical and human resources of a multimedia publishing product.

Computer tools for planning.

Legal regulations applicable in the multimedia framework.

2. Quality standards in multimedia publishing products

Definition and description of quality standards.

Applicable national and international quality standards.

Applicable labour and environmental risk prevention regulations.

Definition and objectives of usability.

Usability standards.

Usability principles.

Accessibility to multimedia products.

3. Resource planning in multimedia publishing projects

The scheduling process. Efficiency and effectiveness. Measurement parameters.

Technical resources to be used in the development of multimedia products (e-book, web page, interactive DVD, digital educational resource, and others).

Adequacy of technology resources; access permissions to information.

Communication systems between the teams.

Evaluation of human resources.

Computer tools for planning.

Techniques for resource planning.

Tracking and maintaining the job plan.

4. Feasibility of multimedia publishing products

Analyzing the viability of a multimedia product.

Cost/benefit ratio and opportunity for the multimedia product.

Human resource costs.

Costs of technical resources. Cost factors.

Multimedia element costs.

Estimating costs and times.

Performing budgets.

Control a static quote.

Computing tools for planning and budgeting.

5. Multimedia publishing product-style books

Style book definition: functionality and objectives.

Templates in the style books.

The graphics: color, semiotics, sizes, and others.

Bitmaps and vectors. Specifications.

Screen color work specifications.

Recommendations on multimedia elements. Visual and audio.

Dynamic elements of the multimedia product. Specifications.

Navigation and interaction. Tables and code lists.

The images. Usage recommendations.

Texts: typographies, color, sizes, and others. Conventions and rules of use.

Crafting a style book.

Design and approval of the corporate image manual.

Training context parameters:

Spaces and installations:

The spaces and facilities will provide a response, in the form of a classroom, a workshop, a workshop of practices, a laboratory or a singular space, to the training needs, according to the Professional Context established in the Unit Partner competence, taking into account the applicable regulations of the production sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.

Professional or former trainer profile:

1.-Domain of knowledge and techniques related to determining the specifications of multimedia publishing projects, which will be accredited by one of the following two forms:

-Level 2 academic training (Spanish Framework of Qualifications for Higher Education), Technical Engineering, Technical Architecture, Diplomacy or other higher level of professional field.

-Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.

2.-Accredited pedagogical competence according to what the competent administrations establish.

TRAINING MODULE 2: DESIGNING MULTIMEDIA PUBLISHING PRODUCTS

Level: 3

Code: MF0936_3

Associated with UC: Design the Multimedia Publishing Product

Duration: 150 hours

Assessment capabilities and criteria:

C1: Define the most appropriate architecture to apply in the development of multimedia publishing product from your specifications document.

CE1.1 Explain what the architecture of a multimedia publishing product is and which parts it consists of: information, network, software, and hardware.

CE1.2 Choose the most appropriate architecture of a multimedia publishing product from among various proposals according to the specifications document.

CE1.3 Determine if the configuration set in the architecture of a given multimedia publishing product is viable.

C2: Define the graphical structure of the screens of a multimedia publishing product according to a previous sketch and its specifications document.

CE2.1 Operate with graphical design tools that allows the design of the look of the multimedia publishing product.

CE2.2 Explain what are the basic concepts of graphic communication and why it is characterized.

CE2.3 Define the graphical spaces of a screen of a multimedia publishing product taking into account visual impact, graphic principles of presentation, color, legibility, aesthetics, and others.

CE2.4 Describe what a graphical element is and what features it has from a technical point of view (vector or bitmap) and perception, such as the golden rule of perception and others.

CE2.5 Describe the factors and phenomena of harmony, contrast, and others that influence the perception of a graphic element.

CE2.6 Create graphic elements and textual content, according to previous sketches, distributing them harmoniously in the spaces of a screen of a multimedia editorial product taking into account the principles of association psychological.

CE2.7 Operate with a font editing tool that allows the graphic design of the multimedia publishing product.

CE2.8 Identify different typographies and the features they have from a technical point of view: vector or bitmap, and readability: fonts or styles.

CE2.9 In a scenario of defining the graphical structure from a given sketch, the style book and the conventions established for the product:

-Apply the appropriate fonts to the multimedia publishing product according to your style book and the conventions set for it.

-Apply readability criteria on the screen image and text.

-Check that the screens that make up the product meet the product specifications, quality criteria as well as the style book and its conventions.

C3: Develop the sketches of a multimedia publishing product from your specifications document.

CE3.1 Explain which are the parts that make up the design document for a multimedia publishing product.

CE3.2 Operate with schema definition tools, using flows, to specify the structure and navigation of a multimedia publishing product.

CE3.3 Define the structure diagram of a multimedia publishing product from your specifications document.

CE3.4 In a scenario of developing sketches based on the specifications of the multimedia publishing product to be performed:

-Develop the multimedia editorial product sketch, collecting global navigation of the product, according to the specifications and making use of the screens that make it up.

-Define the structure diagram and navigation between screens using schemas from your specifications document.

-Check that the given specifications, style book recommendations, and quality standards are met, as well as the rules.

C4: Integrate multimedia elements on the screens of a multimedia publishing product according to the requirements of the process.

CE4.1 Explain which types of multimedia elements are the main features of each of these types.

CE4.2 Identify the multimedia elements needed for the development of a multimedia publishing product from your specifications document and sketches.

CE4.3 Determine what are the possible sources in which multimedia elements can be located and what their rights of use are.

CE4.4 In a scenario of integration of multimedia elements on a display, based on the specifications of the multimedia publishing product given:

-Retrieve the multimedia elements located in an object file according to the specifications of the multimedia publishing product.

-Incorporate the multimedia elements on each of the screens that make up the multimedia publishing product.

-Check that the integration of multimedia elements into the screens that make up the multimedia publishing product is in accordance with its quality standards and specifications document.

C5: Define the functional aspects of a multimedia publishing product, including interactivity, from a specification document and the screens that make it up.

CE5.1 Determine what interactivity is and what are the main features that define the interaction process.

CE5.2 Describe the interaction that a user can perform with a multimedia publishing product from their specifications document and the screens that make it up.

CE5.3 In a practical scenario of defining functional aspects in a multimedia publishing product from a specification document and previous sketches:

-Define the functionalities to be developed.

-Develop the multimedia editorial product functionality document from your specification document and a set of starting sketches.

-Include interactivity with each of the screens that make it up.

C6: Value the legal aspects about the conditions of use of multimedia elements that are incorporated into a multimedia publishing product.

CE6.1 Explain what types of legal usage rights can exist for a multimedia element.

CE6.2 Explain how certain usage rights for a media item can be obtained.

CE6.3 Document the legal rights of use of each multimedia element that is included in a multimedia publishing product type, as well as the origin of the multimedia element.

Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real workbench:

C1 with respect to CE1.3; C2 with respect to CE2.1 and CE2.9; C3 with respect to CE3.4; C4 with respect to CE4.4; C5 for CE5.3; C6 for CE6.3.

Other capabilities:

Take Responsibility for the work you develop and the fulfillment of goals.

Participate and actively collaborate on the work team.

Demonstrate interest in broad knowledge of the organization and its processes.

Adapt to organization, organizational and technological changes as well as new situations or contexts.

Demonstrate flexibility to understand changes.

Respect internal organization procedures and rules.

Contents:

1. Multimedia publishing product architectures

Architecture definition of a multimedia publishing product.

Structure of data and information to be treated.

Structure and selection of software to use.

Type and description of production and user equipment.

Classification of the product by its use, technology, and consumer environment.

Architecture standards.

Network Architectures.

Software Architectures.

Hardware Architectures.

Information Architectures.

Platforms: compatibility and interoperability.

File format and storage.

2. Designing multimedia publishing products

Multimedia publishing product: what it is and how it develops.

Specifications on editorial multimedia products. Types and platforms.

Basic principles and creative fundamentals of graphic design.

Multimedia editorial product sketches.

Navigation on multimedia publishing products.

Using schema definition tools.

Quality standards.

Applicable labour and environmental risk prevention regulations.

3. Graphic display of screens

Graphic Layout Fundamentals.

Principles of psychological association.

The image as a communication element.

The color. Symbolism associated with colors.

Basic aspects of graphic design: perception and technology.

Using graphical design computing tools.

The text and its encoding.

Typography. Styles and features.

Technical and readability characteristics of fonts.

Using computer tools for editing fonts.

Application of graphic design in screen development.

4. Multimedia elements in editorial products

Multimedia content types: texts, images, sounds, videos, 2D and 3D animations, interactive elements, and others.

Features of multimedia content: texts, images, sounds, videos, 2D and 3D animations, interactive elements and others, including spatial and temporal formats, sizes and dimensions.

Localization of multimedia object files.

Retrieving media objects from object repositories.

Communication from the editorial team with the multimedia content development team.

Integrating multimedia elements into sketches of multimedia publishing products.

5. Functional description of a multimedia publishing product

Defining a functional description.

Design of the interaction.

Designing functionality of a multimedia publishing product.

Communication from the editorial team with the programming team.

Integration of functionalities into multimedia publishing products.

6. Legal rights to use multimedia content

Applicable rules on intellectual property.

Defining legal rights of use.

Types of legal rights of use.

The rights to use multimedia content.

Managing legal rights to use multimedia content.

Documentation for the rights to use multimedia content.

Communication from the editorial team with the multimedia content management team.

Training context parameters:

Spaces and installations:

The spaces and facilities will provide a response, in the form of a classroom, a workshop, a workshop of practices, a laboratory or a singular space, to the training needs, according to the Professional Context established in the Unit Partner competence, taking into account the applicable regulations of the production sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.

Professional or former trainer profile:

1.-Domain of knowledge and techniques related to the design of the multimedia publishing product, which will be accredited by one of the following two ways:

-Level 2 academic training (Spanish Framework of Qualifications for Higher Education), Technical Engineering, Technical Architecture, Diplomacy or other higher level of professional field.

-Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.

2.-Accredited pedagogical competence according to what the competent administrations establish.

TRAINING MODULE 3: IMPLEMENTING AND PUBLISHING MULTIMEDIA PUBLISHING PRODUCTS

Level: 3

Code: MF0937_3

Associated with UC: Generate and publish multimedia publishing products

Duration: 210 hours

Assessment capabilities and criteria:

C1: Determine the functional aspects, including interactivity, in multimedia publishing products based on the definition of a previous design.

CE1.1 Identify the functional aspects of a multimedia publishing product from a previous design in which they are defined.

CE1.2 Recognize, in a multimedia publishing product, the interactivity that exists within the functional aspects of it.

CE1.3 From a document of functionality of a given multimedia editorial product, determine the functionalities to be developed, including interactivity with each of the screens that make it up.

C2: Apply presentation marking and script languages in the development of prototype multimedia publishing products from a design and according to functionality specifications.

CE2.1 Explain what are the types of markup, presentation, and hyphen languages, and which are currently available.

CE2.2 Operate with web development tools to produce a multimedia publishing product.

CE2.3 Identify on different given editorial products, the main elements needed to generate the basic prototypes that sufficiently describe the operation.

CE2.4 Determine from the project definition of a given multimedia editorial product, the elements that will conform the prototype: screens of screens, audio and video, as well as the interactions and functionality.

CE2.5 Establish the development phases and the composition and functions of the development team of a prototype of a multimedia publishing product.

CE2.6 Analyze the degree of detail with which the prototype will be developed, to adequately describe the desired performance of the product according to the project definition.

CE2.7 In a practical case, properly characterized and based on a design, specifications and a set of multimedia elements given:

-Develop a web document by making use of a markup language and all of the given elements.

-Modify a presentation style or interaction script to meet the given design and specifications.

-Apply a particular presentation style to a given web document.

-Incorporate interaction scripts into a given web document to meet certain specifications.

-Generate dynamic web pages from queries in a database.

C3: Develop multimedia editorial products of functionality defined by using markup, presentation, and scripting languages of the given functionality specifications.

CE3.1 Establish the development phases and the composition and functions of the multimedia publishing product development team.

CE3.2 Rate the capabilities that can be implemented in a multimedia product from the existing markup, presentation, and script languages.

CE3.3 From a set of sequenced sketches, decide which markup, presentation, or script languages are capable of implementing the intended functionality.

CE3.4 Set the functionality check plan for the schemas of a given muiltimedia product.

CE3.5 From given sketches/prototypes and functional specifications for a defined project:

-Implement functionality by using markup, presentation, or script languages.

-Develop, if any, the interactions defined in the project.

-Implement interactive elements, aids, exception treatment, and error messages consistently with the specified navigation.

C4: Publish multimedia publishing products on Web sites or on digital media.

CE4.1 Explain what are the different alternatives for publishing multimedia publishing and why it is characterized and when each should be used.

CE4.2 Structure the information of a multimedia publishing product for publication according to given specifications.

CE4.3 In a scenario of publishing multimedia publishing products, starting with some work instructions:

-Operate with information transfer tools.

-Publish it to a website using information transfer tools.

-Check that the published multimedia publishing product has the same appearance and behavior as unpublished.

-Identify publication factors that influence environmental security and protection in the process.

Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real workbench:

C1 with respect to CE1.3; C2 with respect to CE2.5 and CE2.7; C3 with respect to CE3.5; C4 with respect to CE4.3.

Other capabilities:

Take Responsibility for the work you develop and the fulfillment of goals.

Participate and actively collaborate on the work team.

Respect internal organization procedures and rules.

Sharing information with the work team.

Adapt to organization, organizational and technological changes as well as new situations or contexts.

Act quickly in problematic situations and not just wait.

Contents:

1. Prototyping

Analysis of relevant aspects in finished prototypes.

Selection criteria for a fully functional project representative fragment.

Selection of elements that make up the prototype.

Determining the tools required to develop the prototype.

Analysis of the previous design and the specifications of the multimedia product.

Prototype mount.

Mounting the multimedia elements into a prototype.

Evaluating the prototypes.

2. Programming languages

Defining the markup, presentation, and hyphen languages.

Types of Presentation languages.

Brand language types.

Types of Guions languages.

Owners language types.

Types of Combined Languages.

Hardware/Software Requirements.

Taxonomies of the markup, presentation, and hyphen languages.

Integrating databases into web pages.

3. Languages for prototype development

Defining the markup, presentation, and hyphen languages.

Types of Presentation languages.

Brand language types.

Types of Guions languages.

Owners language types.

Types of Combined Languages.

Hardware/Software Requirements.

Taxonomies of the markup, presentation, and hyphen languages.

Integrating databases into web pages.

Developing a multimedia publishing product on the web using existing tools.

4. Developing interactivity in multimedia products

Using different markup, presentation, or script tools.

Hardware/software requirements.

Players and updates.

Content publishing and compatibility.

Target devices and platforms.

5. Computer tools

Presentation styles.

Presentation definition.

Characteristics of the style sheets.

Using CSS style sheets.

Document Transformation.

Transformation definition.

Types of transforms.

Using XSLT transformations.

Interaction scripting languages.

Defining interactive scripts.

The JavaScript language.

Using JavaScript to generate dashes.

JavaScript code collections.

Object modeling (dynamic html).

Server and graphical interaction languages.

Flash and actionscript.

Server interpreted languages (PHP, ASP, and others).

Trends in programming with scripting, graphical interaction, and server languages.

6. Mounting the multimedia publishing product

Product assembly.

Assembled multimedia elements.

Integration of icons, menus, and graphic design elements.

Implementing the interactivity described in the dash.

Implementing the functionality.

7. Publishing multimedia publishing products on the Web

Fundamentals of publishing multimedia publishing on the web.

Tools used for Web publishing.

Web publishing publishing development on the web.

Project, prototype, and style book.

Tracking the production schedule.

WWAI Accessibility-W3C.

Usability.

Quality applicable regulations.

Rules applicable to the use of databases.

Technical documentation.

Update capabilities in the various publications.

Tools used for updating publications.

Training context parameters:

Spaces and installations:

The spaces and facilities will provide a response, in the form of a classroom, a workshop, a workshop of practices, a laboratory or a singular space, to the training needs, according to the Professional Context established in the Unit Partner competence, taking into account the applicable regulations of the production sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.

Professional or former trainer profile:

1.-Domain of knowledge and techniques related to the generation and publication of multimedia publishing products, which will be credited by one of the following two ways:

-Level 2 academic training (Spanish Framework of Qualifications for Higher Education), Technical Engineering, Technical Architecture, Diplomacy or other higher level of professional field.

-Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.

2.-Accredited pedagogical competence according to what the competent administrations establish.

TRAINING MODULE 4: MANAGING THE QUALITY OF MULTIMEDIA PUBLISHING PRODUCTS

Level: 3

Code: MF0938_3

Associated with UC: Manage and control the quality of the multimedia publishing product

Duration: 90 hours

Assessment capabilities and criteria:

C1: Check that a multimedia publishing product meets the functional requirements and suitability of your particular distribution platform.

CE1.1 Identify the evidence that a multimedia publishing product must overcome to meet all functional requirements.

CE1.2 Check that each test case for a multimedia publishing product is successful.

CE1.3 In a scenario of testing multimedia publishing product using test cases from a given platform:

-Study the results of use of the selected platform to check its suitability.

-Rate the usability requirements of the prototype and its correspondence with those indicated in the multimedia product specification document.

-Identify and collect the results of the tests exceeded in the appropriate quality control document.

-Identify and collect the failures of the unsurpassed tests in the quality control document, facilitating their subsequent adjustment.

CE1.4 From a given editorial product prototype, perform evaluation and check tests, taking into account applicable quality standards, according to given technical specifications of operation.

C2: Develop the technical documents and the user manual for a multimedia publishing product.

CE2.1 Explain which types of documents are associated with a multimedia publishing product.

CE2.2 Relate the documents associated with a multimedia editorial product with the people involved in the development of the product.

CE2.3 Operate with help system editing tools to create an interactive documentation.

CE2.4 Structure the documentation of a multimedia publishing product according to a predetermined editorial style.

CE2.5 Develop the user manual of a multimedia publishing product according to a default editorial style.

C3: Evaluate a multimedia publishing product by checking that it meets usability requirements.

CE3.1 Explain what phases should be performed to perform the usability assessment of a multimedia publishing product.

CE3.2 Select the most appropriate technique for evaluating a multimedia editorial product according to the development stage and with the available resources.

CE3.3 Plan the process of evaluating a multimedia publishing product, as well as the type of information that you want to collect, taking into account established requirements, quality standards and safety regulations, health and environmental protection.

CE3.4 Explain what the information collection mechanisms are in an evaluation process and under what conditions each would be used.

CE3.5 Explain the statistical analysis methods that can be applied to the information collected in an evaluation process.

CE3.6 Recognize the particularities of physical distribution platforms: CD, DVD, eBook, and others.

CE3.7 In a scenario of evaluating a multimedia publishing product, based on a given schedule and objectives:

-Analyze the results obtained during an evaluation process, contrasting them with established requirements and quality standards.

-Identify the characteristics of the different distribution platforms of the multimedia publishing product.

-Different hardware and operating system platforms used in the distribution of a multimedia publishing product.

CE3.8 Evaluate a given multimedia editorial product, taking into account its adaptation to the media, both physical and hardware and the operating system.

C4: Define plans for improvement and development of multimedia publishing products based on the monitoring of the distribution and user experience of multimedia publishing products.

CE4.1 Define relevant data to establish a plan to track the distribution of a multimedia publishing product.

CE4.2 Indicating the legal requirements in the processing of personal data obtained in the plans to track distribution and use in multimedia publishing products.

CE4.3 In a practical scenario of drawing up a user identification document, from a given multimedia publishing product:

-Determine the user profile.

-Rate the usage indicators to use.

-Set the treatment of user data.

Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real workbench:

C1 with respect to CE1.3; C2 with respect to CE2.3 and CE2.5; C3 with respect to CE3.3, CE3.6, CE3.7; C4 with respect to CE4.3.

Other capabilities:

Take Responsibility for the work you develop and the fulfillment of goals.

Participate and actively collaborate on the work team.

Act quickly in problematic situations and not just wait.

Adapt to new situations or contexts.

Favor professional and personal development in the work team

Respect internal organization procedures and rules.

Contents:

1. Quality control of multimedia publishing products

Quality applicable regulations.

Quality management system structure.

Quality factors.

Functional Parameters.

Navigation parameters.

Aesthetic parameters.

Interaction parameters.

2. Quality testing for multimedia publishing products

Operating tests.

Usability tests.

Accessibility tests.

Behavior analysis with respect to specifications.

Testing of graphical interfaces.

Aids tests.

Real-time behavior tests.

Product internal review and assessment.

3. Usability of multimedia publishing products

Definition and objectives of usability.

Usability principles.

Definition and objectives of the usability assessment.

Principles of usability: Jakob Nielsen.

Definition and objectives of usability assessment.

Experimental evaluation methods and techniques.

The usability assessment process.

Schedule of the process.

Phases of the assessment.

Evaluation techniques.

Statistical analysis methods.

Developing a product evaluation practice examples.

4. Multimedia publishing product distribution

The distribution of multimedia publishing products.

Characteristics of the different distribution channels.

Distribution evaluation techniques.

Defining the user experience.

Features of the user experience.

Gamification theory.

Tools for obtaining data from the user experience.

Applicable data protection regulations.

Training context parameters:

Spaces and installations:

The spaces and facilities will provide a response, in the form of a classroom, a workshop, a workshop of practices, a laboratory or a singular space, to the training needs, according to the Professional Context established in the Unit Partner competence, taking into account the applicable regulations of the production sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.

Professional or former trainer profile:

1.-Domain of knowledge and techniques related to the management and quality control of the multimedia publishing product, which will be accredited by one of the following two forms:

-Level 2 academic training (Spanish Framework of Qualifications for Higher Education), Technical Engineering, Technical Architecture, Diplomacy or other higher level of professional field.

-Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.

2.-Accredited pedagogical competence according to what the competent administrations establish.